Michael Pacholok Purchasing and Materials ... - Toronto · 1.6- Basement Wall; - Refer to Arch. Dwg. A2.00 detail 2, A5.00, A5.01(not reissued) add the following note “Basement

Michael Pacholok Chief Purchasing Officer

r

Purchasing and Materials Management Division City Hall, 18th Floor, West Tower 100 Queen Street West Toronto, Ontario M5H 2N2

Joanne Kehoe, Manager Construction Services

September 17, 2018 Posted on website: (382 pages)

ADDENDUM NO. 1 TENDER NO. 232-2018

REVISED CLOSING: 12:00 NOON (Local Time), Sept. 26, 2018 RE: Moorevale Park Clubhouse State of Good Repair Renovations

Please refer to the above Tender Call document in your possession and be advised of the following:

I. REVISIONS & CLARIFICATIONS 1.0 The closing date is revised from Sept.19 , 2018 at 12:00 PM (Local Time) to Sept.26, 2018 at 12:00 PM (LOCAL TIME). Exterior 1.1 For the existing ramp number 4

- Fully remove the northern part of the ramp, (approximately 6’), from the existing cracked location of the ramp to the bottom of the ramp at the asphalt paving, include for removal of existing substrate and replace with 4” thick compacted granular substrate. Minimum thickness of the concrete ramp shall be 4” (including at the northern perimeter edges).

-Remove top 2” of the existing surface concrete from the remaining ramp areas (including all exposed surfaces including top and sides of the ramp).

-Clean and prepare existing concrete surfaces for placement of new concrete repair materials. -Install concrete formwork to form the perimeter sides of the ramp as required. -Include for installation of welded wire mesh, 6x6 6/6 WWM, (Can/CSA A23.01-09)

reinforcement for ramp areas. -Supply and install new Hilti-HY200 dowels between existing concrete ramp and new repair

areas near the north end of the ramp. Dowel spacing shall be @12” o/c and 15M in size and installed as per Manufacturer’s requirements.

-Apply bonding agent to bond the new concrete to the old concrete slab such as Sika Dur-32 Normal as per Manufacturer’s requirements.

-New concrete ramp should be built according to Structural drawing SO3. -Concrete repair materials shall be in accordance to CSA A23.1-2. New concrete repair materials

shall be C-1 class exposure, 6-8% air entrained, min. 35MPa compressive strength at 28 days, and 13mm max aggregate size. Concrete finish shall be broomed finish.

-Include for soft and hard landscaping repairs adjacent to the repair areas to match existing. 1.2- All of the exposed existing brick foundation walls, (excluded the basement foundation wall, - for basement wall repair refer to A5.01 detail 3), should be repaired as per detail 5, Architectural drawing A5.02. Minimum 2’ deep rigid insulation from existing exterior ground 1.3- Refer to Architectural drawing A5.00 - A5.01-A5.02, (not reissued) All exterior brick revised cement parging to Sikacrete-204 Parging or approved equivalents. 1.4 Architectural Drawing A3.00 New Construction Work – Ground Floor; Add the following to Notes: “2) Existing fire separations are to be maintained, any and all penetrations, gaps, openings, etc. through fire separations are to be fire stopped and made good, typical.”

Interior 1.5- Drawing A 3.00, (not reissued) the west wall at the permit areas and tennis club should be

changed from WA-04 to WA-08 1.6- Basement Wall;

- Refer to Arch. Dwg. A2.00 detail 2, A5.00, A5.01(not reissued) add the following note “Basement interior walls to be thoroughly cleaned & prepared, apply crystalline waterproofing compound to inner surface walls and make good typical refer to Spec Section 071616

1.7- Basement floor;

- Clean & prep. Surfaces - repair floor cracks - apply concrete floor sealer on floor refer to specification section 07756 Concrete Floor Sealer

1.8- Basement stairs - Stair risers and treads to be repaired, painted and made good, typical (include replacement of 3 steps) - repair and repaint hand rails - paint stair walls and ceiling

1.9 Refer to Electrical Addendum E-1Drawing E-3, (not reissued), revise Basement and Ground Floor Proposed Lighting Layout notes as per attached sketch ESK-1.

1.10 Refer to Specification Section 02 22 00 Excavating Backfilling, (not reissued)

Compacting Part 1 General, item 1.7 Removal of water, third paragraph, “Provide for such excavation dewatering using a qualified consultant with competent personnel…, and electrical connections. Delete “a qualified consultant” form the above sentence.

1.11 The Architectural specifications are to be deleted and replaced with the following attached

amended specifications, which have the corrected specification titles and section numbers. Specification Section 07465 Preformed Metal Siding has been deleted. Specification Section 05500 Miscellaneous Metals Part 2 Products item 2.2.10 List of

Miscellaneous Metals: delete item .2 “Bench Supports” replace with ”.2 Locker supports, anchors, etc.” delete item “.6 Folding partition supports” replace with “.6 Security Screens.”

1.12 Refer to Arch. Dwg. A1.00; “NEW PREFABRICATED 10’X10’ WOOD STORAGE SHED (not reissued) (C/W LIFETIME WARRANTY), & STEEL STRUCTURE – REINFORCED

CONSTRUCTION. COLOUR: TO BE DECIDED LATER BY CONSULTANT MATERIAL: UV PROTECTED, PAINTED WOOD C/W ANTI-GRAFITTI COATING ROOF: GAVALUME GABLE ROOF WITH GLAVANIZED STEEL SUPPORTING STRUCTURE WALL: DOUBLE WALL DOOR: PREPAINTED HM DOOR & FRAME C/W PADLOCKKEYED TO CITY STANDARDS” Delete “& STEEL STRUCTURE – REINFORCED CONSTRUCTION”; Delete “GAVALUME GABLE ROOF WITH GALVANIZED STEEL SUPPORTING STRUCUTRE” replace with “ASHPHALT SHINGLES ON WOOD GABLE ROOF STRUCTURE” Delete “ HM PREPAINTED DOOR & FRAME” replace with “PREPAINTED 68”WX80”H STEEL DOORS WITH POLYTEX COATING (OR SIMILAR APROVED COATING)” Add “2 CIRCULAR WOOD VENTS.” Acceptable manufacturer; Summerwood Products or Consultant approved equivalent

II. ADDITIONS 2.1-The following specification sections are hereby added, (contained in the revised Architectural

Specification); 07756 Concrete Floor Sealer 071616 Crystalline Waterproofing Coatings 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08550 Clad Wood Windows 08 14 16 Aluminum Clad Wood Doors

2.2 - The DSS report by Safetech Environmental Ltd., dated July 5 is hereby added to form part of the Contract. Note, the Contractor is responsible for the abatement and removal of all hazardous materials which is affected by the Work.

2.3 Architectural SK-1

New window Security Screens which is added to drawing A7.00 as detail 9/A7.00

III. QUESTIONS Q1 “Re: Wood Doors - Please provide specification for wood doors shown on door schedule.” A1 – Refer to above -II Additions1.7 added Specifications Sections 08 14 16 & 08550 Q2 “Kindly confirm that all existing furniture & equipment shall be removed by the owner before

starting our works. If not, please provide the list and details.” A2– All are to be removed prior to the start of Construction by the User Groups. Q3 “Please provide the details of the cash allowance.” A3 – Refer to line 15 of the bid form the $15,000.00 cash allowance is for door hardware and

testing. Q4 “Kindly confirm the start & completion date of the project.” A4 - Nov 1 to May 1 Q5 “ Kindly provide the asbestos / abatement report for the building.” A5 – refer to 2.2 above the DSS report by Safetech Environmental Ltd., dated July 5, is

attached. Q6 “With reference to the specification Table of Contents, Section 07466 – Preformed Metal

Siding, kindly provide details and scope.” A6 – There is no preformed metal siding except for flashing, etc. refer to item 1.11 revised

Architectural Specifications Q7 “Please provide specs foe the new baby change station as mentioned at drawing A3.00.” A7 – Refer to Washroom Accessories Specification Section 10800, Part 2 Products; “2.4 DIAPER CHANGE STATION: 2.4.1 General Description: pull down, wall mounted diaper change station. 2.4.2 Acceptable Products: ‘Koala KB200’ (white) classic horizontal baby

changing station or Surface mounted baby change station #9012 by American Specialties or approved equivalent”

Q8 “With reference to section 05500 Miscellaneous Metal, list includes Benches support,

perforated woven wire screen panel & Folding partition support with addition to others. Please advise location and scope details.”

A8 – Existing window security screens are to be retained, cleaned, repaired, prepped and repainted. New Windows are to be provided with new security screens consisting of steel rod woven wire mesh and painted to match existing security screens, refer to detail 6/ A7.00. There are no benches in the scope of work. Handrails and guardrails should be included under the scope of work – all are to be galvanized.

Q9 “could you provide specification and info for the storage shed on concrete slab? (ref to

drawing A1.00) “ A9 – Refer to 1.12 above for prefabricated 10’x10’ wood shed on drawings A1.00

Q10 Could you provide quantity of “Damaged Areas of Wood Siding To Be Removed &

Replaced with New to Match Existing” A10 – Refer to Dwg. Elevations note 2 Allow for 30% of total siding area to be replaced. Q11 “I have noticed that the notes from demolition drawing (E-2) have been copied/pasted to

new lighting layout drawing (E-3) Please let me know if there is additional notes for lighting layout drawing (E-3)”

A11 – Refer to 1.9 above. Q12 “According the specification (page 153, Section 01 00 10) ,

Please clarify, dewatering is a part of contract? How deep the water table? Do we need to install sum pit with Pump in the basement?”

A12 – Refer to 1.10 above, the Contractor is responsible for the removal of any water that may be caused by excavation or other means during construction.

Should you have any questions regarding this Addendum, contact Martin Suits, Corporate Buyer, at email: [email protected] Please attach this addendum to your Request for Tender document and be governed accordingly. Bidders must acknowledge receipt of all Addenda on the space provided on the Tender Call Cover Page as per the Process Terms and Conditions, Section 1, Item 8 - Addenda, of the Tender Call document. All other aspects of the Tender remain the same. Yours truly, Joanne Kehoe Manager, Construction Services Purchasing & Materials Management

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION FOR

CITY OF TORONTO

PARKS FORESTRY & RECREATION

MOOREVALE PARK CLUBHOUSE

STATE OF GOOD REPAIR

RENOVATIONS

175 MOORE PARK AVE.,

TORONTO, ONTARIO

Bill Lobb Architect

June 2018

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01 00 01 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 of 1

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION NUMBER

SECTION TITLE

ISSUE DATE

PAGES

00000 Architectural Spec Cover June 2018 1 00 10 01 Table of Contents June 2018 2 00 02 00 Abbreviations June 2018 4 01010 General Instructions June 2018 13 01021 Allowances June 2018 1 011510 Valuation of changes to work June 2018 2 01260 Requests for Interpretation June 2018 2 01310 Construction Schedule June 2018 2 01311 Coordination June 2018 2 01312 Project Meetings June 2018 5 01330 Construction Progress Documentation June 2018 2 01323 Photographic Documentation June 2018 1 01330 Submittals June 2018 14 01340 Shop & Interference Drawings June 2018 2 01370 Schedule of Values June 2018 3 01400 Quality Control June 2018 5 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls June 2018 6 01600 Products and Workmanship June 2018 7 01710 Environmental Protection and Cleaning June 2018 4 01732 Cutting and Patching June 2018 2 01740 Progressive Cleaning June 2018 1 01770 Contract Closeout Procedures June 2018 8 01780 Warranties June 2018 1 02 00 10 Sitework General Requirements June 2018 3 02 60 10 Demolition June 2018 5 02 10 00 Site Preparation June 2018 2 02 22 00 Excavating Backfilling, Compacting June 2018 5 02316 Granular Base For Slabs June 2018 2 02500 Product Substitution Procedures June 2018 2 02585 Concrete unit Paving June 2018 4 02621 Subsurface Drainage June 2018 3 02770 Concrete Sidewalks Decks Curbs and

Gutters June 2018 3

02800 Facility Remediation June 2018 8 05500 Miscellaneous Metals June 2018 11 05530 Welded Steel Bar Grating June 2018 2 05730 Metal Stud Systems June 2018 1 06100 Rough Carpentry June 2018 5 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry June 2018 5 06 21 00 Installation of Doors and Finish Hardware June 2018 3 06400 Architectural Woodwork June 2018 5 06610 Solid Composite Countertops June 2018 4

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01 00 01 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 of 1 07 12 00 Bituminous Damproofing June 2018 4 07 16 16 Crystalline Waterproofing Coatings June 2018 10 07200 Insulation Air/Vapour Barrier June 2018 9 07620 Flashing and Sheet Metal June 2018 3 07 84 00 Firestopping and Smoke Seals June 2018 4 07900 Sealants June 2018 5 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors June 2018 4 08 14 23 Aluminum Clad Wood Doors June 2018 6 08100 Hollow Metal Door Frames, Panels &

Screens June 2018 6

08850 Clad Wood Windows June 2018 4 08 71 13 Automatic Door Equipment June 2018 3 08800 Finishing Hardware June 2018 5 08 80 30 Glazing June 2018 3 09 20 10 Gypsum & Cement Board June 2018 11 09 22 40 Non- Load Bearing Wall Framing June 2018 1 09300 Tiling June 2018 6 09 65 19 Resilient Flooring June 2018 12 09756 Concrete Floor Sealing June 2018 2 09900 Painting June 2018 16 09 91 00 Interior & Exterior Repainting June 2018 12 09 96 23 Graffiti Resistant Coatings June 2018 2 100543 Temporary Scaffolding & Platforms June 2018 7 10 21 16 Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments June 2018 3 10800 Washroom Accessories June 2018 5 10990 Miscellaneous Specialties June 2018 2 Mechanical, Electrical & Structural Specifications: Refer to specifications on drawings and as included above

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 00 02 00 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect

Project: 017 010 ABBREVIATIONS Page 1 of 4

USE OF ABBREVIATIONS 1.1 Many words or expressions that are repeated frequently on the Drawings and

Schedules are abbreviated to reduce the amount of wording that might obscure the detailing. To avoid misinterpretation, these abbreviations are listed, with their full meaning, in this Section.

1.2 In addition to those noted in Article 1.4, some other abbreviations, commonly used in

Specifications, are separately listed, in Article 1.5. Refer also to structural, mechanical and electrical drawings and specifications for other abbreviations used in structural, mechanical and electrical documents.

1.3 Abbreviations listed here may be used in technical Sections of the Specifications. 1.4 List of Drawing Abbreviations @ at ACT acoustic tile ADJ adjustable AFF above finished floor AH access hatch ALUM aluminum ANOD anodized ARCH architect/architectural AVB air/vapour barrier AWP acoustic wall panels BD board BEN bench B/F barrier-free BKHD bulkhead BLDG building BLK block BN bullnose B/S both sides BSD electric bathing suit dryer BVCP Birch veneer Core Plywood C channel CAB cabinet CB catch basin CG corner guard CHC colour hardened concrete CJ control joint CL centre line CLAD cladding CLG ceiling CMT ceramic mosaic tile CMU concrete masonry unit CO cleanout COL(s) column(s) CONC concrete

COND condition(ing) CONST construction CONT continuous CORR corridor CPT carpet CRS course(s) CSA Canadian Standards

Association CT ceramic tile CUP'D cupboard C/W complete with DBL double DBN double bullnose DET detail DF drinking fountain DIA diameter DIM(s) dimension(s) DIV division DMH double manhole DN down DOPB door operator push-button DP deep DPC dampproof course DR door DW dishwasher DWG drawing EA each EIFS exterior insulation & finish

system ELEV elevation ELEC electrical ENCL enclosure EPS expanded polystyrene EQ equal


Project: 017 010 ABBREVIATIONS Page 2 of 4 EQUIP equipment ES electric strike ESB exterior stretching bar EXH exhaust EXIST (E) existing EXP expansion EXT exterior F refrigerator FAP wood fibre acoustic panels FBGL fibreglass FCT folding diaper change

table FD floor drain FDN foundation FEC fire extinguisher cabinet FFL finish(ed) floor level FG finish(ed) grade FHC fire hose cabinet FIN finish(ed) FIXT fixture FL floor(ing) FLUOR fluorescent FR freezer FRR fire resistance rating FSS folding shower seat FTG footing GALV galvanized GC General Contractor GFA gross floor area GH glass handrail GL glass, glazing GR grommet GPWG Georgian Polished Wire

Glass Gyp. Bd. Gypsum Board GWB or GB gypsum wallboard GRD gridline H high HC hollow core HD electric hand dryer HDH or HDL electric hair dryer HHHD electric hand-held hair

dryer HDWD hardwood HM hollow metal HORIZ horizontal HR hour HSS hollow structural section HT height

HVAC heating, ventilation & air conditioning

HYD hydrant INSUL insulate(d)(ing) INT interior INTUM FP intumescent fireproof JAN janitorial JT joint KP key pad L angle LG long LIN linear L/S light standard M,m metre(s) MAS masonry MANUF manufacture MAX maximum MECH mechanical MED medium MEL melamine MET metal MIN minimum MINS minutes MH manhole ML magnetic lock MM,mm millimetre(s) MO masonry opening MTD mounted MTL material MW microwave oven (N) new NBC National Building Code NFPA National Fire Protection

Association NIC not in contract NO.,# number NTS not to scale OA overall OBC Ontario Building Code OC on centre(s) OH overhead OPNG opening OWG one-way glass OWSJ open-web steel joist


Project: 017 010 ABBREVIATIONS Page 3 of 4 PB pushbutton P/C precast PDO power door operator PDOPB power door operator push

button PHEN phenolic PL plaster PLAM plastic laminate PLYWD veneer core plywood PREFIN prefinished PRT porcelain tile PT, PTD paint(ed) PTDW recessed paper towel

dispenser PTDS surface-mounted paper

towel dispenser PTRD paper towel/refuse disposal PTR pressure-treated wood PVC polyvinylchloride QT quarry tile R radius RAD radiator RB rubber base R/C reinforced concrete RCB cement board RCP reflected ceiling plan RD roof drain REC recessed REINF reinforced REQD required RF rubber flooring RM room RMO rough masonry opening RO rough opening RSI Thermal Resistance System

International RT rubber tile RWFS resilient wood floor system S stove SAN sanitary (sewer, drain) SC solid core SCR shower curtain & rod SCHED schedule(d) SD counter-mounted soap

dispenser SDW wall-mounted soap

dispenser SEAL sealant SECT section

SF sports flooring SHT sheet SIM similar SND sanitary napkin disposal SNV sanitary napkin vendor SPEC(s) specifications(s) SQ square SS stainless steel ST stained STC sound transmission co-efficient STL steel STM steam STOR storage STRUCT structural SUPP supplement SUSP suspended SVF sheet vinyl flooring TB towel bar TCKBD tackboard TERR terrazzo T/O top of TOC top of curb TEMP tempered TH towel hook THK thick T/P top of paving T/S top of slab TTD toilet tissue dispenser T/W top of walk TYP typical ULC Underwriter Laboratory of

Canada U/S underside UNFIN unfinished UNO unless noted otherwise VB vapour barrier VCJT veneer control joint VERT vertical VCT vinyl composite tile W/ with WC water closet/washroom WCVRG wall covering WD wood W/O without WP waterproof WR waste receptacle


Project: 017 010 ABBREVIATIONS Page 4 of 4 WV water valve (X) existing

1.5 List of Additional Specification Abbreviations AA The Aluminum Association ACI American Concrete Institute AISC American Institute of Steel Construction ANSI American National Standards Institute ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada CAN Standards Council of Canada CCDC Canadian Construction Documents Committee CEC Canadian Electrical Code (published by CSA) CEMA Canadian Electrical Manufacturer's Association CGSB Canadian Government Standards Board CISC Canadian Institute of Steel Construction CLA Canadian Lumberman's Association CPCA Canadian Painting Contractors' Association CPCI Canadian Prestressed Concrete Institute CRCA Canadian Roofing Contractor's Association CSA Canadian Standards Association FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBC National Building Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NRC National Research Council OBC Ontario Building Code OGCA Ontario General Contractors Association OPSS Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TTMAC Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada ULC Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada

Conform to these standards of these organizations and documents, in whole or in part, as specifically requested in the Specifications.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01010 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 1 of 13 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Unless specified otherwise, the provisions of this Section shall apply to all Sections of

the Specifications.

2. Conform to the General Conditions of the Canadian Construction Document 2, 1994, Stipulated Price Contract and the Supplementary General Conditions.

1.2 SUBDIVISION OF WORK

1. The Specifications have generally been divided into trade divisions, and the trade divisions into sections for the purpose of ready reference, but a section may consist of more than one Subcontractor or supplier. The responsibility for determining which Subcontractor or supplier shall provide labour, materials, products, equipment and services to complete the work rests solely with the Contractor.

1.3 STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS

1. The term “Consultant” as used in CCDC Document 2, and the term “Architect”

which appears elsewhere in the Bidding Documents, shall be interchangeable, and shall, in both cases, refer to Bill Lobb Architect.

2. Where a reference is made to specification standards produced by various organizations, conform to latest edition of standards as amended and revised to date of Contract.

3. Wherever the words “acceptable”, “approved”, “approved as equal”, “satisfactory”, “directed”, “submit”, “selected”, or similar words or phrases are used in standards or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, it shall be understood that they mean, unless the context provides otherwise, “acceptable to the Consultant:, “approved by the Consultant:, “approved as equal by the Consultant”, “satisfactory to the Consultant”, “directed by the Consultant”, “submit to the Consultant”, “selected by the Consultant”.

4. The only means by which something shown or specified shall be indicated as not being in the Contract is by the initials “NIC”, or words “Not in Contract”, “By Owner”, or “By Other Contractor”.

5. Where the word “Provide” occurs, it shall be interpreted to mean “Furnish all labour, products, materials, and equipment necessary to install.”

1.4 TENDER DOCUMENTS

1. Study all Contract Documents to determine work required by all Sections, and the

inter-dependency of each Section.

2. Questions arising as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents shall be asked at the time of tendering. They shall be submitted to the Consultant in writing, and answers, in written form, will be issued by the Consultant.

3. Bidders are advised that all conditions are not portrayed on Drawings. It is the responsibility of Bidders to fully determine the scope of the work through examination of the Site.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01010 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 2 of 13

4. The Contract Documents have been arranged into various divisions, sections, drawings, and schedules for the purpose of presenting the Work in a logical and organized form and to enable ease of reference and interpretation, and are not intended to be an arrangement of precise and independent Subcontractors , or jurisdiction of responsibility for the various parts of the Work. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for coordinating the execution of the Work of this Contract in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

5. As a result the Consultant shall not be required to decide on questions arising with regard to agreements or contracts between the Contractor and Subcontractors r Suppliers, nor to the extent of the parts of the Work assigned thereto.

6. Further no extra will be allowed as a result of the failure to coordinate and allocate the Work such that the Work is Provided in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.5 LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS AND FEES

1. The building Code – shall govern the Work. 2. Comply with codes, by-laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over

the Place of the Work. Codes and regulations form an integral part of the Contract Documents.

3. The Owner shall apply and pay for the building Permit. The Contractor shall pick up the building Permit from the Municipal department having jurisdiction at the Place of Work. Obtain and pay for all other permits, licences, deposits and certificates of inspection as part of the Work.

4. Arrange for inspection, testing and acceptance of the Work required by the authorities having jurisdiction. Be responsible for necessary preparations, provisions and pay costs.

5. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to schedule notifications and inspections required by the authorities having jurisdiction such that notifications can be properly received and that inspections can be properly undertaken without causing a delay in the Work. The Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner, shall be responsible for any delay in the Work caused by failure to properly schedule required notifications and inspections.

6. The Contractor shall provide to the chief building official or the registered code agency where a registered code agency is appointed under the Ontario Building Code Act in respect of the construction to which the notice relates, the required notices as set out in division C- Part 1 Sentence 1.3.5.1(2) and Sentence 1.3.5.2 of the O.B.C., O. Reg. 350/06 as amended. The Contractor shall be present at each site inspection by an inspector or registered code agency as applicable under division C – Part1 Sentence 1.3.5.2 of the building code.

.1 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to schedule notifications to the chief building official or the registered code agency where a registered code agency such that the inspection pertaining to the notifications can be made within the time frame as required under Division C- Part 1 Sentence 1.3.5.3 of the Ontario Building Code, O Reg. 350/06 as amended, without causing a delay in the Work. The Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner, shall be solely responsible for any delay in the Work caused by the failure to properly schedule required notifications and inspections.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01010 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 3 of 13 1.6 QUANTITY OF ITEMS

1. Where a component, device, item or part of materials or equipment is referred to

in the singular number, such reference shall require the provision of as many components, devices items or parts of materials or equipment necessary to complete the Work.

1.7 STANDARDS AND CODES

1. Contract forms, codes, specifications, standards, manuals and installation,

application and maintenance instructions referred to in these specifications, unless otherwise specified, amended or date suffixed shall be the latest published editions a t Contract date.

1.8 DISCRPENCIES AND CLARIFICATIONS

1. Advise Consultant of discrepancies discovered in requirements of the Contract

Documents and request clarification in written form. 2. Advise Consultant when clarifications are required pertaining to meaning or intent

of requirements of Contract Documents and request clarification form Consultant in written form.

3. Do not proceed with related work until written clarification is provided by Consultant.

4. Failure to notify Consultant shall result in Contractor incurring responsibility for resulting deficiencies and expense at no additional cost.

5. Written instructions issue by the Consultant for the purpose of clarification, implicitly supersede applicable and relevant aspects of the Contract Documents irrespective of whether these documents are explicitly or specifically cited in clarification requests or clarification instructions.

1.9 SETTING OUT THE WORK

1. Assume full responsibility for and execute complete layout of the Work to required

locations, lines and elevations. 2. Arrange meeting with Consultant to discuss critical setting out assumptions for the

work and establish limiting conditions for setting out the Work. Consultant shall chair and prepare minutes of meeting and prepare and submit sketches regarding understanding of key setting out principals.

1.10 DOCUMENTS AT THE PLACE F WORK

1. Maintain at the Place of work, one copy of each of the following: .1 Contract Documents including drawings, specifications, addenda, and other

modifications to the Contract. .2 ‘Reviewed’ or ‘Reviewed as Modified’ shop drawings. .3 Construction and submittal schedules .4 Supplemental Instructions, proposed Change Orders, Change Orders and

Change Directives. .5 Field test reports .6 Consultant’s field reviews

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01010 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 4 of 13 .7 Reports by authorities having jurisdiction .8 Building and other applicable permits, and related permit documents .9 Daily log including: a. Start and finish date of each part of the Work .10 As-built drawings recording as- built conditions, instructions, changes for

structure, equipment, wiring, plumbing and the like, as called for in Section 01770 and Division 15 and 16, prior to being concealed.

2. Make above material available to Consultant upon request. 1.11 OVERLOADING

1. Protect the existing building from loads which may cause permanent deformation. 2. Protect the Work form loads which may cause permanent deformation. 1.12 INSERTS, ANCHORS AND FASTENERS

1. Use only factory made, threaded or toggle type inserts as required for supports and

anchors, properly sized for load to be carried. 2. Where inserts cannot be placed, use factory made expansion shields for light

weights only. 3. Supply and locate inserts, holes, anchor bolts and sleeves during placement or

fabrication of structural elements. 4. Fasteners stressed in withdrawal are not acceptable, except where otherwise

indicated. 5. Metal fastenings shall be uniform to metals materials and components being

anchors or of a metal which will not set p a galvanic action causing damage to the fastening or metal component under moist conditions.

6. Fastenings for prefinished materials shall be of concealed type unless otherwise indicated, and when exposed finish is required, of matching pre-finishing materials.

7. Metal fastenings and accessories shall be same texture, colour and finish as material on which they occur as selected by Consultant.

8. Power actuated fasteners: .1 Power actuated fasteners: fastener system of type suitable for application

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190-95 ( 2007) conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

.2 Do not use power actuated fasteners which are stressed in withdrawal in finished work.

.3 Do not use power actuated fasteners within 100 mm (4`) of the edge of concrete or masonry, unless otherwise accepted in writing by Consultant.

.4 Do not use power actuated fasteners in post –tensioned concrete. 1.13 PENETRATIONS

1. Holes or voids created in assemblies or partitions for penetrating mechanical,

electrical, or sprinkler service items, shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the penetrating item as well as additional required fill materials, such as sealants, firestopping, and smoke sealants, insulation, and the like without exceeding the maximum opening allowable by the manufacturer of the additional fill material.

1.14 CONCEALED SPACES

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01010 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 5 of 13 1. Conceal wiring, conduit pipes and ductwork in finished areas, unless otherwise

indicated. 1.15 TRADEMARKS AND LABELS

1. Trademarks and labels, including applied labels, shall not be visible in finished work

in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated by Consultant. 2. The exceptions to this requirement are trademarks and labels which are essential to

identify materials, systems, assemblies and equipment for maintenance and replacement purposes and for life safety, fire resistance and temperature rise ratings.

1.16 WASTE AUDITS/PLANS FOR WASTE REDUCTION

1. Comply with requirements of jurisdictional authorities. 2. Deliver to nearest appropriate depot materials accepted for recycling by region or

municipality having jurisdiction over the Place of Work, including but not limited to cardboard, paper, plastic, aluminum, steel, and glass. Deliver to nearest appropriate depot scrap and excess gypsum wallboard for recycling for this material. Costs for this work are in the Contract Price.

1.17 INTERFERENCES 1. Coordinate placement of equipment to ensure that components will be properly

accommodated within spaces provided prior to commencement of the Work 2. Take complete responsibility for remedial work that results from failure to

coordinate aspect of work prior to its fabrication/installation 3. Ensure that accesses and clearance required by jurisdictional authorities and/or for

easy maintenance of equipment are provided in layout of equipment and services.

1.18 ITEMS SUPPLIED BY OWNER

1. NIC (Not in Contract) shall be used to designate various items of equipment that

require coordination for installation although they are not provided as part of the Work.

2. SBO (Supplied by Owner) shall be used to designate various items of equipment that will be supplied by the Owner for installation by the Contractor as part of the Work.

.1 Install items indicated as supplied by Owner SBO during the work. Coordinate shipping and delivery with Owner. Store item supplied by Owner at the Place of Work and protect from damage. Install completely and leave in full operating condition, in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.

1.19 SECURITY 1. Be responsible for security of the Place of Work and material from time the Work

commences until completion. 2. Provide and maintain signs, hoardings guardrail, barriers, warning lights and other

protection as required by authorities having jurisdiction for safety of the Place of the Work. Be responsible for adequacy of protection.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01010 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 6 of 13 1.20 SMOKING POLICY 1. Smoking in the Owner’s premises is prohibited. 2. Smoking in the Place of Work is prohibited. 3. Smoking within 25 m of the existing or completed buildings is prohibited. 1.22 ELECTRONIC FILES

1. In the event that the Contractor, Sub-contractor or a supplier requests Computer

aided drawings or other electronic documents or files from the Consultant, the Consultant will be allowed to use their discretion whether or not they will provide the. The Consultant may charge a fee for providing the electronic files and/or require a copyright Waiver to be signed, also at the Consultant’s discretion.

1.23 EXAMINATION OF SITE

1. Examine the site and be aware of all conditions affecting the Work. No claims will

be entertained at any time which would properly have been avoided by a thorough examination of the site.

2. All Bidders, Subcontract Bidders and Suppliers will be allowed to examine the Site during the Bid Period, if application is made to the Owner.

1.24 SITE CONDITIONS

1. Existing known conditions of the site are shown on the Drawings. No responsibility is assumed by the Owner for the accuracy of this information.

1.25 EXAMINATION BEFORE EXECUTION OF WORK 1. Make good defects in the Work on which further execution of work depends. 2. Verify dimensions of prepared work before fabrication of that work which is

dependent on the prepared work. 3. Do not proceed with the execution of the work unless the work which is to receive

it and site conditions are satisfactory. Commencement of all work of all sections shall imply that prepared work and site conditions are satisfactory.

1.26 EXITS, ENTRIES AND PARKING

1. Vehicle access will be from Laurel St. A part of the parking lot below the pool may

be used by the Contractor. 2. An area can be reserved, beside the building for the Contractor to use as a

staging area, however room must be left for access to the splash pad.

1.27 PUBLIC UTILITIES AND SERVICES 1. Verify limitations imposed on project work by presence of utilities and services,

and ensure no damage occurs to them.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01010 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 7 of 13 2. Notify service authorities concerned so that they protect, remove, relocate or

discontinue utilities and services, as they may require. 3. Make arrangements and pay for connection charges for services required for

project work. 4. Locate poles, pipes, conduit, wires, fill pipes, vents, regulators, meters, and

sanitary service work in inconspicuous locations. If not shown on drawings, verify location of service work with Consultant before commencing installation.

1.28 VERIFICATION OF INVERTS 1. Immediately after award of the Contract, verify all field service connections to

ensure that drainage runs can meet the inverts of the site services. 2. Give notification immediately of any apparent difficulties or discrepancies. No

extras will be paid for rerouting drains because site inverts cannot be met.

1.29 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION 1. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall cooperate and coordinate with work of

their respective Trades so as to facilitate the continuous and expeditious progress of the Work.

2. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall provide each other in adequate time with all necessary instruction, information, inserts, anchors, templates, sleeves and accessories required to be fixed to, or inserted in, the Work.

3. Pay the cost of extra work caused by, and make up the time lost as the result of, failure to provide the necessary cooperation and coordination in adequate time.

4. Products specified in certain Sections of the Specifications, or indicated on the Drawings, may or may not require installation by supplier. Assign responsibility for installation of items not normally installed by supplier, and for unloading from Carrier and placing into final position of the Work.

5. Cooperate with Other Contractors and Trades and Subcontractors contracted to provide goods and services through the execution of Cash Allowances.

1.30 PROTECTION 1. Adequately protect from damage trowelled concrete surfaces and finished

flooring. Take special measures when moving heavy loads or equipment on them. Keep floors free of oils, grease or other materials likely to discolour them or affect bond of applied surfaces.

2. While working, each Section shall protect work of other Sections from damage. 3. Damaged work shall be made good by Trades which performed original work, but

at the expense of those who caused the damage. 4. Protect work and existing property. If damaged, repair or replace to Consultant’s

satisfaction. Take all necessary reasonable precautions to guard site, premises, materials, and public when supervised work is in progress, and at all other times.

5. Adequately protect landscaping, trees, and shrubs which are to remain and could be subject to damage from construction. Box-in and fence-in growth to be protected prior to commencement of the Work.

6. Provide necessary protection from adverse weather damage to persons, materials, and equipment during and after cutting through existing work.

1.31 CUTTING AND PATCHING


1. Each Section shall be responsible for cutting and patching and making good to execute their work properly. In each case, Tradesmen qualified in the work being cut and patched shall be employed to ensure that it is correctly and neatly done.

2. Assess requirements for sleeving the structural elements for passing of pipes, conduits and other mechanical or electrical components, and include all work required for approved interfacing between the structure, all mechanical and electrical work, and other components of the work. The Section requiring cuts, holes, sleeves or anchors for their work shall locate them.

3. To completely prevent the passage of air, tightly fit all construction to pipes, ducts

and conduits which pass through construction. Pay particular attention where fire separations are penetrated with such objects. Build separations tightly to materials penetrating separations, or provide other materials for packing around perimeters which are specifically manufactured for such conditions. Packing materials shall be of the equivalent fire resistance rating of the penetrated construction. Obtain Consultant’s approval prior to the use of packing materials.

1.32 CONCEALMENT OF PIPES, DUCTS, TUBING AND WIRING

1. Pipes, ducts, tubing and wiring shall be concealed wherever possible. If any doubt arises as to the means of concealment, or the intention of the Contract Documents in this connection, request clarification from the Consultant before proceeding with the portion of the work in question.

2. Arrangements shall be made to have the mechanical and electrical work laid out well in advance of concrete placement and furring installation so that provision may be made for proper concealment. All such work shall be tested, inspected and pipe covering applied where applicable before being concealed.

3. Include work required to modify indicated location of pipes, ducts, conduits, and other mechanical or electrical components to fully conceal such components from view in finished spaces.

1.33 INTERFERENCE

1. Refer to Section 01340 - Shop and Interference Drawings.

1.34 DRAINAGE 1. Ensure that positive drainage is provided to roof, floor, site drains and catch

basins, as set in their final positions, and at all other locations to prevent water infiltration into the building. Provide constant slopes for drained surfaces to drains and drainage courses.

2. Verify the extent of each area served by a drain, or drainage course, to eliminate possible undrained surfaces. Coordinate the work of involved Subcontractors before each of their work proceeds.

3. If water is found to be ponding on floor areas due to improperly placed floor drains of improperly sloped construction, install additional floor drains to alleviate water ponding at no cost to the Owner. Test and demonstrate drainage of all concrete floors. Test setting beds prior to installation of ceramic tile.

1.35 AIR LEAKAGE AND EXPANSION CONTROL


1. Recognizing that wall and roof materials are not dimensionally stable, and that they move differentially from the structural frame, the location of cracks should be anticipated and an airtight diaphragm and/or flexible sealants incorporated to maintain air-tightness, and to prevent problems due to vapour condensation.

2. In addition, connections between structural steel members are not airtight and perimeter connections must be made airtight.

3. Even if concealed behind convectors, panelling, wallboard or suspended ceilings, the interior surfaces of exterior walls and roofs shall be made airtight. Ensure that backup masonry walls are well laid with full mortar joints, and wallboard joints are sealed.

4. The manner of installation of all pipes, ducts, conduits, and electrical outlets shall

be thoroughly coordinated to prevent the occurrence of air leaks: when pipes or conduits run adjacent to exterior walls and are to be furred in, not only shall the exterior wall be airtight, but it shall be adequately insulated to prevent cold spots on which condensation could occur in the cold space. Provide a continuous air seal between the airtight part of a wall or ceiling and the frames of all openings such as windows, doors, hatches, ducts, grilles, louvers, structural steel members and similar building elements.

5. As a general rule, the air/vapour barrier must be on the interior (warm) side of the insulation and should be in contact with it.

6. In addition to the specific requirements in each technical section of the Specification, make allowance for expansion control throughout the construction. Ensure that poured paving and slabs, exterior to the building structure, together with applied materials are not tight to building face, and that expansion control joints are left to accommodate movement.

7. Take particular care in constructing walls and ceilings around wet areas such as pools and showers, to avoid moisture transfer to adjacent building areas.

1.36 LOCAL LABOUR AND FAIR WAGES 1. Wherever possible, the Contractor shall give preference to the use of local labour,

building mechanics, suppliers and subtrades. Rates of wages, hours and conditions of work of persons employed on the work shall be in accordance with Provincial Codes, and as generally recognized and accepted in the locality.

1.37 JOB MEETINGS

1. Refer to Section 01200 – Meeting and Progress Records

1.38 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1. Refer to Section 01300 - Submittals.

1.39 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS


1.402 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS


Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01010 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 10 of 13 1.41 SCAFFOLDING

1. Erect scaffolding independent of walls. Use scaffolding so as to interfere as little as

possible with other Subcontractors’ work. When not in use, move scaffolding as necessary to permit installation of other work. Construct and maintain scaffolding in a rigid, secure and safe manner. Promptly remove scaffolding when no longer required.

1.42 BUILDING DIMENSIONS & COORDINATION 1. Ensure that all necessary job dimensions are taken and all trades are coordinated

for the proper execution of the work. Assume complete responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of such dimensions, and for coordination.

2. Verify that all work, as it proceeds, is executed in accordance with dimensions

and positions indicated which maintain levels and clearances to adjacent work, as set out by requirements of the drawings, and ensure that work installed in error is rectified before construction resumes.

3. Check and verify all dimensions referring to the work and the interfacing of all services. Verify all dimensions, with the trade concerned when pertaining to the work of other trades. Be responsible to see that Subcontractors for various trades cooperate for the proper performance of the Work.

4. Avoid scaling directly from the drawings. If there is ambiguity or lack of information, immediately inform the Consultant. Be responsible for any change through the disregarding of this clause.

5. All details and measurements of any work which is to fit or to conform with work installed shall be taken at the building.

6. Advise Consultant of discrepancies and if there are omissions on drawings, particularly reflected ceiling plans and jointing patterns for paving, ceramic tile, or carpet tile layouts, which affect aesthetics, or which interfere with services, equipment or surfaces. DO NOT PROCEED without direction from the Consultant.

7. Ensure that each Subcontractor communicates requirements for site conditions and surfaces necessary for the execution of the Subcontractor's work, including the provision of setting drawings, templates and all other information necessary for the location and installation of material, holes, sleeves, insets, anchors, accessories, fastenings, connections and access panels. Inform other Subcontractors whose work is affected by these requirements and preparatory work.

8. Prepare interference drawings to properly coordinate the work where necessitated. Refer to Clause 1.14.

9. The pool length and slope of bottom will be measured to ensure conformance with the documents.

1.43 METRIC OR IMPERIAL DIMENSIONS

1. Dimensioning shown on the Drawings and Specifications is in imperial

measurements.


2. Where manufactured products are available in Imperial or metric sizes which differ slightly from dimensions shown on the Drawings or in the Specifications, the Consultant will consider acceptance of such products if they do not, in their opinion, adversely affect the performance of the Work.

1.44 WORK SCHEDULE

1. Refer to Section 01310 – Construction Schedule.

1.45 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

1. Refer to Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities and Controls.

1.46 PERMANENT SYSTEM

1. Do not use permanent heating and ventilation systems for temporary heating and ventilation without obtaining prior approval from Consultant and Owner. Refer also to Mechanical and Electrical Contract Documents for additional specific instructions, and conform to requirements set-out therein.

2. Do not use permanent drains including floor drains for any purpose other than their

intended permanent use. In particular, do not clean tools into floor drains or wash any type of construction debris or residue into floor drains. Cover and protect floor drains except as required for testing and verification of plumbing systems.

1.47 INSPECTION AND TESTING

1. Refer to Section 01400 – Quality Control.

1.48 FIELD OFFICES AND DOCUMENTS AT JOB SITE 1. Refer to Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities and Controls.

2. Maintain field office until Work is declared Substantially Performed. 3. Maintain at job site, one copy each of the following and make same available to

the Consultant upon request: 1. Contract drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Reviewed shop drawings. 5. Change orders. 6. Other modifications to Contract. 7. Field test reports. 8. Copy of approved work schedule. 9. Manufacturer's installation and application instructions. 10. Standards referred to in Specifications.

11. Ontario Building Code and Guide to the Ontario Building Code, latest edition.

1.49 HOARDING AND BARRIERS


1. Prior to commencing construction, consult with relevant Authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their regulations governing hoarding and boarding around the construction area. Place within existing buildings. Erect in consultation with Owner and Consultant.

2. Provide adequate temporary directional signage, barriers and night and day illumination.

3. Refer also to Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities and Controls.

1.50 DEMONSTRATION OF SYSTEMS 1. Upon certification of Substantial Performance or, if called upon earlier,

demonstrate complete operation of mechanical and electrical systems and equipment.

2. Demonstration shall take place in the presence of Owner’s appointed personnel and shall be conducted by responsible personnel whose work is being demonstrated.

3. Refer also to Section 01400 – Quality Control. 1.51 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

1. Conform to the latest published requirements of the Ontario Building Code,

together with all related Supplements. If a conflict should arise between specific sections of the Code, follow the most stringent requirements.

2. Minimum Standard: Unless reference is made in the Contract Documents to other standards, all work shall conform to or exceed the minimum applicable standards of The Building Code, and/or the governing Jurisdictional Authorities.

3. Where reference is made to published standards and codes, such references shall be considered to refer to the 1997 edition of The Ontario Building Code for standards.

4. Construction Safety: Include all provisions for construction safety, such as fences, barricades, bracing supports, storage facilities, sanitation facilities, fire protection, standpipes, electrical supply, temporary heat, steam supply, ventilation, construction equipment with its supports and guards, stairs, ramps, platforms, runways, ladders, scaffolds, guardrails, temporary flooring, rubbish chutes, walkway lighting, and morality lighting, all as required by the Occupational Health and Safety Act, and amendments thereto and the Fire Code Ontario Regulation 388/97 as well as all other applicable regulations of Jurisdictional Authorities.

1.52 LIFE AND FIRE SAFETY

1. Enforce all requirements established by Jurisdictional Authorities and Underwriters for life safety, fire prevention, and fire protection.

1.53 NO SMOKING POLICY

1. Smoking is not permitted within the Building and on the Site except for inside the

Contractor’s Field Office and at least 9 m (30’) away from any Building entrance in accordance with applicable legislation.


1.54 PROMOTIONAL SIGNAGE

1. Promotional signage, including any project signs and signs displaying Contractor or

Subcontractor names and signs advertising materials, products and/or services to the site shall be limited to the Project Sign described in Section 01500, and to the names of the General Contractor, Mechanical Subcontractor and Electrical Subcontractor as permanently affixed to their respective site offices.

2. The Contractor shall mount one promotional sign each supplied by the Architect, Associate Architect, Structural/Mechanical/Electrical Engineer, Civil Engineer, and Landscape Architect. Such signs to be maximum 1600 mm x 750 mm, and mounted in a location which is visible from the municipal street.

3. All promotional signage shall be removed prior to the date of Substantial Performance of the Work.

1.55 CLEAN-UP 1. Further to the General Conditions, maintain the work in a tidy condition and free

from the accumulation of waste products and debris, other than that caused by the Owner, other Contractors or their employees.

2. Conform to all requirements established by jurisdictional authorities for environmental and pollution control.

3. Prevent dust from spreading to adjoining properties. 4. Keep roads and sidewalks free from excavated materials, dirt and debris, snow,

and ice. 1.56 USE OF PREMISES BEFORE SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE

1. The Owner shall have the right to enter and occupy the building in whole or part for the purpose of placing fittings and equipment, or for other use, prior to certification of Substantial Performance if, in the opinion of the Owner, such entry and occupancy does not prevent, or interfere with, the Contractor in the performance of the Contract.

2. Despite the presence of the Owner’s separate contractors on site, this Contractor shall retain complete responsibility for all Work under this Contract including construction safety and applicable payments to the Workplace Safety and Insurance Board.

1.57 PRODUCT & SYSTEM UPGRADES 1. Where upgraded or newer versions or models of systems or products in this

Contract are available, become available, or are anticipated to become available within the Project Schedule, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a proposal for consideration of a change to such products

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01021 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 ALLOWANCES Page 1 of 1 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

1. Cash Allowances

1.2 CASH ALLOWANCES

Refer to GC 4.1.

1. Include, in the Contract Price, Cash Allowances stated in Contract Tender Call

Document.

2. Cash Allowances shall be expended only on specific written instructions from the Consultant.

3. Include all applicable Taxes, except the Federal Goods and Services Tax, in each

authorized expenditure from Cash Allowances.

4. Cash Allowances, unless otherwise specified, cover the net cost to the Contractor of services, products, construction machinery and equipment, freight, handling, unloading, storage, installation and other authorized expenses incurred in performing the Work.

5. The Contract Price, and not the Cash Allowances, includes the Contractor’s

overhead and profit in connection with such Cash Allowances.

6. The Contract Price will be adjusted by written Change Order to provide for an excess or deficit to the Cash Allowances.

7. Where costs under a Cash Allowance exceed the amount of the Allowance, the

Contractor will be compensated for any excess incurred and substantiated, plus overhead and profit as set out in the Contract Documents.

8. The Contractor shall carry and administer any Cash Allowances specified in various

Sections of the Specifications. Cash Allowances shall not be included by a Subcontractor in the amount for Subcontract Work.

9. Direct labour shall mean the hourly wages paid to the employees and shall

exclude all other charges. Direct material shall mean list price less all trade discounts; do not credit cash discounts given to Contractor made before invoice due date.

10. Progress payments on account of work authorized under Cash Allowances shall be

included in the Contractor’s monthly application for payment.

11. A schedule shall be prepared jointly by the Consultant and Contractor to show when items called for under the Cash Allowances must be authorized by the Consultant for ordering purposes so that the progress of the Work will not be delayed.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 011510 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 VALUATION OF CHANGES TO WORK Page 1 of 2 1. GENERAL 1.1 Apply Separate and Alternate Prices to Work as directed by the Consultant

in accordance with the stipulations in this Section and the General Conditions of the Contract.

1.2 All prices described in this Section shall include the total cost of materials,

labour, tools, equipment, fees, insurance, testing, preparation of Drawings, submittals, calculations, supervision, inspections, deliveries, travelling, out-of-town accommodations, rentals, duties, taxes, head office and site office overheads, profits, and all other direct and indirect expenses required to fully perform the specified Work.

1.3 Separate and Alternate Prices shall be valid until the latest possible date by

which they could be implemented without affecting the date of Substantial Performance.

1.4 Changes to Work not covered by Separate or Alternate Prices shall be

established by using current labour rates, including mandatory benefits, prevailing local market prices of materials and/or equipment, taxes, specific fees related to the change only, and overhead costs as defined below. Conform to Section 00006 Supplementary General Conditions, Item 12, GC 6.1 Changes.

1.5 Overhead shall include all costs of:

1. Operating head office and site facilities. 2. Head office and site personnel. 3. Custom duties, basic permits and other licences required by

jurisdictional authorities. 4. Insurance. 5. All services defined in Sections 01300 and 01400. 6. Calculations, inspections, testing. 7. Deliveries, travelling, out-of-town accommodations. 8. Hand and small power tools required for the efficient completion of

the Work. 2. ALTERNATE PRICES 1. An Alternate Price defines the net cost difference between two different

materials, products or processes described on the Drawings and Schedules, and in the Specifications and/or on Tender Form.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 011510 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 VALUATION OF CHANGES TO WORK Page 2 of 2 2. An Alternate Price for any work component identified as a second choice

(an alternate) shall include all costs required to modify related and surrounding Work so that the alternate could function properly.

3. The above-mentioned modifications shall be acceptable to the Consultant. 3. CHANGES TO THE WORK 1. Conform to the requirements of the General Conditions, and Section 01300

for pricing contemplated and or changes to the Work.

2. Any costs related to preparation of the necessary documentation for changes/contemplated changes are deemed to be included in the specified overhead and profit.

3. Conform to Section 00006 Supplementary General Conditions, Item 12, GC

6.1 Changes.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01260 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION Page 1 of 2 1.1 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI)

1. A request for Interpretation (RFI) is a formal process used during the Work to obtain

an interpretation of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES .1 RFI form:

.1 Submit RFI on ‘Request for Interpretation’ form, the Consultant shall not be respond to an RFI except as submitted in writing in this form. .2 Where the RFI form does not provide sufficient space for complete information to be provided thereon attach additional sheets as required. .3 Submit with RFI form necessary supporting documentation.

.2 RFI form:

.1 Maintain a log if RFI’s sent to and responses received from Consultant, complete with corresponding dates.

.2 Submit updated log of RFI’s with each progress draw submittal. .3 Submit RFI’s sufficiently in advance of affected parts of the Work so as not to cause

delay in the performance of the Work. Costs resulting from failure to do this will not be paid by the Owner.

.4 RFI’s shall be submitted to the Consultant and to the Owner at the same time. .5 RFI’s shall be submitted only by the Contractor, RFI’s submitted by Subcontractors

or Suppliers shall not be accepted. .6 Number RFI’s consecutively in one sequence in order submitted. .7 Submit one distinct RFI per RFI .8 Consultant shall review RFI’s from the Contractor submitted in accordance with this

Section, with the following understanding; .1 Consultant’s response shall not be considered as a Change Order or Change

Directive, nor does it authorize changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time or changes in the Work.

.2 Only the Consultant shall be respond to RFI’s. Responses to RFI’S received form entities other than the consultant shall not be considered.

.9 Allow three days for review of each RFI by the Consultant. .1 Consultant’s review of RFI commences on date of receipt by the Consultant of

RFI submittal and extends to date RFI returned by the Consultant. .2 When RFI submittal is received by Consultant before noon, review period

commences that day; when RFI submittal is received by Consultant after noon review period begins the next working day.

.3 If at any time the Contractor submits a large enough number of RFI’s such that the Consultant cannot process these RFI’s within 3 days, the Consultant will confer with the Contractor within 1 working day of receipt of such RFI’s and the Consultant and Contractor will jointly prepare an estimate of the time necessary for processing same as well as an order of priority between the RFI’s submitted. The

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01260 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION Page 2 of 2

Contractor shall accommodate such necessary time at no increase in the Contract Time and at no additional cost to the Owner.

.10 Contractor shall satisfy itself that an RFI is warranted by undertaking a thorough review of the Contract Documents to determine that the claim, dispute, or other matters in question relating to the performance of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall describe in detail this review on the RFI from as part of the RFI submission. RFI submittals that lack such detailed description, or where the detail is provided is in the opinion of the Consultant insufficient, shall not be reviewed by the Consultant.

-END OF SECTION-

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01310 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Page 1 of 2 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Submit projected construction schedule for entire Work. Revise schedule

when it cannot readily be related to the actual stage of construction. 2. FORMS OF SCHEDULES 1. Prepare in form of horizontal bar chart or C.P.M. network. Provide separate

horizontal bar column for each trade or operation, or separate activity for each operation that can be completed independently of other operations or trades. Provide as follows:

1. Order: Chronological order of beginning of each item of work. 2. Identification: Identify each column by distinct graphic delineation. 3. Horizontal Time Scale: Identify first workday of each week. 4. Scale and Spacing: To allow space for updating. 5. Minimum Sheet Sizing: 11" x 17".

3. CONTENT OF SCHEDULES 1. Submit complete sequence of construction by activity, as follows:

1. Shop Drawings - Submittal dates, dates reviewed copies will be required.

2. Interference Drawings - Submittal dates, dates reviewed copies will

be required. 3. Decision dates for products specified by allowances, selection of

finishes and colours, etc. 4. Fabrication and delivery lead time. 5. Dates for beginning and completion of each element of

construction, specifically: concrete placement, subcontractor work, equipment installations and equipment tests.

2. Identify work of separate floors or separate phases, or other logically

grouped activities, with particular attention given to pools/aquatics area work.

3. Show projected percentage of completion for each item of work as of first

day of each month. 4. Submit separate sub-schedule showing submittals, review times,

procurement schedules, and delivery dates. 5. Submit sub-schedules to define critical portions of entire schedule.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01310 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Page 2 of 2 4. UPDATING 1. Show all changes occurring since previous submission of updated schedule. 2. Indicate progress of each activity, and show completion dates. 3. Include major changes in scope, activities modified since previous

updating, revised projections due to changes, and other identifiable changes.

4. Provide narrative report including discussion of problem areas, including

current and anticipated delay factors and their impact; corrective action taken or proposed, and its effect; effect of change in schedules of any work being done by the Owner or other parties for the Owner; and description of revisions (effect on schedule due to change of scope, revisions in duration of activities, and other changes that may affect schedule).

5. SUBMITTALS 1. Submit initial schedules within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed.

Consultant will review schedules and return review copy within 10 days after receipt. If required, resubmit within 7 days after return of review copy.

2. Submit updated schedules with monthly application for payment,

accurately depicting progress to first day of each month. 3. Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque print. 6. DISTRIBUTION 1. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to job-site file, subcontractors, and

other concerned parties. 2. Instruct recipients to report any liability to comply and provide detailed

explanation with suggested remedies.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01311 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 COORDINATION Page 1 of 2 1.1 GENERAL

1. Provide the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and be responsible

for delays or costs resulting from failure to properly inspect or coordinate the Work and for replacement or corrective work required.

1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF SYSTEMS

1. Provide identification of electrical and mechanical system installations and other

automated systems or equipment in compliance with Contract Documents.

1.3 COMMISIONING AND SYSTEM DEMONSTRATIONS

1. Provide testing, adjusting, balancing and certification and commissioning of

mechanical installations and other automated systems or equipment in accordance with Section 01770.

2. Instruct Owner’s designated representatives in operation and maintenance of mechanical and electrical installations and other automated systems or equipment in accordance with Section 01770.

1.4 SUPERINTENDENCE

1. Provide full time project manager and a full tie site superintendent and necessary

supporting staff personnel who shall be in attendance at the Place of Work while Work is being performed at all times, with proven experience, (min. 5 years), in erecting, supervising, testing and adjusting projects of comparable nature and complexity.

2. The Contractor shall appoint a full time site superintendent at the Place of Work who shall have overall authority at the Place of Work who shall have authority at the Place of Work and shall speak for the Contractor and represent the Contractor’s interest and responsibilities at meeting at the Place of Work and in dealings with the Consultant and the Owner.

1.5 DIMENSIONS

1. Verify dimensions at the Place of Work before commencing shop drawings. Before

fabrication commences report discrepancies to Consultant in writing. Incorporate accepted variances on shop drawings and as- built records.

1.6 COOPERATION WITH OWNER

1. The Owner reserve the right to commence moving furniture, fitments, and

equipment into the building as soon as areas become available and Contractor and Subcontractors shall be required to cooperate closely with Owner and coordinate the Work to ensure that the Owner’s requirements are accommodated.

1.7 COORDINATION

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01311 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 COORDINATION Page 2 of 2

1. Coordinate and ensure workers, Subcontractors and Suppliers cooperate to ensure

that the Work will be carried out expeditiously and in proper sequence. 2. Make adjustments to allow adjustable work fit to fixed work.

1.8 BUILDING DEIMENSION, TEMPLATES, BUILT-INS AND COORDINATION

1. Take necessary dimensions for the proper execution of the Work. Assume complete responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of such dimensions and for coordination.

2. Provide forms, templates, anchors, sleeves, insets and accessories required to be fixed to or inserted in the Work and set in place or instruct separate Subcontractors as to their location.

3. Supply items to be built in, as and when required together with templates, measurements, shop drawings and other related information and assistance.

4. Pay the cost of extra work and make up time lost as a result of failure to provide necessary information and items to be built.

5. Verify that the Work, as it proceeds is executed in accordance with dimensions and portions indicated which maintain levels and clearances to adjacent work, as set out by requirements of the Contract Documents and ensure that the work installed in error is rectified before construction resumes.

6. Check and verify dimensions referring to interfacing of services. Verify such dimensions with interconnected portions of the Work.

7. Do not scale directly from drawings. Obtain clarification from the Consultant if there is ambiguity or lack of information.

8. Details and measurements of any work which is to fit or to conform to work installed shall be taken at the Place of Work.

9. Advise Consultant of discrepancies and omissions in the Contract Documents that affect aesthetics or that interfere with services, equipment or surface. Do not proceed with work affected by such items without clarification form Consultant.

10. Prepare and submit setting drawings, templates and other information necessary for the location and installation of material, holes, sleeves, inserts, anchors, accessories fastenings, connections and access panels.

11. Subcontractors shall direct related Subcontractors on site of specific locations required for sleeves and openings.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01312 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 PROJECT MEETINGS Page 1 of 5 PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 ADMINISTRATIVE

.1 The Contractor shall schedule meetings as specified herein. .1 Such scheduling shall be in consultation both with the Owner and with the

Consultant.

.2 The Contractor shall prepare agendas for meetings specified herein. .1 Agendas shall include, as a minimum the agenda items specified in the

Contract Documents. .3 The Contractor shall distribute written notice of each meeting specified herein,

complete with meeting agenda, 4 days in advance of meeting date to the Consultant and the Owner and other affected parties.

.4 The Contractor shall chair and record the minutes of the meetings specified herein. .1 Contractor shall distribute copies of minutes to Owner, the Consultant and to all

others in attendance within 3 days after date of meeting. .5 Representatives of parties shall be authorized to act on behalf of the parties they

represent. .6 Representatives of parties shall not attend meetings unless authorized by the

Consultant and Owner. .7 The Contractor shall prepare and distribute to the Consultant and Owner 4 days in

advance of next progress meeting date the following; .1 Weekly progress reports containing updated schedules, shop drawings logs,

requests for Interpretation logs, submittals and budget.

1.2 CONTRACT START – UP MEETING .1 The Contractor shall schedule meetings as specified herein.

.1 Such scheduling shall be in consultation both with the Owner and with the Consultant.

.2 The Owner, the Consultant, the Contractor, site superintendent(s) and inspection

testing company will be in attendance. 3 Agenda to include the following: .1 Appointment of official representatives of participants in the Project. .2 Status of permits, fees and requirement of authorities having jurisdiction. Action

required. .3 Establishing a schedule for progress meetings. Progress meetings shall occur bi-

weekly at a minimum and weekly were warranted at decision of Owner and/or Consultant.

.4 Requirements for Contract modification and interpretation procedures, including but not limited to; Requests For Interpretation, Contemplated Change Orders, Change Orders, Change Directives, Supplemental Instructions, procedure,

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01312 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 PROJECT MEETINGS Page 2 of 5

approvals required, mark-up percentages permitted, time extensions, overtime and administrative requirements.

.5 Schedule of submission of samples, colour chips, and items for Owners and/or Consultant’s consideration, Section 01330.

.6 Construction schedule and progress scheduling Section 01330. .7 Delivery schedule of specified equipment, Section 01330. .8 Appointment of inspection and testing agencies or firms, Section 01330.

.9 Requirements for notification for reviews. Allow a minimum of 48 hours notice to Consultant for review of the Work. .10 Requirements for temporary facilities, signs, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences, hoarding, Section 01500. .11 Security requirements as and for the Place of Work, Section01500. .12 Owner supplied Products. .13 Record drawings, Section 01770. .14 Maintenance manuals, Section o01770. .15 Take-over procedures, acceptance, warranties, Section 01770. .16 Progress claims, administrative procedures, holdbacks. .17 Insurances, transcripts of policies. .18 Contractor’s safety procedures. .19 Workplace Safety and Insurance Board Certificate.

1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS .1 During the course of the Work prior to Substantial Performance of the Work,

schedule pre-installation meetings as required by the Contract Documents and coordinated with the Consultant.

.2 As far as possible, pre-installation meetings shall be scheduled\to take place on

the same day as regularly scheduled progress meetings.

.3 Agenda to include the following: .1 Appointment of official representatives of participants in the Project. .2 Review of existing conditions and affected work and testing thereof as required. .3 Review of installation procedures ad requirements. .4 Review of environmental and site condition requirements. .5 Schedule of applicable portions of Work.

.6 Schedule of submission of samples, colour chips, and items for Consultant’s consideration. .7 Requirements for temporary facilities, site signs, offices, storage sheds, utilities fences, hoarding, Section 01500. .8 Requirements for notification for reviews. Allow a minimum of 48 hours notice to Consultant for review of the Work. .9 Requirements for inspections and tests as applicable. Schedule and undertake inspections in accordance with Section 01450. .10 Delivery if specified equipment. .11 Special safety requirements and procedures.

1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS


.1 During the course of the Work prior to Substantial Performance of the Work,

schedule progress meetings at east bi-weekly and additionally as may be required by the Owner or Consultant meetings as directed by the Contract Documents and coordinated with the Consultant

.2 Attendees at progress meetings shall include the following: .1 Contractor. .2 Contractor’s site superintendent(s). .3 Consultant. .4 Owner. .3 Agenda to include the following: .1 Review of the proceedings of the previous meeting. .2 Review of items arising from the proceedings. .3 Review of the progress of the Work since previous meeting and Contractor’s

weekly progress report, as required. .4 Field Observations, problems, conflicts. .5 Update construction schedule. .6 Problems that impede the compliance with construction schedule. .7 Review of off-site fabrication delivery schedules. .8 Review material delivery dates/schedules. .9 Corrective measures and procedures to regain construction schedule. .10 Revisions to construction schedule. .11 Progress, schedule, during subsequent period of the Work. .12 Review submittal schedules. .13 Review status of submittals. .14 Maintenance of quality standards. .15 Pending changes and substitutions. .16 Review of Contract modifications and interpretations including, but not limited

to; Change Directives, Supplemental Instructions, for effect on construction schedule and Contract Time.

.17 Review of status of as-built documents. .18 Other business.

1.5 PRE-TAKEOVER MEETING

.1 Prior to application for Substantial Performance of the Work, schedule a pre-

takeover meeting. .2 Agenda to include the following: .1 Review, approval of the proceedings of the previous meeting. .2 Review of items arising from the proceedings. .3 Review of procedures for Substantial Performance of the Work, completion of

the Contract and handover of the Work. .4 Field Observations, problems, conflicts. .5 Review of outstanding Contract modifications and interpretations including but

not limited to; Requests For Interpretation and log, Contemplated Change Orders, Change Orders, Change Directives, Supplemental Instructions, for effect on construction schedule and on Contract Time.

.6 Problems that impede Substantial Performance of the Work. .7 Review of procedures for deficiency review. Corrective measures required. .8 Review of arrangements for hydro, heating and other services.


.9 Review submittal requirements for warranties, manuals, and all demonstrations and documentation required for Substantial Performance of the Work.

.10 Progress schedule, during succeeding period of work. .11 Review submittal requirements for warranties, annuals, and all demonstrations

and documentation required for Substantial Performance of the Work. .12 Review of keying and hardware requirements. .13 Review status of as-built documents and record drawings. .14 Status of commissioning and training. .15 Review Contractor`s deficiency list and status. .16 Cleaning for occupancy. .17 Other business.

1.6 POST-CONSTRCUTION MEETING .1 Prior to application for completion of Contract, schedule a post-construction

meeting. Four days prior to date for meeting, Consultant shall confirm a date for meeting based upon evaluation of completion requirements.

.2 Agenda to include the following: .1 Review, approval of the proceedings of the previous meeting. .2 Confirmation that no business is arising from the proceedings. .3 Confirmation of completion of the Contract and handover of reviewed

documentation from Consultant to the Owner. .4 Confirmation of Contemplated Change Orders, Change Orders, Change

Directives, Supplemental Instructions. .5 Problems that impede the Contract completion. .6 Identify unresolved issues or potential warranty problems. .7 Confirmation of completion of deficiencies. .8 Corrective measures required. .9 Confirmation of arrangements for hydro, heating and other services. .10 Confirm submittal requirements for warranties, manuals and demonstrations

and documentation for Contract completion are in order. .11 Review of procedures for communication during post –construction period.. .12 Handover of reviewed record documents by the Consultant to the Owner. .13 Handover of Contract completion insurance policy transcripts by Contractor. .14 Submission of final application for payment. .15 Review and finalize outstanding claims, pricing and allowance amounts. .16 Demobilization and Place of Work restoration. .17 Review of requests for Interpretation log. .18 Other business.

1.5 SPECIAL MEETINGS .1 Owner and/or Consultant reserve the right to require special meetings which may

be held on short notice and a t which attendance by Contractor and representatives of affected Subcontractors and Suppliers is mandatory. Contractor shall keep detailed accurate meeting notes and distribute copies promptly to all in attendance and those affected by agreements made at such meetings.

.2 If the Contractor requires meetings in addition to those specified above that require the attendance of the Owner and the Consultant, the Contractor shall provide written notice of such meeting to both the Owner and Consultant at least


48 hours in advance of the meeting – setting out the reasons for the meeting and agendas for it.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01330 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Page 1 of 2 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL

1 Schedules required:

.1 Construction schedule.

.2 Product delivery schedule.

.3 Inspection and testing schedule.

2 Format: .1 Prepare schedules in the form of a PERT or GANTT or Microsoft Project chart

method. .2 Include horizontal time scale identifying the first Working Day of each week. .3 Format for listings: The chronological order of the start of each item or part of

the Work. .4 Identification of listings; by systems description

3 Construction schedule:

.1 Include the complete sequence of construction activities, including provision for climate and weather.

.2 Include the dates for the commencement and completion for each major element of the Work parallel to the sections of the specifications.

.3 Show projected percentage of completion for each item as of the first Working Day of each week.

.4 Submit draft schedule for review and incorporate responses to comments identified by Consultant and/or Owner.

.5 Show dates for the commencement and completion of inspection and testing.

.6 At each date of submission of schedule, indicate progress of each activity. .1 Show changes occurring since previous submission of the construction

schedule: .1 major changes in scope .2 Change Orders and Change Directives

.3 Activities modified since previous submission .4 Revised projections of progress and completion .5 Other identifiable changes .2 Include a narrative report to define: .1 Problem areas, anticipated delays and the impact on schedule .2 Corrective action recommended and its impact on the schedule

.7 Submit revised construction schedule with each application for payment.

4 Product delivery schedule:

.1 include dates for delivery of Products, equipment, finish items, and factory-finished manufactured items. Show last dates for order, shipment and delivery in order to meet construction schedule.

5 Inspection and testing schedule:

.1 Prepare schedule for inspection and testing by advance discussion with the selected inspection and testing company to determine the time required for the inspection and testing company to perform its test and to issue each of its findings and allow for require time in the construction schedule.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01330 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Page 2 of 2

.2 Refer to Section 01450 for additional requirements for inspection and testing requirements.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01323 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION Page 1 of 1 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 General 1. Provide photographic documentation in digital format and in accordance with

procedures and submission requirements specified in this section. 1.2 Digital photographs:

1. Equipment: Provide photographs using minimum 4 mega pixel digital camera. 2. Submit the required photographs to the Consultant and to the Owner.

3. Output: Supply date stamped maximum resolution colour photos to Consultant in

JPEG format, and CD ROM format.

4. Number of photos required: .1 Prior to construction: Provide necessary number of photographs, as required to

documents existing conditions and verify damage to adjacent streets and property which may or may not have occurred during construction: minimum 24 photos.

.2 Each progress draw: Provide 6-10 construction photographs each week to accompany each application for progress draw to document the stage of the Work from points selected by the Consultant showing as much as possible of the Work installed during the previous month.

.3 Completions: When the work is completed, arrange to take final photographs of the Work from a minimum of 8 points of view.

PART 2 –PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 – EXECUTION Not Applicable. END OF SECTION

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01330 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 SUBMITTALS Page 1 of 14 PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Submit submittals as requested by the Contract Documents, as specified herein and in accordance with the conditions of the Contract.

2. In addition to submittals specifically requested by the Contract Documents, submit

other submittals as may be requested by the Consultant, or as required to coordinate the Work and to provide the Owner with choices available, within the scope of the Contract Documents.

3. Procedures and requirements for Contract closeout submittals shall be in

accordance with the following Sections: .1 Section o01770 – Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals .2 Section 01780 – Warranties 4. Contractor’s review of submittals: .1 Review submittals for conformity to Contract Documents before submitting to

Consultant. Submittal shall bear the stamp of Contractor and signature of a responsible official on Contractor’s organization indicating in writing that such submittals have been checked and coordinated by Contractor. Contractor’s review shall be performed by qualified personnel who have detailed understanding of those elements being reviewed and the conditions at the Place of Work proposed for installation.

.2 Check and sign each submittal and make notations considered necessary

before submitting to Consultant for review. Where submittal is substantially and obviously in conflict with requirements of Contract Documents, reject submittal without submitting to Consultant and request resubmission. Note limited number of reviews of each submittal covered under Consultant’s services as specified below.

.3 Contractor shall assume sole responsibility for any conflicts occurring in the

Work that result from lack of comparison and coordination of submittals of the Work.

.4 Submittals that have not been reviewed, checked and coordinated by

Contractor prior to submission to Consultant, will be rejected. .5 Notify Consultant in writing of changes made on submittals from Contract

Documents. Consultant’s review of submittals shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for changes mad form Contract Documents not covered by written notification to Consultant.

5. Consultant’s review of submittals: .1 Review of submittals by Consultant is for the sole purpose of ascertaining

conformance with the general design concepts and the general intent of the Contract Documents. This review shall not mean that the Consultant approves the detail design inherent in the submittals, responsibility for which shall remain with the Contractor. Such review shall not relieve the Contractor of the

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01330 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 SUBMITTALS Page 2 of 14

responsibility for error or omissions in the submittals, or responsibility for meeting requirements of the Contract Documents.

.2 Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the Place of Work for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for coordination of the Work.

.3 Consultant’s review and markings on submittals do not authorize changes in the Work or the Contract Time and will be accommodated at no additional cost to the Owner. If in the opinion of the Contractor, the Consultant’s markings on submittals constitute a change in the Work or will effect a change in the Contract Time, then the Contractor shall so notify the Consultant in writing and request an interpretation following the procedures for requests for interpretation in accordance with Section 01260. I f the Consultant finds that the Consultant’s markings on submittals do constitute a change in the Work or will effect a change in the Contract Time, then a Change Order will be prepared therefore. taken to process such a request for interpretation shall not in and of itself constitute a change in the Work nor increase the Contract Time.

.4 Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents or not requested by the Consultant will not be reviewed by the Consultant and will be marked ‘NOT REVIEWED” by the Consultant and returned to the Contractor.

6. Make submittal with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as to

cause no delay in the Work. Be responsible of delays, make up time lost and pay added costs, at no additional cost to the Owner, incurred because of not making submittals in due time to permit proper review by the Consultant.

7. Submittals that contain substitutions will be rejected. Substitutions are permitted

only on submittals as specified inSection01250. 8. Do not proceed with work affected by a submittal, including ordering of

Products, until relevant submittal has been reviewed by Consultant. 9. Prepare submittals using SI (metric) units. 10. Contractor’s responsibility of errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by

Consultant’s review of submittals. 11. Contractor’s responsibility of deviations in submittal from requirements of

Contract Documents is not relieved by Consultant’s review of submittal, unless consultant gives written acceptance of specific deviations.

12. Engineered submittals: .1 Submittals for items required to be engineered shall be prepared under the

direct control and supervision of a qualified professional engineer registered in the Place of Work, having a minimum of $1,00,000.00 professional liability insurance, who shall also apply his/her professional seal and signature to submittals prepared directly under their control and supervision.

.2 A certificate of insurance indicating that the professional engineer under

whose direct control an supervision the submittal has been prepared has the required professional liability insurance is to be submitted with submittals required


o be sealed by a professional engineer, (or as otherwise indicated as engineered).

.3 Design includes life safety, sizing of supports, anchors, framing, connections,

spans and as additionally required to meet or exceed requirements if applicable codes, standards, regulations and authorities having jurisdiction.

.4 Engineered submittals shall include design calculations, complete with

references to codes and standards used in such calculations, supporting the proposed design represented by the submittal. Prepare calculations in a clear and comprehensive manner so that they can be easily reviewed. Incomplete or haphazard calculations will be rejected.

.5 The professional engineer responsible for the preparation of engineered

submittals shall undertake periodic field review, including review of associated mock- ups at locations wherever the work as described by the engineered submittal is in progress, during fabrication and installation of such work and shall submit a field review report after each site visit. Field review reports shall be submitted to the Consultant to Authorities having jurisdiction as required and in accordance with the building code.

.6 Field reviews shall be at intervals as necessary and appropriate to the progress

of the work described by the submittal to allow the engineer to be familiar with the progress and quality of such work and to determine if the work is proceeding in general conformity with the Contract Documents, including reviewed shop drawings and design calculations.

.7 Upon completion of the parts of the Work covered by the engineered

submittal, the professional engineer responsible for the preparation of the engineered submittal and for undertaking the periodic field reviews described above shall prepare and submit to the Consultant and to Authorities having jurisdiction as required a letter of general conformity for those pats =of the Work, certifying that they have been Provided in accordance with the requirements both of the Contract Documents and of the authorities having jurisdiction over the Place of Work.

.8 Costs of such filed reviews and field review reports and letters of general conformity are included in the Contract Price.

13. Keep copies of reviewed submittals at the Place of Work in a neat, orderly

condition. Only submittals that have been reviewed by the Consultant and are marked with Consultant’s review stamp, as applicable are permitted at the Place of Work.

14. The Work shall conform to reviewed submittals subject to the requirements of this

section. Remove and replace materials or assemblies not matching reviewed submittals at no increase in the Contract Time and at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS


1. Before commencement of the Work, submit to the Consultant a detailed schedule of submittals required by the Contract Documents.

2. Schedule shall be accompanied by a checklist, correlated to each of the

schedule o submittals, the construction schedule (specified under Section 01320), the Product delivery schedule (specified under Section 01320), and the schedule of inspections and tests (specified under Scetion01320 an d01450), listing the following:

.1 Shop Drawings .2 Samples .3 Mock-ups .4 Reviews, tests and inspections by: .1 Manufacturers .2 Authorities having jurisdiction .3 The Owner .4 The Consultant .5 Inspection and testing companies. .5 Demonstration and training 3. Indicate dates for submitting, review time resubmission time, flat time and last

date for meeting construction schedule. 4. Consultant will review submittal schedule and advise Contractor if volume and

timing of submittals will permit timely review and response. Consultant may require modifications to submittals schedule in order to allow adequate time for review of submittals. Adjust submittals schedule and construction schedule as required to comply with Consultant’s needs.

5. Make provisions in schedule for at least 5 working days for the Consultant’s review

of submittals. When submittal have to be reviewed by one or more of the Consultant’s sub-consultants, add 3 more days for a total of 8 working day review period.

6. If the Consultant requires resubmission of submittals, allow for an additional 5

working days review for each resubmission. 7. If , at any time the Contractor submits a large enough number of submittals such

that the Consultant cannot process these submittals within 5 working days, the Consultant in consultation with the Contractor within 3 working days of receipt of such submittal, will provide the Contractor with an estimate of the time necessary for processing same, the Contractor shall accommodate such necessary time at no increase in the Contract Time and at no additional cost to the Owner.

8. The Contractor shall periodically resubmit the submittal schedule to correspond

to changes in the construction schedule. Such resubmissions shall maintain the minimum 5 working day period for the Consultant’s review.

9. Schedule submissions of submittals well in advance of scheduled dates for

installation to provide for reviews and possible resubmissions and for placing orders and securing delivery so as to avoid delays in the Work.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01330 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 SUBMITTALS Page 5 of 14 1.3 SUBMISSION PROCEDURES

1. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. Individual submittals shall include related information.

2. Distribute copies of submittals to parties whose work is affected by submittals

except Consultant and Owner before final submission for review by Consultant. 3. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing; .1 Date. .2 Project title and number. .3 Contractor’s name and address. .4 Identification and quantity of each submittal. .5 Other pertinent data. 4. Each submittal shall be identified numerically by relevant specification section

number with a numeric indicator for multiple submittals by that section followed by revisions number, for example 04080-01 –RO

5. Make any changes in submittal that Consultant may require, consistent with

Contract Documents and resubmit as directed by Consultant. 6. Notify Consultant in writing, when resubmitting, of any revisions other than those

requested by Consultant. 7. After Consultant’s review, distribute copies to affected parties.

1.4 PRODUCT DATA SHEETS

1. Submit Product data sheet prints; 3 sets for Consultant( which includes 1 set that will be returned to the Contractor and 1 set that will be submitted to the Owner once submittal has been reviewed), 1 set for Contractor and 1 set each of applicable structural, mechanical and electrical engineers.

2. Submit Product data sheets for requirements requested in the Contract

Documents and as the Consultant may reasonably request where shop drawings will not be prepared due to a standardized manufacture of a Product. Manufacturer’s catalogue cut=s will be acceptable in such cases, providing that they are 213mm x 275mm (8 ½” x11”) originals and that they indicate choices including sizes, colours, model numbers, options and other pertinent data, including installation instructions. Submissions showing only general information are not acceptable.

3. Where requirements of Contract Documents are more stringent than design

proposed on Product data sheets, the requirements of the Contract Documents take priority.

4. Upon completion of review by Consultant, 1 marked set of Product data sheets will

be returned to Contractor for reproduction and distribution and 1 marked set will be delivered to the Owner.


5. Retain 1 complete set of prints of reviewed Product data sheets for issuance to Owner immediately prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, in an acceptable, bound manner and in accordance with Section 01770.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit shop drawings prints; 3 sets for Consultant, (which includes 1 set that will be returned to the Contractor and 1 set that will be submitted to the Owner once submittal has been reviewed), 1 set for Contractor and 1 set each of applicable structural, mechanical and electrical engineers. Or submit PDF for review.

2. Lettering on shop drawings shall be not less than 3mm (1/8”) high. 3. Where requirements of Contract Documents are more stringent than design

proposed on shop drawings, the requirements of the Contract Documents take priority.

4. Consultant markings and resulting action required: .1 Shop drawings required no changes will be marked ‘REVIEWED’ and shall be submitted for as-built purposes. .2 Shop drawings requiring several changes will be marked as ‘REVIEWED as

NOTED’ and shall be revised and submitted for as-built purposes. .3 Shop drawings requiring substantial changes will be marked ‘REVISE and

RESUBMIT’ and shall be revised and resubmitted until Consultant stamps drawings with ‘REVIEWED’ or ‘REVIEWED as NOTED’

5. Shop drawing size shall be multiple of 213mm x275mm (8 ½” x11”) excluding 38mm

(1 ½”) binding margin and not larger than 838mm x 117mm (33”x 44”). Leave minimum 150mmx 100mm (6”x4”) clear space for Consultant’s comments.

6. Upon completion of review by Consultant, 1 marked set of shop drawings will be

returned to Contractor for reproduction and distribution and 1 marked set will be delivered to Owner.

7. Retain 1 complete set of prints of reviewed shop drawings for issuance to Owner

immediately prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, in an acceptable\, bound manner and in accordance with Section 01770.

8. Submit copies of reviewed shop drawings to authorities having jurisdiction as

required. 9. Shop drawings shall include:

.1 Fabrication and erection drawings .2 Plans, sections, elevations, arrangements and sufficient full size details which

indicate complete construction, components methods of assembly as well as interconnections and other parts of the Work.

.3 Design calculations prepared by professional engineers, as required substantiating sizes for members and connections based on design loads.

.4 Clear definition of the division of responsibility for the work described thereon. No Products, items or equipment, or description of work, shall be indicated to


be supplied or work to be done ‘By Others’ or ‘By Purchaser’. Shop drawings marked with either of these phrases will be rejected without having been reviewed by the Consultant.

.5 Location and type of exposed anchors, attachments and locations and types of fasteners, including concealed reinforcements to accept mounted fasteners.

.6 Adhesives, joinery methods and bonding agents.

.7 Kinds and grades of materials, their characteristics, relative to their purpose, detailed description of finishes and other fabrication information.

.8 Configurations, types and sizes required; identify each unit type on drawing and on Product.

.9 Descriptive names of equipment and electrical characteristics when applicable.

.10 Data verifying that superimposed loads will not affect function, appearance and safety or work shown on shop drawings, as well as other interconnected work.

.11 Assumed design loadings, dimensions of elements and material specifications for loadbearing members.

.12 Proposed chases, sleeves, cuts and holes in structural members.

.13 Wall – thickness of metals.

.14 Location and types of welds. For structural welds use AWS symbols and clearly show net weld lengths and sizes.

.15 Materials, gauges and sizes being supplied including connections, attachments, reinforcement, anchorage and locations of exposed fastenings.

.16 Installation instructions and details for Products to be installed by separate Subcontractors, including function of each part.

.17 A list of Products covered by, or included on the shop drawing. List of Products shall be complete and show manufacturer’s name, Product name, generic description, standard certification where specified, manufacturer’s complete installation data and precautions against wrong installation, operation and maintenance.

.18 Refer to individual sections of the specifications for more particular requirements for shop drawings.

10. Compatibility statement: include with each shop drawing a statement that each

Product and material indicated on the shop drawing is comparable with each other Product and material with which it comes into contact.

1.6 SAMPLES

1. Deliver 3 samples to Consultant’s office with expense, including carrying costs, prepaid ,unless otherwise instructed.

2. Contractor and Subcontractor and date of submission. Identify location, specified

material reference and any other pertinent information. Show construction by layered method if necessary, clearly displaying textures and patterns.

3. Resubmit samples until written acceptance is obtained from Consultant.

1.7 MOCK UPS


1. Provide field or shop erected example of work complete with specified materials and workmanship.

2. Erect mock- ups at location as specified and as acceptable to Consultant. DO not

proceed with work for which mock-ups are required prior to Consultant’s review of mock-ups.

3. Protect and maintain mock-ups until directed to be removed. Commence work

demonstrated in mock-up only after review and acceptance of workmanship. If possible, mock-up may become part of finished work, at sole discretion and with prior written acceptance of Consultant.

4. Reviewed and accepted mock –ups will become standards of workmanship and

material against which installed work will be compared. 5. Remove and replace materials or assemblies not matching reviewed mock-ups. 6. Resubmit mock-ups until written acceptance is obtained from Consultant. 7. In addition to any mock –ups called for in the rest of the Contract Documents,

provide a mock-up of transition from terrazzo to porcelain tile. Size and location as directed by the Consultant.

2. SUBMITTALS AFTER RECEIPT OF NOTICE TO PROCEED 1. Submit the following:

1. Initial Construction Schedule in accordance with Section 01310, within 10 working days of receipt of Notice to Proceed with Work.

3. SUBMITTALS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK 1. Submit the following:

1. Performance Bond. 2. Labour and Material Payment Bond.

3. Certificate of Construction Insurances. 4. Contractor’s Safety Policy. 5. Mechanical Acceptable Equipment Schedule

4. SUBMITTALS PRIOR TO FIRST APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 1. Submit the following:

1. Letter of Good Standing from Workplace Safety & Insurance Board (WSIB).

2. A bar chart or CPM schedule, in accordance with CCDC 2 and Section 01310 of the Specifications. Combine mechanical and electrical in a separate schedule.


3. Schedule of Shop Drawing and sample submissions. 4. Product delivery schedule. 5. Estimate of Monthly Progress Claims. 6. Breakdown of Progress Claim, to Consultant's standard. 7. Documentation required by OAA/OGCA Take Over Procedures

Document No. 100.

5. SUBMITTALS DURING PROGRESS OF CONSTRUCTION 1. Submit the following during the course of construction:

1. Construction Schedule updates. 2. Report on any damage, on conditions or problems arising out of

receipt of Owner's equipment on site. 3. Samples

1. The Contractor shall submit for the Consultant's approval such standard manufacturers' samples as the Consultant may reasonably require. Samples shall be labelled as to origin and intended use in the work and shall conform to the requirements of the contract documents.

2. Submit samples where specified in each applicable trade

section of the Specifications. Unless specified otherwise make samples of adequate size to represent the material intended for use on this project.

3. Where the degrees of marking or colour cannot be

adequately shown in a single sample, submit a range of samples to show the extremes of colour and marking. Identify samples with project number, date, and name of Contractor. Materials used in building shall correspond to approved samples for quality, colour, texture, finish, and thickness.

4. Submit two samples of each item required unless specified

otherwise. 5. Review submittals for conformity to Contract Documents

before submitting to Consultant. Submittals shall bear stamp of Contractor and signature of a responsible official in Contractor’s organization indicating in writing that such submittals have been checked and coordinated by Contractor. Contractor’s review shall be performed by qualified personnel who have detailed understanding of those elements being reviewed and of the conditions at the Place of Work.

6. Check and sign each submittal and make notations

considered necessary before submitting to Consultant for


review. Where submittal is substantially and obviously in conflict with requirements of Contract Documents, reject submittal without submitting to Consultant and request resubmission. Note limited number of reviews of each submittal covered under Consultant’s services as specified below.

7. Contractor shall assume sole responsibility for any conflicts

occurring in the Work that result from lack of comparison and coordination of submittals required for the Work.

8. Submittals that have not been reviewed, checked and

coordinated by Contractor prior to submission to Consultant will be rejected.

9. Notify Consultant in writing of changes made on submittals

from Contract Documents. Consultant’s review of submittals shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for changes made from Contract Documents not covered by written notification to Consultant.

4. Progress records in accordance with Section 01200, and testing and

inspection reports in accordance with Section 01400. 5. Mock-Ups: Refer to Section 01400 for requirements regarding

installation of mock-ups during progress of construction. 6. Record Drawings and Record Specifications

1. Maintain, as the work progresses, until project duration, 1 set of project Record Drawings and Specifications. The full size drawings shall be in white prints while the 8-1/2" x 11" detail drawing sheets and Specifications shall be in photocopies. Refer to mechanical and electrical for their requirements.

2. Record accurately, on the Record Drawings and

Specifications, all changes to the Contract Documents as constructed, such as Consultant/Engineer-originated changes, Contractor/Subcontractor-originated changes, Site Instructions, Supplementary Instructions, Addenda, instructions by correspondence and Jurisdictional Authority approvals. Carefully record location of concealed elements as required for future maintenance, alteration work, and building additions. Delete information made obsolete by changes, and accurately draw or duplicate instructions and indicate all changes listed herein. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Specification Divisions for additional requirements.

3. Record exact location of all services with dimensions to the

Grid Lines and Datum Lines, and show on Record Drawings prior to placing concrete. DO NOT place concrete until this


is done. Coordinate Mechanical, Electrical, and concrete trades.

4. Clearly mark each of the project Record Drawings and

Specifications "Project Record Copy". Maintain in good condition. Make the File Copy available at all times for inspection or use by the Consultant.

5. Keep the File Record Drawings and Specifications current

and do not record irrelevant information. Do not permanently conceal any work until the required information has been recorded.

6. Submit to the Consultant, the Record Drawings, 1 bound photocopy of the Drawing Detail Sheets and 1 bound copy of the Record Specifications with the application for Substantial Performance of the Project.

7. Consultant shall provide, to the Contractor, an electronic

copy of the Contract Drawings in AutoCAD Release 14 format. The Contractor, using as-built information recorded on Record Drawings, shall revise these files to ‘as-built’ status and provide an electronic copy to the Consultant with the application for Substantial Performance of the Project.

7. Shop Drawings

1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340, and in accordance with Mechanical and Electrical Divisions of the Specifications.

2. Conform also to Section 00006, Supplementary General Conditions, Item 6, GC 3.11, Shop Drawings.

8. List of Paint Materials: Submit list of paint materials in accordance

with Section 09900. Submit 6”x6” samples of each paint colour to Consultant minimum 1 month before painting start on site.

6. SUBMITTALS WHEN PROJECT IS SUBSTANTIALLY PERFORMED 1. Shop Drawings and Operation & Maintenance Manuals

1. Provide the Owner with Shop Drawings and the Operations & Maintenance Manuals prior to application for certification of Substantial Performance of the Project.

2. Shop Drawings shall consist of two complete sets of final "REVIEWED"

and "Reviewed as Modified" shop drawings, on which corrections have been recorded of changes made during fabrication and installation of unforeseen conditions. Do not include drawings which were noted "REVISE AND RESUBMIT".

3. The Operations & Maintenance Manuals shall consist of two bound

copies of hard, black, vinyl-covered loose leaf binders, to accommodate 8-½" x 11" sheets. Binders shall match in all


dimensions. A title sheet labelled "Operations & Maintenance Manuals" with project name, and the date of Substantial Performance and list of contents shall precede data. Organize required material into applicable sections of work. Each section shall be marked by labelled tabs protected with celluloid covers fastened to hard paper dividers.

4. The Operations & Maintenance Manual shall contain:

1. Equipment and operating instructions on all operable equipment and on all mechanical and electrical equipment, plumbing fixtures, and architectural hardware. Notes shall be typed. Drawings shall be neatly drafted and inked, or white-printed. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for additional requirements.

2. Maintenance instructions for all exterior, and interior floors, walls and ceiling surfaces.

3. Operating and maintenance instructions for all mechanical

and electrical equipment. 4. Original brochures on all equipment. 5. Parts lists on all equipment including a list of suppliers. 6. All additional material used in the project beyond that

indicated by brochures listed under the various sections, showing manufacturers and sources of supply.

7. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of the

designer(s) and major contractor(s) who worked on the building.

8. Commissioning data such as air and water flows and

regulating valve positions.

2. Affidavits

1. Submit to the Consultant affidavits which are specified in other Sections of the Specifications.

2. Submit affidavits in duplicate, and signed by a responsible officer of

the certifying company.

3. Final Hydro Inspection Certificates/Approval Certificates: Collect the following from each trade whose work requires Hydro inspection/approval certificates and submit to the Consultant:

1. Original, final Hydro inspection certificates.


2. Original approval certificates (CSA, ULC, etc.) for specified equipment.

4. Laboratory and Inspection Reports: Submit to the Consultant, in accordance with the technical Sections of the Specifications.

5. Extended Warranties: Provide the extended warranties specified. These extended warranties shall commence immediately after the expiration of the standard one-year warranty included in the Contract under Article GC 12.3, Warranty, the General Conditions of the Contract. The Contractor shall submit them on the Form of Warranty, a sample of which is included in this Section.

6. Maintenance Materials: Provide the Owner with extra materials for future maintenance use, as specified in the technical Sections of the Specifications.

7. Fixture Suspension Certificate: Submit to the Consultant a certificate from independent inspection company in accordance with Section 09510.

8. Sprinkler Installation Certificate: Submit to the Consultant certificates of tests required by NFPA 13.

9. Plumbing, Heating and Building Inspection Certificates: Submit to the Consultant certificates of Plumbing, Heating and Building Inspection.

10. Survey Certificate: Submit to the Consultant survey certificates in accordance with Section 01010.

11. Engineer's Certification: Where the documents require the seal of a registered Professional Engineer engaged by the Contractor, the Engineer(s) in question shall be responsible for providing certification as required by the Ontario Building Code or as required by the specifications, stating that the construction it designed is in conformity with that design. Submit one copy of the applicable certification to the Consultant before Substantial Performance.

12. Elevating Inspection Branch Data: Submit a copy of the Application of Registration, Specification Sheet, Wiring Diagram, Revisions Layout and other applicable data for submission to the Owner.

13. Record Drawings: Refer to "Record Drawings" and "Record Specifications" articles in this section. For information to be recorded, submit two copies of "as constructed" drawings showing all changes from the original contract documents.


SAMPLE FORM OF EXTENDED WARRANTY

NOTES: 1. Items shown in brackets are to be changed to give the specific information for this

project and trade. 2. Extended warranties are to be submitted through the General Contractor. 3. If validity of extended warranty is related to proper maintenance and servicing of

equipment, etc., full details must be provided in the maintenance manuals.

(Date)

To: (Owner's Name and Address)

EXTENDED WARRANTY (Name of Trade and Specification Section, or brief description of work covered). OWNER: (Owner's Name and Address) PROJECT: (Full name and correct address) WORK COVERED: (Refer to Technical sections. State clearly, description of

work covered, including consequential damage to other work, and what remedial action will be taken under the Warranty).

WARRANTY PERIOD: Commences on date of Certificate of Substantial

Performance * and expires on .

(Name and Address of (Name and Address of General Contractor) Trade Contractor) _________________________________ (Signature and Corporate Seal) (Signature and Corporate Seal) * (Unless otherwise agreed)

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01340 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 SHOP AND INTERFERENCE DRAWINGS Page 1 of 2 1. SHOP DRAWING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Where specified or where deemed to be required by the Consultant, submit

shop drawings to the Consultant in the following manner: 1. Submit one PDF document of each shop drawing with title block

appearing at lower right-hand corner. 2. The use of photographed or photocopied Consultant's Drawings for

shop drawing purposes is not acceptable. 3. Prior to submission to the Consultant, the Contractor shall review all

shop drawings. By this review the Contractor represents that all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalogue numbers, and similar data have been determined and verified, or will done, and that each shop drawing has been checked and coordinated with the requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. The Contractor's review of each shop drawing shall be indicated by stamp, date, and signature of a responsible person. The Shop Drawing shall clearly indicate whether it is for review or for record purposes.

4. The Contractor (and Subcontractor(s) where appropriate), shall

mark any information requested by the fabricator, confirm any matters in doubt, check and sign each trade shop drawing, and make any other notations considered necessary before submitting to the Consultant for review.

5. Drawings requiring several or extensive changes will be marked

"REVISE AND RESUBMIT", otherwise one (1) white print and sepia will be returned marked "REVIEWED" or "REVIEWED WITH COMMENTS" and shall not be returned to the Consultant. Drawings marked "NOT REVIEWED" are either not required, or from an unacceptable supplier.

6. Manufacturer's catalogue cuts will be acceptable, providing they

are 8½" x 11" originals, and they indicate all choices including sizes, colours, model number, options, and other pertinent data. Only one copy need be submitted to the Consultant, except for colour sample sheets.

2. Shop drawings shall show: 1. The name of the project. 2. Kinds of material and finishes. 3. Sections, arrangements and details which indicate complete

construction, as well as all interconnections with other work.

4. Fabrication and erection dimensions, together with quantities and/or locations.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01340 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 SHOP AND INTERFERENCE DRAWINGS Page 2 of 2

5. Assumed design loadings, all dimensions of elements and material specifications for all load-bearing members.

6. Data verifying that superimposed loads will not affect function, appearance and safety of work shown on shop drawings, as well as other work interconnected.

7. Proposed chases, sleeves, cuts, and holes in structural members. 8. The time that the fabricator considers necessary from the date that

the Contractor's authority to proceed is received (and shop drawing is returned) until the fabricated work will be delivered to the site, and for installation, if appropriate.

9. A 4½" x 3" high block for Consultant's review stamp, and another block of the same size for review stamp of Contractor's Engineer.

3. The review by the Consultant is for the sole purpose of ascertaining

conformance with the general design concept. The review shall not mean that the Consultant approves the detail design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with the Contractor submitting same, and such review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation, and for coordination of the work of all trades.

4. The review of this drawing and/or any notes added to it, does not constitute

authorization to proceed with any work which, in the Contractor's or Supplier's opinion, will involve extra cost to the Owner.

5. In the event of any conflict between the Contract Documents and a shop

drawing, the Contract Documents shall govern. 6. Keep copies of "reviewed" and "reviewed with comments" shop drawings

on site for Consultant's review. 2. INTERFERENCE DRAWINGS 1. The Contractor shall prepare colour-coded interference drawings in order

to properly coordinate the work of all trades, such as, but not restricted to, plumbing and fire protection, sheet metal and air conditioning, electrical and building structure.

2. Bear all costs involved for the preparation of these drawings and the changes necessitated due to interference discovered by their preparation. Advise all trades and the Consultant of any rerouting or relocation required.

3. If interferences are discovered, advise Consultant immediately and do not proceed until adjustments are accepted.

4. Submit copies of drawings for the Consultant's records.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01370 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Page 1 of 3 1. GENERAL 1. Submit a Schedule of Values to the Consultant at least 10 days prior to

submitting first Application for Payment. 2. Upon request by Consultant, support values given with data that will

substantiate their correctness. 3. Submit quantities of designated materials. 4. Refer to the General Conditions of the contract and Section 00006

Supplementary General Conditions for details of payment procedure. 5. Schedule of Values will be used only as basis for Contractor's Application for

payment. 2. FORM OF SUBMITTAL 1. Submit a PDF of the typewritten Schedule of Values on 8½" x 11" white

paper, in accordance with sample schedule included in this Section. 2. Use Table of Contents of this Specification as basis for the order for listing

costs of work for sections under Division 2-16. 3. Identify each line item with number and title as listed in Table of Contents of

this Specification. 3. PREPARING SCHEDULE OF VALUES 1. Itemize separate line item cost for each of the following general cost items:

1. Bonds. 2. Field Supervision and Layout. 3. Temporary Facilities and Controls.

2. Subdivide costs of products to be installed during several stages of construction into separate line items under each Section listing.

3. Break down installed costs into:

1. Delivered cost of product, with taxes paid (except Federal Goods and Services Tax).

2. Total installed cost, with overhead and profit.

4. Make sum of total costs of all items listed in schedule equal to total Contract Price excluding Federal Goods and Services Tax.

4. PREPARING SCHEDULE OF UNIT MATERIAL VALUES

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01370 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Page 2 of 3 1. Submit separate schedule of unit prices for materials to be stored for which

progress payments may be claimed. 2. Make form of submittal parallel to Schedule of Values, with each line item

identified same as line item in Schedule of Values. 3. Include in unit price only:

1. Cost of material. 2. Delivery and unloading at site. 3. Sales taxes except Federal Goods & Services Tax.

4. Make sure that unit prices multiplied by quantities equal given material cost of that item in Schedule of Values.

5. REVIEW AND RESUBMITTAL 1. After review by Consultant, revise and resubmit Schedule (and Schedule of

Material Values), as required. 2. Resubmit revised schedule in same manner.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01370 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Page 3 of 3 TYPICAL SCHEDULE OF VALUES (Sample Mechanical Breakdown Shown) Project __________________________________________________ Project No. __________ Payment Application No. _____ Date of Application _______________________________ Covers Work completed for the period ______________________ to _______________________

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9Material Work Completed

Item Cost Field Amount Site Work Previous % This Balanceor incl. Labour (2 + 3) Stored in Application Compl. Request to

Trade Shop Cost Matls. Place (5 - 6) FinishLabour

SECTION 15600Boilers & ControlsWater Heaters & ControlsSECTION 15700Pipe & FittingsPiping DevicesHot Water Heating DevicesNatural Gas EquipmentPumpsHeating UnitsWater TreatmentHumidifier

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01400 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 QUALITY CONTROL Page 1 of 5 1. RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1. Section 01300: Submission of samples to confirm product quality. 2. Section 01600: Material and workmanship quality - reference standards. 2. INDEPENDENT TESTING AND INSPECTION COMPANIES 1. Naming of Companies

1. The Consultant will name independent inspection and testing companies to inspect and report on compliance of Work with the Specifications. For simplicity, independent inspection and testing companies are referred to in the documents as "Inspector(s)".

2. Inspection and testing by Inspector(s) is carried out for the

Consultant's information and does not relieve the Contractor from its responsibility to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. Payment: Unless specified otherwise, payment for inspection and testing will

be paid directly by the Owner. 3. Work to be Tested and/or Inspected: As identified in individual Specification

Sections. 4. Access to the Work: Representatives of the Inspector(s) shall have access to

the Work at all times. The Contractor shall provide assistance and facilities for such access in order that the Inspector(s) may properly perform its (their) function.

5. Extent of Testing: The extent of testing and inspection and the number of

tests, if not specified in the applicable technical section of the Specifications, shall be verified with the Consultant before proceeding. Extra payment for testing and inspection beyond what the Consultant intends will be the Contractor's responsibility.

6. Notification of Work to be Tested: Be responsible for notifying all Inspector(s)

as to when they will be required to inspect the work. Notify Inspector(s) at least 48 hours prior to testing.

7. Materials for Testing and Mock-Ups 1. Submit samples and/or materials required for testing. Submit with

reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as not to cause delay in the Work.

2. Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples and

materials on site. Provide sufficient space to store and cure test samples.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01400 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 QUALITY CONTROL Page 2 of 5 8. Reports: Inspector(s) will submit copies of inspection and test reports

promptly to the Consultant, the Owner, the Contractor, other applicable Consultants, and jurisdictional authorities.

3. CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL 1. Obtaining and payment of inspections, tests, or Engineer's stamps required

by Code or Ordinances, or by a plan approval authority and made by a legally constituted authority, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, unless otherwise provided by the Contract Documents.

2. Be responsible for inspection or testing performed exclusively for own quality

control and convenience, and testing, adjustment and balancing of mechanical and electrical systems, and pay all costs associated therewith.

4. REVIEW BY CONSULTANT 1. Give the Consultant advance notice of shop fabrication, field erection and

other phases of the Work so as to afford reasonable opportunity to review the Work for compliance with contract requirements. Failure to meet this requirement may be cause for the Consultant to classify the Work as defective.

2. Uncover any Work that has been designated for special tests, inspections or

approvals before such is made, have the inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work.

3. The Consultant may order any part of the Work to be examined if such Work

is suspected to be not in accordance with the Contract Documents. If, upon examination such Work is found not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correct such Work and pay the cost of examination and correction. If such Work is found in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner will pay the cost of examination and replacement.

5. MOCK-UPS 1. General 1. Prior to proceeding with the Work, prepare mock-ups as requested

in the individual sections of the specifications and in this section. Include for Work of all Sections required to provide mock-ups.

2. Construct in specified locations or as selected by the Consultant. 3. Prepare mock-ups for Consultant's review with reasonable

promptness and in an orderly sequence, so as not to cause any delay in the Work.

4. Failure to prepare mock-ups in ample time is not considered

sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01400 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 QUALITY CONTROL Page 3 of 5 5. Remove mock-ups at conclusion of Work or when acceptable to

Consultant. 6. CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES 1. Unless more restrictive/demanding requirements are specified in other

Sections, the following construction tolerances could be accepted:

1. "plumb and level" - 3 mm in 3 m. 2. "square" - 10 seconds more or less than 90 degrees. 3. "straight" - 3 mm under a 3 m long straight edge. 4. Tolerances shall not be cumulative.

7. NON-COMPLIANCE WITH INSPECTIONS AND TESTS 1. If the initial inspections and tests, required to establish compliance with the

Contract Documents, indicates non-compliance with the Contract Documents, subsequent testing or re-inspection occasioned by non-compliance shall be performed by the same Inspector(s) and the cost thereof borne by the Contractor.

2. Where factual evidence exists that defective workmanship has occurred or

that work has been carried out incorporating defective materials, the Consultant may have tests, inspections or surveys performed, analytical calculation of structural strength made and the like in order to help determine whether the work must be replaced. Tests, inspections or surveys carried out under these circumstances will be made at the Contractor's expense, regardless of their results, which may be such that, in the Consultant's opinion, the work may be acceptable.

3. All testing shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of the

Ontario Building Code, except where this would in the Consultant's opinion cause undue delay or give results not representative of the rejected material in place. In this case, the tests shall be conducted in accordance with the standards given by the Consultant.

4. Materials or workmanship which fail to meet specified requirements may be

rejected by the Consultant whenever found at any time prior to final acceptance of the work regardless of previous inspection. If rejected, defective materials or work incorporating defective materials or workmanship shall be promptly removed and replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Consultant, at no expense to the Owner.

8. WATER TEST 1 – UNTREATED CONCRETE POOL TANKS

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01400 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 QUALITY CONTROL Page 4 of 5 1. When the pools have developed sufficient strength, as determined by the

Consultant, and before the waterproofing and tile work is installed, the tank will be tested by filling with water. Refer to Section 03300 for procedures.

9. MEASURING OF POOL LENGTH AND BOTTOM SLOPES

1. The length of the lane pool (Tank A) and bottom slopes of the entire pool tank bottoms (Tanks A and B) shall be measured and recorded by an Ontario Land Surveyor. Therefore it is imperative that the documents are complied with. Refer to Section 01010.

2. These measurements shall be performed prior to commencing with

waterproofing and tile work. 10. WATER TEST 2 – WATERPROOFED CONCRETE POOL TANKS 1. On completion of pool tanks structures and before tiling, the structures will

be tested for watertightness as follows using either warm water testing or cold water testing method:

1. Warm water testing: Using water above 10°C (50°F).

1. Clean out structure, plug all drains, and shut all necessary valves. Waterproofing laitance can remain until completion of Water Test 2.

2. Fill with warm water to above overflow channel or skimmer

level so that overflow channel is full. 3. Add no further water for 48 hours for concrete to absorb

water. 4. Top off and test for 48 hours. 5. Record water and air temperature and relative humidity of

the pool area every 8 hours. 6. Measure and record difference in water levels every 24

hours. 7. Report all readings and findings to the Consultant to

determine if water leakage has occurred. 8. Make any repairs as required and directed by the

Consultant and re-test.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01400 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 QUALITY CONTROL Page 5 of 5

2. Cold water testing: Using water between 4.5°C (40°F) and 10°C (50°F).

1. As noted in warm water testing. 2. Fill pool tanks in 3 stages to allow water and concrete

temperature to stabilize at a minimum temperature of 10°C (50°F). Allow a minimum of 24 hours between stages.

Stage 1 - Fill deep end to –1450 mm tank elevation (Tank A). Stage 2 - Fill up to 600 mm (2 feet) below static water level (Tanks A & B). Stage 3 - Fill remainder to above overflow channel (Tanks A & B)

3. Add no further water for 48 hours for concrete to absorb water.

4. Top off and test for 72 hours. 5. Record water and air temperature and relative humidity of

the pool area every 8 hours. 6. Measure and record difference in water levels every 24

hours. 7. Report all readings and findings to the Consultant to

determine if water leakage has occurred.

8. Drain tank(s) in stages and record water levels if required to locate leaks.

9. Make any repairs as required and directed by the

Consultant and re-test.

3. Any site conditions that differ from the above shall be brought to the attention of the Consultant before proceeding with filling and testing of pool tanks structures.

11. TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION OF OPERABLE EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS 1. Ensure that the Owner's representatives are adequately instructed, to the

Owner’s satisfaction, in all aspects of operation and maintenance of manual and automated systems and/or equipment, and all tests and adjustments have been performed to ensure smooth, trouble free operation is achieved, in compliance with Contract Documents.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01500 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 TEMPORARY FACILITIES &CONTROLS Page 1 of 6 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 General Instructions

1. Temporary facilities and controls specified in this section shall be supplemented as

applicable in accordance with Section 01351 2. Arrange, obtain and pay cost for permits required for temporary facilities and controls. 3. Provide and maintain temporary facilities and controls for the Work and remove them

from the Work upon issuance of certificate of Substantial Performance of Work. 4. Arrange any pay for required temporary services, unless otherwise indicated by

Consultant. 5. Protect and maintain without interruption, existing water, heating, drainage,

telephone and other services within the Place of the Work to existing buildings not within the scope of the Work of this Contract. Obtain written permission of the Owner for services required to be temporarily shut off, at least 5 full working days in advance.

6. Do not use permanent conveying, mechanical, or electrical systems during the course of the Work unless specific written permission is provided by the Consultant. Use of permanent facilities or services for temporary construction shall not prejudice warranties

7. Provide connection and disconnection of temporary services and facilities required in the work including connection to existing services made available by the Owner.

1.2 Existing Services and Facilities

1. Do not use any existing services and facilities during construction unless specific written permission is provided by Owner.

1.3 Temporary Electrical Services

1. Provide and maintain an adequate temporary electrical service for performance of the Work including, but not limited to, operation of electric pumps, motors, vibrators and other power tools, hoisting and related construction and general illumination during the Work.

1. Use existing power, where available, subject to Owner’s approval. Owner will pay electrical bills.

2. Provide and maintain any components and equipment necessary to transform

supply power to necessary temporary power voltage. 1.4 Temporary Water Supply

1. Provide and maintain a temporary supply of water for use in the Work.

1. Use existing water supply, where available, subject to Owner’s approval. Owner will pay water bills. 2. Extend supply pipe or pipes from nearest available sources and maintain in good condition until permanent system is installed and ready for use.

1.5 Temporary Sanitary Facilities

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01500 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 TEMPORARY FACILITIES &CONTROLS Page 2 of 6

1. Temporary sanitary facilities shall be in accordance with Section 01351. 1.6 Temporary Telephone, Fax Machine, and Computer 1. Superintendent shall be equipped with mobile telephone device. 2. Provide and maintain a computer for the purposes of e-mail and internet access.

Computer is to have dedicated, high-speed access, and be provided complete with a printer capable of printing 11” x 7” format.

1.7 Temporary Heating and Ventilation

1. Provide and pay for temporary heating, cooling and ventilation required for the

Work, including attendance, maintenance and fuel. 2. Provide temporary heat and ventilation as required to:

1. Facilitate continuous uninterrupted progress of the Work. 2. Protect the work and Products against damage and defacement caused by weather, harmful levels of temperature, humidity, and moisture. 3. Provide ambient temperatures and humidity levels for proper storage, installation and curing of materials, in accordance with specified standards and manufacturer’s requirements. 4. Provide adequate ventilation to meet health regulation for safe working environment.

3. Prior to enclosing building, maintain work areas at not less than 7 Cº. After enclosing, keep premises heated to at least 13 C using approved temporary heating devices. Increase temperatures in isolated areas to 20 Cº as required by various sections of the specifications or by Product manufacturers.

4. Solid fuel salamanders will not be permitted. 5. Provide temporary heat or adequate protection by means of str w or other

coverings to floor slabs, footings, or any part of building not specifically designed to withstand frost penetration.

6. Furnish other temporary heating as required by various sections of the specifications

or by Product manufacturers. 7. Ventilate to the exterior of the building work areas as required when toxic materials

are being utilized or cured. 8. Replace with new, any work damaged due to failure to provide adequate heat at

no cost to Owner.

1.8 Temporary Enclosures and Protection

1. Provide temporary enclosures and protection of adequate construction to prevent dispersion of dust and dirt into other areas of existing building and to prevent dispersion of dust and dirt beyond the Place of the Work.

2. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosures and protection for exterior openings in building as soon as walls, floors and reefs are built so as to protect the Work from weather and vandalism. Provide doors in enclosures as necessary to maintain fire exits.

3. Temporary enclosure and protection shall be of finished appearance and painted to colour approved by Owner.

4. Provide dust seal and sound resistant enclosures to protect existing building and operations as indicate. Include temporary doors, fastenings and keys.


5. Insulate and air seal exterior enclosures to prevent condensation and drafts. 6. Supplement these requirements in accordance with Section 01351.

1.9 Plant, Machinery and Scaffolding

1. Provide formwork, scaffolding, equipment, tools, machinery, and incidental appurtenances necessary for the proper execution of the Work.

2. Erect plant, machinery and scaffolding to permit access to building and the Work.

3. Use scaffolds in such manner as to interfere as little as possible with other trades’ operations.

4. Support scaffolds from finished surfaces only after taking precautions to prevent

damage. No supports, clips, brackets, or similar devices shall be welded, bolted or otherwise affixed to any finished member or surface without prior permission.

1.10. Site Storage 1. Handle and store materials so as to prevent damage or defacement to the Work

and surrounding property.

2. Owner is not responsible for securing Products or materials at the Place of the Work.

1.11 Protection of the Public

1. Provide fencing, barricades, hording, notices and warning boards and maintain lights and signals for protection of workers engaged on the Work, for protection of adjoining property and for protection of the public.

2. Where any special hazards exists from which it is not possible top protect the public safety by other means, watch persons shall be employed to preserve public safety until the area of special hazard no longer poses a risk of public safety.

1.12 Protection of the Work

1. Protect the Work from damage and defacement, and maintain protection until the Work is complete. 2. Protect completed Work from soiling, abrasion, punctures, damage or

defacement and maintain protection until the surrounding or overhead work is complete.

3. Keep surfaces free of oils, grease, or other materials that may damage or deface them or affect bond of applied Products.

4. Remove and replace materials damaged or defaced as a result of failure to provide adequate protection

5. have damaged or defaced work corrected by workers meeting qualification requirements of the Contract Documents

1.13 Fire Protection


1. Take necessary precautions to eliminate fire hazards and to prevent damage to the Work, building materials, equipments and other property both public and private having to do with the Work.

2. Provide and maintain in working order, suitable labelled fire extinguishers and

locate in prominent positions, to approval of authorities having jurisdictions.

3. When welding, brazing and performing any operation with an open flame, keep a portable fire extinguishes within close access of operator.

4. Store and locate materials and equipments packed in cardboard cartons, wood

crates and other combustible containers in orderly and accessible manner. Place approved types of fire fighting equipment in vicinity of materials or equipment packed in this type of crates or cartoons until permanent fire protection and equipments are available.

5. Store rags and waste containing oil , grease or other flammable materials in an

approved fire proofed cabinets or remove from the Place of the Work at the end of each Working Day

6. Only fire resistant tarpaulins are permitted at the Place of the Work.

7. Provide temporary sand pipes as the Work proceeds in accordance with

applicable regulations.

8. When welding or using torching at the place of Work institute measures as required to prevent fire hazard. Maintain and document 2 hours fire watch after welding or torching work.

9. Use only non combustible materials for interior non temporary construction.

10. No fires or burning of waste is permitted at the Place of the Work.

11. Supplement these requirements in accordance with Section 01351.

1.14. Pest Control

1. Provide rodent control and other pest control programs during the work in accordance with the authorities having jurisdictions.

1.15 Waste Management

1. Do not bury rubbish and waste materials at the Place of Work. 2. Do not dispose of waste into waterways or storm or sanitary sewers. 3. Do not burn waste materials at the Place of the Work. 4. Comply with waste disposal requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Remove waste materials from the Place of the Work daily. 6. Arrange and pay for removal of debris and waste from the Place of the Work. 7. Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for

disposal of waste and debris. Pay fees.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01500 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 TEMPORARY FACILITIES &CONTROLS Page 5 of 6 1.16 Control of Dust, Debris and Noises

1. Cover or wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust and debris. 2. Control dust and dirt produced during the Work to prevent dispersion beyond the

immediate work areas.

3. Prevent materials from contaminating air beyond application area, by providing temporary enclosures and ventilation/ filtration.

4. Limit noise levels in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the Owner.

5. Prevent abrasive-blasting, pressure-washing spray, and other extraneous materials from contaminating air beyond application area.

6. Supplement these requirements in accordance with Section 01351 1.17. Traffic Control and Road Maintenance

1. Do not block roads or impede traffic. Keep construction to designated roads only. Provide flag person to direct traffic as required.

2. Keep public and private roads free of dusts mud and debris resulting from truck, machinery and vehicular traffic related specifically to this project, for the duration of the work.

1.18 Security

1. Provide security for the Place of the Work in accordance with section 01351 2. The contractor shall be solely responsible for securing the Place of Work and the

Work, and securing areas used for the storage products or construction machinery and equipments. The owner shall have no responsibility in this regards.

3. Provide and maintain security lighting.

1.19. Design and Safety Requirements

1. Be responsible for design, erection, operation, maintenance and removal of temporary structural and other temporary facilities. Engage and pay for registered professional engineering personnel skilled in the appropriate discipline to perform these functions where required by law or by the Contract Documents; and in cases where such temporary facilities and their method of construction are of such a nature that professional engineering skill is required to produce safe and satisfactory results.

2. Engage and pay for professional engineer(s) registered in Place of Work to design and supervise construction and maintenance of hording, covered ways, protective canopies and project sign(s). Designs provide by Consultant or Owner for such work cover general appearance only.

1.20 Moisture and Mould Control

1. Avoid trapping water in finished work 2. Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subjected to wetting

and exposure and to air borne mould spores, protect as follows:


1. Protect porous materials from water damage 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolong contact with

concrete. 4. Remove standing water from deck 5. keep deck opening covered or dammed

3. After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mould spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install gypsum board or other porous materials or

components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.

3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.

4. Discard or replace water-damaged materials 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow

mould. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows wet materials adequate time to

dry before enclosing the material in gypsum board or other interior finishes.

4. After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent heating, ventilation, and air condition systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective

drying condition. 2. Use permanent heating, ventilation, and air conditioning system to control

humidity. 3. Comply with manufacture’s written instructions for temperature, relative

humidity, and exposure to water limits.

PART 2 –PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 – EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01600 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 PRODUCT AND WORKMANSHIP Page 1 of 7 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 Availability of Products

1. In the event of delays in supply of products, and should it subsequently appear that

the Work may be delayed for such reason, Consultant reserves the right to substitute more readily available Products of similar character, at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.2. Product Handling

1. Handle and store products in a manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deterioration and soiling and in accordance with manufacturer’s and supplier’s recommendations and so as to ensure preservation of their quality and fitness for the Work, and protect from vandalism and theft.

2. Store packaged or bundled Products in original and undamaged condition with

manufacturer’s seals and labels intact, facing to outside. Do not remove from packaging or bundling until required in the Work.

3. Store materials susceptible to environmental damage in a weather tight enclosure

raised clear of ground so that they are protected from weather, dampness and deterioration. Do not use such materials which have been damaged by exposure to moisture.

4. Keep sand, when used as ingredient for grout, mortar or similar mixed materials, clean

and dry. Store sand on wooden platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulin during increment weather.

5. Store sheet metals, lumber and other Products susceptible to deterioration on flat, solid

supports and keep clear of ground or slab. Slope to shed moisture.

6. Store and mix paints in a single designated, heated and ventilated room. Remove oily rags and other combustible debris from place of Work daily. Take every precaution necessary to prevent spontaneous combustion.

7. Carefully handle materials to preclude damaging existing surfaces and work of others.

8. Remove and replace damaged Products.

9. Transportation:

.1 Pay cost of transportation of products required in performance of Work.

.2 Transportation cost of Product supplied by Owner will be paid for by Owner. Unload, handle and store such Product at the Place of the Work.

.3 Reject Products damaged during transport.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01600 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 PRODUCT AND WORKMANSHIP Page 2 of 7

.4 Transportation of Products must be undertaken to suit construction schedule. Contractor is responsible for determining mode of transport to ensure delivery, obtaining shop drawings, placement of orders, and on time premium cost, air freight, and the like.

PART 2 –PRODUCTS 2.1 Product Requirements and Quality

1. Products used for temporary facilities may have been previously used, providing they are sound in structural qualities.

2. Specific options: The Work is based on materials, Products and systems specified by

manufacturer’s catalogued trade names, reference to standards, by prescriptive specifications and by performance specifications.

.1 Where only one manufacture’s trade name is specified for a Product,

the Product is single sourced and shall be supplied by the specified manufacture.

.2 Where more than one manufacturer’s trade name is specified for a product, supply one product from list of Product specified.

.3 When a Product is specified by reference to a standard, select one Product from manufacturer that meets or exceeds the requirements of the standard and manufacturer’s written application directions.

.4 When a Product or system is specified by prescriptive or performance specifications provide one Product or system which meets or exceeds the requirements of the prescriptive or performance specifications, and manufacturer’s written application directions.

.5 The onus is on the Contractor to prove compliance with governing public standards, prescriptive specifications and with performance specifications.

.6 Visual selection specification: .1 Where specifications include the phrase “as selected by

consultant from manufacture’s full range” or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Consultant will select colour, gloss, pattern, density or texture from manufacture’s product line that includes both standards and premium items.

.7 Visual matching specification: .1 Where specification require “match Consultants sample”,

provide a product that complies with requirements and matches consultant’s sample. Consultant’s decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

3. Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as Product throughout the

Contract Documents) incorporated the Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and of the quality standards specified, for the purpose of intended. If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of Products provided.

4. Where Contract Documents list acceptable products or acceptable manufacturers,

select as applicable, one Product meeting performance of specifications and manufacturer’s written application directions.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01600 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 PRODUCT AND WORKMANSHIP Page 3 of 7 5. Where Contract Documents require design of a Product or system, and minimum

material requirements are specified, the design of such Product or system shall employ materials specified within applicable section. Where secondary materials or components are not specified, augment with materials Meeting applicable code limitations, and incorporating compatibility criteria with adjacent work.

6. Defective products, whenever identified prior to completion of the Work, will be

rejected, regardless of previous reviews. Review of the Work by Consultant or inspection and testing companies does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for executing the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, but is the precaution against over sight or error. Remove and replace defective Products and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection at no additional cost to the Owner.

7. Should dispute arise as to quality or fitness of Products, the decision rests strictly with

Consultant based upon the requirements of the Contract Documents. 8. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, maintain uniformity of the

Product and manufacturer for any like item, material, equipment, or assembly for the duration of the Work.

9. Products exposed in the finished Work shall be uniform in colour, texture, range, and

quality, and be from one production run or batch, unless otherwise indicated. 10. Permanent labels, trade marks, and name plates on Products are not acceptable in

prominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located in mechanical, electrical, machinery, or like rooms.

11. Owner retains right to select from choices available within specified Products for

colours, patterns, finishes or other options normally made available. Submit full range of product options in accordance with01330 for such selection.

12. Quality control: .1 Implement a system of quality control to ensure compliance with

Contract Documents .2 Notify consultant of defects of Work or departures from intent of

Contract Documents that may occur during construction. Consultant will recommend appropriate corrective action in accordance with requirements of Contract.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 Manufacture’s Instructions


1. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Document, install or erect in accordance with manufacture's printed instructions. Do not relay on labels or enclosures supplied with Product. Obtain printed instructions directly from manufacture.

2. Notify Consultant in writing, of conflicts between the Contract Documents and

manufacture’s instructions. 3. Improper installation or erection of Products, due to failure in complying with these

requirements, authorises consultant to require removal and re-installation at no additional cost to the Owner.

4. Manufacturer’s representatives shall have access to the Wok at all times.

Contractor shall render assistance and facilities for such access in order that the manufacturer’s representative may properly perform their functions.

3.2 Galvanic/Dissimilar Metal Corrosion

1. Insulate dissimilar metals from each other by suitable plastic strips, washers or sleeves

to prevent galvanic corrosion where conductive liquid or electrolyte (rainwater or condensation) exists.

3.3 Workmanship 1. General:

.1 Execute the Work using workers experienced and skilled in the respective duties for which they are employed.

.2 Do not employ an unfit person or anyone unskilled in their required duties.

.3 Decisions as to the quality or fitness of workmanship in cases of dispute rest solely with Consultant, whose decision id final.

.4 Remove Products or materials that have been broken, chipped, cracked, discoloured, abraded, or damaged during construction period and provide undamaged Products or materials meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents.

2. Coordination: .1 Ensure cooperation of workers in layout of the Work. Maintain efficient

and continuous supervision. .2 be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves

and accessories. 3. Concealment: .1 In finished areas conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and

ceilings, except where indicated otherwise. .2 Before installation, inform Consultant of any contradictory situation.

Install as directed by Consultant.

4. Cutting and remedial work:

.1 Perform cutting and remedial work required to make parts of the Work come together. Coordinate the Work to endure this requirement is maintained. Obtain permission from Consultant


before commencing any cutting. Refer also to requirements of Section 01732.

5. Location of fixtures:

.1 Consider location of fixtures, access panels, outlets and mechanical and electrical items indicated as approximate only. Locate fixtures, and the like approximately; Architectural drawings will relate these items to known dimensions, such as ceiling tile grid or wall locations and the like.

.2 Obtain Consultant’s acceptance for precise locations of fixtures, access panels, outlets, mechanical, and electrical items.

.3 Consultant reserves the right to locate electrical outlets and mechanical fixtures at a later date, but prior to installation, without cost, provided that the relocation per outlet does not exceed 3050mm (10’) from the original location.

.4 Inform Consultant of conflicting installations. Install only as directed by Consultant.

6. Fastenings:

.1 Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour and finish as adjacent materials, unless indicated otherwise.

.2 Prevent electrolytic action and corrosion between dissimilar metals and materials.

7. Protection in work in progress:

.1 Take reasonable and necessary measures, including those required by authorities having jurisdiction, to provide protection.

.2 Adequately protect parts of the Work completed or in progress. Parts of the Work damaged or defaced due to failure in providing such protection is to be removed and replaced, as directed by the Consultant, at no additional cost to the Owner.

.3 Prevent overloading of any part of the building. Do not cut, drill or sleeve any load bearing structural member without written permission of Consultant, unless specifically indicated. Refer also to Section 01732.

.4 Adequately protect finished flooring from damage. Take special measures when moving heavy loads or equipment on them.

.5 Keep floors free of oils, grease or other materials likely to discolour them or affect bond of applied surfaces.

.6 Protect work of other Subcontractors from damage while doing subsequent work. Damaged work shall be made good by appropriate Subcontractors but at expense of those causing damage.

.7 Protect existing buildings, curbs, roads and lanes. If, during the Work, any buildings, curbs, roads or lanes are damaged, bear costs for repairs.

8. Existing utilities:

.1 When braking into or connection to existing services or utilities, executes the Work at times approved by Owner, with a minimum of disturbance to Owner’s ongoing operations, the Work, and traffic.


.2 Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When inactive services are encountered, cap off in a manner approved by authority having jurisdiction and stake or otherwise record location of capped service.

9. Protection of mechanical and electrical Products or materials:

.1 Wrap in protective plastic and seal mechanical and electrical items of mechanical and electrical equipment prior to and during for shipment, storage at the Place of the Work and after installation.

.2 Remove protective coverings only to the extent required for

installation of the items. Re-install protection immediately following installation.

.3 Remove protective coverings in stages, as work areas are completed, or when directed by Consultant.

10. Operational Requirements:

.1 Operable Products shall be provided fully operational and ready for intended use.

.2 Adjust operating hardware and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and whether stripping for smooth operation and weather tight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts for smooth Squeak-free function, in accordance with manufactures instructions.

11. General construction tolerances:

.1 Unless more stringent tolerances are required by the Contract Documents or building code, construct the Work to the following tolerances.

.1 Maximum variation from plumbs in vertical lines, surface of columns, walls, and arises:

.1 6.5mm(1/4”) on 3m (10ft)

.2 9.6mm(3/8”) in a storey height not to exceed 6m(20ft)

.3 12.7mm(1/2”) in 12 m(40ft) or more .2 Maximum variation from plumb for external corners,

expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines: .1 6.4 mm (1/4”) in any storey or 6m (20ft) .2 12.7 mm (1/2”) 12 m (40 ft) or more

.3 Maximum variation from level of grades for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines:

.1 6.4 mm (1/4”) in any bay or 6m (20ft)

.2 12.7 mm (1/2”) 12 m (40 ft) or more .4 Maximum variation from drawing location of columns,

walls, and partitions: .1 12.7mm(1/2”) in any storey or 6m (20ft) .2 19mm(3/4”) in 12m(40ft) or more

.5 Maximum variation in cross-sectional dimension of columns and thicknesses of wall from dimensions indicated:


.1 Minus 6 mm (1/4”)

.2 Plus 12.7 mm (1/2”) .6 Maximum variation from plane or from straight:

.1 3.2mm (1/8”) in 3m (10ft) straight edge. .7 Maximum variation from angle indicated:

.1 10 Seconds .8 Tolerances shall be non - cumulative

END OF SECTION

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01710 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION & CLEANING Page 1 of 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DUST AND CLEANING REQUIREMENTS 1. Standards: Maintain project in accordance with the latest edition of The

Occupational Health and Safety Act. 2. Hazards Control

1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from premises daily.

2. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. 3. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious

substances.

3. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws:

1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on project site.

2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, paint thinner, excavated material or debris in storm, sanitary drains, streams or waterways.

1.2 WASTE AND MATERIALS MANAGEMENT 1. All materials generated from the work are to be managed in accordance

with Ontario Regulation 347 "General - Waste Management Regulation R.R.O. 1990 (as amended)" and Ontario Regulation 102/94 "Waste Audits and Waste Reduction Work Plans" and Ontario Regulation 103/94 "Industrial, Commercial and Institutional Source Separation Programs" of the Ontario Environmental Protection Act (EPA).

2. Segregate and deliver all reusable or recyclable materials to salvage

dealers or recyclers in accordance with Ontario Regulation 103/94 of the EPA.

3. Segregate, transport and deliver all non-salvageable or non-recyclable

materials to a licensed disposal facility. 4. Fences: Supply and install barriers, warning signs or other safeguards around

waste and material stockpiles prior to leaving the job site at the end of each working day in accordance with Section 01500.

5. Protection:

1. Protect and ensure stability of any waste or material stockpiles.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01710 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION & CLEANING Page 2 of 4

2. Protect adjacent structures, equipment and existing work from any damage. In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and replace if necessary to the Consultant's satisfaction.

6. The Contractor shall maximize the amount of materials that can be recycled, salvaged or reused. An emphasis shall be placed on wood, steel and metal, concrete and brick in accordance with Ontario Regulations 102/94 and 103/94.

7. All other materials not recycled, salvaged or reused shall be managed or

otherwise disposed in accordance with Regulation 347. 8. Waste asphalt shall not be reused on site but shall be sent to an asphalt

recycler.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS 1. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to

be cleaned. 2. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning

material manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION 1. Execute cleaning to ensure that building, grounds, and public properties

are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish. Keep site clear of snow, mud and pooling of water due to severe rain. Ensure that work is not stopped because of failure to provide access to site.

2. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust. 3. At reasonable intervals during progress of Work, clean site and public

properties and dispose of waste materials, debris and rubbish. 4. Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials, debris and

rubbish. 5. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site and legally dispose of

at public or private dumping areas off Owner's property. 6. Vacuum-clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting

and continue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis until building is ready for Substantial Performance or occupancy.

7. Obtain from each Subcontractor, instructions which designate proper

methods and materials to be use in final cleaning, and submit such instructions to the Consultant. Include instructions in Operation and Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01300.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01710 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION & CLEANING Page 3 of 4 8. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible;

do not drop or throw materials from heights. 9. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting

from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly-painted surfaces. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING 1. Prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, remove waste materials,

rubbish, tools, equipment, machinery, and surplus materials, and clean all surfaces exposed to view; leave project clean and ready for occupancy.

2. Employ experienced workers, or professional cleaners, for final cleaning.

3. In preparation for Substantial Performance or occupancy, conduct final inspection of interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, and of concealed spaces.

4. Remove dust and soil from all surfaces affected by the Work by vacuuming,

damp mopping, washing or scrubbing as required. All necessary safety equipment is to be used.

5. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign

materials from all exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces; polish resilient and ceramic surfaces so designated to shine finish. Vacuum carpet.

6. All high level and inaccessible surfaces including ventilation duct interiors

are to be clean of construction debris and dust. 7. Clean and polish glass and mirrors. 8. Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match

adjacent surfaces. 9. Remove all surplus materials from site and clear all construction debris from

anywhere on site including roofs, steps, ramps, platforms, walks, roads, etc. Broom-clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds. Hose down all exterior platforms, steps, and ramps. Remove snow and ice from access to building.

10. Clean filters, exposed ductwork, and structure. Clean all equipment, fixtures,

ductwork, piping and accessories, 11. Clean bulbs and lamps and replace those burned out. 12. Clean diffusers and grilles. 13. Clean sinks, faucets, and water closets and controls.

14. Remove all temporary labels, protective coating, markings and tags, and

thoroughly clean adhesive off surfaces.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01710 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION & CLEANING Page 4 of 4

15. Avoid contamination of surrounding surfaces with cleaning fluids. Install temporary protection, if required, and remove same immediately upon completion of cleaning operation involved.

16. Methods of cleaning shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations of the finishes involved. 17. Soaps, detergents, waxes, and other cleaning materials and methods shall

be as recommended by the manufacturer for finish surface material involved.

18. Use a heavy-duty type industrial machine for all vacuum cleaning.

19. Exercise extreme care with abrasive and chemical cleaning agents and

verify their compatibility with finish and material to be cleaned.

19. Maintain cleaning until project, or portion thereof, is occupied by Owner.

3.3 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES

1. Completely remove temporary facilities from site, including signs and foundations, making good any damage when no longer required.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01732 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect

Project: 017 010 CUTTING AND PATCHING Page 1 of 2 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 Cutting, Patching and Remedial Work.

1. Submittal Items

1. Comply with administrative requirements of Section 01330 2. Submit written request in advance of cutting, coring, and alteration that

affects : 1. Structural integrity of any elements of Work. 2. Integrity of weather- exposed or moisture resistant elements 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational elements. 4. Visual qualities of sight – exposed elements 5. Owner or work of other contractors.

3. Include in request 1. Identification of project 2. Location and description of affected work. 3. Statement of necessity for cutting or alteration 4. Description of proposed work and products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and pitching. 6. Effect on Owner or Work of other contractors 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. 8. Date and time work will be performed 9. Non-destructive structural survey; Radiography (x-ray) imaging of

work to be cut or cored. 4. Do not commence cutting, patching, remedial work until request has been

reviewed by Consultant

2. Preparation

1. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting or patching.

2. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of the Work. 3. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 4. Provide support to assure structural integrity of surroundings; devices and

methods to protect other portions of the Work from damage. 5. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by

uncovering work. 6. Where uncovering of area exposes local deterioration cracking, evidence of

water infiltration, structural settlement, previous modifications, or other unexpected conditions, advise consultant immediately in writing and leave conditions exposed until; receipt of consultant’s written instructions. If area is exposed to the exterior, provide temporary protection from inclement weather.

3. Execution:


Project: 017 010 CUTTING AND PATCHING Page 2 of 2

1. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching to complete the Work. Under no

circumstances will over cutting of corners of opening be accepted. Ensure corners of to be cut are predrilled or sawed.

2. Remove and replace defective and non conforming work. 3. Remove samples of installed work for testing if directed by Consultant. 4. Shop drawings identifying precise locations and size of openings to be cored

and cut are to be submitted for review by Consultants. Provide non-destructive structural survey of structural concrete to be cored or cut, for Consultant review. Coring or cutting work locations shall be reviewed by Consultant for acceptance before proceeding.

5. Provide openings in non-structural elements of the Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work.

6. Perform work by methods to avoid damage to other work. And which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishes.

7. Employ qualified installer with at least 3 years of relevant experience to perform cutting and patching for weather-exposed and moisture-resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.

8. Cut rigid material using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools not allowed to be used anywhere within existing buildings unless approved by Consultant.

9. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

10. Fit work to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces and with suitable allowances for deflection, expansion, contraction, and fire stopping.

11. Enclose pipes, ducts, conduits, and wires passing through floors at areas where faucets occur (for example, washrooms, kitchens, mechanical rooms on suspended floors, janitors rooms) in a 100 mm (4") high metal sleeve and make air and water tight with water resistant fire stopping.

12. Completely seal voids of penetrations of fire rated wall, ceiling, and floor constructions with fire stopping and smoke seals.

13. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. Refinish continuous surfaces to nearest intersection, refinish entire assembly unit.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable END OF SECTION

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01740 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 PROGRESSIVE CLEANING Page 1 of 1 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 Environmental Control

1. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution law

2. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from Place of Work daily.

3. Prevent accumulation of wastes which creates hazardous conditions. 4. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.

1.2 Materials

1. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacture of surface to be cleaned and as recommended by cleaning material manufacture.

1.3 Cleaning During Construction

1. Clean up the Place of Work daily. Maintain clean and clear egress routes at all times 2. Maintain Place of Work, Ground s and public properties free from accumulations of

waste materials and rubbish. 3. Provide containers at the Place of the Work for collection of waste materials and

rubbish. Remove waste materials and rubbish from the Place of Work when containers become full.

4. Vacuum and clean interior building area when ready to receive finish painting, and continue vacuum cleaning on an as needed basis until Substantial Completion of the Work.

5. Scheduled cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminant resulting from cleaning process will nit fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

6. Promptly as the Work proceeds, on a daily basis and upon completion, clean up and remove rubbish, surplus materials and equipments.

7. Remove as the work of the section progresses, corrosive and foreign materials which may set or become difficult to remove at time of final cleaning or which may damage members.

8. Wash exposed surfaces with a cleaning solutions approved by Product manufactures.

9. Debris and wastes not permitted within cavities of Work. 1.4. Final Cleaning

1. Perform final cleaning in accordance with requirements of Section 01770 PART 2 – PRTODUCTS Not applicable PART 3 – EXECUTION Not applicable

END OF SECTION

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01770 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Page 1 of 8 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 General Instructions

1. The procedures for completing Contract and acceptance by the Owner shall be in

accordance with the methods described in OAA/OGCA Document 100 (December 12, 2007) and any additional requirements described below.

2. Stages will be reviewed at the Contract start-up meeting to ensure that parties understand their responsibilities. Refer to Section 01312 for procedures and requirements for Contract start-up meeting.

3. Within 2 weeks of commencement of the Work, submit to the Consultant a list of closeout submittals required by the Contract Documents.

1.2 Final Cleaning

1. Environmental Controls:

1. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.

2. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from Place of the Work daily.

3. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. 4. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.

2. Materials: 1. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of

surface to be cleaned and as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

3. Final Cleaning: 1. Immediately prior to Consultant’s review to determine if Substantial

Performance of the Work has been achieved, remove surplus Products and construction machinery and equipment not required for the performance of the remaining Work.

2. Remove waste Products and debris other than that caused by the Owner, and leave the Work clean and suitable for occupancy by Owner.

3. When the Contract is competed, remove surplus Products, tools, construction machinery and equipment.

4. Clean glass, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain enamel, pre-finished surfaces, and fixtures.

5. Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorative parts of the Work, electrical and mechanical fixtures, furniture fittings, walls, and fixtures.

6. Vacuum clean and remove from dust building interiors, behind grilles, louvers, and screens. Vacuum clean interiors of electrical equipments.

7. Clean floor finishes to recommendations of manufacturer. 8. Remove non-permanent labels. 9. Remove dirt and residue from surfaces.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01770 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Page 2 of 8 10. Inspect finishes, fittings and equipment and endure specified

workmanship and operation. 11. At completion of the Work, remove protective coatings, clean

surfaces and remove excess compounds and sealant materials. Make good defective, scratched or damaged work.

1.3 Closeout Submittals

1. Collect renewed submittals, and assemble required closeout submittals executed by Subcontractors, Suppliers, and manufacturers. Prior to submitting closeout submittals to the Consultant, undertake the following:

1. Review maintenance manual contents (operating, maintenance

instructions, as-built drawings, materials) for completeness. 2. Review supply and completeness of spare parts required by

Contract Documents and manufacturers. 3. Review in relation to Contract Price, Change Orders, Chang

Directives, holdbacks and other adjustments have been completed.

4. Review inspection and testing reports to verify conformance to intent of Contract Documents and that changes, repairs or replacements have been completed.

5. Execute transition of performance bond and labour and materials payment bond to warranty period requirements.

6. Submit a final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Price, previous payments, and monies remaining at time of application for completion of the Contract. Consultant will issue a final change order reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Price not previously made.

2. No later than 5 Working Days prior to submitting request for Consultant’s review to

determine if Substantial Performance of the Work has been achieved, submit to the Consultant the closeout submittals specified in this section, including, but not limited to.

3. For equipment put into use with Owner’s permission during the Work, submit required closeout submittals within 5 Working Days after start-up.

4. For items of the Work delayed materially beyond date of Substantial Performance of the Work, provide updated closeout submittals within 5 Working Days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

5. Neither the Consultant’s review to determine if Substantial Performance of the Work has been achieved, nor acceptance of the Work, will take place until receipt, by the Consultant, of acceptable copies of the closeout submittals required herein and by the Contract Documents.

6. As-built records: 1. Owner will provide 1 reproducible set of Contract Documents to

the Contractor for as-built drawing purposes. 2. Accurately record changes to the Work and deviations from

Contract Documents as the Work progresses. 3. Mark changes in red ink. 4. Record, without being limited to the following: 1. Field changes of dimensions/details.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01770 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Page 3 of 8 2. Changes by Change Orders, Change Directives, and

Supplemental Instructions. 3. Locations of interior mechanical and electrical

equipment and distribution. 5. As-built drawings: 1. Submit 3 copies of as-built drawings. 6. Digital as-built drawings: 1. Once hard copy of as-built record drawings have been

accepted by Consultant, Contractor shall receive digital media in format compatible with AutoCAD 2009 software from the Consultant, to update drawings to reflect “As-Built” conditions as referenced above. Refer also to requirements of Division 15 and Division16.

2. Contractor shall transcribe hard copy changes to the

drawings into the electronic media. 3. After final acceptance by Consultant, submit 2 disk

copies of revised electronic media as-built drawings to Owner.

7. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Submit 3 copies of operation and maintenance

manuals, consisting of the following general components:

1. Operation and maintenance data. 2. Shop drawing manuals 3. Warranty manuals 4. Project data book 2. Operation and maintenance manuals shall contain

operating and maintenance data and information specified below for supplied Products, in English, and shall be made up as follows:

1. Bind each general component of the operation

and maintenance manuals in separate vinyl hard covered, 3 ring loose leaf binders.

2. Enclose title sheet, labelled as applicable, with project name, date and list of contents.

3. Organize contents into applicable sections of work to parallel project specifications break-down. Mark each section by labelled tabs protected with celluloid covers fastened to hard paper dividing sheets.

4. Neatly typed lists and notes. Use clear drawings, diagrams of manufacturers’ literature.

3. Shop drawing manuals

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01770 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Page 4 of 8

1. Submit 1 copy of each final accepted shop drawings issued for the Work on which have been recorded changes made during fabrication and installation caused by unforeseen conditions

2. Engineered shop drawings shall include copies of the certificate of insurance, the engineer’s field review reports, and the engineer’s letters of general conformity that were provided as part of the engineered submittal in accordance with Section01330 appended to the pertinent engineered shop drawings in the shop drawing manual.

4. Warranty manuals:

1. Submit copies of bonds, guaranties, warranties and extended warranties together in one report binder, complete with an indexed summery list of warranties and expiration dates. Warranties to be in accordance with Section 01780

5. Project data book: Shall includes the following

information supplemented by additional required data specified else where in the Contract Documents.

1. Maintenance instructions for finished surfaces

and materials 2. Copy of hardware and paint schedules 3. Description, operation and maintenance

instructions for equipments and parts list. Indicate name plate information such as make, size, and capacity serial number.

4. Names, addresses, and phone numbers of Subcontractors and Suppliers, as applicable.

5. Additional material used in the Work listed under various sections showing name of manufacture and source of supply.

6. Charts diagrams and reports identified in Division 15 and Division 16 of the specifications.

7. Report recording demonstration and instruction provided to Owner for operation and maintenance of building systems as described below in this section

8. Key construction photos. 9. Permits and forms:

1. Workplace Safety & Insurance Board certificate of clearance.

2. Certificates of approval of the Work by local building department (if available).


3. Electricity authority certificate of inspection.

8. Posted operating instructions.

1. Prepare operating instructions in English for posting near equipments and systems. Posted instructions to be glass covered, framed and mounted. 2. Posted instructions to consists of simplified, consolidated equipments , control and power diagrams graphically representing the entire system, including concise instructions on how to start and stop systems , what setting and conditions are to be observed by the operators, and what control adjustments are to be made or maintain by the operator. 3. Posted instructions shall include control diagrams with added specific operating instructions, controls, interlocks, and the like. 4. Posted instructions shall include:

1. HVAC controls for each system; 2. One line schematic diagram of water supply 3. One line diagram of steam distribution, hot and

cold water systems,

9. Maintenance materials: 1. Provide overage, extra stocks and maintenance

materials. For required material, see individual sections of specifications. Deliver to a location at a time specified by the Owner, and as follows

1. Use unbroken cartons, or if not supplied in

cartoons, material shall be strongly packaged. 2. Clearly mark cartons or packaging as it

contents project name, and Supplier. 3. If applicable give colour and finish, room

number or area where materials are used. 2. Replace in correct or damaged maintenance

materials delivered to Owner, including damage through shipment.

3. Provide a typed inventory list of maintenance materials prior to Substantial Performance of the Work Application. List all items, complete with quantities, and storage locations.

4. Establish a master list identifying maintenance materials and maintain a log of when materials are turned over to Owner and signing authority for acceptance materials on behalf of the owner.

1.4 System Demonstration and Project Commissioning

1. Refer also to requirements of Division 15 and Division 16 with respect to commissioning for control system, mechanical/ electrical systems


2. Perform system demonstration and commissioning work no later than 5 working days prior to the submitting request for Consultant’s review to determine if Substantial Performance of the work has been achieved.

3. Submit required certificates of approval or acceptance from authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Meet with other consultants; structural, mechanical, electrical to coordinate demonstration, instruction, commissioning and completion.

5. Review condition of equipment such as lighting, elevators and heating system, which has been used in the course of the Work to ensure turning over at completion in “as new condition” with warranties dated and certified from time specified.

6. When partial occupancy of uncompleted projects is required by Owner, coordinate owner’s uses, requirements, access, and the like with Contractor’s requirements to complete the Work.

7. Demonstration and instruction:

1. Demonstrate operating of each system to Owner and Consultant. 2. Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance

of equipment and systems, using operation and maintenance data provided as the basis for instructions. Arrange and coordinate instruction of Owner’s staff in care, maintenance and operation of building systems and finishes.

3. Contractor, manufacture’s representative and responsible personnel from Subcontractors whose work is being demonstrated shall be present at these demonstrations.

4. Instruct Owner’s representative on use of software required for operation and maintenance of building systems and provide a toll-free telephone number or web site address for further assistance to the Owner.

5. Prepare and insert additional data in the operation and maintenance data manuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent during demonstration or instruction.

6. Demonstration and instruction report: Submit a written report of such demonstration, instruction and commissioning to the Consultant as part of the contract closeout submittals described earlier in this section. Report shall include time and date of each demonstration, instruction, commissioning activity, complete with a list of persons presents.

8. Correct deficiencies and defects identified during demonstration, instruction, or

commissioning. 9. Attend ‘end-of work” testing and break-in or star-up demonstration. 1.5 Substantial performance of the Work

1. Deficiency Review

1. Neither owner nor consultant will be responsible for preparation or issuance of extensive lists of deficiencies. Contractor assumes prime responsibility for ensuring that items shown and shown and described in the Contract Documents are complete. Any reviews to approve the certificates of Substantial Performance of the Work will be immediately cancelled. If it


becomes obvious to the Consultant that extensive deficiencies are outstanding.

2. The Contactor shall conduct an inspection of the Work to identify deficiencies and defects, which shall be repaired. When the Contractor considers that the Work is substantially performed, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Consultant a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected and apply for a review of the Work by the Consultant to determine if Substantial Performance of the Work has been achieved.

3. The Contractor’s request described above shall includes a statement by Contractor that the Work to be reviewed by Consultant for deficiencies is, to the best of the Contractor’ s knowledge, in compliance with Contract Documents, reviewed shop drawings, and samples, and that deficiencies and defects previously noted by Consultant have been repaired.

4. No later than 5 Woking Days after the receipt of the Contractor’s request described above, but contingent upon the prior receipt, by the consultant, of the closeout submittals in the manner and form specified in this section, the Consultant and the Contractor will review the Work to identify any defects or deficiencies. If necessary, the Contractor shall tabulate a list of deficiencies to be corrected prior to Substantial Performance of the Work being certified by the Consultant. During review, the Consultant and the Contractor will decide which deficiencies or defects must be rectified before Substantial Performance of the Work can be certified, and which defects are to be treated as warranty items.

5. Provide a schedule of planned deficiency review having regard to the foregoing.

2. Certification of Substantial Performance of the Work:

1. When the consultant considers that the deficiencies and defects have been

completed and that it appears that the requirements of the Contract Documents have been substantially performed, the Consultant shall issue a certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work to the Contractor, stating the date of Substantial Performance of the Work.

2. The certification of Substantial certification of the Work shall be prepared in form required by Construction Lien Act.

3. Final inspection for the completion of the Contract;

1. Deficiencies and defects shall be made good before the Contractor submit a written request for final review of the Work and before the Contract is considers complete.

2. When contractor is satisfied that the Work is complete, and after the contractor has reviewed the Work to verify its completion in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall submit a written request for a final review by the Consultant, who in turn will notify the Owner.

3. If there are any deficiencies identified as a result of this review, they shall be listed by the Consultant and submitted to the Contractor. This list shall be recognising as the final deficiency list for purposes of acceptance of the Work under the Contract.

4. Such deficiencies shall be corrected by a date mutually agreed upon between Consultant and the Contractor, unless a specific date is required by Contract, and a further review by the Consultant shall be called for by the


Contractor following his own review to take place within 5 days from date of request.

5. Contractor shall thereafter submit invoice for final payment. 6. Money shall be withheld for deficiency work and will be released only when all

deficiencies have been completed. No partial payment to be recognized until all work is completed.

1.6. Warranty Period

1. Provide on-going review and attendance to building call-back, maintenance and repair problems during the warranty period.

2. At the beginning of the 24th month after Substantial Performance of the Work, the Owner, Contractor and Consultant, along with key subcontractors as designated, shall carry out a complete review of building and its system to determine which deficiencies are to be rectified under the warranty. Contractor shall be responsible for timely written notification of Owner, and Consultant prior to such end of warranty period inspection and any delay in such notification shall extend such warranty period inspection and any delay in such notification shall extend such warranty period until proper notification is received by Owner, and the Consultant.


Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 01780 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 WARRANTIES Page 1 of 1 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 Warranties

1. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, and as follows:

1. Warranties shall commence at the date of Substantial Performance

of the Work 2. Submit warranties for applicable items, signed by the applicable

company responsible for each warranty. 3. Submit warranties on form approved by owner including, but not

limited to, the following information:

1. Name and address of project 2. Warranty commencement date (date of Substantial

Performance of the Work. 3. Duration of Warranty. 4. Clear indication of what is being warranted and what

remedial action will be taken under warranty. 5. Authorized signature and seal of company providing each

warranty. 4. Owner shall be named in manufacture’s Product warranties. Submit

on relevant Product manufacturer’s standard guaranty or warrant form.



Project: 017 010 SITEWORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 3 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1.1.1 Includes But Not Limited To 1. General Site Work Requirements for following work: 1. Site improvements 2. Earthwork 3. Foundation and load-bearing elements 4. Stormwater utility services 5. Drainage and containment 6. Bases, ballasts, pavement, and appurtenances 7. Site furnishings

8. Landscaping 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.2.1 Division One, General Requirements is a part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.1.1 Examine site to determine type of problems to be encountered. Discuss problems

with Consultant prior to beginning work. 3.1.2 Site Verification Of Conditions .1 Excavate exploratory hole and locate existing various underground

facilities at sufficient locations to assure that no conflict with the proposed work exists and sufficient clearance is available to avoid damage to existing facilities.

.2 Perform exploratory excavation at least 10 working days in advance of performing any excavation or underground work.

.3 Upon discovery of conflicts or problems with existing facilities, notify Consultant by phone or fax within 24 hours. Follow telephone or fax notification with letter and diagrams indicating conflict or problem and sufficient measurements and details to evaluate problem.

3.2 PREPARATION 3.2.1 Protection .1 Spillage - Avoid spillage by covering and securing loads when hauling on

or adjacent to public streets or highways. Remove spillage and sweep, wash, or otherwise clean project, streets, and highways.

.2 Dust Control - Take precautions necessary to prevent dust nuisance, both on-site and adjacent to public and private properties. Correct or repair damage caused by dust.


Project: 017 010 SITEWORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 3 .3 Erosion Control - Take precautions necessary to prevent erosion and

transportation of soil downstream, to adjacent properties, and into on-site or off-site drainage systems. Develop, install, and maintain an erosion control plan if required by law. Repair and correct damage caused by erosion. Refer to Drawings.

3.2.2 If Contractor fails to take specified precautions or to make corrections and

repairs promptly, Owner may take such steps as may be deemed necessary and deduct costs of such from monies due to Contractor. Such action or lack of action on Owner's part does not relieve Contractor from responsibility for proper protection of the Work.

3.3 REPAIR/RESTORATION 3.3.1 Adjust existing covers, boxes, and vaults to grade. Replace broken or damaged

covers, boxes, and vaults. Independently confirm size, location, and number of covers, boxes, and vaults which require adjustment.

3.3.2 Replace concrete sidewalks broken during construction. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.4.1 Notify local underground utility coordinator 48 hours prior to performing any

excavation work. 3.4.2 If work has been interrupted by weather, scheduling, or other reason, notify

Consultant 24 hours minimum prior to intended resumption of grading.

3.4.3 Owner reserves right to require additional testing to re-affirm suitability of completed work including compacted soils which have been exposed to adverse weather conditions.

3.5 SETTING OUT

3.5.1 Be responsible for vertical and horizontal control by setting centre lines, batter boards, and grade pickets from reference points and bench marks provided by Consultant.

3.6 SURVEY PINS

3.6.1 Have property markers, iron pins and square iron bars, disturbed or lost in the course of construction, replaced by an Ontario Land Surveyor at no cost to the Owner.

3.7 MINOR LOCATION CHANGES

3.7.1 Consultant may direct or accept minor changes requested by Contractor in route or location of new utilities or structures during construction. However, any such change in location shall not be considered as a basis for a claim for extra compensation regardless of reason for changing location.


Project: 017 010 SITEWORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 3 of 3 3.8 VERIFICATION OF AS-BUILT GRADES 3.8.1 Provide to the Consultant, in a form acceptable to the Town of Flamborough, a

survey certificate verifying that site grades have been constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 DEMOLITION Page 1 of 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as

if repeated here. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED IN SECTION 1.2.1 Demolition and removals shown/noted on Drawings. 1.2.2 Restoration of damaged or disturbed work. 1.2.3 Removal of surplus materials from the site. 1.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.3.1 CSA S350-M1980 Code of Practice of Safety in Demolition of Structures. 1.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS 1.4.1 Take over structures to be demolished based on their condition at time of

examination prior to tendering. 1.5 DEMOLITION DRAWINGS 1.5.1 Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit for approval,

drawings, diagrams or details showing sequence of disassembly work and supporting structures and underpinning.

1.5.2 Submissions to bear stamp of qualified professional engineer registered in

the Province of Ontario. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6.1 Comply with all applicable municipal regulations, the Occupational Health

and Safety Act 1991 and Regulations for Construction Projects and the Ontario Building Code.

1.6.2 Provide all shoring, bracing, or other measures necessary to prevent

accidental collapse of any part of existing buildings, and take all necessary measures to prevent damage to adjacent buildings.

1.6.3 Complete all measures required by the authority having jurisdiction for the

enclosure of the site and protection of the public before the work of demolition is commenced.


Project: 017 010 DEMOLITION Page 2 of 5

1.6.4 Conspicuously post danger signs around the property. Close off with barricades all doorways and thoroughfares giving access to the area of demolition.

1.6.5 Requirements specified herein shall be considered the minimum

requirements; be responsible for providing and performing things required and necessary to complete the work, in a safe, proper and workmanlike manner.

1.6.6 A competent foreman shall be in charge of the work at all times while work

is in progress. 1.7 MAINTAINING TRAFFIC 1.7.1 Maintain and preserve Owner's access requirements to and from existing

buildings in areas where demolition and removal work is being carried out. 1.7.2 Do not close, obstruct, place or store material in Owner's driveways and

passageways. Conduct operations with minimum interference with roads, streets, driveways and passageways.

1.8 HAULING OPERATIONS 1.8.1 Haul and move machines, vehicles and equipment over designated route

and within work areas as designated by Consultant. 1.8.2 Maintain roadways and paving in the hauling areas clean on a daily basis

and as required by Municipal authorities. 1.9 PROTECTION 1.9.1 Protect work to remain against damage of any kind. Repair or replace

damaged work at the discretion of Consultant, at no cost to Owner. 1.9.2 Prevent movement, settlement or damage of adjacent structures, services,

walks, paving, trees, landscaping, adjacent grades, parts of existing building to remain. Provide bracing, shoring and underpinning as required. Make good damage caused by demolition.

1.9.3 Take precautions to support affected structures and, if safety of the parts of

the building being demolished or adjacent structures or services appears to be endangered, cease operations and notify Consultant.

1.9.4 Prevent debris from blocking surface drainage system. 1.9.5 Pay particular attention to prevention of fire and elimination of fire hazards

which would endanger the work or adjacent buildings and premises.


Project: 017 010 DEMOLITION Page 3 of 5 1.9.6 Provide and maintain necessary fire extinguishers throughout the work at all

times to the approval of the Fire Marshal, and located at convenient and accessible points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY PARTITIONS AND SCREENS 3.1.1 Preparation

.1 Post warning signs on electrical lines and equipment which must remain energized to serve other properties during period of demolition.

.2 Disconnect and cap designated mechanical services in

accordance with authorities having jurisdiction.

.1 Natural gas supply lines: to be removed by gas company.

.3 Do not disrupt active or energized utilities traversing premises or designated to remain undisturbed.

3.1.3 Demolition

.1 Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings most built-in cabinetry and millwork is to be temporarily removed so as to allow work to be done on the heating system upgrade. After work is complete the built-in cabinetry and millwork is to be reinstalled and made good. Where the built-in cabinetry and Millwork is deemed to be unusable for reuse dispose of said cabinetry and install new cabinetry/millwork to match existing that was removed, as covered under the cost allowance for such.

.2 At end of each day's work, leave work in safe condition so that no

part is in danger of toppling or falling. (Protect interiors of parts not to be demolished from exterior elements at all times).

.3 Demolish to minimize dusting. Keep materials wetted as directed by

Consultant. .5 Do not sell or burn materials on site.



.6 Remove contaminated or dangerous materials as defined by

authorities having jurisdiction, relating to environmental protection, from site and dispose of in safe manner to minimize danger at site or during disposal.

3.2 DEMOLITION 3.2.1 Carry out demolition work, removal of existing materials and equipment,

and disposal of resultant debris not specifically called for under various Sections of the Specification but which is required to complete the work of this Section. Proceed with demolition of, or alteration to, any portion of existing building ONLY after thorough protection of existing building has been achieved, as directed and/or accepted by Consultant.

3.2.2 During demolition operations, keep work wetted down with fog sprays to

prevent dust and dirt rising. Provide temporary water line for this purpose and furnish connections that may be required. Upon completion, remove installed temporary water lines. Use covered chutes, watered down.

3.3 CUTTING 3.3.1 Perform required cutting using power operated cutting devices. Chipping

will not be allowed. Breaking out shall commence only after sawcutting of the cut-off points has been performed in order to prevent damage to remainder.

3.3.2 Demolish masonry and concrete in small sections. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS, RUBBLE AND DEBRIS 3.4.1 Surplus Materials

.1 Materials forming permanent part of the building that require removal become Contractor's property and must be removed from site daily, unless such materials are otherwise specified or shown on Drawings to be reused under this Contract (or turned over to Consultant). Remove materials not suitable for reuse.

.2 Stockpiling of surplus materials on site will not be permitted.

3.4.2 Rubble and Debris

.1 Rubbish and debris resulting from execution of the work shall be cleaned up as they are generated. Dispose of same at end each day's work or place in waste disposal bins which must be emptied on a regular basis. Stockpiling of rubble and debris will not be permitted.



.2 Do not burn material on site.

3.5 CLEANING-UP 3.5.1 Leave site in a "broom-clean" condition on completion of work to

Consultant's satisfaction. 3.5.2 Clean all existing surfaces specified to receive new applied finishes to assure

proper adherence. 3.5.3 Clean all existing surfaces to receive paint finish to paint manufacturer's

written specifications and/or recommendations. 3.6 ENVIRONMENTAL SITE ASSESSMENT 3.6.1 An environmental site assessment was conducted by the Owner to

determine the presence of environmentally hazardous materials. A copy of this report is available for review.

3.6.2 Should the Contractor encounter buried items containing environmentally

hazardous substances such as, but not limited to, oil tanks, stop work and notify the Consultant immediately. Do not proceed until written instructions have been received from the Consultant.

3.6.3 No responsibility is assumed by the Consultant for the scope or accuracy of

this report. The Trade Contractor shall review the report and the existing site and extract his own conclusions and interpretations.

3.7 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES 3.7.1 There is not a registered substance report for the existing buildings to be

demolished. The following note pertains to their demolition. 3.7.2 Demolition of materials containing hazardous substances can be hazardous

to health. Should material resembling, but not limited to, the following: spray or trowel applied asbestos, PCB ballasts, plaster containing asbestos binder, roof felt containing asbestos binder, be encountered, stop work and notify the Consultant immediately. Do not proceed until written instructions have been received from the Consultant.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 SITE PREPARATION Page 1 of 2 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is a part of this Section and shall

apply as if repeated here. 1.2 SUMMARY 1.2.1 Includes But Not Limited To 1. Prepare site for grading and structure excavation as described in

Contract Documents including - 1. Remove trees, brush, and shrubs. 2. Excavate and dispose of stumps, roots, and buried debris. 3. Strip and remove vegetative layer. 4. Strip and store topsoil for landscape use. 1.2.2 Related Sections 1. Section 02000 - Site Work General Requirements 2. Section 02941 - Topsoil/Fine Grading 1. Addition of amendments and finish grading of existing topsoil

stored on site. 1.3 DEFINITION 1.3.1 Existing topsoil is defined as total amount of soil stripped less vegetation layer

stripped as specified in Article 3.3 below. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 Requirements Of Regulatory Agencies - Conform to local building by-laws, the

Provincial Fire Marshal's Act, the Ontario Building Code and the WISB Accident Prevention Regulations, current editions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 Protection 1. Protect tops, trunks, and roots of existing trees on site which are intended

to remain. Do not use heavy equipment within branch spread. Interfering branches may be removed only with permission of Consultant.

2. Protect other plants and features which are to remain. 3. Do not expose or damage shrub or tree roots of plants to remain. 3.2 PERFORMANCE


Project: 017 010 SITE PREPARATION Page 2 of 2 3.2.1 When existing grade around plants is lower than new finish grade, perform

regrading by hand. 3.2.2 Tree & Brush Removal 1. Cut off trees, shrubs, brush, and vegetative growth 300 mm (12")

maximum above ground. 2. Trees To Remain - 1. Do not pull up or rip out roots of trees that are to remain. If

excavation through roots is required, excavate by hand and cut roots with sharp axe. Make clean, smooth, sloping cuts.

2. Cut roots 150 mm (6") or larger in diameter only with Consultant's written permission.

3.2.3 Grubbing 1. Grub out stumps and roots 300 mm (12") minimum below original ground

surface, except as follows - 1. Under buildings, remove roots 25 mm (1") and larger entirely. 2. Entirely remove roots of plants which normally sprout from roots, as

identified by Consultant. 3.2.4 Stripping & Stockpiling 1. Strip existing vegetation layer 50 mm (2") deep minimum from areas of

site to receive buildings, landscaping, or paving and remove from site prior to stripping topsoil for storage and reuse.

2. After stripping vegetation layer, strip existing topsoil additional 180 to 460 mm (7” to 18") deep minimum and store on site for later use. 1. Refer to Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation regarding existing

topsoil depths. 2. In order to avoid contamination of topsoil material, take

precautions to not remove material beyond depth of existing topsoil.

3. Existing topsoil is property of Contractor with the restriction that topsoil is to be used first for Project landscape topsoil requirements.

.3 Stockpile existing topsoil in such a manner that the soil does not become compacted and that existing soil texture and structure is preserved.

3.3 CLEANING 3.3.1 Remove from site trees, shrubs, uprooted stumps, vegetative layer, and

surface debris and dispose of legally. 3.3.2 Do not bury cuttings, stumps, roots, and other vegetative matter or burnt

waste material on site.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 EXCAVATING BACKFILLING COMPACTING Page 1 of 5

PART-1 GENERAL 1.1 Work Included

All excavation, backfilling and fill, including work required for site services, mechanical and electrical trades.

1.2 Site Conditions

Sub-surface investigation is to be undertaken by the contractor and reported to the Engineer.

1.3 Submittals Submit 25 kg of each type fill specified to the designated Testing Company. In the case

of coarse gravelly soil or crushed stone, submit 70 kg. 1.3 Shoring, Bracing and Underpinning Prevent movement or settlement, safeguard and maintain integrity of adjacent work. Shore and brace excavations to prevent failure in accordance with Canadian

Construction Safety Code, W.C.B. and applicable local regulations. 1.4 Utility Lines Before commencing work, establish location and extent of underground utility lines in

area of excavation. Notify Consultant of findings.

Existing underground and surface utility lines, where shown, are indicated on drawings for general guidelines only. No guarantee is given of completeness or accuracy. Maintain existing lines in area of excavation which must remain active. Remove abandoned utility lines to distance of 6 ft. from foundations. Cap or otherwise seal lines at cut off points. Record locations of maintained, re-routed and abandoned underground utility lines. Make good and pay for damage to existing utility lines resulting from work.

1.6 Protection Protect bottoms of excavations from softening. Should softening occur, remove softened

soil and replace with compacted granular base material.

Construct banks in accordance with local regulations. Provide adequate protection around benchmarks, layout markers, survey markers, and geodetic monuments. Provide protection to ensure no damage to existing facilities and equipment situated on site.



Effect measures to minimize dust as a result of this work. Do not stockpile excavated material to interfere with site operation or drainage.

1.7 Removal of water If it should prove necessary during operations to intercept or obstruct the natural

drainage, or the flow of artificial drains, divert, collect replace and make good all drainage to satisfaction of Consultant.

Do not allow water from any source to collect or pond in excavations. Maintain effective

measures throughout the work site to control water and remove it from excavations. Use well point systems if this is considered necessary to effectively control water.

Provide for such excavation dewatering using a qualified consultant with competent

personnel for the period of contract stated. Include provision for an on-site standby emergency generator to maintain pump operation in case of power failure, permanent site personnel for water level monitoring and servicing of equipment, water disposal and electrical connections.

1.8 Inspection and Testing Compaction testing will be carried out by an independent laboratory designated by the

Consultant. Testing company will be paid for by the Owner. The soils testing consultant will meet on site with the contractor on the first day of

compaction work and will advise on the most appropriate procedure for compacting material to specified densities.

Have compacted fills and bearing surfaces tested and approved before any work is

placed on them. Approval by the Consultant may first be verbal if required to expedite the work but will subsequently be confirmed in writing.

Should results show that the degree of compaction has not been obtained, recompact the

areas in question, as required by the Consultant until satisfactory results are obtained. Should tests indicate fills do not meet specified requirements, remove and replace with

specified material. 1.9 Compaction Densities Compaction densities are percentages of maximum d3ensities obtainable from ASTM

D698 (Standard Proctor Method) corrected for material retained on a 19mm sieve. PART-2 -Products 2.1 Sand: Clean sand containing not more than 5% clay or silt (passing .080 mm sieve).



2.2 Granular Base: Crushed material consisting of sound, tough, durable fragments with the portion retained on a 10mm sieve being not less than 60% crushed and having grading limits as follows, when tested to ASTM C136.

Sieve Size % Passing 20mm 100 12.5mm 60 to 100 10mm 45 to 85 5mm 35 to 60 2.5mm 25 to 45 .315mm 10 to 25 .160mm 5 to 15 .080mm 2 to 8

2.3 Pit Run: Substantially free of stones larger than 80 mm, free from organic material and

containing not more than 6% silt or clay (passing .080 mm sieve). 2.4 Drain gravel: Clean well-screened 32 mm gravel. 2.5 Excavated Material: Excavated material may be used if it meets the criteria of the

specified material and the moisture content allows compaction to the specified density. 2.6 Clear Crushed Stone: 20 mm well compacted clear crushed stone. Alternatively use

granular material containing no more than 10 % of material passing the 4mm sieve PART-3 -Execution 3.1 Excavation

Excavate to elevations and dimensions required for installation, erection of forms, shoring, waterproofing and inspection of the work. Excavate to clean lines to minimize quantity of fill material required. Excavation must not interfere with normal 45degree splay of bearing from bottom of any footing. Excavate so that when complete the bottom of excavation is reasonably level and free from loose or organic matter. The Consultant will inspect excavations to verify depths and dimensions. Test, treat (if required) and dispose of excavated fill removed from the site, in accordance with all authorities having jurisdiction. Where soft spots occur, remove such areas and replace with sand or granular base compacted to 100% density. Payment for excavation and backfilling of same will be made in accordance with the Extra Work clause of the General Conditions of the Contract. Soft spots resulting from water penetration or development by virtue of the Contractor’s operations shall be replaced as above at no extra cost. Have Consultant inspect soft spots before removing material. Stockpile excavated material required for backfill and finish grading in a manner to prevent segregation or contamination.

3.2 Unauthorized Excavation



Correct unauthorized excavations by filling under bearing surfaces and footings with granular base compacted to 100% density.

3.3 Added Excavation

Excavation, exceeding that indicated in contract documents, if authorized in writing by Consultant, will be paid as extra to Contract price in accordance with General Conditions.

3.4 Excavation for Underground Services

Excavation for mechanical and electrical work will be laid out and supervised by the mechanical or electrical trade concerned. Excavate trenches and pits to lines and grades shown to minimum 6 in. below underside of pipe, conduit, cable or duct bank. Provide recesses for bell and spigot pipe or other fittings to ensure bearing will occur along barrel of pipe. Trim and shape trench bottoms and leave free of irregularities, lumps or projections. Cut trenches 12 in. wider than maximum pipe, conduit, cable or duct diameter or width. Employ temporary drains, offset sumps or dewatering to keep water away from under all conditions. Keep trenches water free during joining.

3.5 Fill types and Compaction

Prior to placing fill and bases for site services, compact existing subgrade to obtain same compaction as specified for fill. Cut out soft areas and fill with sand and or granular base until specified compaction is obtained. Place and compact fill materials in continuous horizontal layers not exceeding 12 in. loose depth. Use methods to prevent displacing or damaging buried services. Make good any damage. Maintain optimum moisture content to enable compaction to attain specified density. Compact by hand machine within 4 ft. of foundation walls so as to minimize side pressures on walls. .1 Under Footings, concrete slabs and walls on grade: use regular base

compacted to 100% Density over compacted subgrade. .2 Exterior side of walls: use pit run compacted to 95% Density. .3 Backside of retaining walls: use rain gravel to subgrade level on high side for

minimum 20 in. from wall. Compact as required by surface use. .4 Trenches under concrete slabs, paving or walks: Fill to underside of gravel

base with sand and compact to 100% Density. .5 Fill outside building lines: where grade must be built up, place material in

layers not over 12 in. thick measured loose from existing grade to final subgrade for base material. Compact as required by surface conditions noted above.

3.6 Bedding of Underground Services



.1 Storm, Sanitary and Water Systems: Use sand compacted to 100% Density. After pipe is in place and has been approved, cover with 12 in. of sand compacted to 1005 Density in maximum 6 in. layers before proceeding with remainder of backfill.

.2 Electrical cable, cable duct and ductbanks: Use sand compacted to 100%

Density. After cables, ducts or ductbanks are in place and approved, cover with 6in. of sand compacted to 100% density before proceeding with remainder of backfill.

3.7 Backfilling

Commence backfilling only after areas of work to be backfilled and compacted have been inspected and approved by the Consultant. This includes waterproofing and dampproofing membranes, rigid insulation, foundation drainage and all mechanical and electrical services and systems. Ensure areas to be backfilled are free from debris, snow ice, water or frozen ground. Do not use frozen backfill material or material containing ice, snow or debris. Backfill simultaneously on each side of walls and other structures to equalize soil pressures. Obtain Consultant’s approval prior to placing backfill against walls. Where temporary unbalanced earth pressures are liable to develop on walls or other structures, erect bracing or shoring to counteract unbalanced pressures, and leave in place until removal is approved by Consultant. Place and compact fill materials in continuous horizontal layers not exceeding 12 in. loose depth. Use methods to prevent disturbing or damaging buried services, foundation drainage system, waterproofing, dampproofing and insulation. Make good any damage. Rough grade backfill to levels, profiles and contours indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. Unless shown otherwise slope grade away from building 1:50 minimum slope. Restore paved areas damaged by construction activities.

3.8 Clean Up

Dispose of surplus excavated material not required for backfill, grading or landscaping from site. Keep surrounding public roads free from excessive fill deposits from trucks hauling materials. Trucks to be loaded carefully to prevent spillage. Keep temporary roads on site clean and accessible during the construction period. END OF SECTION


Project: 017 010 Granular Base for Slabs Page 1 of 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is a part of this Section and shall apply as if

repeated here. 1.2 SUMMARY 1.2.1 Includes But Not Limited To 1. Furnish and install gravel under interior slabs on grade as described in

Contract Documents. 1.2.2 Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section 2. Under-slab laminated vapor retarder and lap sealant. 1.2.3 Related Sections .1 Section 02000 - Sitework General Requirements .2 Section 02315 - Excavation, Filling and Compaction .3 Section 02621 - Subsurface Drainage .4 Section 02770 - Concrete Sidewalks, Curbs and Gutters .5 Section 07135 - Laminated Vapor Retarder 1.3 SEQUENCING & SCHEDULING 1.3.1 Install laminated vapor retarder and granular base immediately prior to

placing concrete. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Gravel - 20 mm (3/4") clear crushed stone containing no more than 10%

passing the No. 4 sieve. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Install laminated vapour retarder. Lap joints 150 mm (6") minimum. Apply

liberal coating of lap sealant to seal joints. Seal vapor retarder around pipes, conduits, etc, which penetrate slab. Seal tears and punctures prior to placing granular.

3.1.2 Place 200 mm (8") minimum of gravel over laminated vapour retarder, level, and compact as specified in Section 02315.

3.1.3 Do not allow water onto vapour retarder or granular base prior to placing of concrete.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.2.1 Notify Consultant 48 hours prior to installation of concrete to allow inspection

of laminated vapor retarder and granular base installation.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 02500 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Page 1 of 2 1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Section 01340: Shop drawings. 2. Section 01370: Schedule of Values. 1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS

1. All requests for substitution be it during bidding or at construction stage shall include complete data substantiating compliance with the Contract Documents.

.1 For products: .1 Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address.

.2 Manufacturer's literature: .1 Product descriptions. .2 Performance test data. .3 Reference standards.

.3 Samples. .4 Name and address of similar projects on which product was used,

and date of installation.

.2 For construction methods: .1 Detailed description of proposed method. .2 Drawings illustrating methods. .3 Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or

method specified. .4 Data relating to changes in construction schedule. .5 Relation to separate contracts.

.3 In making request for substitution, Contractor represents:

.1 Proposed product or method has been generally investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to that specified.

.2 The substitution will be provided with the same guarantee as that for product or method specified.

.3 Installation of accepted substitution will be coordinated into the Work, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects.

.4 Requests for substitutions during construction shall state what cost difference if any, will be made in the Contract Price for each substitution, should it be accepted,

.4 Substitutions will not be considered if: .1 They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or project data

submittals without formal request. .2 Acceptance will require revision of Contract Documents. 1.3 PRODUCTS LIST

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 02500 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Page 2 of 2 1. Within 30 days after date of Contract, submit to Consultant one complete list of all

products which are proposed for installation. List shall be provided on reproducible transparency if exceeding 11” x 17” in size.

2. Tabulate list by each specification section. 3. For products specified under reference standards, include with listing of each

product: .1 Name and address of manufacturer. .2 Trade name. .3 Model or catalogue designation. .4 Manufacturer's data:

.1 Performance and test data. .2 Reference standards.

.5 Material safety data sheets.

1.4 CONTRACTOR’S OPTIONS 1. For products specified only by reference standards, select any product meeting

standards, by any manufacturer. 2. In order to establish standards of quality, the Consultant has in the detailed

Specifications, referred to certain products by name and catalogue number. Where the drawings have shown specific detailing, dimensions, ratings, characteristics and other performance criteria the details are based on one specific manufacturer and not combinations of more than one.

3. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturer's, select any

product and manufacturer named. 4. For products specified by naming one or more products, but indicating the phrase

"or approved equivalent" after specified product, Contractor must submit request for substitution, for any product not specifically named.

5. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer and without

the phrase "or approved equivalent", there is no option, and no substitution will be allowed.

END OF SECTION

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 02585 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 Concrete Unit Paving Page 1 of 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as

if repeated here. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 Samples: When requested by Consultant submit samples in accordance

with Section 01300. 1.2.2 Extended Warranty

1. Provide a written warranty in accordance with Section 01300 stating that interlocking paving will be free from bumps and depressions, evenly graded to levels shown, and free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year beyond the expiration of the warranty period under the General Conditions.

2. Maintain all work until acceptance of all work of the Contract. 3. Immediately remedy all defects to completed work, which occur

during the maintenance period. 4. Refill joints and re-compact pavers and adjust for level and

alignment when necessary. 5. Total warranty period: 2 years.

1.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.3.1 ASTM C67-89a Methods of Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural

Clay Tile 1.3.2 ASTM C144-89 Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar 1.3.3 ASTM C33-90 Specification for Concrete Aggregate 1.3.4 CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90 Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete

Construction 1.3.5 CAN/CSA-A82.2-M78 Methods of Sampling and Testing Brick 1.3.6 OPSS Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS 1.4.1 Do not lay concrete pavers over frozen materials or on improperly prepared

base.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 02585 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 Concrete Unit Paving Page 2 of 4 1.4.2 At end of each work period, protect unrestrained edges with plywood or

similar material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Generally: Concrete materials shall be in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1. 2.1.2 Unit Pavers

1. 80 mm thick x 203 mm x 203 mm "Stone" as manufactured by Oaks Precast, Unilock Ltd., or Omnistone Corporation Ltd. to pattern as shown on the drawings. Colour selected by Consultant from manufacturer's standard range.

2. Pavers shall be supplied complete with normal side and end units in

the same thickness as field pavers. 3. Pavers shall be free of efflorescence, have a compressive strength

of minimum 55 MPa (8000 psi), a water absorption maximum of less than 5% and a freeze-thaw resistance equal to CAN/CSA A82.2 or Section 8 of ASTM C67.

2.1.3 Granular Base: Granular ‘A’ conforming to OPSS Form 1010. 2.1.4 Concrete: 25 MPa conforming otherwise to Sections 02770 and 03300. 2.1.5 Jointing and Setting Bed Sand: Imported sand conforming to ASTM

Specification C144 - gradation for 3mm joints - free of organics and soluble salts or contaminants likely to cause efflorescence, and in compliance with the following grading limits:

Sieve Size Percent Passing

Natural Manufactured Sand Sand

4.75 mm No. 4 100 100 2.36 No. 8 95 – 100 95 - 100 1.18 No. 16 70 – 100 70 - 100 600 mm No. 30 40 – 75 40 - 75 300 No. 50 10 – 35 20 - 40 150 No. 100 2 – 15 10 - 25 75 No. 200 0 0 – 10

2.1.6 Filter Fabric: "Terrafix 270R" manufactured by Terrafix Filter Fabrics Ltd. 2.1.8 Metal Edging: Reversible aluminum edging as manufactured by Brickstop

Corporation.

2.1.9 Drainage Pipe: 50 mm diameter plastic. 2.1.10 Bituminous Paint: Conforming to CAN/CGSB 1.108.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 02585 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 Concrete Unit Paving Page 3 of 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.1.1 Subgrade to be unfrozen, and free of ice and snow. 3.1.2 Ensure all subdrainage or underground services within the pavement area

are completed in conjunction with subgrade preparation and before the commencement of granular base construction.

3.1.3 Ensure that the prepared subgrade is protected from damage from surface

water and other trades. 3.2 APPLICATION 3.2.1 Excavate and re-grade as required to achieve the levels shown. Conform

to general requirements specified in Section 02315. 3.2.2 Proof roll and compact exposed earth subgrade to 100% Standard Proctor

maximum dry density. 3.2.3 Correct any irregularities or depressions that develop under rolling by

loosening the material at such locations and adding or replacing material and re-compacting until the surface is smooth and uniform. Dig out any soft spots which develop during or after compaction operations and replace at no increase in Contract Price.

3.2.4 Place a 150 mm thick compacted layer of granular base over compacted

earth subgrade. Spread in maximum compacted lifts of 100 mm. Compact each lift to 95% Modified Proctor density.

3.2.5 Install sections of plastic drain pipe vertically as required to drain paver

setting bed through concrete sub-paving to granular base below. 3.2.6 Place concrete sub-paving to thickness indicated on Drawings

3.2.7 Install 200 mm x 200 mm filter fabric over top of plastic drain pipes below

sand setting bed. 3.2.8 Place fine setting bed over filter fabric and concrete sub-paving to a depth

higher than specified to allow for compaction after pavers have been installed. Depth of sand after paver compaction shall be maximum 38 mm.

3.4 EDGE RESTRAINT 3.4.1 Where unit pavers adjoin landscaped areas, install metal edging between

landscaped area and pavers. Prior to installation coat metal with isolation coating.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF PAVERS

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 02585 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 Concrete Unit Paving Page 4 of 4 3.5.1 Do not install pavers with excessive chips, cracks, voids, discolorations or

other defects. 3.5.2 Install paving units simultaneously to ensure colour mix uniformity. 3.5.3 Where necessary, cut pavers with a concrete saw. All cut edges shall be

true, even, straight, and undamaged. Minimum paver size to be no less than half one full paver.

3.5.4 Place pavers as close together as possible, so that joints do not exceed 3

mm. 3.5.5 Compaction of pavers shall be accomplished with 3 or more passes with a

vibratory plate compactor; the first pass shall be made with the surface of the laid pavers brushed clean and joints open; the remaining passes with the vibrator shall be accompanied with simultaneous brushing of fine masonry sand into the joints and sprinkling with water to compact.

3.5.6 Fill all voids in the paver joints by sweeping in dry, jointing sand. 3.5.7 Finish pavement to lines and levels to ensure positive drainage at all

drainage outlets and channels. In no case shall the cross-fall of any portion of the pavement be less than 2 percent. The pavement surface shall not deviate by more than 6 mm in 1800 mm from a straight edge laid in any direction.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 Subsurface Drainage Page 1 of 3 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as

if repeated here. 1.2 SUMMARY 1.2.1 Includes But Not Limited To

1. Subsurface drainage weepers around building perimeter, in outdoor play areas and under floor slabs as described in Contract Documents.

2. Basement wall vertical drainage system.

3. Ancilliary works as specified or shown.

4. Pay necessary fees to and conform to requirements of agencies having

jurisdiction over drainage systems. 1.2.2 Related Sections 1. Section 02000 - Sitework General Requirements 2. Section 02315 - Excavating, filling and compaction. 1.3 REFERENCES 1.3.1 CAN/CSA-A23.1-94 Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete

Construction 1.3.2 Canadian Standards Association

1. CAN/CSA B182.1-96, "Plastic Drain and Sewer Pipe and Pipe Fittings" 1.3.3 CGSB 41-GP-29Ma Tubing, Plastic, Corrugated, Drainage 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 See Section 01300. 1.4.2 Product data. 1.4.3 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340. Show typical detail

of water transfer sleeve connections, base condition and location thereof (ie. relative to subgrade).

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS 2.1.1 Subsurface Drainage Weepers .1. 100 mm (4") diameter perforated flexible drainage pipe meeting

requirements of CGSB 41-GP-29Ma, Type 1 for unperforated and Type 2


Project: 017 010 Subsurface Drainage Page 2 of 3 for perforated wrapped with filter fabric, as manufactured by Big-O Inc., Oxford Plastics (1983) inc., or Prinsco Inc.

2. Provide non-perforated pipe sections as required for collectors. Provide all adapters, fittings, couplings required.

2.1.2 Geotextile Filter Fabric - 1. Synthetic geotextile fabric by Terrafix Geosynthetics Inc, or Mirafi Inc. 2.1.3 Sewer Pipe

1. PVC gasket-joint gravity sewer pipe meeting requirements of CAN/CSA B182.1.

2. Joints - Integral wall bell and elastomeric gasket. 3. Fittings - Schedule 40 PVC meeting ASTM D 3034. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION 3.1.1 Excavate for the work of this Section. Prior to placing bedding, line bottom and

sides of trenches with continuous filter fabric to create a filter envelope. 3.2 PIPE BEDDING 3.2.1 Lay underfloor weepers on a 100 mm thick bedding. Spread and hand-tamp

bedding to provide proper consolidation, before laying pipe. 3.2.2 Carefully arrange weepers to bypass obstructions such as footing irregularities. 3.2.3 Ensure piping is a least 150 mm clear of obstructions and invert is minimum 350

mm below the underside of floor slab on grade. 3.3 PIPE LAYING 3.3.1 Layer weepers with both rows of holes and coupling slot facing down. 3.3.2 Lay perimeter weepers inside the foundation wall. 3.3.3 Use unperforated pipe to join perimeter weepers to sump pits, and for header

runs connecting the underfloor weepers to the sump pits. 3.3.4 Use adapter fittings to join perforated weepers to unperforated pipes. 3.3.5 Use standard fittings for corners, bends, elbows, crosses, tees and wyes. 3.3.6 Install end plugs at the terminal ends of pipe runs. 3.3.7 Protect pipe ends from damage and ingress of foreign material at all times. 3.3.8 Generally, lay all weepers sloped to drain to the sump pits at a slope

indicated. Hand excavate sub-grade where necessary to provide required slopes. Remove any excavated material from the site.


Project: 017 010 Subsurface Drainage Page 3 of 3 3.3.9 Provide cleanouts at changes in direction consisting of outlets, wyes,

extension pipes and flush plugs. Coordinate cleanout locations with walls and other appurtenances in basement floor locations for approval before commencing work. Set cleanouts flush with finished level above.

3.3.10 The drainage system collector pipes shall drain to a sump for collection and

discharge to a storm sewer. 3.4 COVER 3.4.1 Place a layer of clear pea gravel over and around the sides of all perforated

weepers. The layer of pea gravel shall be 300 mm thick, but reduced in thickness where necessary to suit the underside of the slab-on-grade.

3.4.2 Consolidate the cover with a light tamping to compact the material without

damaging or dislodging the pipes. 3.5 WATER TRANSFER SLEEVES 3.5.1 In line with wall vertical drainage around building perimeter, provide 100 mm

diameter drainage pipe water transfer sleeves for casting in place in foundation wall. Coordinate sleeve length with wall and formwork thickness.

3.5.2 Supervise setting of water transfer sleeves to ensure that they are set at the

same elevation as the adjacent peripheral piping, or higher. 3.5.3 Fill water transfer sleeves with the filter aggregate base course material

specified above. 3.6 TESTING 3.6.1 After each straight run of perimeter and underslab weeper is laid and before

aggregate is placed around it, test for proper alignment by introducing a light source at one end , and checking that the light source is visible at the other end.

3.6.2 If the light source is not visible, remove and re-install piping as required to correct the misalignment so the light can be detected.

3.7 CLEAN-UP 3.71. Clean-up and remove all unused and discarded materials arising from the

work of this Section.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 02770 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DECKS, CURBS AND GUTTERS Page 1 of 3 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if

repeated here. 1.2 SUMMARY 1.2.1 Includes But Not Limited To .1 Compact sub-base as described in Contract Documents. .2 Furnish and install granular base as described in Contract Documents. .3 Furnish and install poured-in-place concrete curb, gutter, sidewalks, pool

deck, fence post bases, light pole bases, flat drainage structures, & concrete sub-paving for concrete unit paving as described in Contract Documents.

.4 Furnish and install poured-in-place concrete planter walls as described in Contract Documents.

1.2.2 Related Sections .1 Section 02000 - Sitework General Requirements .2 Section 02315 - Excavation, Filling and Compaction .3 Section 02316 - Granular Base .4 Section 02585 - Concrete Unit Paving .4 Section 03100 - Concrete forms .5 Section 03200 - Reinforcing steel .6 Section 03300 - Cast-in-place concrete .7 Section 07900 - Sealants 1.3 REFERENCES 1.3.1 CAN/CSA-A23.1-94, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete

Construction 1.3.2 ASTM D698, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Unit

Standard Effort 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 Concrete shall meet requirements specified in Section 03300. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Form work - Meet requirements specified in Section 03100. 2.1.2 Granular Base - Road Base type gravel or crushed rock meeting or exceeding

requirements specified in Section 02316. 2.1.3 Fiber Expansion Joints .1 Manufactured commercial type meeting requirements of ASTM D 1751.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 02770 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DECKS, CURBS AND GUTTERS Page 2 of 3 .2 13 mm (1/2") thick. .3 Approved Manufacturers - .1 "Sealtight" by W R Meadows Limited of Canada, Milton, ON .2 Flexcell by Sternson, Branford, ON, (519) 759-6600. See Section

01600. 2.1.4 Concrete - Meet requirements specified in Section 03300 for exterior

concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 Survey and stake concrete site elements to indicate grading required by

Contract Documents. 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 Sub-Base - Compact sub-base as specified in Section 02315. 3.2.2 Granular Base .1 Unless shown otherwise on Drawings, following minimum of granular base

under - .1 Patios, decks and Sidewalks - 200 mm (8") of Granular ‘A’ .2 Driveway crosswalks and concrete sub-paving for concrete unit

paving – 100 mm (4”) of Granular ‘A’ .2 Level, and compact to minimum 100 percent as established by ASTM D

698 under sidewalks and concrete sub-paving. 3.2.3 Joints .1 Align joints of sidewalk, deck and curb & gutter. .2 Expansion & Contraction Joints - .1 Spacing – as indicated on Drawings and as follows: (1) Sidewalks, Decks, Curbs & Gutters, Patio and Sub-paving for

concrete unit paving - 6 000 mm (20'0") on center. .2 Install so top of expansion joint material is 6.4 mm (1/4") below

finished surface of concrete. .3 No expansion joint required between curbs and walks parallel to

curb. .4 Provide expansion joint at end of walks perpendicular to and

terminating at curb. .3 Control Joints .1 Curbs & Gutters - 3 000 mm (10'0") on center. .2 Sidewalks, decks and concrete sub-paving - 1 500 mm (5'0") on

center. .3 Control joints shall be approximately 25 mm (1") deep. .4 Caulk joints as specified in Division 07. 3.2.4 Finish .1 Curb, Gutter, Sidewalks, Decks, Flat Drainage Structures, & Stairs - .1 Broom finish. .2 Round edges including edges formed by expansion joints. .3 Remove edger marks.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 02770 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DECKS, CURBS AND GUTTERS Page 3 of 3 .2 Fence Post &Light Pole Bases - Exposed portion to have rubbed finish. 3.2.5 Special Requirements .1 Sidewalks, Stairs, Decks & Landings, Slabs, and Formed Curbs - .1 Slope to drain. (1) Slope sidewalks, decks with transverse slope of 2 percent or

6.4 mm per 300 mm (1/4" per ft) in direction of intended drainage.

(2) Slope sidewalks, decks away from building 3 percent minimum.

.2 Dusting with cement not permitted. .3 Sidewalks to be a minimum of 125 mm thick unless indicated

otherwise on the drawings. .2 Fence Post & Light Pole Bases - Install bond breaker consisting of three

layers of 13.6 Kg per 9 290 sq mm (30 lb) roofing felt between pole base and adjoining sidewalk.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.3.1 Tests, Inspection - To allow Consultant's verification of grades and elevations,

notify Consultant three days minimum prior to placing specified concrete site elements.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 FACILITY REMEDIATION Page 1 of 8 1 General

1.1 REFERENCES

1. Canadian Environmental Protection Act,1999 (CEPA 1999): 1. Export and Import of Hazardous Waste Regulations (SOR/2002-300).

2. National Fire Code of Canada 2010.

3. Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDG Act) 1999, (c. 34).

4. Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations (T-19.01-SOR/2003-400).

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1. Dangerous Goods: product, substance, or organism that is specifically listed or meets hazard criteria established in Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations.

2. Hazardous Material: product, substance, or organism that is used for its original purpose; and that is either dangerous goods or a material that may cause adverse impact to environment or adversely affect health of persons, animals, or plant life when released into the environment.

3. Hazardous Waste: any hazardous material that is no longer used for its original purpose and that is intended for recycling, treatment or disposal.

4. Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS): Canada-wide system designed to give employers and workers information about hazardous materials used in workplace. Under WHMIS, information on hazardous materials is provided on container labels, material safety data sheets (MSDS), and worker education programs. WHMIS is put into effect by combination of federal and provincial laws.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

2. Submit proof satisfactory to the Owner that suitable arrangements have been made to dispose of Hazardous Materials in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Submit notifications to applicable authorities having jurisdiction regarding the handling, storage, haulage, and/or disposal of Hazardous Materials as required by Regulations.

4. Submit proof satisfactory to the Owner that the Hazardous Waste materials were appropriately disposed of.


Project: 017 010 FACILITY REMEDIATION Page 1 of 8 1.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS

1. An inventory of the location of known asbestos containing materials in areas designated for renovation is available.

2. Information pertaining to the presence of Hazardous Materials to be handled; removed, or otherwise disturbed during this project is identified in the report: Reassessment Survey of Asbestos Containing Building Materials City of Toronto Parks, Forestry & recreation Management Services Branch, March 2015

3. If the Contractor locates asbestos containing or any other hazardous materials during the course of construction, the Contractor shall cease work in the area immediately, and contact the Owner.

1.5 REGULATORY AGENCIES

1. Comply with Federal, Provincial, and local requirements pertaining to the handling, management, haulage, and/or disposal of Hazardous Materials including but not limited to the following: 1. Ontario Ministry of Labour, Occupational Health and Safety Act,

Regulation 838 (former O. Reg 654/85) respecting Asbestos on Construction Projects and in Buildings and Repair Operations.

2. Ontario Ministry of the Environment and Energy Regulation 347 (formerly O.Reg. 309) under the Environmental Protection Act.

3. Ontario Regulation 356, Highway Traffic Act.

1.6 INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING

1. Before commencing work, provide to the Owner satisfactory proof that every worker has had instruction and training in the hazards of handling and storage of Hazardous Materials, in personal hygiene and work practices, and in the use, cleaning, and disposal, of respirators and protective clothing as required.

2. Instruction and training related to respirators shall include instruction and training related to: 1. The limitations of the equipment. 2. The inspection and maintenance of the equipment. 3. The fitting of the equipment. 4. The disinfecting of the equipment.

1.7 WORKER PROTECTION

1. Provide workers with suitable protection as required for Work of this Section, including but not limited to, respirators and protective clothing suitable for materials to be handled and acceptable to the Provincial Authority having jurisdiction.


Project: 017 010 FACILITY REMEDIATION Page 1 of 8 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1. Coordinate storage of hazardous materials with the Owner and abide by internal requirements for labelling and storage of materials and wastes.

2. Store and handle hazardous materials and wastes in accordance with applicable federal and provincial laws, regulations, codes, and guidelines.

3. Store and handle flammable and combustible materials in accordance with current National Fire Code of Canada requirements.

4. Keep no more than 45 litres of flammable and combustible liquids such as gasoline, kerosene and naphtha for ready use. 1. Store flammable and combustible liquids in approved safety cans bearing

the Underwriters' Laboratory of Canada or Factory Mutual seal of approval.

2. Storage of quantities of flammable and combustible liquids exceeding 45 litres for work purposes requires the written approval of the Owner.

5. Transfer of flammable and combustible liquids is prohibited within buildings.

6. Do not transfer of flammable and combustible liquids in vicinity of open flames or heat-producing devices.

7. Do not use flammable liquids having flash point below 38 degrees C, such as naphtha or gasoline as solvents or cleaning agents.

8. Store flammable and combustible waste liquids for disposal in approved containers located in safe, ventilated area. Keep quantities to minimum.

9. Observe smoking regulations, smoking is prohibited in areas where hazardous materials are stored, used, or handled.

10. Storage requirements for quantities of hazardous materials and wastes in excess of 5 kg for solids, and 5 litres for liquids: 1. Store hazardous materials and wastes in closed and sealed containers. 2. Label containers of hazardous materials and wastes in accordance with

WHMIS. 3. Store hazardous materials and wastes in containers compatible with that

material or waste. 4. Segregate incompatible materials and wastes. 5. Ensure that different hazardous materials or hazardous wastes are not

mixed. 6. Store hazardous materials and wastes in secure storage area with

controlled access. 7. Maintain clear egress from storage area. 8. Store hazardous materials and wastes in location that will prevent them

from spilling into environment. 9. Have appropriate emergency spill response equipment available near

storage area, including personal protective equipment.


Project: 017 010 FACILITY REMEDIATION Page 1 of 8 10. Maintain inventory of hazardous materials and wastes, including product

name, quantity, and date when storage began.

11. Ensure personnel have been trained in accordance with Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) requirements.

12. Report spills or accidents immediately to the Owner. Submit a written spill report to the Owner within 24 hours of incident.

1.9 TRANSPORTATION

1. Transport hazardous materials and wastes in accordance with federal Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations, and applicable provincial regulations.

2. If exporting hazardous waste to another country, ensure compliance with federal Export and Import of Hazardous Waste Regulations.

3. If hazardous waste is generated on site: 1. Coordinate transportation and disposal with the Owner. 2. Ensure compliance with applicable federal, provincial and municipal laws

and regulations for generators of hazardous waste. 3. Use licensed carrier authorized by provincial authorities to accept subject

material. 4. Prior to shipping material obtain written notice from intended hazardous

waste treatment or disposal facility that it will accept material and that it is licensed to accept this material.

5. Label containers with legible, visible safety marks as prescribed by federal and provincial regulations.

6. Ensure that trained personnel handle, offer for transport, or transport dangerous goods.

7. Provide photocopy of shipping documents and waste manifests to the Owner.

8. Track receipt of completed manifest from consignee after shipping dangerous goods. Provide a photocopy of completed manifest to the Owner.

9. Report discharge, emission, or escape of hazardous materials immediately to the Owner and appropriate provincial authority. Take reasonable measures to control release.

2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS

1. Not Used.


Project: 017 010 FACILITY REMEDIATION Page 1 of 8 3 Execution

3.1 HCFC/CFC CONTAINING MATERIALS

1. Conform to and Manage and dispose of all HCFC and/or CFC containing equipment in accordance with Ontario Regulation 189/94.

3.2 PCB CONTAINING MATERIALS

1. Conform to and manage and dispose of all PCB containing materials in accordance with R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 362, Waste Management - PCB’s and, without limiting the foregoing, the following: 1. Disconnect, remove, and dismantle fluorescent light fixtures to remove

ballasts from fixture housing. 2. Inspect ballast labels and/or stamped date codes and compare to the

document "Identification of Lamp Ballasts Containing PCBs" prepared by Environment Canada dated August 1991 or other pertinent guidelines.

3. Stockpile separately ballasts confirmed to contain PCBs or ballasts which cannot be confirmed as PCB-free.

4. Stockpile separately ballasts confirmed to be PCB-free. 5. Verification of the presence or absence of PCBs in each of the separated

piles may be carried out by the Owner at the Owner’s discretion. 6. Temporarily store PCB waste materials for packaging and off- site disposal

in accordance with pertinent regulations. Temporary storage area(s) shall be selected by the Contractor and approved by the Owner.

7. If ballasts are leaking, respirators, protective clothing, and polyethylene drop sheets are to be utilized. Leaking ballasts are to be isolated in clear plastic ziplock bags. Components soiled with tar from PCB containing ballasts are to be disposed or PCB waste.

8. Notify the Owner of intention to package and/or transport materials off-site prior to carrying out this work to allow for evaluation of materials and quantities.

9. Following approval from the Owner, dispose of PCB waste materials in accordance with all applicable Federal, Provincial, and/or municipal requirements.

10. Dispose of ballasts which are PCB-free as municipal waste.

3.3 ACRYLONITRILE CONTAINING MATERIALS

1. Conform to and manage and dispose of acrylonitrile containing materials in accordance with R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 835 (Amended 2004), Designated Substance - Acrylonitrile.

3.4 ARSENIC CONTAINING MATERIALS

1. Conform to and manage and dispose of arsenic containing materials in accordance with R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 836, Designated Substance - Arsenic.


Project: 017 010 FACILITY REMEDIATION Page 1 of 8 3.5 ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS

1. Conform to and Manage and dispose of asbestos containing materials in accordance with Regulation Designated Substance - Asbestos on Construction Projects And In Buildings And Repair Operations R.R.O. 1990, Reg. 838, made under Occupational Health and Safety Act as amended by O.Reg. 278/05 and O.Reg 837 as amended by O.Reg. 279/05.

3.6 BENZENE CONTAINING MATERIALS

1. Conform to and manage and dispose of benzene containing materials in accordance with R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 839, Designated Substance - Benzene.

3.7 COKE OVEN EMISSIONS CONTAINING MATERIALS

1. Conform to and manage and dispose of coke oven emissions containing materials in accordance with R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 840, Designated Substance - Coke Oven Emissions.

3.8 ETHYLENE OXIDE CONTAINING MATERIALS

1. Conform to and manage and dispose of ethylene containing materials in accordance with R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 841, Designated Substance - Ethylene Oxide.

3.9 ISOCYANATES CONTAINING MATERIALS

1. Conform to and manage and dispose of Isocyanate containing materials in accordance with R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 842, Designated Substance - Isocyanates.

3.10 LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS

1. Conform to and manage and dispose of lead containing materials to comply with R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 843, Designated Substance - Lead, Ministry of Labour (MOL) Health and Safety Guideline "Guideline - Lead on Construction Projects, and without limiting the foregoing, the following: 1. Prevent the spread of lead dust from the work area using measures

appropriate to the work to be done. Use FR polyethylene drop sheets over exterior areas, flooring such as carpeting that absorbs dust and over all flooring or exterior areas in work areas where dust and contamination cannot otherwise be safely contained.

2. Wet materials containing lead to be cut, ground, abraded, drilled, or otherwise disturbed unless wetting creates a hazard or causes damage. Use garden reservoir type low velocity fine mist sprayer. Perform work in a manner to reduce dust creation to lowest levels practicable.

3. Personnel who are required to cut, grind, abrade, drill, or otherwise disturb lead containing materials should take appropriate precautions to avoid inhalation of lead dust.


Project: 017 010 FACILITY REMEDIATION Page 1 of 8 4. Lead sheeting and/or lead containing batteries should be collected for

recycling at an appropriate facility. 5. Lead containing waste materials not considered suitable for recycling

must be disposed of off Site.

3.11 MERCURY CONTAINING MATERIALS

1. Conform to and manage and dispose of mercury containing materials in accordance with R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 844, Designated Substance - Mercury.

3.12 SILICA CONTAINING MATERIALS

1. Conform to and manage and dispose of silica containing materials in accordance with R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 845, Designated Substance - Silica.

3.13 VINYL CHLORIDE CONTAINING MATERIALS

1. Conform to and manage and dispose of vinyl chloride containing materials in accordance with R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 846, Designated Substance - Vinyl Chloride.

3.14 CHEMICALS

1. Collect all chemicals stored in the building and classify for off-site disposal.

2. Ensure only compatible chemicals are stored together.

3.15 FUEL OIL

1. Obtain waste generator registration number from the Ministry of Environment.

2. Pump out any remaining fuel oil and/or sludge within existing above-ground storage tanks on site using a licensed liquid waste disposal firm.

3. Dispose of fuel oil and/or sludge at appropriate licensed receiving facility.

4. Submit record of haulage and disposal of material to the Owner for verification of same.

3.16 MOULD

1. Take appropriate precautions for worker protection in areas where mould is present in the building, including but not limited to the following: 1. The use of personally issued air purifying respirators suitable to protect

against airborne mould. 2. Implementation of good hygiene protocols including washing hands,

face, equipment, etc. to minimize the potential inhalation and spread of mould.

3. Appropriate handling and disposal of mould containing materials to minimize the potential inhalation and spread of mould.


Project: 017 010 FACILITY REMEDIATION Page 1 of 8 3.17 OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES (ODS)

1. Conform to all federal and provincial regulations pertaining to the handling, transport, and disposal of potential ODS.

END OF SECTION

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 05500 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 1 of 11

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as

if repeated here.

1.1.2 Provide all miscellaneous metal.

1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.2.1 ASTM A325-90 Specification for High Strength Bolts for Structural

Steel Joints 1.2.2 ASTM A143-74(1989) Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement

of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement

1.2.3 ASTM A307-90 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength

1.2.4 ASTM A563M-90 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts 1.2.5 ASTM A780-90 Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated

Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized coatings 1.2.6 ASTM A666-94 Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel, Sheet,

Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar 1.2.7 CAN/CSA-S16.1-M94 Limit States Design of Steel Structures 1.2.8 CSA W47.1-92 Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of

Steel Structures 1.2.9 CSA W55.3-1965 Resistance Welding Qualification Code for

Fabricators of Structural Members Used In Buildings

1.2.10 CSA W59-1989 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) 1.2.11 CAN/CSA-G40.20-1992 General Requirements for Rolled or Welded

Structural Quality Steel 1.2.12 CAN/CSA-G40.21-1992 Structural Quality Steels

1.2.13 CAN/CSA-G164-M92 Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles 1.2.14 CAN/CGSB-1.40-M89 Primer, Structural Steel, Oil Alkyd Type 1.2.15 ASTM B209 M Aluminum, Aluminum Alloy Flat Sheet, Coils and

Plate 1.2.16 ASTM B632/ N632 M Specifications for Aluminum Alloy, Rolled Sections

and plate 1.2.17 ANSI H35.1/H35 (M) 1.2.18 ASTM 73211 B Rolled Cold Finished Aluminum & Aluminum Alloy

Bars And Wire 1.2.19 ASTM B308 / B308M Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-

T6 Standard Structural Profiles 1.2.20 ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and

Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

1.2.21 ASTM B429 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube

1.2.22 AWS D1.2 American Aluminum Welding Society: Structural Welding Code, Aluminum.

1.2.23 ASTM B209 (2014) Standard Specification for Aluminum


and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate ASTM B209M (2014) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric)

1.2.24 ASTM B221 (2014) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

1.2.25 ASTM B221M (2013) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric)

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Qualifications of Subcontractor: Execute work of this Section using a firm

thoroughly conversant with governing laws, bylaws, and regulations. Use workers skilled in work of this Section.

1.3.2 Welding

.1 Welding of structural components shall be done only by fabricators certified by CSA Welding Qualification Codes, CSA W47 or W55.3 as applicable, for welding of steel, and who shall perform welding to meet specified requirements of CSA W55.2 or W59.1, as may apply.

.2 Weld all stainless steel by the Argon Arc process. Grind smooth and polish joints, crevice free, and flush without seams.

.3 Weld all connections where possible, and bolt where not possible. Provide method to prevent loosening of nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings. Make welded joints tight, flush, and in true planes with base metals. Make welds continuous at joints where entry of water into building or into voids of members or assemblies is possible. Grind welds in exposed locations smooth in a manner that will not leave blemishes on exposed surfaces. Join members generally by inert metal arc welding where practicable, using materials recommended by manufacturers of metals being welded. Remove flux completely following welding, and grind and polish joints smooth and clean.

.4 Where galvanized steel is to be welded, provide adequate ventilation. If adequate ventilation is not available provide supplementary air circulation. In confined spaces use a respirator.

.5 Where Aluminum is to be welded, provide adequate ventilation. If adequate ventilation is not available provide supplementary air circulation. In confined spaces use a respirator.

Welding Materials: 1. Filler Metals: AWS D1.2.

2. Electrodes and Equipment Settings: As recommended by the filler metal manufacturer for the position, thickness and conditions of use. 3. Furnish written verification to the University that filler metal is appropriate to the materials and welding process

.6 Touch up all uncoated weld areas.


1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

1.4.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions, of all the Work of this Section, large-scale detail of members and materials, of connection and jointing details, and of anchorage devices, dimensions, gauges, thicknesses, description of materials, metal finishing, as well as all other pertinent data and information, for Consultant's review before fabrication.

1.4.2 Shop drawings of stairs, screens, and other load bearing and/or force-

resulting components such as handrail/guardrails, `L` frames, HSS posts & beams, `L` closures, hinges, brackets, supports & perforated screens, etc. shall be designed by & bear the seal and signature of a registered in Ontario Professional Engineer with a Certificate of Practice & Appropriate Liability Insurance (minimum $1,000,000.00).

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION 1.5.1 Maintain protection provided for Work of this Section from time of

installation until final finishes are applied or to final cleanup. 1.5.2 Protect prime-painted and galvanized surfaces from damage. 1.5.3 Protect exposed surfaces of prefinished metal work which does not receive

site finishing with protective coatings or wrappings. Use materials recommended by finishers or manufacturers of metals, to ensure that method is sufficiently protective, easily removable, and harmless to the finish.

1.5.4 Load and store galvanized articles as follows to prevent the formation of

wet storage stain:

.1 Stack the articles or bundle to allow air between the galvanized surfaces during transport from the supplier. Load the material in such a manner that continuous drainage could occur.

.2 Raise the articles from the ground and separate with strip spacers to

provide free access of air to most parts of the surface. Incline in a manner which will give continuous drainage. Under no circumstances will galvanized steel be allowed to rest on cinders, clinkers, wet soil or decaying vegetation.

.3 Handle galvanized articles in such a manner as to avoid any

mechanical damage and to minimize distortion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 General: Metals shall be free from defects which impair strength or

durability, or which are visible. Metals shall be new, of best quality, and free


from rust, or waves, or buckles, clean, straight, and with sharply defined profiles.

2.1.2 Metals

.1 Steel: Structural: hot rolled to meet requirements of CAN3-G40.21, Grade 50W for tubes and Grade 44W for flat shapes. Sheet: cold-rolled furniture steel, double annealed, mill stretched and levelled, and fully pickled. Otherwise, steel shall be hot-rolled or cold-rolled of alloy to suit needs of fabrication, use, and appearance.

.2 Stainless Steel: Type 302 or 304 alloy conforming to ASTM A167, No. 4

finish, including brushed finished stainless steel sheet for countertops.

.3 Aluminum: Aluminum sheet, bent aluminum sheet & plate, 3003 H14

alum.

.4 Perforated metal to be used for screens, ventilating hoods, and windows refer to drawings and specifcations;

A. Perforated metal shall be mild steel perforated ½’ dia. X 11/16: staggered centres x 16 ga, sheared and brake formed as per drawings, as manufactured by Ferrier Wire Goods Company Ltd.

Or approved equal, note alternates must be submitted prior to close of tender. B. Welded to steel 2”x2”x ¼” ‘L’ frame complete with 1”x1”x1/8” st. ‘L’ closure C. Welded or Bolted to 3 ½”x3 ½”x1/4” HSS columns and screwed to existing wood structure @16” O.C. D. All bolts, screws, nuts & connections to be stainless steels or galvanized, including hinges, handles and closure plates and padlock connections, (Note provide di-electric protection for alum. To steel connections, typical) E. Loading: At a uniform load of 100 pounds per square foot, deflection shall not exceed ¼ inch over the required span. F. Finish: all exposed steel to be galvanized all exposed aluminum to be sealed with a clear aluminum sealer

2.1.3 Primers and Coatings

.1 Interior Steel in Dry Areas: Quick drying oil alkyd conforming to CISC/CPMA 2.75.

.2 Exterior Steel, Interior Steel in Unheated Areas, Steel Embedded in

Concrete: Hot dip galvanized conforming to CSA G164. .3 Cold Galvanizing Coating Touch-Up: W.R. Meadows "Galvafroid" or

Kerry Industries "Z.R.C." zinc rich coating or similar manufacturer containing minimum 90% zinc by weight.

.4 Exposed exterior sheet metal items of aluminum must have a baked-on, factory-applied color coating of polyvinylidene fluoride (PVF2) or other equivalent fluorocarbon coating applied after


metal substrates have been cleaned and pretreated. Provide finish coating dry-film thickness of 0.020 to 0.033 mm 0.8 to 1.3 mils and color of (clear).

.5 Isolation Coating: Black, alkali-resistant bitumastic enamel conforming to CAN/CGSB 1.108.

2.1.4 Fastenings: Use nuts and bolts conforming to ASTM A307, A325, and A563 as applicable.

.1 For interior work, use cadmium-plated fastenings where other

protection is not specified. .2 For exterior work, (exterior perforated panels and bent alum.

Support ‘L’) and interior wet areas such as but not limited to shower rooms, change rooms, pools, use 300 series stainless steel.

2.1.5 Anchors and Shims: For exposed anchorage of aluminum, use stainless steel

and otherwise to match metal anchored. For non-exposed work, anchors and shims may be galvanized steel.

2.1.6 Pipe: To ASTM A53, extra strong steel pipe for bollards. 2.1.7 Bituminous Paint: Alkali-resisting to meet specified requirements of

CAN/CGSB-1.108, Type 2. 2.2 DESIGN AND FABRICATION 2.2.1 Generally

.1 Fabricate Work of this Section with machinery and tools specifically designed for the intended manufacturing processes, and with skilled tradespersons.

.2 Fit and assemble work in the shop. When this is not possible, make a

trial shop assembly.

2.2.2 Construction

.1 Fabricate Work with materials, component sizes, metal gauges, reinforcing, anchors, and fasteners of adequate strength to withstand intended use, and with allowable design factors imposed by Jurisdictional Authorities.

.2 Ensure that Work will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of

joints and seams, distortion, and permanent deformation.


2.2.3 Assembly

.1 Accurately cut, machine, and fit joints, corners, copes and mitres so that junctions between components fit together tightly, and in true planes.

.2 Fasten Work with concealed methods, unless otherwise indicated

on the Drawings. .3 Weld all connections where possible, and bolt where not possible,

and cut off bolts flush with nuts. Countersink bolt heads and provide method to prevent loosening of nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings.

.4 Make welded joints tight, flush, and in true planes with base metals,

and continuous at joints where entry of water into building or into voids of members or assemblies is possible. Continuously grind and make smooth welds in exposed locations.

.5 Provide for differential movements within assemblies and at

junctions of assemblies with surrounding work. .6 Plug galvanizing vent holes with pear shaped fishing weights

hammered in place and filed smooth. .7 Fabricate shims of galvanized steel of sizes required.

2.2.4 Finish Work

.1 Provide holes and connections for Work installed under other Sections of this Specification.

.2 Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials, including

holes. .3 Cap open ends of sections exposed to view, such as pipes,

channels, angles, and other similar work.

2.2.5 Prime Painting of Steel: Clean all loose mill scale, rust, dirt, weld flux, and spatter from Work after fabrication. Grind smooth sharp projections, and manufacturing marks and labels. Prepare for prime painting by blast cleaning to SSPC-SP6. Apply to steel a shop prime coat of paint. Work paint into corners, and onto open areas smoothly. Deliver work to site with primer undamaged. Paint all surfaces except those to be welded in field, encased in concrete, or that are machined or galvanized. Paint surfaces that are inaccessible to finish field painting with two coats of primer.

2.2.6 Galvanized Steel


.1 Galvanize steel members, fabrications, and assemblies after

fabrication by the hot dip process in accordance with CSA G164. Minimum coating Z275.

.2 Galvanize bolts, nuts and washers and iron and steel hardware

components in accordance with CSA G164. .3 Safeguard products against steel embrittlement in conformance

with ASTM A143. .4 Design features which may lead to difficulties during galvanizing

shall be pointed out prior to dipping. .5 The composition of metal in the galvanizing bath shall be not less

than 98.0% zinc.

2.2.7 Mechanical Damage: Repair areas damaged by welding, flame cutting, or during handling, transport or erection (in accordance with ASTM A780) using one of the following methods whenever the damage exceeds 4.7 mm in width:

.1 Cold Galvanizing Compound

.1 Ensure surfaces to be reconditioned with cold galvanized zinc-rich compound are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease and corrosion products.

.2 Power clean areas to be repaired to near white metal

condition. To ensure that a smooth reconditioned coating can be effected, extend surface preparation into the undamaged galvanized compound.

.3 Touch up using specified cold galvanizing compound. .4 Spray or brush apply paint in minimum two coats until a dry

film thickness of 4 mils minimum has been achieved. Apply a finish coat of aluminum paint to provide a colour blend with the surrounding galvanizing. Verify coating thickness by measurements with a magnetic or electromagnetic gauge.

.2 Treat galvanized surfaces that are cut, welded, or threaded with

three coats of cold galvanizing compound immediately following damage to galvanized protection.

.3 Coating shall be continuous, adherent, as smooth and evenly

distributed as possible and free from any defect that is detrimental to the stated end use of the coated article.

.4 Determine the integrity of the coating by visual inspection and

coating thickness measurements.


.5 The galvanized coating shall be sufficiently adherent to withstand

normal handling during transport and erection.

2.2.8 Wet Storage Stain: Remove any wet storage stain if formed and discovered prior to leaving the galvanizer's plant, unless late pick up or acceptance of delivery has necessitated the material being stored in unfavourable conditions. In any event, remove wet storage stain before installation so that premature failure of the coating will not occur. Remove wet storage stain as follows:

.1 Arrange the objects so that their surfaces dry rapidly. .2 Remove light deposits by means of a stiff bristle (not wire) brush.

Remove heavier deposits by brushing with a 5% solution of sodium or potassium dichromate with the addition of 0.1% by volume of concentrated sulphuric acid. Apply with a stiff bristle brush and leave for approximately 30 seconds before thoroughly rinsing and drying. Alternatively a product such as Oakite Highlite, or approved equivalent, which is intended for this purpose may be used according to manufacturer's recommendations.

2.2.9 Stainless Steel Work

.1 The stainless steel fabricator shall take all necessary precautions to safeguard against latent surface discolouration due to disturbance of the natural protective oxide coating of the material or to contamination from other sources. The fabrication process shall include proper and adequate cleaning in accordance with the recommended practices set out in ASTM A3.80-78.

.2 Workmanship shall be the best standard practice for this type of

work. Do all stainless steel work in accordance with the applicable instructions set forth in the "Technical Data" handbook on stainless steel available from ATLAS STEELS.

.3 Do all stainless steel fabrication in clean shops, located away from

areas where carbon steel is burnt, ground, or cut with abrasive wheels to ensure that carbon steel dust will not be embedded into the stainless steel.

.4 Prior to fabrication of stainless steel, clean tools and dies which

have been used on carbon steels. .5 Ensure tools and dies use for forming and cutting stainless steel are

free of nicks and other damage. .6 Use ‘virgin’ material only. .7 Advise Consultant of schedule for fabrication with sufficient notice

to permit Consultant review of materials and shop conditions.


2.2.10 List of Miscellaneous Metals: This Section includes, but not limited to the

following:

.1 Anchors, bolts, inserts, sleeves for work in this Section.

.2 Locker supports, anchors,etc.

.3 Channel framing, post legs and brackets for vanity and work counters – all to be galvanized .4 Angles or other shapes cast in concrete. .5 Floor plates. .6 Security Screens. .7 Hangers and supports (for work in this Section only). .8 Perforated & woven wire screen panels .9 Galvanized bent steel ‘L’s and ‘C’s support brackets and closure pieces complete with slotted connections .10 Galvanized bent steel sill and closure pieces .11 Galvanized Handrails & guardrails .12 Galvanized steel grates- outdoor light wells; Galvanized steel bar grating size 2 ½”x3/16”, welded to 2”x2”x1/4” welded steel ’L’ frame all to be Galvanized, bolted in place, typical .13 Stainless steel built in counters and sinks

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION OF SITE 3.1.1 Take site measurements to ensure that Work is fabricated to fit surrounding

construction around obstructions and projections in place, or yet to be put in place to suit service locations, and inaccuracies of construction.

3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 Install work plumb, true, square, straight, level, and accurately and tightly

fitted together and to surrounding work. 3.2.2 Work includes anchor bolts, bolts, washers and nuts, lag screws, expansion

shields, toggles, straps, sleeves, brackets, clips, shims and other items necessary for secure installation, as required to support and/or resist loads and forces, and as required by Jurisdictional Authorities.

3.2.3 Provide anchors at 600 mm o.c. for cast-in-place work unless shown

otherwise. 3.2.4 Attach work to wood by screws through countersunk holes in metal.

3.2.5 Attach work to masonry with lead plugs and non-corrosion fastenings to support load with a safety factor of 3.

3.2.6 Insulate between dissimilar metals, or between metals and masonry or

concrete with bituminous paint to prevent electrolysis. 3.3 PATCHING AND REFINISHING


3.3.1 After erection, touch up prime paint and galvanized finishes damaged or

removed during installation. 3.3.2 Remove damaged, dented, defaced, defectively finished, or tool-marked

components and replace with new. 3.3.3 Refinish shop-applied finishes in field only with acceptance of Consultant. 3.3.4 Clean off dirt on surfaces resulting from installation work. 3.4 MISCELLANEOUS 3.4.1 Generally

.1 Ensure that all Drawings and Specification Sections, including those for structural, mechanical, and electrical work as applicable are consulted to establish the limits of work included in this Section.

3.4.2 Lintels and Shelf Angles

.1 Lintels or shelf angles secured to a structural steel member are the responsibility of structural steel trade.

.2 Other lintels and shelf angles are the responsibility of the

miscellaneous metals section. .3 Hot dip galvanize exterior lintels and shelf angles, and prime paint

those occurring on interior. .4 Refer to Structural Drawing for lintel schedule. Hot dip galvanize

shelf angles and bracing for support of masonry. Provide 6 mm expansion gaps at corners and between lengths of shelf angles. Bolt angles to allow for construction inaccuracies and tolerances unless shown as welded. At corners, bolts should not exceed 250 mm from corner. Maximum thickness of shims shall not exceed 9 mm.

3.4.3 Concealed Support Elements and Framing

.1 Supply and install all support elements and framing as shown on the Drawings except where framing is part of building structural steel. Construct supports from rolled steel sections assembled by welding.

.2 Design supports to withstand, within acceptable deflection

limitations, their own weight, the weight of the items to be supported, loads imposed by the motion of supported items, where applicable, and all live loads, static and dynamic which might be applied to the supported items in the course of their normal function. Design supports with a safety factor of 3. Design supports further as required to accommodate structural deflection.

.3 Provide all accessories, inserts and fixings necessary for attachment

of supports to building structure. Drill supports as required to receive


attachment of supported items. Arrange supports to avoid conflicts with pipes, ducts, precast concrete connections, thermal and vapour barrier construction, framing provided under other sections, and such that supports and their fixings are fully concealed from view within the finished Work.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 05530 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation,

City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 WELDED STEEL BAR GRATING Page 1 of 2 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 Scope of Work

The contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown and specified and are required to furnish and install grating, stair treads and supports.

1.2 Quality Assurance

A. Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manuals designated ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 for Steel, Stainless Steel and Aluminum Gratings and Stair Treads.

B. The steel used in the Bearing Bars shall be of rectangular section and conform to ASTM A1011 Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip. The Cross Bars shall be of ASTM A510 Carbon Steel Rods and Course Round Wire.

C. No substitution of materials will be accepted unless they are submitted for review and the Architect/Engineer approves their use.

1.3 Submittals

A. The contractor shall submit to the owner or its representative, for approval, shop drawings for fabrication and erection of the work. Included shall be plans, elevations, sections and details of the work.

B. The contractor shall submit the manufacturer’s specifications, load tables, anchor details and standard installation details.

C. The contractor may be required to take field dimensions to verify “as built” conditions to ensure proper fit of grating.

PART 2: PRODUCT 2.1 General

A. Grating shall be Amico Standard Welded Type “W” 19 p 4 resistance welded grating as manufactured by Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AIMCO) or approved equal.

B. Bearing bars: Rectangular steel bars of an appropriate depth and thickness for the required load, on 1 3/16” centers.

C. Cross Bars: Twisted wire rod, at 4” on center, resistance welded to the bearing bars and at right angles to them.

D. Surface: The bearing bars shall have a serrated surface. E. Loading: At a uniform load of 100 pounds per square foot, deflection shall not exceed ¼

inch over the required span. F. Finish: Manufacturers standard Galvanized.

PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 Shop Fabrication

A. All required cutting, fitting and welding shall be performed in the manufacturers shop in accordance with the approved shop drawings and shall be in compliance with the NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manual tolerances and welding standards.

B. All cutouts to clear obstructions shall have a recommended clearance of 1 inch. When banding and toe plates are required they shall be welded to the grating in accordance with NAAMM standards.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 05530 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation,

City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 WELDED STEEL BAR GRATING Page 2 of 2

C. The finish galvanizing shall be applied after all of the required fabrication is complete. 3.2 Installation

A. The grating shall be received at the job site by the contractor, unloaded and protected from damage prior to the requirement for it to be installed.

B. The installing contractor shall prepare the site for installation, determining that deviations from the approved drawings are corrected prior to grating placement.

C. Grating shall be installed in accordance with the approved shop drawings and the installation clearances called for in the NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manual, including the use of the prescribed anchor system.

D. Pipe penetrations of 4” or less shall be cut in the field. When installed, Grating Cross Bars shall be in alignment.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 METAL STUD SYSTEMS Page 1 of 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if

repeated here. 1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.2.2 CAN/CGSB-19.21-M87, Sealing and bedding Compound Acoustical,

ASTM C645-88, Specification for non-load bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. 1.2.3 Non-loadbearing channel and stud framing: to ASTM C645, 92 mm stud size; roll formed from .92mm thickness hot dipped galvanized sheet steel, for screw attachment of gypsum board. Knock out service holes at 460 mm centres. 1.2.4 Floor and ceiling tracks to: ASTM C645, in widths to suit stud sizes, 32mm flange height. 1.2.5 Metal channel stiffener: 1.4 mm thick cold rolled steel, coated with rust inhibiting coating. 1.2.6 Acoustical sealant to: Can/CGSB-19.21 1.2.7 Insulating strip: rubberized, moisture resistant 3 mm thick foam strip, 12mm wide, with self sticking adhesive on one face, lengths as required. 1.2.8 Align partition tracks at floor and ceiling or steel deck and secure at 600 mm o.c. minimum. 1.2.9 Install damp proof course under stud shoe tracks of partitions at slab on grade. Place studs vertically at 400mm o.c. and not more than 50mm from abutting walls at each side of openings and corners. Position studs in tracks at floor and ceiling. Cross brace steel studs as required to provide rigid installation to manufacturer’s recommendations. 1.2.10 Erect metal studs to tolerance of 1:1000. Attach studs to underside of ceiling or deck as indicated using screws. 1.2.11 Install two continuous beads of acoustical sealant under studs and tracks around perimeter of sound control partitions. 1.2.12 Where required install structural stud systems. 1.2.13 Where required provide a designed stud deflection system where walls or partitions meet roof deck, or structure that requires deflection tolerance of minimum 1” or greater as required.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 Rough Carpentry Page 1 of 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as

if repeated here. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2.1 N.L.G.A. 1991 National Lumber Grades Authority, Standard Grading Rules for

Canadian Lumber. 1.2.2 Identify lumber by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian

Lumber Standards Administration Board. 1.2.3 Plywood identification: by grade mark in accordance with applicable CSA

Standards. 1.2.4 Each panel of plywood required to be fire retardant treated to bear ULC

label indicating Flame Spread Classification (FSC), and smoke developed. 1.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.3.1 CSA-B111-1974 Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples 1.3.2 CSA-0121-M1978 Douglas Fir Plywood 1.3.3 CAN/CSA-0141-91 Softwood Lumber 1.3.4 CSA-0151-M78 Canadian Softwood Plywood

1.3.5 CAN/CSA-080 Series M89 Wood Preservation 1.3.6 CAN/ULC-S102-M88 Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies

1.3.7 CAN/CSA G164-M92 Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped

Objects 1.3.8 CAN/CSA-080.27-M89 Fire Retardant Treatment of Plywood by

Pressure Processes 1.3.9 CAN3-086-M84 Engineering Design in Wood (Working Stress

Design) 1.3.10 CAN/CSA 086.1-M89 Engineering Design in Wood (Limit States

Design) 1.3.11 NFPA 80-1990 Fire Doors and Windows.


Project: 017 010 Rough Carpentry Page 2 of 5 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.4.1 When it is required that wood maintain dimensional stability and tolerances,

to ensure accurate installation of later work, store and install it only in dry areas and when no further installation of moist materials is contemplated.

1.4.2 Accept delivery of pressed steel door frames. Be responsible for any

damage to frames from time of delivery until accepted by the Consultant after installation.

1.4.3 Provide dry storage areas for rough carpentry materials. Stack lumber 150

mm clear of floor. 1.4.4 Protect fire-retardant materials against high humidity and moisture. 1.4.5 Install temporary wood protection strips at door jambs and similar locations

vulnerable to damage. 1.4.6 Cover materials stored on site with tarpaulins or polyethylene sheets to

prevent moisture, absorption and impairment of structural and aesthetic-properties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Except as indicated or specified otherwise lumber shall be softwood S4S,

SPF Species moisture content (MC) not greater than 19% at time of installation in accordance with the following standards;

.1 CSA 0141 .2 NLGA Standard grading rules for Canadian Lumber.

2.1.2 Machine stress - rated lumber is acceptable for all purposes. 2.1.3 Lumber

.1 S-DRY, graded and stamped to National Lumber Grades Authority, Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.

.1 Studs: spruce, pine or fir (SPF), 121c. "STUD". .2 Wood Deck: 38mm (2”nom.) Tongue & Groove plank with a

moisture content of 15% refer to wood deck section 06150 OF specification.

.2 Blocking, furring, strapping, curbs, battens, nailers, bracing,

bridging, and cants: spruce, pine or fir (SPF), standard or better grade.

.3 Exterior wood: wood species and grades as specified above in

paragraphs 2.1.3.1 and 2.1.3.2; pressure treated with CCA to CAN/CSA-080-Series-M89, minimum retention 4.0 kg/m³ by assay.


Project: 017 010 Rough Carpentry Page 3 of 5 .1 Preservative: chromated copper arsenate (CCA) to AWPA

Pt-81 as amended by CAN/CSA-080-Series-M89.

2.1.4 Pressure Applied Wood Preservative: Pressure applied CCA preservative with 6.5 kg/m³ average retention for roof woodwork and wood in contact with floor slabs or walls in areas to be waterproofed, and 4 kg/m³ elsewhere; "Outdoor Wood" by Hickson Building Products or "Green Pentox" by Osmose Wood Preserving Company, or "C50" by Timber Specialties Limited. Apply preservative in accordance with CAN3-080 Series.

2.1.5 Surface Applied Wood Preservative: Copper napthenate of 10%

pentachlorophenol solution, water repellent preservative. 2.1.6 Fire Retardant Treatment of Lumber and Plywood : "Dricon" by J.A. Biewer or

equivalent, conforming to CAN2-080.20 and CAN2-080.27 to provide a flame spread rating of 25 or less, in accordance with ULC test method CAN4/ULC-S102.

2.1.7 Plywood: Conforming to CSA 0121, "G1S" Douglas Fir. 2.1.8 Nails, Spikes, Staples and Other Connectors: to CSA B111, galvanized for

exterior work, interior highly humid areas and for treated lumber; plain finish elsewhere. Use spiral thread nails except where specified otherwise.

2.1.9 Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Screws and Pin Type Fasteners: Hot dip galvanized to

CAN/CSA G164 for exterior work and for pressure preservative treated lumber. Elsewhere for sight exposed surfaces, prime paint. Use surface fastenings of following types, except where specified type is indicated:

.1 To hollow masonry, gypsum board and panel surfaces use toggle

bolts. .2 To solid masonry and concrete use expansion shield with lag screw,

or lead plug with wood screw.

2.2 FABRICATION 2.2.1 Comply with CAN3-086 or CAN3-086.1 for all fabrication and assembly of

structural components off site, or on site. 2.2.2 Design construction details for expansion and contraction of materials. 2.2.3 Machine sand surfaces exposed in the finished work. Hand sand to an even

smooth surface free from scratches. 2.2.4 Pressure fire retardant treat lumber prior to final milling. Each piece shall

bear the mark of Underwriters Laboratories of Canada indicating conformance to CAN4/ULC-S102.


Project: 017 010 Rough Carpentry Page 4 of 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERALLY 3.1.1 Lay out work carefully and to accommodate work of others. Cut and fit

accurately. Erect in position indicated on drawings. Align, level, square, plumb and secure work permanently in place. Join work only over solid backing.

3.1.2 Bore holes true to line, and to same size as bolts. Drive bolts into place for snug fit, and use plates or washers for boltheads and nut bearings. Turn up bolts and lag screws tightly when installed, and again just before being concealed by other work or at completion of work.

3.1.3 Cooperate with work of other Sections to ensure that unity of actions will

ensure orderly progress to meet construction schedule. 3.1.4 Provide anchors, bolts and inserts required for attachment of the work of this

Section to those performing the work of other Sections, and who are responsible for their installation.

3.1.5 Work shall include such rough hardware as nails, bolts, nuts, washers, screws,

clips, hangers, connectors, and strap iron required for installation of work, and all operating hardware required on work of this Section for temporary work.

3.2 GROUNDS, BLOCKING, STRAPPING, FURRING, SLEEPERS AND NAILERS 3.2.1 Do not regard grounds, blocking, furring, and such other fastening

provisions as shown on Drawings as exact or complete. Provide required provisions for fastenings, located and secured to suit site conditions and adequate for intended support.

3.2.2 Cut fastening work into lengths as long as practicable, and with square

ends. Erect work plumb, in true planes, and fastened rigidly in place. 3.2.3 Rough bucks for openings jambs, heads, and sills shall be minimum 50 mm

thick, and of width of casings, or as otherwise indicated. Set bucks plumb, level, and anchored securely in place.

3.2.4 For mirrors installed over concrete block without separating gypsum board

layer, install wood blocking at 450 mm o.c. behind mirrors. 3.2.5 Provide wood furring and strapping for applied facings, caseworks, etc. 3.2.6 Except where steel is specifically shown, provide wood blocking and

supports in metal stud partitions for fastening of items anchored to stud partitions. Provide wood blocking and supplementary supports in metal studs supporting counters and similar items.

3.2.7 Provide 16 mm thick fire retardant treated plywood fastened to metal stud

framing, at washroom mirrors and light valances in gypsum board partitions.


Project: 017 010 Rough Carpentry Page 5 of 5 3.2.8 Coordinate with Section 09250, for the installation of wood blocking for

fastening of wall mounted accessories and casework. 3.3 WOOD PRESERVATIVE 3.3.1 Use pressure impregnated material for lumber and plywood used in roofing

work and for items previously specified in "Materials". Treat all bolt holes and freshly cut surfaces with a minimum of 2 coats of 10% CCA concentrate.

3.3.2 For material cut or bored after pressure treatment, treat surfaces of material with surface applied wood preservative, before installation.

3.3.3 Apply preservative by dipping, or by brush to completely saturate and maintain wet film on surface for minimum 3 minute soak on lumber and one minute soak on plywood.

3.3.4 Re-treat surfaces exposed by cutting, trimming or boring with liberal brush application of preservative before installation.

3.4 CURBS, BASES, SUPPORTS AND BLOCKING 3.4.1 Install blocking at roofs as indicated on Drawings, secure permanently to

structure with galvanized 9 mm bolts. Locate fastenings within 300 mm from ends and uniformly spaced between. Space bolts at 1.2 m and nails at 600 mm centres except where indicated otherwise. Trim and level to accommodate cambers, falls and thickness of insulation, and to receive flashings and applied roofing.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF HOLLOW METAL STEEL FRAMES 3.5.1 Set frames plumb and square in their exact location. Firmly block and brace

to prevent shifting. Shim up where required to ensure proper alignment dimensions from finished floor to head of frame. Install temporary wood spreaders at mid-height.

3.5.2 Where pressed steel frames are installed in concrete walls, secure frames to concrete using lead expansion shields and anchor bolts through pipe sleeves. Perform drilling of concrete as required. Fill recessed bolt heads flush to frame face with approved metal filler and sand smooth.

3.5.3 Install fire rated door frames in accordance with Chapters 2 and 3 of NFPA 80 as specified in OBC 3.1.8.5

3.6 FIRE RETARDANT TREATED FURRING AND PLYWOOD BACKING 3.6.1 Blocking and framing in ceiling spaces, partitions and bulkheads and

plywood backboards supporting electrical panels, disconnects, splitters and other electrical devices shall be fire retardant treated.

3.6.2 Do not expose treated material to dampness between the time the material is treated and the time the painter's finish is applied. Carefully sand surfaces which show evidence of salt deposits to remove such evidence before finish is applied. Provide identification that these specifications have been complied with on large items, and bundles of small items. This requirement also applies to all fire retardant treated materials.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 1 of 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Conditions are a part of this Section and shall apply as if

repeated here. 1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.2.1 AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers of Canada 1991 1.2.2 CSA 0115-M1982 Hardwood and Decorative Plywood 1.2.3 CSA 0151-M1978 Canadian Softwood 1.2.4 CAN3-0188-M78 Interior Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard 1.2.5 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association Rules for

Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood and Cypress 1.2.6 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority Standard Grading Rules

for Canadian Lumber 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 Shop Drawings

.1 Submit shop drawings to Consultant in accordance with General Conditions, for carpentry items.

.2 Clearly indicate the material being supplied and show all connections,

attachments, reinforcing, anchorage and location of exposed fastenings.

1.3.2 Samples: Submit samples in accordance with Section 01300. 1.4 QUALITY STANDARD 1.4.1 Do millwork to ‘premium grade’ standards of the Architectural Woodwork

Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC) 1991. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Generally

.1 Where the designation "NLGA" appears hereinafter, it shall mean NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, approved by the Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board.

.2 Kiln dry all lumber to maximum 8% moisture content.

2.1.2 Nailing Strips, Blocking, Furring and Strapping: NLGA 122c, "Standard" light framing.


Project: 017 010 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 2 of 5 2.1.3 Hardwood Plywood: Conform to CSA 0115, plain-sliced AWMAC Grade 1 hard

Birch veneer core plywood with minimum weight of 593 kg/cu m (37 lbs/cu ft). Hardwood Plywood: Conform to CSA 0115, plain-sliced AWMAC Grade 1 hard (sugar) maple veneer, medium density particle board core with minimum weight of 593 kg/cu m (37 lbs/cu ft). Birch Veneer Core Plywood, Baltic Birch Plywood.

2.1.4 Softwood Plywood: Conform to CSA 0151, Canadian Softwood Plywood and

Douglas Fir Plywood to CSA 0121 2.1.5 Marine Grade Mahogany Veneer Core Plywood: Conform to BS 1088 Marine

plywood standard, waterproof glue, face veneers solid free from defects, core veneers similar

2.1.6 Pressure Applied Wood Preservative: Pressure applied CCA preservative with 6.5

kg/m³ average retention for plywood at pool. Apply preservative in accordance with CAN3-080 Series.

2.1.7 Nails, Spikes and Staples: To CSA B111. Galvanized for exterior work, interior

highly-humid areas and for treated lumber; plain finish elsewhere. Use spiral thread nails, except where specified otherwise.

2.1.8 Fire-Retardant Pressure Treatment: ‘Dricon’ pressure-impregnated fire-retardant

treated plywood by J.A. Biewer (Canada) Ltd. or equivalent, conforming to CSA 080.27, to provide a flame spread rating of 25 or less, in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102-M88. Apply to maple hardwood veneer ceiling panels.

2.1.9 Hardwood

.1 Maple: hard (sugar) maple, NHLA Select and Better Grade, AWMAC premium grade.

.2 Birch for miscellaneous exposed trim: quarter sawn, architectural grade,

white birch matched for compatibility of grain and colour.

2.1.10 Wood Ceilings and Soffits

.1 Select grade SPF, 140 mm x 19 mm, tongue and grooved, ‘Veed” one side. Kiln dry to 15% maximum moisture content.

.2 Surface applied wood preservative, Osmose Pentox clear (5% PCP) water

repellent. .3 Fire retardant treated wood in conformance with OBC 3.1.5.10.(3).

2.1.11 Hardwood Veneer for Natural Finish: Specie: Northern Maple or Birch flat sawn to

match approved sample, minimum 0.75 mm thick, architectural quality, premium grade selected for uniformity of colour, figure and grain. Piece veneers shall be parallel-chipped, jointed by tapeless splicer and edge-glued. Face veneers shall not contain open joints, face depressions, glue stain, patches, plastic repair or any other manufacturing irregularities or defects. Veneer shall be supplied by General Woods and Veneer or approved equivalent.


Project: 017 010 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 3 of 5

2.1.12 Exposed Fasteners for Hardwood Ceiling Panels: ‘Spanner Pan Head Sheet Metal Screws’ by Spae-Naur, 18-8 stainless steel, size as required for secure fastening with minimum 13 mm head diameter.

2.1.13 Laminated Hardwood Benches: assembly of 38 mm x 38m hard (sugar) maple,

NHLA Select and Better Grade, AWMAC premium grade laminated with suitable waterproof adhesive and through-bolted with 10 mm diameter stainless steel or brass threaded rod, washers and nuts.

2.2 FABRICATION 2.2.1 General Workmanship

.1 Fabricate work in accordance with the best practice by skilled craftspersons of companies specializing in the work specified and to the requirements of other trades.

.2 Use running members in greatest lengths obtainable. .3 Machine-dressed work shall be slow fed using sharp cutters and the

finished work shall be free from drag, feathers, slivers or roughness of any kind. Remove machine marks by sanding.

.4 In finished work, machine-sand exposed surfaces in the shop and hand-

sand on the job to even smooth surfaces, free from scratches, ready for finishing.

.5 Frame materials with tight joints rigidly held in place. Use glue blocks

where necessary. .6 Assemble work in shop and deliver to job ready for installation as far as

practicable. Leave ample allowance for fitting and scribing on the job. .7 Take care to prevent the opening up of glue lines in the finished work. .8 Joints made on the on the job shall be equal in quality and workmanship

to joints made in the shop. .9 Finish exposed edges of plywood and particleboard with solid stock edge

banding, glued in place. .10 Glue and blind screw or nail all work unless otherwise specified. Set

surface nails and plug surface screws with wood plugs of material to match surface.

.11 Accurately scribe, cope, and mitre members where required. .12 Erect work plumb, level, square, and to the required lines. .13 Fabricate finished woodwork in the building free from bruises, blemishes,

mineral marks, knots, shakes and other defects. .14 Be responsible for methods of construction, and for ensuring that

materials are rigidly and securely attached and will not be loosened by the work of other trades.


Project: 017 010 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 4 of 5

.15 Take field dimensions and fabricate work to suit field dimensions.

.16 Fasten wood nailers, blocking, framing, and strapping solidly to adjacent materials in true planes.

.17 Do not permit delivery of this work to the site until the area is sufficiently

dry so that woodwork will not be damaged by excessive changes in moisture content.

2.2.2 Matching of Mahogany, Maple & Birch: Throughout the work, select with regard to

matching colour and grain. Avoid contrasting light and dark colours and mismatching.

2.2.3 Marine Grade Mahogany & Birch Veneered Panels

.1 Fabricate Marine Grade Mahogany & Birch veneered panels and sills in minimum thickness indicated, with backing sheet, 6 mm thick solid maple edge strips, and wood veneer.

.2 Provide backing sheet of sufficient thickness to compensate stresses

caused by facing sheet. Apply uniform coating of sealer on exposed veneered edges.

2.2.4 Hardwood Sills

.1 19 mm thick solid hard maple as detailed on Drawings.

2.2.5 Hardwood Benches

.1 Fabricate to sizes and configurations as detailed on Drawings.

.2 Countersink nuts and washers of through-bolts and plug with matching hardwood. Space through-bolts equally at maximum 450 mm oc and 150 mm from end of bench.

2.3 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH FOR HARDWOOD BENCHES, BARRES, SILLS AND MARINE GRADE MAHOGANY, MAPLE/ BIRCH VENEERED PANELS

2.3.1 Wood shall have AWMAC factory-applied transparent finish system as specified in

AWMAC Quality Standards 1998 System 609.2 AWMAC No.2 Catalyzed Lacquer – Custom.

2.3.2 Shop finished surfaces shall closely match the approved samples in all respects. 2.3.3 Apply stain evenly, and consistently throughout with no lighter or darker areas or

blotches. 2.3.4 Sheen shall be consistent throughout. 2.3.5 Fill nail holes and blemishes to closely match and blend with finish so as to be as

inconspicuous as possible. 2.3.6 Surfaces shall be consistently smooth and even with no "orange peel", runs, sags,

skips, drips, or rough areas.


Project: 017 010 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 5 of 5 2.3.7 Protection: Prior to shipment to the site suitably protect fitments from possible

damage prior to installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Strips and Blocking: Where wood is to be fastened to masonry, supply metal

nailing plugs to masonry section, for building into masonry joints. 3.1.2 Carpentry and Millwork

.1 Install carpentry items as detailed. .2 Execute installations and assemble work on the job using skilled forces,

under supervision of competent joinery foreman. .3 Adequately fasten units and secure in place with concealed fixings

wherever possible. Include grounds and furring where required. .4 Install work level, plumb, true, and complete in all respects. Shim as

necessary with concealed shims. Accurately scribe and closely fit face plates, filler strips and trim to irregularities of adjacent surfaces.

.5 Installation to conform to AWMAC and latest revision of specified

standards. 3.2 PREPARATION

3.2.1 Door and frames shall be prepared for, but not limited to preparations for heavy weight oversize butt hinges, continuous hinges, cylindrical locksets, concealed vertical rod and mortise lock case exit devices, surface door closers and concealed overhead stops.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 INSTALLATION OF DOORS AND FINISH HARDWARE Page 1 of 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if

repeated here. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION 1.2.1 Installation of hollow metal, and wood doors. 1.2.2 Installation of finish hardware for hollow metal doors, wood doors. Finish hardware

shall be specified in a Finish Hardware Schedule after award of this Contract. 1.2.3 Installation of door grilles. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.3.1 Accept delivery of doors and finish hardware. 1.3.2 Inspect doors for damage, upon delivery to the site. Hollow metal doors which

cannot be readily corrected by sanding, shall be promptly returned to the manufacturer.

1.3.3 Store doors in a dry and clean location. Store in a temperature and humidity

controlled area. Stack 150 mm off the floor. 1.3.4 Be responsible for any damage to doors and hardware from time of delivery until

accepted by Owner after Substantial Performance. 1.4 JOB SITE CONTROL AND DISTRIBUTION OF HARDWARE 1.4.1 Provide locked room for the storage of hardware at the job and a person

responsible for the control and distribution of hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Finish Hardware

.1 Set, fit and adjust hardware according to manufacturer's directions. Hardware shall operate freely. After installation, adjust door closers for closing and latching speed and panic devices for proper latching. Protect installed hardware from damage and paint spotting.

.2 Prepare doors and frames for material specified in the Finish Hardware

Schedule. Preparations shall include, but not be limited to, those required for over-weight oversize hinges, continuous hinges, mortise locks, mortise and concealed vertical rod exit devices, surface and concealed door closers, concealed overhead stops and slides.


Project: 017 010 INSTALLATION OF DOORS AND FINISH HARDWARE Page 2 of 3

.3 Predrill kickplates and doors before attachment of plates. Apply with

water-resistant adhesive and countersunk stainless steel screws. .4 Locate hardware in accordance with requirements specified in Hardware

Schedule. .5 Thresholds: Site measure openings before cutting. Set thresholds on two

continuous beads of caulking conforming to Section 07900. .6 Door Closers and Holders: Install door closers in such a manner that door

opening is unaffected, and that maximum swing is permitted. .7 Weatherstripping & Sound Sealing of Doors

.1 Install weatherstripping/sound seal effectively to tightly seal entire perimeter of doors. Secure in place with non-ferrous screws, in accurate alignment.

.2 Maintain integrity of weatherseal/sound sealing at head of doors

fitted with closers. Adapt weatherstripping/sound sealing as required to achieve specified performance and provide any necessary accessories.

.8 Electronic Hardware

.1 Installation of all electronic automatic door operator components, security components such as magnetic locks, door status switches, card readers, processors, transformers, and other electric devices shall be included in the contract price. Installation shall be by the Hardware Supplier selected by the Owner.

.2 All wiring will be supplied and installed by Electrical Division 16

including conduit, boxes and other electrical appurtenances, including connections and terminations. Be responsible for ensuring that all wiring work is done in accordance with the suppliers wiring diagrams and directions.

.3 Arrange for testing and commissioning of system by the

distributor of the system. Submit a copy of reports to the Consultant.

.4 Note: When installing electric strikes, it is imperative that doors

are perfectly aligned to enable the bolt to properly close. Also ensure that rubber silencers do not impair the proper strike action required. Adjust or remove silencers as necessary.

3.1.2 Wood Doors

.1 Prepare doors for installation with the required bevels, clearances and mortises for hardware. Install all applicable hardware, including hinges.

.2 Hanging of doors. Leave 2 mm shy (recessed) from rebate, even after

bumpers are installed. Where trimmed in the field, have painter seal top and bottom edges of doors under Section 09900, Painting and Finishing.

.3 Provide hardwood stops for grilles or glass lites.


Project: 017 010 INSTALLATION OF DOORS AND FINISH HARDWARE Page 3 of 3

3.1.3 Hollow Metal and Aluminum Swing Doors

.1 Hang doors to swing easily and freely on their hinges, to remain stationary in any position, and to close tightly and evenly on frames without binding.

.2 Provide 2 mm clearance at head and jambs, and no more than 10 mm at

floor. Provide clearance for intended finish flooring.

3.1.4 Door Grilles: Install grilles in interior doors. Screw securely in position using stainless steel screws.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING OF FINISH HARDWARE 3.2.1 Check and adjust each operating hardware item to ensure proper operation and

function of unit. 3.2.2 Lubricate moving parts as recommended by hardware manufacturer. Use graphite

type lubricant if no other is recommended. 3.2.3 Repair or replace defective materials and units which cannot be adjusted and

lubricated to operate freely and smoothly. Re-install items found improperly installed.

3.2.4 Prior to date of Substantial Performance, re-adjust and re-lubricate as necessary. 3.2.5 Instruct Owner's designated personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance

of hardware and finishes at time of final hardware adjustment.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 06400 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD WORK Page 1 of 5 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated

here. 1.2 SUMMARY 1.2.1 Includes But Not Limited To .1 Fabrication of Architectural Woodwork .2 Installation of cabinet hinges & catches, drawer & tray guides, adjustable shelf

standards, and surface bolts associated with Architectural Woodwork. Finish Hardware shall be specified in a Finish Hardware Schedule after award of this Contract. Finish Hardware shall consist of, but not be limited to, recessed hinges, pulls, drawer glides, locks, and recessed adjustable shelf pilasters. This Section shall review the Finish Hardware Schedule and confirm that all quantities, sizes and types of material are suitable and correct for use prior to fabrication.

1.2.2 Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section .1 Architectural Woodwork described in Contract Documents. .1 Where room numbers and/or names are shown for locations of certain

items in this Specification, it is done as an aid and is not intended to be inclusive.

.2 Custom casework including but not limited to - .1 interior walls & ceiling & partitions .2 built-in benches .3 soffits, valences, .4 cabinetry, window frames, column enclosures, sills, display cabinets, etc. 1.3 REFERENCES

1.3.1 Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada .1 Quality Standards for Architectural Woodwork, 1998

1.3.2 Canadian General Standards Board .1 CAN/CGSB 71.20-M88, "Adhesive, Contact, Brushable" 1.3.3 Canadian Standards Association .1 CAN3-A172-M79, "High Pressure, Paper, Decorative Laminates." .2 CAN/CSA O151-M1978, "Canadian Softwood Plywood" 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 See Section 01300. 1.4.2 Product Data .1 Manufacturer's literature or cut sheets for plastic laminate. .2 Color selections. 1.4.3 Shop Drawings - Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340. 1.4.4 Samples - Submit samples of wood pre-finished with specified system. 1.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING, & STORAGE

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 06400 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD WORK Page 2 of 5

1.5.1 Assemble work at mill and deliver ready for erection insofar as possible. 1.5.2 Protect millwork from moisture and damage while in transit to job site. Unload and store

in place where it will be protected from moisture and damage and convenient to use. 1.6 QUALITY STANDARD 1.6.1 Custom grade to AWMAC 1998.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL 2.1.1 Hardwood .1 Exposed Parts .1 Solid wood - Plain sawn hard (sugar) maple or Birch. .2 Plywood - Plain sliced Birch Veneer Core Plywood +Douglas Fir

Plywood. .2 Semi-exposed parts shall be species as required for AWMAC custom grade. 2.1.2 Lumber .1 Grade - .1 No defects in boards smaller than 4000 cm2 (600 sq in.) .2 One defect per additional 1000 cm2 (150 sq in) in larger boards. .3 Select pieces for uniformity of grain and color on exposed faces and

edges. .4 No mineral grains accepted. .2 Allowable Defects - .1 Tight knots not exceeding 3.2 mm (1/8") in diameter. No loose knots

permitted. .2 Patches (dutchmen) not apparent after finishing when viewed beyond

450 mm (18"). .3 Checks or splits not exceeding 0.8 mm x 75 mm (1/32" x 3") and not

visible after finishing when viewed beyond 450 mm (18"). .4 Stains, pitch pockets, streaks, worm holes, and other defects not

mentioned are not permitted. .5 Normal grain variations, such as cats eye, bird's eye, burl, curl, and cross

grain are not considered defects. .3 Length - Use maximum lengths possible, but not required to exceed 3 000 mm

(10'0") feet) without joints. No joints closer than 1 800 mm (6'0") in straight run. .4 Moisture content - .1 6% maximum at fabrication. .2 No opening of joints due to shrinkage is permitted. 2.1.3 Panel Products .1 Core shall be medium density particle board with minimum weight of 593 kg/ cu

M (37 lbs/cu ft). .2 Hardwood veneer shall be plain sliced AWMAC Grade 1, HPMA Grade A,

NWMA premium Grade, or APA Grade A. Semi-exposed cabinet interiors and shelving shall be Melamine or Kortron.

.3 Exposed and semi-exposed edges of panel product with one or both faces having hardwood veneer shall have 19 mm wide by 6 mm thick edge-band of wood species matching hardwood face veneer. Panel product with both faces Melamine or Kortron shall have PVC 'T' molding.

.4 Glues used in manufacture of panel products shall be Type I or II.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 06400 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD WORK Page 3 of 5 .5 Moisture content shall be same as specified for lumber. 2.1.4 Casework Doors .1 Doors 1200 mm in height or more shall be solid core and 35 mm (1-3/8") thick. 2.1.5 Plastic Laminates .1 Counter tops shall meet requirements of AWMAC Quality Grade - Premium. .1 Post formed and as indicated on Drawings. .2 Laminate shall meet requirements of CAN3-A-172. .3 Rigid glue line except for edge banding. .2 Other Laminates - .1 Laminating adhesives shall meet requirements of CAN/CGSB 71.20. .2 Balancing Backing Sheet - 0.5 mm (0.020") thick minimum. .3 Exposed and semi-exposed edges of panel product with one or both

faces having plastic laminate finish shall have plastic laminate edge-band of material matching finished panel face.

.3 Colour, Pattern, & Finish .1 Colour, pattern, and finish to be selected by Consultant from

Manufacturer’s standard full range. .2 A minimum of 4 different colours, patterns and finishes may be selected.

Plam is to match the existing plam on the existing revenue counters – countertops and vertical front face.

.4 Approved Manufacturers .1 Arborite .2 Formica .3 Nevamar .4 WilsonArt

2.1.6 Hardboard: 6 mm thick, smooth both faces, finish and colour to match cabinet interior. 2.1.7 Bulletin Board Material: 6 mm (1/4”) fibreboard faced with 25 oz minimum cloth supported

vinyl meeting requirements of Fed Spec CCC-W-408 Type 2 and ULC rated for 25 flame spread, Taslan/20 by Lanark, colour as selected from manufacturer’s full range.

2.1.8 Grommets: 56 mm diameter zinc die-cast, chrome polished finished cable grommets with

22 mm wide cable opening, Hafele 429.94.258.

2.1.9 Aluminum Sheet: 0.635 mm (0.025”) thick solid polished aluminum suitable for lamination to medium density particle board, clear anodized finish surface, back surface with special lacquer coating to prevent chemical interaction of the aluminum and laminating adhesive.

2.1.10 Birch Plywood: birch veneer core panel product to AWMAC Paint Grade.

2.1.11 Sealants: Dow Corning ‘786’ mildew-resistant silicone, General Electric ‘1700’ Sanitary

Sealant’ or Rodorsil ‘8S’.

2.1.12 Stainless Steel: Type 302 or 304 alloy conforming to ASTM A167, No. 4 finish, 0.635 mm (0.025”) thick suitable for lamination to medium density particle board, back surface with special lacquer coating to prevent chemical interaction of the aluminum and laminating adhesive.

2.1.13 It shall be the responsibility of this Section to prepare all cabinets, etc… for finishing hardware supplied by others (refer to Cash Allowances). This section shall, within two weeks of receipt of the Finishing Hardware Schedule, confirm in writing to the Consultant that the materials specified, including sizes, quantities,


etc… are in agreement with this sections shop drawings.

2.2 FABRICATION 2.1.2 Fabricate work in accordance with measurements taken on job site. 2.2.2 'Ease' sharp corners of exposed members to promote finishing and protect users from

slivers.

2.2.3 Fabricate so veneer grain is vertical. 2.2.4 Join members by pressure glue and biscuit joints, or pressure glue and dowels.

2.2.5 Finish Tolerances - .1 No planer marks (KCPI) allowed. Sand all wood members and surfaces to 100

grit. .2 Maximum Gap - None allowed. .3 Flushness Variation - 4 mm (0.15") maximum. .4 Sanding Cross Scratches - 6 mm (0.250") maximum .5 Compatibility of grain and color from lumber to panel products is required. .6 Plug screw holes. Screw locations not to be visible beyond 450 mm (18").

2.2.5 Install hardware in accordance with Manufacturer's directions. Leave operating hardware operating smoothly and quietly.

2.2.6 Cabinet Component Thickness & Material .1 Ends, Divisions, Bottoms, Tops - 19 mm (3/4") panel product with hardwood

veneer or plastic laminate for exposed locations and Melamine or Kortron for semi-exposed locations.

.2 Rails - 19 mm (3/4") x 6 mm edge-banded panel product with hardwood veneer or plastic laminate for exposed locations and Melamine or Kortron for semi-exposed locations.

.3 Shelves - Edge-banded panel product with hardwood veneer or plastic laminate for exposed locations and Melamine or Kortron for semi-exposed locations, 19 mm (3/4") thick for spans up to 900 mm (36") and 25 mm (1") thick for spans 900 mm to 1 200 mm (36 to 48"). Provide Hafele or equal center supports for spans over 1 200 mm (48").

.4 Backs - 9 mm (3/8") nominal panel product with hardwood veneer or plastic laminate for exposed locations and Melamine or Kortron for semi-exposed locations

.5 Doors - 19 mm (3/4") hardwood or plastic laminate edged and faced panel product with Melamine or Kortron interior face.

.6 Drawer Sides, Backs, & Subfronts - 13 mm (½") panel product with Melamine or Kortron faces.

.7 Drawer Bottoms - 6 mm (1/4") nominal panel product with Melamine or Kortron face.

.8 Drawer Front - 19 mm (3/4") hardwood or plastic laminate edged and faced panel product.

.9 Removable Dividers & Shelves - 3 mm (1/8") hardboard, smooth both sides. Color to match cabinet interior.

.10 Refer to Drawings for locations of hardwood veneer and plastic laminate.

2.2.6 Fabricate cabinets to AWMAC custom grade quality.


2.2.7 Provide cut-outs for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes and other fixtures. Confirm sizes of Owner-supplied equipment prior to fabrication.

2.3 FINISHES

2.3.1 All maple, birch, veneered and solid to be finished clear lacquer stain and catalytic sealed to match Consultant-approved sample, to 609.2 AWMAC No. 2 Custom System.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Install architectural woodwork to Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer’s Association of Canada (AWMAC), except where specified otherwise.

3.1.2 Install pre-finished woodwork at locations shown on Drawings. Position accurately, level,

plumb and straight.

3.1.3 Fasten and anchor woodwork securely. Provide heavy duty fixture attachments for wall-mounted cabinets.

3.1.4 Use drawbolts in countertop joints.

3.1.5 Scribe and cut as required to fit abutting walls and to fit properly into recesses and to

accommodate piping, columns, fixtures, outlets or other projecting, intersecting or penetrating objects.

3.1.6 Apply water-resistant building paper over wood framing members in contact with masonry

or cemetitious construction.

3.1.7 Fit hardware accurately and securely in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. 3.2 FINISH TOUCH-UP

3.2.1 Fill and touch-up exposed site-made nail or screw holes. 3.2.2 Repair and re-finish site-inflicted damage.

3.2.3 Use materials and methods consistent with specified pre-finishing system.

3.3 PROTECTION 3.3.1 Protect woodwork from damage until final inspection. 3.4 ADJUSTMENT & CLEANING 3.4.1 Remove or repair damaged surface of or defects in exposed finished surfaces of millwork

to match adjacent similar undamaged surface.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 SOLID COMPOSITE COUNTERTOPS Page 1 of 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if

repeated here. 2 Refer to Architectural & Mechanical Drawings & Specifications 1.2 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION 1 Installation of solid surface fabricated countertops, including all necessary & related

trim, joints, finishing, etc. 1.3 RELATED WORK Work of this section is related to work specified in the following sections:

1. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry

2. Section 15410 – Plumbing Fixtures 1.4 REFERENCES

1. ANSI Z124-3 for vanities and Z124-6 for kitchen sinks

2. ASTM G21 “Fungal Resistance,” Method [A] [B], no growth.

3. ANSI Z124-6-5.2 1997 stain resistance

4. ISSFA-2, “classification and standards publication of solid surfacing

material”.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 Accept delivery of material. 2 Inspect material for damage, upon delivery to the site. 3 Store material and assembled countertops in a dry and clean location. Store in a

temperature and humidity controlled area. Stack 150 mm off the floor. Take special precautions and protect corners and edges.

4 Be responsible for any damage to materials and assemble countertops from time of

delivery until accepted by Owner after Substantial Performance. 1.6 JOB SITE CONTROL AND DISTRIBUTION OF HARDWARE 1 Provide locked room for the storage of hardware at the job and a person

responsible for the control and distribution of hardware.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

1. PRODUCT DATA: Manufacturer's technical literature indicating physical

properties and performance criteria for solid surfacing materials and related


Project: 017 010 SOLID COMPOSITE COUNTERTOPS Page 2 of 4 components.

2. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate design parameters, adjacent construction,

materials, dimensions, thickness, fabrication details, tolerances, jointing

methods, method of support, anchorages, integration with plumbing fixtures and

connections, and colors. 3. SAMPLES: Submit two, 2 inch by 2 inch (51mm x 51mm) samples

representative of colors, patterns, textures, finishes and edge treatments.

Approved samples will be retained as a standard for the work.

1.8 WARRANTY

1. WARRANTY: Provide manufacturer’s 10 year limited warranty covering replacement of the material

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

1. Formica Solid Surfacing, Formica Corp., Cincinnati, OH.

2. Avonite by Aristech Surfaces

3. Corian, by Dupont

4. Solid Surface by Wilsonart

3. Or approved alternate

2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

1. Solid surfacing materials: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic

resin complying with ISSFA-2. Special features: Eased edge treatments.

Colors and Patterns:

a. #650 Black Onyx - Formica Signatures as manufactured by Formica.

b. Night Pearl #K38580, Avonite.

c. Deep Black Quartz Corian

d. Black Onyx mirage 9092 by Wilsonart

Or Consultant approved Equivalent.

2. Accessories: a. Adhesives: For seams and drop edges, Formica Solid Surfacing Seaming

Cartridges, 9 ounce (260ml); color to blend with sheet material. Or approved

equivalent.

b. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives


Project: 017 010 SOLID COMPOSITE COUNTERTOPS Page 3 of 4

that comply with the limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR

59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.3 FABRICATION

1. Assemble work at shop following manufacturer’s printed fabrication instructions

and deliver to job ready for installation. Manufacture in largest practical pieces for

handling and shipping without seams. a. Grade: AWI, Custom

b. Fabricate work square and to required lines.

c. Recess and conceal fasteners, connections, and reinforcing.

d. Design construction and installation details to allow for expansion and

contraction of materials. Properly frames material with tight, hairline joints held

rigidly in place.

e. Fabricate countertops and vanities with back splash and side splash pieces to profiles and sizes indicated.

f. Fabricate items to profiles shown with connections and supports as indicated

or as required for complete installation in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions and approved submittals.

g. Provide cut-outs for plumbing fixtures and trim, washroom accessories,

appliances, and related items. Confirm layout with manufacturer’s cut-out

templates before beginning work. Round corners of cut-outs and sand edges

smooth.

h. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended unsupported overhang

distances.

i. Finish exposed surfaces smooth and polish to low sheen.

j. Radius corners and edges.

2. Countertops: 1/2 inch (13mm) thick, Solid Surfacing, adhesively joined with no exposed seams,

edge details as indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

1. Examine surfaces for conditions that would adversely affect execution.

2. PREPARATION: Take field measurements.


Project: 017 010 SOLID COMPOSITE COUNTERTOPS Page 4 of 4 3.2 INSTALLATION

1. GENERAL: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions

and approved Submittals. Provide templates and rough-in measurements.

a. Set items plumb, level, rigid and solidly adhered to substrate.

b. Prefit items: Adjust supports to make fit. Align joints over support framing.

c. Apply dabs of silicone on supports; place items on supports and attach.

2. SPLASHES: Install splashes at back and sides of countertops and vanities using

silicone. Apply silicone to back surface only. Place thin bead of seam adhesive

along edge where splash seats.

a. Seal joint between vanity top and splashes and between splashes and walls with

Sealant Designation as specified in Section 07920 “Sealants”.

3. WINDOW SILLS: Install sills tight to window framing and adjacent wall surfaces.

Anchor with concealed fastening system to securely prevent rocking, racking, or

displacement. Seal joint between sill at adjacent wall and window surfaces with

Sealant as specified in Section 07920 “Sealants.”

4. TOLERANCES: a. Maximum Variation From True Dimension: 1/8 inch.

b. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1/8 inch.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

1. CLEANING:

a. Clean and polish fabrications in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions. b. Promptly remove excessive mastic and seam adhesive.

c. Clean tops and splashes in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations.

2. PROTECTION:

a. Do not permit construction near unprotected surfaces.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 07 12 00 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING Page 1 of 4 PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1.1 The General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, and all

other requirements of Divisions 00 and 01, shall apply to this Section of the Work.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

1.2.1 Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.2.2 Section 07131 - Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing.

1.3 REFERENCES 1.3.1 CAN/CGSB-37.2-M88 Emulsified Asphalt, Mineral-Colloid Type, Unfilled, for

Dampproofing and Waterproofing and for Roof Coatings.

1.3.2 CAN/CGSB 37.3-M89 Application of Emulsified Asphalts for Dampproofing

or Waterproofing. 1.3.3 CAN/CGSB 37.5-M89 Cement, Plastic, Cutback Asphalt. 1.3.4 CGSB 37-GP-6Ma-83 Asphalt, Cutback, Unfilled, for Dampproofing. 1.3.5 CGSB 37-GP-9Ma-83 Primer, Asphalt, Unfilled, for Asphalt Roofing,

Dampproofing and Waterproofing. 1.3.6 CGSB 37-GP-11M-R84 Application of Cutback Asphalt Plastic Cement. 1.3.7 CGSB 37-GP-12Ma-84 Application of Unfilled Cutback Asphalt for

Dampproofing. 1.3.8 CGSB 37-GP-15M-R84 Application of Asphalt Primer for Asphalt Roofing,

Dampproofing and Waterproofing. 1.3.9 CAN/CGSB 37.16-M89 Filled, Cutback, Asphalt, for Dampproofing and

Waterproofing. 1.3.10 CAN/CGSB 37.28-M89 Reinforced, Mineral Colloid Type Emulsified,

Asphalt for Roof Coatings and for Waterproofing. 1.3.11 CGSB 37-GP-36M-76 Application of Filled Cutback Asphalts for

Dampproofing and Waterproofing. 1.3.12 CGSB 37-GP-37M-77 Application of Hot Asphalt for Dampproofing or

Waterproofing. 1.3.13 CSA A123.4-M1979 Bitumen for Use in Construction of Built-Up Roof

Coverings and Dampproofing and Waterproofing Systems.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 07 12 00 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING Page 2 of 4 1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING

1.4.1 Provide and maintain dry, off-ground weatherproof storage. 1.4.2 Store materials on supports to prevent deformation. 1.4.3 Remove only in quantities required for same day use. 1.4.4 Store materials in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1.5.1 Do not proceed with work when wind chill effect would tend to set bitumen

before proper curing takes place. 1.5.2 Maintain air temperature and substrate temperature, at dampproofing

installation area, above 50°C for 24 hours before, during and 24 hours after installation.

1.5.3 Do not apply dampproofing in wet weather. 1.5.4 Provide forced air circulation during installation and curing periods for

enclosed applications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Asphalt: .1 For application and curing at temperatures above 50°C: to

CAN/CGSB-37.2. Package label or bill of lading for bulk hot liquid asphalt must indicate type, flash point, equiviscous temperature range and final blowing temperature.

.2 For application and curing at temperatures above 00C but below 50°C: to CAN/CGSB-37-GP-16M. Package label or bill of lading for bulk hot liquid asphalt must indicate type, flash point, equiviscous temperature range and final blowing temperature.

2.1.2 Sealing compound: plastic cutback asphalt cement to CAN/CGSB-37.5. 2.1.3 Asphalt primer: to CGSB 37-GP-9Ma.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP 3.1.1 Keep hot asphalt: .1 below its flash point. .2 at or below its final blowing temperature. .3 within its equiviscous temperature range at place of application.

3.2 PREPARATION

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 07 12 00 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING Page 3 of 4

3.2.1 Free substrates from curing compounds, dust and loose particles, grease, paint, frost, form oil and other material detrimental to bond of membrane materials.

3.2.2 Obtain FM HOTWORK Permit. 3.3.3 Do not use propane containers exceeding 908 kg (200 lbs). 3.2.4 Before applying dampproofing: .1 Seal exterior joints between foundation walls and footings, joints

between concrete floor slab and foundation and around penetrations through dampproofing, with sealing compound.

.2 Ensure all surfaces are clean, dry to maximum moisture content of

16%, free of excessive frost, laitance or loose concrete and films of oil, grease, curing compounds or other substances which could affect adhesion of coating.

3.3 APPLICATION

3.3.1 Do dampproofing in accordance with CGSB 37-GP-36M except where

specified otherwise. 3.3.2 Do sealing work in accordance with CGSB 37-GP-11M except where

specified otherwise. 3.3.3 Do priming of surface in accordance with CGSB 37-GP-15M except where

specified otherwise and apply primer. 3.3.4 Apply dampproofing in accordance with applicable CGSB application

standard. Material Application CAN/CGSB-37.2 use CAN/CGSB-37.3 CGSB37-GP-6Ma use CGSB37-GP-12M CAN/CGSB-37.16 use CGSB37-GP-36M CAN/CGSB-37.28 use CAN/CGSB-37.3 CSAA123.4 use CGSB37-GP-37M

3.4 SCHEDULE 3.4.1 Install bituminous coating in accordance with recommendations of

manufacturer and in a manner to make all treated surfaces dampproof. 3.4.2 Apply continuous, uniform coating to entire exterior faces of foundation

walls from 50 mm below finished grade level to and including tops of foundation wall footings.

3.4.3 Apply continuous, uniform coating to exterior side of foundation walls

enclosing rooms below finished grade. Include exterior portion of interior walls where floors in adjacent rooms are at different elevations.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 07 12 00 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING Page 4 of 4

3.4.4 Apply two additional coats of dampproofing to vertical corners for a minimum width of 300 mm on each side, and all around, and for 300 mm along, pipes passing through wall.

3.4.5 Refer to Section 07131 for waterproofing at construction joints. Apply two

additional coats of dampproofing at construction joints, to cover the work of Section 07131 for a minimum distance of 150 mm over the edge of the work installed by Section 07131.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING COATINGS Page 1 of 10 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Furnishing of all labor, materials, services and equipment necessary for the supply and installation of cementitious crystalline waterproofing to concrete substrates, above-grade or below-grade, on either dry or wet side of substrates, as indicated on drawings and as specified herein. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 031000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories 2. Section 079000 - Joint Protection 3. Section 099000 - Paints and Coatings 1.02 REFERENCES A. Applicable Standards: The following standards are referenced herein. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 2. Army Corps of Engineers (CRD) 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. NSF International 5. European Standards (EN) 6. RILEM 7. Drinking Water Inspectorate (DWI) 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Cementitious Crystalline Waterproofing: Concrete waterproofing and protection system shall be of the crystalline type that is a blend of Portland cement, fine treated silica sand and active proprietary chemicals. When mixed with water and applied as a cementitious coating, the active chemicals diffuse into the concrete and cause a catalytic reaction which generates a non-soluble crystalline structure within the pores and capillary tracts of concrete. This crystalline system causes the concrete to become sealed against the penetration of liquids from any direction, and protects the concrete from deterioration due to harsh environmental conditions. The system is used for above or below-grade walls and slabs, including liquid retaining structures and where enhanced chemical resistance is required. 1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Testing Requirements: Crystalline waterproofing system shall have been tested in accordance with the following standards and conditions, and the testing results shall meet or exceed the performance requirements as specified herein. B. Independent Laboratory: Testing shall have been performed by an accredited independent laboratory meeting the requirements of ASTM E 329 or other applicable


Project: 017 010 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING COATINGS Page 2 of 10 international standard for certification of testing laboratories. Testing laboratory shall have obtained all control and treated concrete samples. C. Crystalline Penetration: Crystallizing capability of waterproofing material shall be evidenced by independent SEM (Scanning Electron Microscope) photographs. Crystal growth 12 inches (30 cm) from the surface of the coating shall be evident with 1000X magnification 1 year after application of the coating and exposure of the sample to normal weathering. D. Permeability: Independent testing shall be performed according to U.S. Army Corps of Engineers CRD C48 “Permeability of Concrete”. Concrete samples shall have design strength of 2000 psi (14 MPa) and thickness of 2 inches (50 mm). Treated samples shall have two coats of crystalline waterproofing applied per manufacturer’s directions. Samples to be pressure tested to 175 psi (405 foot head of water) or 1.2 MPa (123.4 m head of water). Control samples shall leak and treated samples, after crystalline growth has occurred, shall exhibit no measurable leakage. E. Permeability - Negative Side Application: Independent testing shall be performed according to EN 12390–8 or other recognized direct pressure test. Concrete samples shall have a design strength of 25 MPa (3600 psi). Treated samples shall be exposed to water pressure on the side opposite to the crystalline coating. Coated samples shall exhibit a greater than 90% reduction in depth of water penetration as compared to the control samples. F. Chemical Resistance: Independent testing shall be performed according to ASTM C 267 “Chemical Resistance of Mortars” and ASTM C 39 “Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens”. Concrete samples (treated and untreated) shall have design strength of 4000 psi (27.6 MPa). Treated samples shall have two coats of crystalline waterproofing applied per manufacturer’s directions. Untreated and treated specimens must be immersed for a minimum of 84 days in following chemical solutions: hydrochloric acid (3.5 pH), brake fluid, transformer oil, ethylene glycol, toluene, caustic soda. Treated specimens shall exhibit no detrimental effects after exposure, and shall have an average of 17% increase in compressive strength versus untreated control specimens. G. Acid Resistance: Independent testing shall be performed to determine “Sulfuric Acid Resistance of Concrete Specimens”. Treated concrete samples shall be tested against untreated control samples. All samples shall be immersed in 5% sulfuric acid and weighed weekly for 10 weeks. Untreated samples shall exhibit at least 8 times more mass loss than treated samples. H. Carbonation Resistance Testing: Independent testing shall be performed according to RILEM CPC-18 or other recognized accelerated carbonation test. Concrete samples shall have a 0.5 w/cm ratio or be approximately 30 MPa (4500 psi) in strength. Coated samples shall have crystalline coating applied one day after casting and all samples to be cured for 7 days prior to carbonation. After 91 days exposure to CO2 the coated samples shall show a 35% or greater reduction in carbonation depth as compared to the control samples. I. Potable Water Approval: Waterproof material shall have a current, valid approval certificate from NSF (NSF 61), DWI, or other recognized certification agency.


Project: 017 010 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING COATINGS Page 3 of 10 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with conditions of the Contract and with Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section. B. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer’s specifications, installation instructions, and general recommendations for waterproofing applications. C. Test Reports: Submit for acceptance, complete test reports from approved independent testing laboratories certifying that waterproofing system conforms to performance characteristics and testing requirements specified herein. D. Manufacturer’s Certification: Provide document signed by manufacturer or manufacturer’s representative certifying that the materials to be installed comply with the requirements of this specification. E. Manufacturer’s Field Report: Provide copy of report from manufacturer’s representative confirming that the surfaces to which waterproofing material is to be applied are in a condition suitable to receive same. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 registered, and shall have no less than 10 years experience in manufacturing the cementitious crystalline waterproofing materials for the required work. Manufacturer must be capable of providing field service representation during construction phase. Manufacturers who cannot provide ongoing field support or the performance test data specified herein will not be considered for the project. B. Applicator: Waterproofing applicator shall be experienced in the installation of cementitious crystalline waterproofing materials as demonstrated by previous successful installations, and shall be approved by the manufacturer in writing. C. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to installation of waterproofing, conduct meeting with waterproofing applicator, Architect/Engineer, owner’s representative, and waterproofing manufacturer’s representative to verify and review the following: 1. Project requirements for waterproofing as set out in Contract Document. 2. Manufacturer’s product data including application instructions. 3. Substrate conditions, and procedures for substrate preparation and waterproofing installation. D. Technical Consultation: The waterproofing manufacturer’s representative shall provide technical consultation on waterproofing application and provide on-site support as needed. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.


Project: 017 010 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING COATINGS Page 4 of 10 B. Delivery: Deliver packaged waterproofing materials to project site in original undamaged containers, with manufacturer’s labels and seals intact. C. Storage: Store waterproofing materials in dry, enclosed location, at a minimum temperature of 45ºF (7ºC). 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data regarding condition of substrate to receive waterproofing, weather conditions before and during installation, and protection of the installed waterproofing system. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer shall provide standard product warranty executed by authorized company official. B. Applicator’s Warranty: Applicator shall warrant the waterproofing installation against defects caused by faulty workmanship or materials for a period of typically (specify term) years from Date of Substantial Completion. The warranty will cover the surfaces treated and will bind the applicator to repair, at his expense, any and all leaks through the treated surfaces which are not due to structural weaknesses or other causes beyond applicator’s control such as fire, earthquake, tornado and hurricane. The warranty shall read as follows: 1. Warranty: The applicator warrants that, upon completion of the work, surfaces treated with cementitious crystalline waterproofing will be and will remain free from water leakage resulting from defective workmanship or materials for a period of (specify term) years from Date of Substantial Completion. In the event that water leakage occurs within the warranty period from such causes, the applicator shall, at his sole expense, repair, replace or otherwise correct such defective workmanship or materials. Applicator shall not be liable for consequential damages and applicator’s liability shall be limited to repair, replacement or correcting of defective workmanship or materials. Applicator shall have no responsibility with respect to water leakage or other defects caused by structural failure or movement of the structure, or any other causes beyond Applicator’s control. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Xypex Chemical Corporation 13731 Mayfield Place, Richmond, B.C., Canada V6V 2G9 Tel: 800 961.4477 or 604 273.5265 Fax: 604 270.0451 E-mail: [email protected] Website: www.xypex.com Note: Acceptable manufacturers include all licensed manufacturing operations of Xypex Chemical Corporation. B. Proprietary Products: Xypex crystalline waterproofing materials as follows: 1. Xypex Concentrate 2. Xypex Modified


Project: 017 010 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING COATINGS Page 5 of 10 3. Xypex Patch’n Plug Note: Supplemental specifications are available for Xypex Admix series (admixture) and Xypex Concentrate DS-1/DS-2 (dry shake). C. Or approved equivalent D. Source Quality: Obtain all proprietary crystalline waterproofing products from a single manufacturer. 2.02 MIXES A. General: Mix waterproofing material by volume with clean, potable water. Mix waterproofing material in quantities that can be applied within 20 to 30 minutes from time of mixing. As mixture thickens, stir frequently, but do not add additional water. Do not mix bonding agents or admixtures with crystalline waterproofing materials. B. Brush Application Mix: Measure dry powder and place in mixing container. Measure water and mix into the dry powder with a paddle on a slow speed electric drill (250 RPM) or other type mixer which is acceptable to manufacturer. Mixing proportions shall be as follows: Coverage Proportions (by volume) 1.5 lb./sq. yd. (0.8 kg/m2) 5 powder to 2 water 2.0 lb./sq. yd. (1.0 kg/m2) 3 powder to 1 water C. Spray Application Mix: Mixing shall be same as specified for brush application except that mixture shall be thinner. Use following proportions as a guide only. Adjust proportions to match type of spray equipment and pressures used. Mixing proportions shall be as follows: Coverage Proportions (by volume) 1.5 lb./sq. yd. (0.8 kg/m2) 5 powder to 3 water D. Dry-Pac Mix: Using a trowel, mix 1 part clean water with 6 parts Xypex Concentrate powder for 10 to 15 seconds. It is acceptable that lumps may be present in mixture. Mix only as much as can be applied in 15 minutes. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Site Visit: Prior to waterproofing installation, arrange visit to project site with waterproofing manufacturer’s representative. Representative shall inspect and certify that concrete surfaces are in acceptable condition to receive waterproofing treatment. B. Verification of Substrates: Verify that concrete surfaces are sound and clean, and that form release agents and materials used to cure the concrete are fully removed. C. Examination for Defects: Examine surfaces to be waterproofed for defects such as honeycombing, rock pockets, faulty construction joints and cracks. Such defects to be repaired in accordance to manufacturer’s product data and 3.02 below.


Project: 017 010 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING COATINGS Page 6 of 10 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Smooth surfaces (e.g. where steel forms are used) or surfaces covered with form oil or other contaminants shall be cleaned, water-blasted, lightly sand-blasted, or acid etched as necessary to provide a clean absorbent surface. The surface must also have an open capillary system to provide “tooth and suction” for the Xypex treatment. A minimum of CSP-3 per the International Concrete Repair Institute Concrete Surface Profile Chips or other equivalent standard is required. Surfaces to be acid-etched shall be should be saturated with water before application of the acid. After acid etching flush concrete thoroughly with clean water. Horizontal surfaces shall have a rough wood float or broom finish. Where a smooth trowel finish is required on horizontal surface, crystalline waterproofing material shall be applied by dry shake method at time of concrete finishing in accordance with manufacturer’s product data. B. Repair of Defects: Concrete defects shall be repaired in accordance with manufacturer’s technical literature including relevant Method Statements (www.xypex.com/technical/statements). Procedures are generally as follows: 1. Cracks and Faulty Construction Joints: a. Chip out cracks, faulty construction joints and other defects to a depth of 1.5 inches (37 mm) and a width of one inch (25 mm). A “V” shaped slot is not acceptable. The slot may be saw cut instead of chipped but ensure that the slot is dovetailed or otherwise shaped such that there will be mechanical interlock of materials placed into the slot at a later stage. b. Clean slot of debris and dust. Soak area with water and remove excess surface water. Apply a slurry coat of Xypex Concentrate at the rate of 1.5 lb./sq. yd. (0.8 kg/m2) to the slot. c. While slurry coat is still tacky, fill cavity with Dry-Pac. Compress tightly into cavity using pneumatic packer or block and hammer. d. This step may be omitted if the area filled with Dry-Pac will be subsequently covered with Xypex coating. Wet Dry-Pac surface lightly with water, then apply a slurry coat of Xypex Concentrate at a coverage rate of 1.5 – 2 lb./sq. yd. (0.8 – 1 kg/m2) over the repaired area to 6” (150 mm) on either side of slot. 2. Rock Pockets, Honeycombing or other defective concrete: All areas of poor concrete consolidation (honeycomb or rock pockets) shall be repaired. Note: Where there is active water-flow see Method Statements or contact Xypex Technical Services Representative for assistance. C. Wetting Concrete: Xypex requires a saturated surface dry (SSD) substrate. Concrete surfaces must be thoroughly saturated with clean water prior to the application so as to aid the proper diffusion of the Xypex chemistry and to ensure the growth of the crystalline formation deep within the pores of the concrete. Remove excess water before the application such that there is no glistening water on the surface. If concrete dries out before application, it must be re-wetted. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Construction Joints: In addition to specified waterstops, apply one coat of Xypex Concentrate slurry at a rate of 2 lb./sq. yd. (1 kg/m2) to joint surfaces between concrete


Project: 017 010 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING COATINGS Page 7 of 10 pours. Moisten surfaces prior to slurry application. Apply slurry and keep moist for 12 hours then allow slurry to set or dry. Where joint surfaces are not accessible prior to pouring new concrete, contact Xypex Technical Services Representative for assistance. Note: Inclusion, type and position of waterstops are at the discretion of the designer. Expanding waterstops may be placed on Xypex after it has dried or before Xypex slurry application. Xypex slurry may only be applied over waterstop if approved by waterstop manufacturer. B. Sealing Strips: Where hydrostatic conditions exist, sealing strips shall also be applied at construction joints by filling grooves that are created along the joints. Dimensions of the grooves shall be 1 inch (25 mm) wide and 1.5 inches (37 mm) deep. If grooves are not pre-formed then chip grooves to those dimensions. Fill the groves as follows: 1. Apply slurry coat of Xypex Concentrate slurry to slot in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions or recommendations. 2. While slurry coat is still tacky, fill slot with Xypex Concentrate Dry-Pac. 3. Compact tightly using pneumatic packer or hammer and block. 4. This step may be omitted if the area filled with Dry-Pac will be subsequently covered with Xypex coating. Wet Dry-Pac surface lightly with water, then apply a slurry coat of Xypex Concentrate at a coverage rate of 1.5 – 2 lb./sq. yd. (0.8 – 1 kg/m2) over sealing strip and extending to 6” (150 mm) on either side. Note: For further information, see Xypex Schematic Drawings for standard construction joint details. C. Form Tie Holes: Form tie holes shall be waterproofed in accordance with manufacturer’s technical literature including relevant Method Statements (www.xypex.com/technical/statements). Procedures are generally as follows: 1. Prepare the tie hole to create a straight sided void with a profile of at least ICRI CSP-3. For through element ties holes such as those created by taper ties the prepared void is to be at least 5” (125 mm) deep. For cone ties the void is to be to the bottom of the cone. 2. Clean and profile the area to a 12 inch (300 mm) diameter around the tie hole to an ICRI CSP-3 profile. 3. For through-element tie holes create a solid plug of material at the bottom of the profiled hole using Xypex Patch’n Plug leaving at least 4” (100 mm) of empty tie hole from the top of the plug to the surface of the concrete element. 4. Apply a coat of Xypex Concentrate slurry at a rate of 1.5 lb./sq. yd. (0.8 kg/m2) to the inside of the tie hole and to a 12” (300 mm) diameter area around the hole. 5. Fill and compact the tie hole with Xypex Concentrate Dry-Pac. 6. This step may be omitted if the area filled with Dry-Pac will be subsequently covered with Xypex coating. Wet Dry-Pac surface lightly with water, then apply a slurry coat of Xypex Concentrate at a coverage rate of 1.5 - 2 lb./sq. yd. (0.8 - 1 kg/m2) over the repaired area to a 12” (300 mm) diameter area around the filled void. D. Surface Application: After repairs, surface preparation, treatment of construction joints and sealing strip placement have been completed in accordance with manufacturer’s product data and as specified herein, apply Xypex treatment to concrete surfaces with semi-stiff bristle brush, push broom (for large horizontal surfaces), or suitable spray equipment. The Xypex coating must be uniformly applied and should be just under 1/16” (1.25 mm) thick.


Project: 017 010 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING COATINGS Page 8 of 10 Application rates and locations shall be as indicated in the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s product data. When brushing, work slurry well into surface of the concrete, filling surface pores and hairline cracks. When spraying, hold nozzle close enough to ensure that slurry is forced into pores and hairline cracks. 1. First Coat (of one or two coat application): Apply Xypex Concentrate slurry coat to locations indicated on drawings in accordance with manufacturer’s product data. 2. Second Coat (of two coat application): Where indicated on drawings or as required by manufacturer’s product data, apply Xypex Modified or Xypex Concentrate slurry coat after the first coat of Xypex Concentrate has reached an initial set but while it is still “green” (less than 48 hours). Curing by misting the coating with water should be done between coats. Ensure first coat is in SSD condition before application of the second coat. Note: Prior to the installation, it is recommended that a test section be completed under anticipated ambient and project conditions to demonstrate acceptable bond E. Sandwich (Topping) Application: When treated structural slabs are to receive a concrete or other topping, place the topping while waterproofing material is still “green” (less than 48 hours) but after it has reached an initial set. The preferred time frame is 12 to 24 hours after the installation of Xypex coating. Curing by misting the coating with water should be done between application of coating and installation of concrete overlay. Ensure coating is in SSD condition prior to placement of concrete. 3.04 CURING A. General: Begin curing as soon as Xypex coating has hardened sufficiently so as not to be damaged by a fine spray. Cure Xypex treatment with a mist fog spray of clean water three times a day for 2 to 3 days. Wet burlap and some specialty curing blankets are also effective for curing during the prescribed period. In warm climates, more than three sprayings per day may be necessary to prevent excessive drying of coating. B. Air Circulation: Do not lay plastic sheeting directly on the waterproofing coating as air contact is required for proper curing. If poor air circulation exists in treated areas, it may be necessary to provide fans or blown air to aid in curing of waterproofing treatment. C. Holding Structures: For water holding structures such as swimming pools, reservoirs, water treatment tanks and wet wells, cure Xypex treatment for three days and then allow treatment to set for 12 days before filling. For structures holding hot or corrosive liquids, cure waterproofing treatment for three days and allow to set for 18 days before filling. D. Protection: During the curing period, protect treated surfaces from damage by wind, sun, rain, puddling of water and temperatures below 36°F (2°C). If plastic sheeting is used for protection, it must be raised off of the waterproofing coating to allow sufficient air circulation. 3.05 INTERFACE WITH OTHER MATERIALS A. Backfilling: Do not backfill for 36 hours after application. If backfill takes place within seven days after application, then backfill material shall be moist so as not to draw moisture from waterproof coating.


Project: 017 010 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING COATINGS Page 9 of 10 B. Paint, Epoxy or Similar Coatings: Do not apply paint or other coatings until waterproofing treatment has cured and set for a minimum of 21 days. Light abrasive blasting or washing the Xypex surface with a 3 - 5% acid solution followed by a rigorous rinse with clean water is recommended before applying the coating. Be sure to flush all acid off the surface. Alternately, removal of the Xypex coating by high pressure washing or abrasive blasting following full curing is acceptable. Consult epoxy and paint manufacturer for additional coating instructions and restrictions. C. Grout, Cement Parge Coat, Plaster or Stucco: It is recommended that any other cementitious system be applied over the Xypex coating after the Xypex has completely set but while it is still “green” (12 to 48 hours). The 12 to 24 hour window is considered ideal. Contact your Xypex Technical Services Representative regarding surface preparation and other procedures for installations of other materials onto Xypex coatings older than 48 hours. Alternately, removal of the Xypex coating by high pressure washing or abrasive blasting following full curing is acceptable. Use of a polymer additive to help improve bond in the over coating mortar mix should be considered. D. Responsibility to Ensure Compatibility: Xypex Chemical Corporation makes no representations or warranties regarding compatibility of Xypex treatment with coatings, plasters, stuccos, tiles or other surface-applied materials. It shall be the responsibility of the installer of the surface-applied material that is to be applied over the Xypex waterproofing treatment, to take whatever measures are necessary, including testing, to ensure acceptance by or adhesion to the waterproofing treatment. Note: Prior to the installation, it is recommended that a test section be completed under anticipated ambient and project conditions to demonstrate acceptable bond. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Observation: Do not conceal installed waterproofing system before it has been observed by Architect/Engineer, waterproofing manufacturer's representative and other designated entities. B. Testing for Tanks and Foundation Works 1. Testing: Fill tanks or, for foundation works, shut off dewatering system as soon as practical so that the structure shall be exposed to it’s normal service conditions. Examine for leaks. 2. Monitoring: a. Actively leaking cracks and joints shall be left to self-heal for as long as practical. Depending on job site and ambient conditions crack healing can be expected to take several days to weeks. b. Any crack or joints that do not heal in the allowable time frame shall be repaired by the general contractor. c. Moving cracks shall be repaired using polyurethane injection or other appropriate method. 3. Repair: Use Xypex repair procedures to seal any static crack or joint that does not self-heal. See Method Statements (www.xypex.com/technical/statements) or contact Xypex Technical Services Representative for appropriate repair procedures. Note: Lower temperatures will extend the times for crystalline development.


Project: 017 010 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING COATINGS Page 10 of 10 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent surfaces using appropriate cleaning agents and procedures. B. Protection: Take measures to protect completed Xypex coating until the coating is hard enough to not be damaged. In normal conditions protect from pedestrian traffic for 3 days and vehicular traffic for 7 days. If coatings will be exposed to ongoing vehicular traffic or other abrasive environments consult Xypex Technical Services.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 07200 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 Building Insulation and Air/Vapour Barrier Page 1 of 9 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if

repeated here. 1.2 Related Work

Built up Roofing Section 07150 Firestopping Section 07270 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 07610 Interior Studs Section 09110

1.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.3.1 CAN/CGSB 51.10-92 Mineral Fibre Board Thermal Insulation 1.3.2 CAN/ULC S701 - 97 Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe

Covering 1.3.3 CAN/CSA-A247-M86 Insulating Fibre-Board 1.3.4 CAN/ULC S704 Thermal Insulation, Urethane and Isocyanurate,

Board, Faced 1.3.5 CAN/CGSB-51.31-M84 Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre Board for Above

Roof Deck 1.3.6 CAN/CGSB-51.34-M Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in

Building Construction 1.3.7 CAN/CGSB-51.33-M Vapour Barrier Sheet, Excluding Polyethylene, for

Use in Building Construction 1.3.8 CAN/ULC S702 – 97 Standard for Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for

Buildings 1.3.9 CAN/ULC S705.2 – 98 Spray Applied Rigid Polyurethane Foam, Medium

density, Material-Specification Insulation

1.3.10 ASTM C 739 – Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal

Insulation. 1.3.11 ASTM E 84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials. 1.3.12 ASTM E 119 – Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction

and Materials. 1.3.13 CPSC Standard 16 CFR Parts 1209 and 1404.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 07200 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 Building Insulation and Air/Vapour Barrier Page 2 of 9

1.3.14 UL 723 – Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials. 1.4 AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER REQUIREMENTS 1.3.1 The drawings do not indicate every situation where an air/vapour barrier is

required, however it is a requirement in the design of the building to provide an integral monolithic impermeable air/vapour barrier that prevents water leakage and the diffusion of water vapour and air movement under the action of a difference in vapour and air pressure, at the inner face of the insulation.

1.3.2 Exercise extreme care that the continuity of the air/vapour barrier is

maintained over the entire insulated area and that it extends across all junctions between different materials.

1.3.3 Coordinate and cooperate with other trades such as aluminum windows

and curtain wall where materials serving purpose of air/vapour barrier abut the materials of this Section of the work. Responsibility for ensuring continuity of air/vapour barrier system rests with this Section.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS 1.4.1 Employ only skilled workers having experience in the work specified, and

having an understanding of the design principles of the materials which they are providing.

1.4.2 Only Contractors with a minimum 5 years accredited experience and who

are skilled in insulation and air/vapour barrier work as approved by air/vapour barrier manufacturer will be acceptable. If requested submit certification from air/vapour barrier manufacturer as proof of compliance to this requirement.

1.6 STORAGE 1.5.1 Store packaged materials in their original wrappings or containers with

manufacturer's labels and seals intact. Store flammable materials outside the building and protect from weather hazards and open flame. Abide by fire protection regulations imposed by the authorities having jurisdiction, and take precautionary measures to avoid fires.

1.5.2 Do not store insulation in direct contact with the earth, road surface, or

floors. Place suitable forms or skids under the insulation upon delivery to protect the insulation from absorbing dampness from the surrounding terrain or floor. Cover material with approved tarpaulins and secure.

1.5.3 In cold weather, provide warm storage for adhesive such that its

consistency is suitable for ease of application.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 07200 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 Building Insulation and Air/Vapour Barrier Page 3 of 9 1.7 PROTECTION 1.6.1 Protect all surfaces, and in particular the building cladding, from being

marred or contaminated by the materials, by means of protective covers, boards, tapes and other approved means.

1.6.2 Supervise the work of other trades where such work is closely associated

with the work of this Section and report any damage. 1.6.3 Protect the work of this Section from damage until the building cladding,

masonry, or other permanent protection is in place.

1.6.4 Thoroughly ventilate spaces where adhesive containing volatile solvent is used.

1.8 MOCK-UP

1.7.1 Construct roof/ceiling and junction of new aluminum glazed screen and ceiling roof mock-up in accordance with Section 01300.

1.7.2 Allow for review and acceptance of mock-up by Consultant. Accepted

mock-up wall section may be incorporated as part of the final work. Obtain acceptance prior to commencing with any further air/vapour barrier membrane installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS – AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER

2.1.1 Air/Vapour Barrier – Torch-applied Sheet Membrane: Thermofusible SBS modified bitumen membrane reinforced with non-woven fibreglass, minimum thickness 2.5 mm (100 mils), ‘Blueskin TG’ as manufactured by Bakor Inc., or ‘Sopraseal 60 F/F’ by Soprema. Use primer manufactured and recommended by the air/vapour barrier membrane manufacturer, ‘Elastocol 500’ if using Soprema products on concrete block substrate, or ‘Non-penetrating Asphalt Primer 910-02’ if using Bakor products.

2.1.2 Air Barrier – Self-adhering Sheet Membrane: Peel and Stick SBS rubberized

asphalt compound laminated to polyethylene reinforcement film and silicone release paper, minimum thickness 1.0 mm (40 mils), or ‘Blueskin RF2000’ by Henry Bakor Inc., or equivalent ‘Sopraseal Stick 1100’ by Soprema. Use primer recommended by the air/vapour barrier manufacturer, , or ‘Blueskin Adhesive or Aquatac’ if using Henry Bakor products or equivalent ‘Elastocol Stick’ if using Soprema products.

2.1.3 Air/Vapour Barrier Sealant: Polymer-modified sealing compound formulated

for use with SBS modified membranes, with a water vapour permeance of no greater than 0.05 perms (2.8 ng/Pa.s.m2) and be resistant to chemicals. ‘570-05 Polybitume’ as manufactured by Henry Bakor Inc. or a product specifically approved by membrane manufacturer. Material shall be a permanent air/vapour seal and be compatible with the products used for the air/vapour barrier for the building. Use for sealing breaks, holes, junctions of adjacent sheets and elsewhere as recommended by the manufacturer.


2.1.4 Mastic: ‘Air-Bloc 21’ air/vapour barrier insulation adhesive as manufactured by Bakor if using Henry Bakor products. “Sopraseal LM 200” if using Soprema products.

2.1.5 Tie-ins to Window Frames, Roofs, Etc.: As recommended by membrane

manufacturer, ‘Blueskin SA’ with ‘Blueskin Primer or Aquaprime if using Henry Bakor products, or ‘Sopraseal Stick 1100’ with ‘Elastocol 700’ primer if using Soprema products.

2.1.6 Through-wall and Dampproof Course Flashings: ‘Blueskin TG’ or ‘Blueskin

AG’ if using Henry Bakor products, ‘Colphene 3000’ if using Soprema products. Use primer and/or mastic as recommended by membrane manufacturer.

2.1.7 Vapour Barrier: 0.152 mm (6 mil) thick polyethylene film, CGSB 51.34, Type 2

2.1.8 Vapour Barrier Mastic: ‘Acoustic Sealant’ by Tremco Ltd.

2.19 Fastening Bars: 38 mm x 38 mm galvanized steel as recommended by

air/vapour barrier manufacturer. 2.2 MATERIALS - INSULATION

2.2.1 Rigid Foundation Insulation: Extruded polystyrene complying with CAN/ULC

S701 - 97, Type 4, "SM" by Dow Chemical of Canada Ltd., "Pro-Tec Roof Insulation" by Building Products of Canada Limited, or "Celfort 300" by Celfortec Inc.

2.2.2 Insulation Clips (with washers): Stainless steel "Stick clips" as manufactured

by Eckel Industries of Canada Limited, or "Insul-Anchors" by Continental Stud Welding as distributed by Multi-Glass Insulation, Toronto. Clip size and type to suit application and insulation thickness. Note: Use Wedge-Lok plastic fasteners for installation of cavity wall insulation, as supplied by Section 04200.

2.2.3 Mechanical Fasteners for Securing Insulation Securement Clips to Concrete

and Masonry: galvanized "Gripcon" screws with plastic plates. Minimum penetrations into substrate shall be 25 mm.

2.2.4 Underslab Insulation: ‘Styrofoam SM High Load-40’ as manufactured by

Dow. 2.2.5 Roof insulation: extruded expanded polystyrene, 2 in. thick R=15 value, butt

edged. Slope as necessary as per drawings to provide adequate drainage, min. slope

to be 1%. Standards: to AGSB-51.31-M84 Approved manufacturers: Posi –slope Enterprises Inc.; Fiberglass Canada

Inc.;


Dow Chemical Corporation; Fiberex Insulations Inc. 2.2.6 Cellulose Insulation:

1. Pneumatically blown dry into attics and floor assemblies. 2. Pneumatically blown dry into wall cavities.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION – INSULATION AND MEMBRANE AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER 3.1.1 General Requirements

.1 Fit boards neatly around beams, pipes, ducts, openings and corners, reinforcing and bonding ties, and other obstructions.

.2 Conform with manufacturer's recommendations for storage and

application of air/vapour barrier sheet. Butt insulation boards together and stagger joints. Apply firm hand pressure to level insulation boards.

.3 Use the largest module of insulation possible where cutting is

necessary, to reduce the number of joints. Patch holes and tears with the same material.

.4 Permanently seal vapour barrier at points where it is impaled by

screws, staples masonry reinforcing, or other fastening devices. .5 Do not install insulation in any part of the building where protection

against inclement weather has not yet been provided, and where the insulation could thereby be wet or damaged.

3.1.2 Air/Vapour Barrier Membrane

.1 Inspect all surfaces to receive membrane and flashing. Repair defects which may impair the performance of the membrane.

.2 Ensure concrete has been cured for a minimum of 7 days and is

clean, dry, smooth and sound. Concrete curing compounds and form release agents shall be free of oil, pigments and waxes.

.3 Install membrane when all substrate defects have been corrected. .4 Apply to clean, dry, smooth and sound surfaces. Remove moisture,

grease and all foreign materials, which may adversely affect proper adhesion.

.5 Apply primer with a brush, spray or roller and allow to dry. Prime only

areas to be covered in a working day. Primed areas not covered within a working day must be re-primed.

.6 Apply torch grade sheet air/vapour barrier membrane when primer

is dry and has fully cured. Position membrane for alignment and


apply heat to the underside of the membrane by propane torch at the point of contact with the substrate. Apply sufficient heat to make bitumen tacky and press membrane firmly onto substrate to ensure complete contact and bond for the full extent of the membrane.

.7 Lap joints to a minimum of 50 mm and fully heat seal.

.8 Apply heavy pressure using a blunt object or small hand roller to the top and bottom end terminations, to ensure positive adhesion at the edges.

.9 Using a small hand roller, roll membrane immediately after each

length of membrane is applied. .10 Using a trowel or gun, apply a bead of mastic to all terminations of

the membrane. .11 Before covering membrane, inspect thoroughly and repair

immediately. Repair punctures with a patch large enough to completely cover damaged area. Seal edges of patch with mastic.

.12 Fill all joints, gaps and cracks wider than 6 mm with mastic and

reinforce with a 300 mm strip of membrane, prior to the application of the full membrane.

.13 Take extra care to ensure continuity of the air/vapour barrier at all

detail areas. If required by membrane manufacturer mechanically attach to window frames and aluminum screens and spandrel panels. Use 300 mm reinforcing strips at all inside and outside corners.

.14 Be responsible for the continuity of the air/vapour barrier from the

wall to the roofing system, windows, aluminum screens, hollow metal doors, precast concrete anchors, as required to complete the building envelope. Ensure compatibility prior to starting work.

.15 The continuity of the air/vapour barrier must be carefully inspected

prior to fastening of insulation. .16 Perform all repairs to the air/vapour barrier as required. .17 Seal all breaks, holes and wall ties with liquid air/vapour barrier. .18 Apply self-adhered sheet membrane at tie-in locations when primer

is dry and has fully cured. Position membrane for alignment, remove release paper and press firmly into place to ensure complete contact and bond for the full extent of the membrane.

.19 Where the membrane air barrier specified in Section 07240 is to be

lapped over this air/vapour barrier, prepare the air/vapour barrier for adhesion by ‘burning off’ the plastic film. Confirm with


air/vapour barrier manufacturer before proceeding. At the joint with the air/vapur barrier specified in Section 07240, apply a bead of mastic in accordance with the air/vapour barrier manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.1.3 Through-Wall and Dampproof Flashing

.1 Where through-wall and dampproof flashings are indicated on Drawings, install specified products in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. For through-wall flashing, ensure membrane extends fully to the exterior face of the exterior masonry veneer. Trim off excess as directed by Consultant.

.2 Ensure that no coarse aggregate or other protrusions will pierce

flashing, and protect it until work resumes. In cavity construction, ensure that flashings have a positive slope toward the outside in order that any water that penetrates the exterior wythe and drains to the bottom, will be directed back outside through the weep holes.

.3 Install through-wall flashings at any horizontal interruption of the air

space behind the veneer such as:

.1 Top of foundation walls. .2 Bottom of cavity walls. .3 Over shelf angles in exterior walls. .4 Over pre-cast copings in exterior walls.

.4 Flashing above windows and doors that is discontinuous shall be turned up at ends to form a dam.

.5 Overlap ends of flashing 150 mm.

3.1.4 Mechanical Fasteners

.1 Except for cavity walls use stick clips to install insulation. .2 Install stick clips at generally 4 per 600 x 1200 mm insulation board

by torch heating back surface of perforated plate and press into air/vapour barrier membrane. Supplement with a small power activated pin fastener applied through fastener base to structure. (Install stick clips with mastic adhesive. Allow adhesive to "ooze" out into the surface of the perforated clip base.) If self adhesive sheet membranes are used do not torch apply. Secure by screw fasteners.

.3 At cavity walls obtain Wedge-Lok plastic fasteners from Section 04200 and install in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 07200 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 Building Insulation and Air/Vapour Barrier Page 8 of 9 3.1.5 Perimeter Insulation: Place boards dry against the face of the foundation

wall. Butt joints tightly together without gaps. Use spot application of suitable mastic adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation in place.

3.1.6 Foamed-In-Place Insulation: Spray apply foam into hollow metal door

frames, windows; and other locations necessary to reduce air infiltration.

3.1.7 Cavity Stops: Install semi-rigid insulation as cavity stops as detailed by loose fitting.

3.1.8 Insulation Installation:

Erect the work in accordance with reviewed shop drawings, manufacturer’s published instructions, as shown on Drawings. Apply rigid insulation to the substrate by the method indicated, complying with the manufacturer’s recommendation’s. if no specific method is indicated, bond insulation with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage, to provide permanent placement and support rigid insulation as shown. Apply vapour barrier to inside of construction or as detailed. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for the particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to the project conditions, consult the manufacturer’s technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with the work. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over the whole area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections which interfere with placement. Do not install boards which are broken or have chipped or broken edges.

3.1.9 Tapered Roof Insulation: Cut and trim insulation boards to provide plain butt joints at perimeter,

parapet, curbs, etc.. Lay insulation boards in parallel course, butted together in moderate contact without gaps, with staggered end joints.

Install insulation boards over Sarnavap 10 vapour retarder with long side at right angles to flutes of steel deck. Provide full support at ends. Cut and trim insulation boards to provide plain butt joints at perimeter, parapet, curbs, etc.. Lay insulation boards in parallel course, butted together in moderate contact without gaps, with staggered joint.

Mechanically fasten insulation boards with fasteners and plates at a rate of sixteen (16), fasteners 4’-0” x 8’-0” board size. The fasteners are to be positioned as required by the system manufactured to meet the requirements of their FM Certification.

Leave insulation board joints unbonded over line of building control and expansion joints.

Do not lay more insulation than can be covered in one day. Lay thermal barrier and insulation boards at right angles to the run of the

deck. Butt boards tightly so that joints are over ridges in steel deck. Do not install boards which are broken or have chipped or broken edges.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 07200 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 Building Insulation and Air/Vapour Barrier Page 9 of 9 3.2 PATCHING 3.2.1 Perform cutting and patching necessary to accommodate irregularities in

the work of this Section caused by appurtenances of the work of other Sections including piping, ductwork and electrical conduit projecting through the insulation or air/vapour barriers.

3.2.2 Ensure the continuity of the insulation and air/vapour barriers where such

items project through the barriers. Allow for expansion and contraction and linear movement of these items.

3.2.3 Where there is a possibility of heat loss through ductwork or conduit which

passes through the insulation and air/vapour barrier, extend insulation around the duct or conduit a distance of 300 mm minimum on both sides of the barrier unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

3.2.4 After installation under other Sections of heating equipment and other

construction adjacent to the work of this Section, inspect the work of this Section and perform such reasonable taping and patching of air/vapour barriers and replacing of insulation as necessitated by unavoidable minor damage caused in the course of the work of the other Sections.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.3.1 Insulation and air/vapour barrier installations shall be inspected and

accepted by the Consultant prior to the installation of ceiling and wall finishing materials.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 FLASHING & SHEET METAL Page 1 of 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Work Included Design, fabrication, and erection of all sheet metal flashings where noted on drawings and as

required to finish work in other sections. 1.2 Related Work Mortar and Grout Section 04100 Unit Masonry Section 04200 Rough Carpentry Section 06100 Built Up Roofing Section 07510 1.3 Quality Assurance Use a trade contractor approved by the manufacturer, employing skilled tradesmen, competent in

the installation or the selected product. 1.4 Submittals Samples of materials and profiles in accordance with General Conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials Sheet Metal: 22 gauge gavalume coated steel to AZ180, color to be selected by

Consultant. Aluminum Sheet: plain pattern, 22 gauge, clear anodized finish to AAM12C22A31. Fasteners: weather guard hexheaded screws with 1/2 in. dome and neoprene washers.

Colour to match flashings. Galvanized or stainless steel nails or screws, compatible with materials being employed suitable to Consultant’s approval.

Locking Strips: 22 gauge galvanized steel continuous concealed strips.

Special Hook Strips and Cleats: two gauges heavier of matching materials of flashing being employed.

Solder: Block Solder 50% tin, 50% lead. Nails: Ardox of length to penetrate bases ½ In.. Exposed Fasteners: Consult manufacturer for screw type and sizing for materials being

secured. Provide caps for screw heads to match colour of flashing as specified. Masonry Fasteners: tapcon sized to penetrate concrete 1-1/2 in. minimum unless

otherwise specified. Wedges: Rolled plumber sheet lead. Masonry Anchors: In accordance with Section 04200.


Project: 017 010 FLASHING & SHEET METAL Page 2 of 3

Caulking: Polysulfide compound for concealed horizontal metal joints. Polyurethane to

CAN/CGSB1924 M80 for reglet and exterior applications. Use colour to match materials as approved by Consultant.

Joint Filler: Extruded polyethylene closed cell Shore a hardness 20, tensile strength 20

to 30 psi.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Inspection Before commencing erection, examine the work and conditions to make sure that they are

acceptable and within tolerance for the work of this Section. Report unsatisfactory work or conditions to the Consultant in writing.

Commencement of work implies acceptance of existing work conditions. 3.2 Fabrication Fabricate all possible work in the shop in minimum 8 ft. lengths by brake forming, bench cutting,

drilling and shaping. Form bends with straight sharp lines and angles into true planes, free from twists, buckles, dents

and other visual distortions. Double – back exposed metal edges at least ½ in. . Raw edges will not be permitted.

Supply all accessories required for installation of sheet metal work of this Section. Fabricate

accessories of same material as work with which they will be used. 3.1 Inspection Install refinished metal and sheet metal work in accordance with CECA specifications and

standards and as detailed. Use concealed fastenings except where approved before installation. Install refinished metal flashing at all locations exposed to view to include copings, walls,

expansion joints and curbs as shown on the drawings. Install sheet metal flashing for concealed or hidden from view as shown on the drawings, or as

otherwise required, for building components which penetrate roofs, and for which flashing are not specified in the work of other sections.

Sheet metal work shall be installed to properly cover the area to be protected and be watertight

under all service and weather conditions. Install in a uniform manner, level, true to line free, of dents, warping and distortion. Report unsatisfactory work or conditions to the Consultant in writing.

Back-paint at the rate of 1 gal. /60 sq. ft. with bituminous paint, sheet metal that comes in contact

with another kind of metal, masonry or concrete. Install sheet metal with concealed fasteners at lock joints. Exposed fastening will be permitted

only with the approval of the Consultant. Space all fasteners evenly in an approved manner. Use


Project: 017 010 FLASHING & SHEET METAL Page 3 of 3

lead plugs and screws with rubber washers where metal flashings are installed over concrete or masonry.

Join sheet metal by “S” lock seams, to permit thermal movement. Clean off all excessive material

visible subsequent to installation. Space joints evenly where exposed. Make corners by means of raised seams.

Lock seam and caulk. Do not use pop rivets. Shape all metal to interior to maintain minimum 4 % slope for positive drainage. Do not form open

joints or pockets that fail to drain water. Caulk open sheet metal joints. Wedge flashings into reglet joints lead wedges 9 in. i.c. . At reglets wider than 3/8 in. and deeper

than ¾ in., provide polyetheline rod, 25% wider than joint width. Prime and caulk all joints to ensure positive waterproof seal. Use colours to match materials as approved by Consultant. Conform to manufacturer’s latest printed recommendations for use of product being employed.

Remove flux residue completely from surfaces and crevices. Remove other deposits or

protections, and wash metals left unpainted and exposed to view as specified by metal manufacturer.

Touch up minor paint damage with matching paint. END OF SECTION


Project: 017 010 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS Page 1 of 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as

if repeated here. 1.2 WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1 Firestopping and smoke seals within mechanical (i.e. inside ducts, dampers)

and electrical assemblies (i.e. inside bus ducts) are specified in Divisions 15 and 16 respectively. All other firestopping and smoke seals are the responsibility of this Section.

1.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1 CAN/ULC-S101 Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and

Materials 2 CAN4-S115-M85 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada, Standard

Method of Fire Tests for Firestop Systems 3 ASTM E119 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 4 ASTM E-814 Fire Tests of Firestop Systems. 1.4 SAMPLES 1 Submit samples for Consultant's review, in accordance with Section 01010. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS 1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with General

Conditions. 2 Show proposed material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings and

method of installation. Construction details should accurately reflect actual job conditions.

3 Submit manufacturer's product data for materials and prefabricated

devices, providing descriptions are sufficient for identification at job site. Include manufacturer's printed instructions for installation.

1.6 SINGLE SOURCE RESPONSIBILITY 1 It is the intent of this Section of the Specifications to establish a single,

competent source to be responsible for providing firestopping and smoke sealing work for the entire project as clarified under 1.2 above.

2 Subcontractor shall be a specialist with accredited experience of not less

than 5 years, and as recommended by firestopping/smoke seal manufacturers.


Project: 017 010 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS Page 2 of 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 1 Firestopping and smoke seal systems: in accordance with CAN4-S115,

CAN/ULC-S101, ASTM E119, and ASTM E-814. Unless noted otherwise ‘F’ and ‘T’ ratings 1 hour.

.1 Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining an

effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of CAN4-S115 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended.

.2 Tests shall be performed by an accredited testing agency acceptable to local Jurisdictional Authority.

2 Service penetration assemblies: certified by ULC in accordance with CAN4-

S115 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19. 3 Service penetration firestop components: certified by ULC in accordance

with CAN4-S115 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19.13 and ULC Guide No. 40 U19.15 under the Label Service of ULC.

4 Fire resistance rating of surrounding floor and wall assembly as indicated. 5 For firestopping and smoke seals at openings intended for ease of re-entry

such as cables, use elastomeric seal; do not use cementitious or rigid seal at such locations.

6 For firestopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes,

ductwork and other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control use elastomeric seal; do not use a cementitious or rigid seal at such locations.

7 Primers: to manufacturer's recommendation for specific material, substrate,

and end use. 8 Water (if applicable): potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of

deleterious substances. 9 Damming and backup materials, supports and anchoring devices: to

manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

10 Sealants for vertical joints: non-sagging. 11. a. Hilti LIL FC1059 metal pie through 1 hr fire rated assembly b. Hilti LIL WJ720 metal duct through floor assembly up to 18”x24” c. Hilti SP 727 multiple penetrations through concrete wall assembly d. Hilti CAJ 7051 metal duct (30”x30”)

e. other Hilti firestopping as required for other 1 hr fire rated wall & ceiling penetrations


Project: 017 010 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS Page 3 of 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 1 Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct

thicknesses and installation of materials. Ensure that substrates and surfaces are dry and frost free.

2 Prepare surfaces in contact with firestopping materials and smoke seals to manufacturer's instructions.

3 Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation. 4 Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining

surfaces; remove stains on adjacent surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION 1 Install firestopping and smoke seal material and components in

accordance with ULC certification and manufacturer's instructions. 2 Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through

termination devices and unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are maintained.

3 Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after

materials have gained sufficient strength and after initial curing. 4 Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to a neat finish. 5 Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon

completion. 3.3 INSPECTION 1 Notify Consultant when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or

enclosing firestopping materials and service penetration assemblies. 3.4 SCHEDULE 1 Work of firestopping and smoke seals shall include but not limited to the

following:

.1 Penetrations through fire resistance rated masonry, concrete, and gypsum board work.

.2 Top of fire resistance rated masonry and gypsum board work. .3 Intersection of fire resistance rated masonry and gypsum board

work. .4 Control joints in fire resistant rated masonry and gypsum board

work. .5 At edge of floor slabs at juncture with wall envelope. .6 Penetrations through fire resistant rated floor slabs, ceilings and

similar members.


Project: 017 010 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS Page 4 of 4 .7 Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire resistant

rated separations. .8 Any and all existing penetrations and openings in existing fire

separations that are found on the work site in the course of the project, i.e. rated floor assemblies or rated wall assemblies, shall be firestopped to maintain the required fire separation rating.

3.5 CLEAN-UP 1 Remove excess materials and debris and clean adjacent surfaces

immediately. 2 Remove temporary dams after initial set of firestopping and smoke seal

materials. 3 Remove firestopping from materials and surfaces not specifically required to

be sealed.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 SEALANTS Page 1 of 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if

repeated here. 1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.2.1 ASTM C790-90 Recommended Practices for Use of Latex

Sealing Compounds 1.2.2 ASTM C804-83 Standard Practices for Use of Solvent-Release

(Reapproved 1988) Type Sealant

1.2.3 ASTM D1056-85 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber

1.2.4 ASTM D1565-81 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular

(Reapproved 1986) Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open Cell Foam)

1.2.5 CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87 Sealing Compound, One Component,

Elastomeric, Chemical Curing 1.2.6 CAN/CGSB-2-19.24-M90 Sealing Compound, Multi-Component, Chemical Curing 1.2.7 CAN/CGSB 19-GP-22-M89 Sealing Compound, Mildew Resistant, for Tubs

and Tile 1.2.8 Sealant and Waterproofers Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.

Institute.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Have work performed by a recognized established caulking and sealing contractor

having at least ten years experience and with skilled workers thoroughly trained and competent in the use of caulking and sealing equipment and the specified materials.

1.3.2 In order that recommendations may be made, arrange with sealant manufacturers

for one of their technical representatives to visit the site, prior to application of this work, to discuss with the Contractor, in the presence of the Consultant, the procedures to be adopted and to review site conditions, and surfaces and joints to be sealed.

1.3.3 Discuss the following items:

.1 Weather conditions under which work will be done. .2 Anticipated frequency and extent of joint movement. .3 Joint design.

.4 Suitability of durometer hardness and other properties of material specified.


Project: 017 010 SEALANTS Page 2 of 5

1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Samples

.1 Prepare sample joints at site of each type of caulking and sealant for each joint condition. Do not proceed with work until each sample joint has been accepted by Consultant.

.2 Approved joints shall represent minimum acceptable for work. .3 Submit manufacturer's name for each compound which will be used on

project before commencing work.

1.4.2 Product Data: Submit product data of sealants and caulking proposed in accordance with General Conditions.

1.4.3 Extended Warranty

.1 Submit a warranty in accordance with General Conditions, covering the repair or replacement of defective work for a period of 4 years from the expiration of the one-year warranty, under the General Conditions.

.2 Warranty shall provide for repair or replacement of damaged work

resulting from leakage, gassing, wrinkling, ridging, sagging, shrinkage, running, loss of adhesion, cohesive failure, or staining of adjoining surfaces.

.3 Total warranty period shall be 5 years.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS 1.5.1 Apply materials only to completely dry surfaces, and at air and material

temperatures above minimum established by manufacturer's specifications. 1.5.2 The applicator is responsible for ensuring the sealants are applied under

acceptable conditions. Substrate temperatures of less than 4°C require special considerations, to ensure a clean, dry substrate and proper sealant wet-out.

.1 The substrate to which sealant is to be applied should be dry. This is

particularly crucial where the substrate is porous and subject to water absorption. Although the joint interface may appear to be dry, the substrate below the immediate joint surface may still be moist. This moisture can migrate rapidly to the joint surface thereby contaminating any preparation.

.2 Use a quick flashing solvent such as MEK or Tremco 200 Cleaner to clean

the substrates.

NOTE: Ensure the substrate and/or any coating on the substrate is compatible with MEK or Tremco Cleaner 200.

.3 After solvent cleaning, wipe the joint interfaces dry with a second clean

rag. .4 Immediately following cleaning, install the sealant and tool it.


Project: 017 010 SEALANTS Page 3 of 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Generally: Labels indicating conformance to specified reference specifications will

be acceptable as verification that contents meet specified requirements. Colour will be selected by Consultant from manufacturer's standard range. Colours shall match surface on which it occurs unless noted otherwise.

2.1.2 Sealants: Non-bleeding and capable of supporting their own weight. Caulking,

sealants, cleaning solvents, fillers and primers shall be compatible with each other.

.1 Interior non-traffic bearing: one component elastomeric material conforming to CAN/CGSB-19.13, Class 1 or 2, depending on application. Colour as selected by the Consultant.

.2 Exterior non-traffic bearing, weather side of construction: use one of the

following:

.1 “Dymeric 240" by Tremco. .2 "RC-2" by Sternson Construction Products. .3 "Silpruf" by General Electric Canada .4 "790" by Dow Corning. .5 "Vulkem 922" by Mameco International.

.3 Traffic bearing: Tremco Dymeric 240, or Mameco "Vulkem 45". .4 Sanitary caulking: Dow Corning "786" mildew resistant silicone, General

Electric "1700 Sanitary Sealant", or "Rhodorsil 8S".

2.1.3 Primer: Specifically designed for use with compounds on surfaces encountered, and as specified by the compound manufacturer, to assure adhesion of compound and to prevent staining of substrate material.

2.1.4 Sealant Backing: Extruded, polyethylene closed cell, round foam rod, 25% wider

than joint width, and manufactured especially for caulking purpose. Ensure that sealant backing is not cut nor punctured during installation.

2.1.5 Bond Breaker: Tape of type supplied or recommended by sealant or caulking manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION


Project: 017 010 SEALANTS Page 4 of 5 3.1.1 Remove moisture, loose mortar, dust, oil, grease, oxidation, mill scale, coatings,

and all other materials affecting bond of compounds by brushing, scrubbing, scraping, or grinding, from surfaces to which caulking compounds must adhere.

3.1.2 Ensure that releasing agents, coatings, or other treatments have either not been

applied to joint surfaces, or that they are entirely removed. 3.1.3 Ensure joints are suitable to accept sealant and caulking. 3.1.4 Before any work is commenced, test the materials for indications of staining or poor

adhesion. 3.1.5 Do not apply material to masonry until mortar has cured. 3.1.6 Do not exceed shelf life, and pot life of the materials and installation times, as

stated by the manufacturers. 3.1.7 Become familiar with the work life of the material to be used. Do not mix two part

materials until required for use. 3.1.8 Mix sealants thoroughly with a mechanical mixer capable of mixing at 80-100 rpm

without mixing air into the materials. Continue mixing until the material is a uniform colour and free from streaks of unmixed material.

3.1.9 Mask areas adjacent to the joints as required. Prevent contamination of adjacent

surfaces. Remove masking promptly after the joint has been completed. 3.2 APPLICATION 3.2.1 Work of this Section shall include all sealing and caulking, except where specified

under the work of other Sections, to make the building weather and air tight, as indicated typically on drawings, and as otherwise specified.

3.2.2 Apply materials in accordance with the recommendation of the material

manufacturer, in particular, backer rod, priming and depth-to-width ratio. 3.2.3 Pack joints tightly with sealant backing, set at sealant depth. 3.2.4 Apply primer with a brush which will permit all joint surfaces to be primed. Perform

priming immediately before installation of caulking or sealant. 3.2.5 Caulking and sealants shall be of gun or knife grade consistency to suit the joint

condition. Use gun nozzles of the proper sized to suit the joints and the caulking and sealing material.

3.2.6 Apply with manually operated or air pressure operated guns. 3.2.7 Use sufficient pressure to fill all voids and joints. Caulking sealants shall bond to

both sides of joint but not backing material. 3.2.8 Ensure that the correct compound depth is maintained. Superficial painting with a

skin bead will not be accepted. 3.2.9 Finished applications shall be a full bead free from air pockets and embedded

impurities and having smooth surfaces, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and imbedded impurities.


Project: 017 010 SEALANTS Page 5 of 5 3.2.10 After joints have been completely filled, tool them neatly to a slight concave

surface. 3.2.11 Caulk joints in site painted materials after adjacent surfaces have been painted. 3.2.12 The work shall include, but not limited to the following:

.1 Exterior and interior hollow metal steel door frames; interior screens (both sides of frames).

.2 Exposed control joints in masonry walls; masonry wall corners; masonry-to-column junctures; joints in front of steel lintels bearing on exterior brick jambs.

.3 Raked joints in junction of walls running at different angles, and at junction of walls to columns.

.4 Joints between washroom vanities, and other counters, urinals, and adjacent surfaces (use sanitary caulking).

.5 Wall to floor junctions and joints in floor, where typically indicated on Drawings.

.6 Joints between masonry and concrete surfaces. .7 Joints between gypsum board and masonry, or other materials. .8 Joints between louvers and other surfaces. .9 Penetrations through roofs, floors and walls other than firestopping. .10 At other locations shown on Drawings. .11 Joints between precast panels installed by masonry trade and other

materials, and between precast pieces. 3.3 CLEANING 3.3.1 Do not use chemicals, scrapers, or other tools which would damage surfaces of

caulked or sealed materials when excess compounds or droppings are removed. Work damaged by cleaning shall be made good under work of this Section.

3.4 REPAIR 3.4.1 Cut out damaged caulking and sealing, re-prepare and prime joints and install new

material as specified to the Consultant's satisfaction. 3.5 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK 3.5.1 Provide wood planks or other approved, non-staining means of protection for the

completed caulking and sealants installations where required to protect the work from mechanical, thermal, chemical and other damage by other construction operations and traffic.

3.5.2 Maintain protection securely in place until project completion. Remove protection

when so directed by the Consultant.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 08 14 16 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1 Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section .1 Flush wood doors .2 Flush wood doors with openings for grilles as necessary 2 Related Sections .1 Section 08 07 00 Finish Hardware .3 Section 09 90 00 Painting & Coatings 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1 Product Data .1 Manufacturer's product literature. .2 Maintenance and repair instructions. .3 Samples: Submit 3 - 100 mm x 200 mm samples of each type of door facing

material. Conform to Section 01300. 2 Shop Drawings - Schedule showing type of door at each location. Included shall be size,

veneer, core type, fire rating, hardware prep, openings, blocking, etc. Conform to Section 01 33 00.

3 Quality Assurance/Control - Submit copies of fire tests showing accessories and

configurations necessary for rated doors to achieve ratings. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING 1 Deliver in clean truck and, if in wet weather, under cover. Deliver to building site after

plaster, cement, and taping compound are dry. At time of delivery of unfinished doors, seal top and bottom rails of doors that are to remain on site in storage longer than seven days before they are installed.

2 Store doors in a space having controlled temperature and humidity range between 25

and 55 percent. Store flat on level surface in dry, well ventilated space. Cover to keep clean but allow air circulation. Do not subject doors to direct sunlight, abnormal heat, dryness, or humidity.

3 Handle with clean gloves and do not drag doors across one another or across other

surfaces. 1.4 WARRANTY

1 Submit a warranty in accordance with Section 01 78 36, covering the replacement of defective work for a period of 2 years from the expiration of the one-year warranty under the General Conditions.

2 Warping, shrinking, twisting, showing of core ghost lines, splitting, delaminating, or sagging under normal use will be considered as defects. Warpage shall not exceed 3 mm clearance over height or width.

3 Warranty shall cover hanging, refinishing, and complete replacement costs of defective doors.

4 Total warranty period: 3 years.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS 1 Wood Doors .1 For Transparent Finish - .1 Door Grade - AWI Premium .2 Face Veneer - (1) Plain sliced Hardwood (Sugar) Maple meeting requirements of

AWI Grade A, 0.5 mm (1/50") thick minimum immediately prior to finishing.

(2) Face veneers shall be running book matched. FACE PLAM –

(1) Plastic laminate –Plam. 2. .3 Fully Type I - Adhere all glue lines with Type I adhesive, including

veneer lay-up. .4 Core - .1 Fully bonded to stiles and rails and sanded as a unit prior to

applying veneers. .2 Non-Rated - (1) 32 lb density meeting requirements of ANSI A 208.1 Mat

Formed Wood Particle Board, Grade 1-L-1 minimum. (2) Stiles - [1] 35 mm (1-3/8") deep minimum before fitting. [2] 10 mm (3/8") minimum of stile face to be

hardwood matching face veneer material. (3) Rails - [1] 28 mm (1-1/8") [2] Mill option, except top rail of lower half of Dutch

Doors which have 10 mm (3/8") minimum of rail face to be hardwood matching face veneer material.

.3 Fire-Rated, 45 Minutes - (1) Mineral as standard with approved Manufacturer with

inner blocking, 125 mm (5") wide minimum, for flush bolts and exit devices.

(2) Stiles & Rails - [1] Sizes of stiles and rails to be Manufacturer's

standard to meet fire rating. [2] Stiles for pairs of mineral core doors shall be of

material meeting required fire rating without use of metal astragal or edge.

.5 Glazing Stops: Thinline prefinished aluminum at non fire rated locations. Acceptable Material (Non Fire Rated): "Ken-Door" aluminum door lites by K.N. Crowder or approved equal, prime paint finish.

2.2 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 1 Baillergeon 2 Cambridge Door 3 Door Lam Manufaturing

4 Dormond Industries 5 Lambton 6 Prem-Door 7 Sauder Industries


8 Weyerhaeuser. 2.3 FABRICATION

1 Doors shall be factory-machined. 2 Fabricate doors and frames to meet specified requirements for service in interior

locations, in sizes and designs indicated on Drawings and Schedules. 3 Fabricate slab and dutch doors 44 mm thick, 5-ply solid-core construction, unless

indicated otherwise on Drawings and Schedules. 4 Provide particleboard core doors with built-up full height stiles, and full width rails.

Fabricate stiles and rails, hardwood outer piece laminated to inner piece. Fabricate stiles and rails to conform to CAN/CSA 0132.2. Laminate a 1.6 mm thick hardwood veneer crossbanding to serve as substrate for facing material. Incorporate solid wood blocking at locations where finish hardware and security hardware is installed.

5 Sand back of facing material to provide a homogeneous bonding surface. Bond the

facing material to manufacturer's instructions to provide a perfectly smooth surface, free from distortion, waves, or ridges.

6 Glass Lights: Prepare doors to receive glass as indicated on Drawings and Schedules. 7 Prepare doors and frames for material specified in the Finish Hardware Schedule.

Preparations shall include, but not be limited to, those required for over-weight oversize hinges, continuous hinges, mortise locks, mortise and concealed vertical rod exit devices, surface and concealed door closers, concealed overhead stops and slides.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 1 Verification of Performance .1 Doors shall have following information permanently affixed on top of door: .1 Manufacturer .2 Door designation or model .3 Veneer species .2 Conform to National Fire Protection Standards, NFPA-80, for fire-rated doors.

Required fire-rated doors shall bear approved labels of ULC, Warnock Hersey International, or other code acceptable agency. Machining for hardware shall be complete prior to application of label.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

1 Door and frames shall be prepared for, but not limited to preparations for heavy weight oversize butt hinges, continuous hinges, cylindrical locksets, concealed vertical rod and mortise lock case exit devices, surface door closers and concealed overhead stops.


- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 Aluminum Clad Wood Doors Page 1 of 6 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Aluminum-clad wood commercial hinged doors. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 07200 – Insulation Air/Vapour Barriers B. Section 07900 - Sealants C. Section 06210 – Installation of Doors and Finish Hardware

D. Section 08800 – Finishing Hardware. E. Section 08 80 00 – Glazing 1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. AAMA 502 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows and Sliding Doors. 2. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 3. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM B 117 - Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 2. ASTM C 1036 - Flat Glass. 3. ASTM C 1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass – Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 4. ASTM D 1149 - Rubber Deterioration – Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber. 5. ASTM D 2803 - Filiform Corrosion Resistance of Organic Coatings on Metal. 6. ASTM D 3656 - Insect Screening and Louver Cloth Woven from Vinyl-Coated Glass Yarns. 7. ASTM D 4060 - Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser. 8. ASTM E 283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under

Specified Pressure Difference Across the Specimen. 9. ASTM E 330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform

Static Air Pressure Difference. 10. ASTM E 547 - Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Cyclic

Static Air Pressure Differential. 11. ASTM E 1105 – Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of

Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 12. ASTM G 85 - Modified Salt Spray (Fog) Testing.


Project: 017 010 Aluminum Clad Wood Doors Page 2 of 6

C. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA): 1. ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and

Wood Windows and Glass Doors. 2. ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2/NAFS-02 - Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows,

Skylights and Glass Doors. 3. WDMA I.S.4 - Industry Standard for Water-Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for

Millwork. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Doors not rated due to 0 psf water performance with low profile sill.

B. Door Unit Air Leakage, ASTM E 283, 1.57 psf (25 mph): 0.15 cfm per square foot of frame or less. 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Division 1 requirements.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, indicating dimensions, construction, component connections and locations, anchorage methods and locations, hardware locations, and installation details.

D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site undamaged in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying manufacturer and product name. Include installation instructions.

B. Storage: Store materials in an upright position, off ground, under cover, and protected from

weather, direct sunlight, and construction activities.

C. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Pella Corporation, 102 Main Street, Pella, Iowa 50219. Toll Free (800) 54-PELLA. Phone (641) 621-

1000. Website www.pella.com. 2. Marvin Doors & Windows of Canada, 1455 Courtneypark Dr. E., Mississauga, ON L5T 2E3 tel. (905) 670-5052, marvincanada.com 3. Kolbe Windows And Doors, distributed by Ridley Windows & Doors,


Project: 017 010 Aluminum Clad Wood Doors Page 3 of 6 520 Applewood Cres., Toronto, ON L4K 4B4 tel. 416-742-3546 4. Or Consultant approved equivalent 2.2 ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD HINGED DOORS

A. Aluminum-Clad Wood Hinged Doors: Architect Series factory-assembled aluminum-clad wood doors with outward-swing door panels installed in frame.

B. Frame:

1. Select woods, water-repellent, preservative-treated with EnduraGuard® in accordance with WDMA I.S.-4. EnduraGuard includes water-repellency, three active fungicides and an insecticide applied to the frame.

2. Interior Exposed Surfaces: Pine veneered and edge-banded with no visible fastener holes. 3. Exterior Surfaces: Clad with aluminum at head and jambs. 4. Metal Sill: Solid aluminum, ADA approved, low profile.

a. Finish: Mill finish. 5. Overall Frame Depth: 5-7/8 inches (149 mm).

C. Door Panel:

1. Select woods, water-repellent, preservative-treated with EnduraGuard in accordance with WDMA I.S.-4. EnduraGuard includes water-repellency, three active fungicides and an insecticide applied to the panel.

2. Panels: Three-ply construction. Randomly finger-jointed blocks laminated with water-resistant glue.

3. Interior Exposed Surfaces: Pine core veneered with Pine, with glass stops. 4. Exterior Surfaces: Clad with aluminum. 5. Intermediate Bar: 5-1/4 inches high. 6. Corners: Urethane-sealed and secured with metal fasteners. 7. Sash Thickness: 2-1/16 inches (52 mm).

D. Weather Strip:

1. Dual-durometer extruded polymer along jambs, head and sill. 2. Dual-durometer extruded polymer rainscreen along top and sides of panel. 3. Bristle rainscreen along bottom of panel.

2.3 GLAZING

A. Glazing: 1. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Quality 1. a. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048.

2. Type: Urethane-glazed 13/16-inch, dual-seal, fully tempered, insulating glass, multi-layer

Low-E coated. 3. Type: Silicone-glazed 1” triple-pane, dual-seal, fully tempered, insulating glass, multi-layer



Low-E coated.

4. Integral Light Technology Glazing and Grilles: a. Insulating glass contains non-glare spacer between the panes of glass. b. Grid: Adhered to glass on double pane and a metal spacer on triple pane. c. Room Side Grilles: 7/8" wide ogee profile that are solid Clear Pine. d. Exterior Grilles: Extruded aluminum 7/8" ogee profile. Dimension to match room side

grilles. e. Bars shall be adhered to both sides of insulating glass with VHB acrylic adhesive tape

and aligned with non-glare grid. f. Finish: Finish color matches interior and exterior finish colors.

2.5 HARDWARE A. Refer to Door Hardware schedule: Hinges:

1. Doors 6' 10" and under frame height will have three (3) ball-bearing hinges. 2. Doors over 6' 10" frame height up to and including 8' 0" frame height will have four (4) ball

bearing hinges. 3. Finish: compliments the finish of the sill.

2.6 TOLERANCES

A. Doors shall accommodate the following opening tolerances: 1. Vertical Dimensions Between High and Low Points: Plus 1/8 inch, minus 0 inch. 2. Width Dimensions: Plus 1/8 inch, minus 0 inch. 3. Building Columns or Masonry Openings: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from plumb.

2.7 FINISH

A. Exterior Finish System: AAMA 2603. 1. Exterior aluminum surfaces shall be finished with the following multi-stage system:

a. Clean and etch aluminum surface of oxides. b. Pre-treat with conversion coating. c. Top coat with baked-on polyester enamel.

2. Color: Consultant will chose at a later date – to match existing door colours. 3. Performance Requirements: Exterior aluminum finishes shall meet or exceed all

performance requirements of AAMA 2603 and the following performance requirements of AAMA 2605: a. Dry Film Hardness: Eagle Turquoise Pencil, H minimum. b. Film Adhesion: 1/16-inch crosshatch, dry, wet, boiling water. c. Impact Resistance: 1/10-inch distortion, no film removal. d. Chemical Resistance: 10 percent Muriatic acid, 15 minutes. Mortar pat test, 24 hours. e. Detergent Resistance: 3 percent at 100 degrees F, 72 hours. f. Corrosion Resistance (ASTM G85-A5): Humidity, 3,000 hours. Salt spray exceeds 3,000



hours.

C. Interior Finish: Factory-primed with 1 coat acrylic latex, to be painted on site colour by Consultant at a later date.

2.8 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Flashing/Sealant Tape: 1. Aluminum-foil-backed butyl window and door flashing tape. 2. Maximum Total Thickness: 0.013 inch. 3. UV resistant. 4. Verify sealant compatibility with sealant manufacturer.

B. Interior Insulating-Foam Sealant: Low-expansion, low-pressure polyurethane insulating window and door foam sealant.

C. Exterior Perimeter Sealant: high quality, multi-purpose sealant as specified in the joints sealant

section.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings.

B. Install doors to be weather-tight and freely operating.

C. Maintain alignment with adjacent work.

D. Secure assembly to framed openings, plumb and square, without distortion.

E. Integrate door system installation with exterior weather-resistant barrier using flashing/sealant tape. Apply and integrate flashing/sealant tape with weather-resistant barrier using watershed principles in accordance with door manufacturer's instructions.

F. Place interior seal around door perimeter to maintain continuity of building thermal and air

barrier using [backer rod and sealant] [insulating-foam sealant].

G. Seal door to exterior wall cladding with sealant and related backing materials at perimeter of assembly.



H. Leave doors closed. 3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean door frames and glass in accordance with Division 1 requirements.

B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish.

C. Remove labels and visible markings. 3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed doors to ensure that, except for normal weathering, doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.

END OF SECTION


Project: 017 010 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES, PANELS AND SCREENS Page 1 of 6

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if

repeated here. 1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.2.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA).

.1 CSA A101-M1983, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings. .2 CAN/CSA-G40.21-M92, Structural Quality Steels. .3 CSA W59-M1989, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).

1.2.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).

.1 CAN/CGSB-1.181-92, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. .2 CGSB 41-GP-19Ma-84, Rigid Vinyl Extrusions for Windows and Doors. .3 CAN/CGSB-51.20-M87, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe

Covering. .4 CGSB 51-GP-21M-78, Thermal Insulation, Urethane and Isocyanurate,

Unfaced.

1.2.3 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

.1 ASTM A 525M-91b, Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process Metric.

.2 ASTM A 526M-90, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Commercial Quality. .3 ASTM A 527M-90, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Lock-Forming Quality. .4 ASTM B 29-92, Specification for Pig Lead. .5 ASTM B 749-85(1991), Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet

and Plate Products. .6 ASTM E 152-81a, Methods for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

1.2.4 Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC).

.1 CAN4-S104M-M80, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. .2 CAN4-S105M-M85, Fire Door Frames.



1.2.5 Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturer's Association.

.1 CSDFMA, Specifications for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames, 1990. .2 CSDFMA, Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Commercial

Steel Doors, 1990.

1.2.6 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

.1 NFPA 80-1992, Fire Doors and Windows. .2 NFPA 252-1990, Door Assemblies Fire Tests of.

1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.3.1 Steel Fire Rated Doors and Frames: Labelled and listed by an organization

accredited by Standards Council of Canada in conformance with CAN4 S104M and CAN4 S105M for ratings specified or indicated.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.4.1 Brace frame units to prevent distortion in shipment, and protect finished surfaces

by sturdy protective wrappings. 1.4.2 Store doors in protective wrappings in a secure dry location, to ensure that they are

not damaged until hung. Install them only when work has progressed to a stage when no damage will occur to them in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Steel: commercial grade steel to ASTM A568 , Class 1, wiped coat galvanized to

ASTM A527, coating designation ASTM A525, ZF75. 2.1.2 Doors and Panels:

.1 Facings, rails, stiles: 1.5 mm (16 ga.) base steel thickness. .2 Interior Stiffeners: .914 mm base steel thickness. .3 Hardware Reinforcement: 3 mm base steel thickness. .4 Sound Deadening and Insulating Material: semi-rigid fibreglass 24 kg/m³

minimum density, to fill core space. Honeycomb structural core consisting of kraft paper with 20 mm cells x core thickness may be used at interior locations.

.5 Glazing Stops: 1.6 mm base steel thickness, formed, drilled and

countersunk for fasteners.



2.1.3 Frames

.1 Steel: 1.5 mm (16 ga.) base thickness. .2 Hardware Reinforcement: 3 mm base steel thickness. .3 Mortar Guards: .762 mm base steel thickness. .4 Rubber Bumpers: Glynn-Johnson GJ64 or approved equivalent. .5 Sound Seal: Rubber sound seal gaskets in aluminum frames, all around to

match existing courtroom doors on the same floor.

2.1.4 Anchors

.1 Frames in Masonry: adjustable "T" strap anchors. .2 Frames in Precast: galvanized expansion bolts. .3 Labelled Frames: to conform to ULC requirements. .4 Frames in Gypsum Board Partitions: steel anchor clips and floor anchors

of suitable design securely welded inside each jamb. .5 Anchorage to Floor: minimum 3 mm thick clip angles with 2 holes for

expansion bolting to floor.

2.1.5 Galvanizing

.1 Interior units: steel sheet wipe coated with zinc-iron alloy to a total mass coating both sides of 75 g/m² to conform to ASTM A525M, ZF75 coating designation.

.2 Exterior units, and interior units in unheated areas: steel sheet coated with

zinc to a total mass coating both sides of 275 g/m² to conform to ASTM A525M, Z275 coating designation. Mill phosphatize to provide for good paint adhesion.

2.2 FABRICATION - GENERALLY 2.2.1 Fit and assemble Work in the shop, where possible. Make trial assembly in shop

when not possible. 2.2.2 Fabricate, reinforce and anchor component parts and assemblies to support loads

that usage will impose without deflection detrimental to function, appearance or safety. For interior doors either the use of metal stiffeners with the spaces between stiffeners filled with insulation, or honeycomb structural core will be acceptable. For exterior doors the core is to be completely filled with insulation.

2.2.3 Reinforce components to resist in-use stresses imposed by finishing and security

hardware.



2.2.4 Prepare frames and doors for finish hardware with mortises and reinforcement. Drill

and tap to template information. Reinforce for surface-mounted hardware and for door closer brackets. Provide for concealed door closers where specified. Install mortar guards at cut-outs and reinforcing plates in frame. For cylindrical locks install reinforcing units to lock manufacturer's specification. For mortise locks provide a suitable internal bracket to hold the lock case rigidly in the centre of the door. Preparations shall include, but not be limited to, those required for over-weight oversize hinges, continuous hinges, mortise locks, mortise and concealed vertical rod exit devices, surface and concealed door closers, concealed overhead stops and slides.

2.2.5 Provide for anticipated expansion and contraction of frames and supports. 2.2.6 Fit elements at intersections and joints accurately together in true planes, plumb

and level. 2.2.7 Weld frame and door assemblies. Weld continuously at joints exposed to view

including door edge seams, or at joints through which air or water could penetrate from the exterior of the building to the interior.

2.2.8 Where welding is impossible, connections may be bolted. Ream drilled holes and

leave exposed edges clean and smooth. 2.2.9 Isolate from each other dissimilar metals and metal from concrete or masonry, to

prevent electrolysis. 2.2.10 Ensure that exterior doors and frames are tightly fitted, and that entry of water is

prevented by drips on head frames of outswinging doors exposed to weather. 2.2.11 Make allowance in frames and doors to receive electrical conduits for security

strikes and contactors which may be installed in doors and frames. Provide electrical conduit protection mortar boxes to receive conduit for electric strikes, locks, door closers, and hinges as detailed.

2.3 DOOR AND SCREEN FRAMES 2.3.1 Fabricate frames to details shown on Drawings using welded construction. 2.3.2 Fabricate steel frames in minimum base steel thickness specified. Minimum frame

material thickness applies only to work which does not otherwise require heavier gauges to meet specified fire-rated construction.

2.3.3 Touch up frames in the factory where coating has been removed. 2.3.4 Where members join at corners, cut mitres and weld continuously along inside

welding. 2.3.5 Where tubular transoms or mullions meet frame members, joint by butt welding. 2.3.6 Attach two channel spreaders at bottom of door frames to maintain square

alignment. Provide removable attachment for spreaders on frames that to not extend below finished floor, and remove them after frames are built in.



2.3.7 Incorporate structural stiffeners for frame members where required to withstand

loadings. Securely anchor them at bottom and top. Where they extend above ceiling, anchor them to concrete or structural framing to suit site conditions and in such a way that load from the concrete is not transferred to the frames.

2.3.8 Install three rubber bumpers in latch side stops of each interior door frame. Locate

lowest bumper 225 mm above bottom of door. 2.3.9 Backpaint exterior frames and frames to unheated areas where in contact with

masonry or concrete or other dissimilar materials. 2.3.10 Fabricate glass stops for non-rated screens the same as specified for glass stops

for doors. Fabricate glass stops for fire rated screens 20 mm wide and of 1.35 mm thick sheet steel.

2.3.11 Note all exterior doors on the Door Schedule shall have thermally broken frames.

Fill these frames with fibreglass or foamed in place polyurethane insulation. 2.4 DOORS AND PANELS 2.4.1 Fabricate interior and exterior doors and panels with sheet steel in specified base

steel thickness. 2.4.2 Minimum panel thickness applies only to doors not otherwise requiring heavier

gauges to meet specified fire-rated construction. 2.4.3 Fabricate doors with faces true and smooth, and with no dimples or welds visible. 2.4.4 Bevel edges of stiles to suit door swing. 2.4.5 Locate hardware to Canadian Steel Door & Frame Manufacturer's Association

Standard, unless shown otherwise on Drawings, Door Schedule Or Finishing Hardware Schedule.

2.4.6 Fill solid all voids within doors and panels with insulation, or honeycomb core. For exterior doors and panels, fill voids with insulation.

2.4.7 Fabricate muntins, removable stops, and glass mouldings of minimum 1.2 mm steel.

2.4.8 Prepare doors to receive glass and grilles. Install grilles. Secure removable stops with countersunk Phillips oval head screws symmetrically spaced on stop lengths.

2.4.9 Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors to make a weather tight seal, and doors to which the tops can be seen from stair landings or other high elevations, so that they are flush with face edges.

2.5 ANCHORS 2.5.1 Provide frames for installation in masonry walls with the following number of

anchors:

.1 Frames up to 2296 mm height, 3 anchors .2 Frames 2296 mm to 2438 mm, 4 anchors .3 Frames over 2438 mm, 1 anchor for each 600 mm or fraction thereof in

height. 2.5.2 Provide frames for installation in stud partitions with the following number of

anchors: .1 Frames up to 2296 mm height, 4 anchors .2 Frames 2296 mm to 2438 mm, 5 anchors



.3 Frames over 2438 mm, 5 anchors, plus 1 additional for each 600 mm or

fraction thereof over 2438 mm. 2.5.3 Provide frames to be anchored to previously-placed concrete, masonry, or

structural steel, with anchors of suitable design, as shown on reviewed shop drawings.

2.5.4 Securely weld adjustable floor anchors to inside of each jamb profile, with two holes provided at each jamb for floor anchorage.

2.5.5 Anchors shall have minimum gauges: "T" strap type, 1.6 mm "L" type, 1.2 mm; wire type, 3.9 mm diameter; stirrup type, 1.6 mm; stud type, 1.2 mm; jamb spreaders; 1.2mm.

2.6 FINISHING 2.6.1 Carbon Steel: Clean and smooth work at welds which has been ground. Fill if

necessary, and prime all areas from which zinc has been removed. 2.7 FIRE-RATED HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 2.7.1 Construct fire-rated doors and frames of ratings indicated, in accordance with ULC

Section 120 IDO, and as otherwise required by Jurisdictional Authorities. Fire rated screens containing doors shall be labelled (whole assembly).

2.7.2 Ensure that hardware used meets requirements of ULC 120 ID16, and installed to NFPA 80 requirements.

2.7.3 Doors and frames indicated as labelled shall have attached ULC labels. Attach labels on the inside of the hinge jamb midway between the top hinge and the head of the door frame. Where fire doors are shown in pairs swinging in the same or opposite directions they shall bear a ULC label of a category that does not require astragals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Installation of the Work of this Section is also specified in Section 06210. 3.2 PREPARATION

3.2.1 Door and frames shall be prepared for, but not limited to preparations for heavy weight oversize butt hinges, continuous hinges, cylindrical locksets, concealed vertical rod and mortise lock case exit devices, surface door closers and concealed overhead stops.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 08850 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 Clad Wood Windows Page 1 of 4 PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

1.2.1 Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section .1 Wood windows 1.2.2 Related Sections .1 Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry: installation .2 Section 07900 – Sealants: quality of sealants and caulking .3 Section 08830 – Glazing and Mirrors: quality of glass

1.3 REFERENCES

1.3.1 National Wood Window & Door Association Inc (NWWDA) .1 IS 2-87 - Industry Standard for Wood Windows .2 IS 4-87 - Industry Standard for Water-Repellant Preservatives 1.3.2 American Society for Testing And Materials .1 ASTM E 283-91, 'Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air

Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen'

.2 ASTM E 330-97, 'Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.'

.3 ASTM E 547-96, 'Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential.'

1.3.3 Canadian Standards Association .1 CAN/CSA-A440-M90, "Windows"

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.4.1 Design Requirements - NWWDA IS-2 Performance Grade 40 minimum. 1.4.2 Performance Requirements .1 Air leakage of 0.25 cu ft min/ft of crack maximum at 25 mph in

accordance with ASTM E 283. .2 No water penetration under static pressure of 50 mph, after three

cycles of 5 minutes each, with water applied at 5 gal/hr/sq ft in accordance with ASTM E 547.

.3 Window assembly shall withstand positive and negative windloads acting normal to plane of window, as required by applicable code when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 08850 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 Clad Wood Windows Page 2 of 4

.4 Window assembly shall have following U-values for AA window size as documented in NFRC Certified Products Directory.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

1.5.1 Product Data .1 Manufacturer's literature or cut sheet .2 Literature on glazing provided. .3 Maintenance and re-glazing instructions. 1.5.2 Shop Drawings - Submit prior to framing or laying up walls. Show rough

opening requirements and placement of glazing surfaces and types other than smooth, clear surfaces and types.

1.5.3 Quality Assurance / Control

.1 Published installation instructions for products furnished. .2 Copies of test results verifying NWWDA IS performance grade,

performance requirements, and NFRC listing. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.6.1 Qualifications - Windows provided shall be product manufactured by specified manufacturers. Windows manufactured by others and labelled by specified manufacturers are not acceptable.

1.7 WARRANTY

1.7.1 Window units shall have written 10 year non-prorated manufacturer's warranty including

.1 Seal failure and stress breaks. Warranty shall provide for replacement sash.

.2 Failure of operating hardware .3 Failure of cladding so wood core is exposed to elements.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

1.8.1 Maintenance Service - Service and replacement sashes shall be available within seven days of notification for up to two sashes.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS 2.1.1 Windows .1 Custom or stock windows sized to one inch maximum less than

rough opening width and 13 mm (1/2") less than rough opening height. Rough openings as indicated on Drawings.

.2 Wood - .a Species as approved in IS-2, kiln dried to moisture content of

less than 12 percent.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 08850 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 Clad Wood Windows Page 3 of 4 .b Treat with water repellent preservative after cutting and milling

but before fabrication in accordance with NWWDA IS-4. .3 Finish - a. Exterior -

i. Clad with aluminum. ii. Cladding to be mechanically interlocked, not

attached with fasteners. iii. Cladding corner locked. iv. Colour shall be selected by Consultant from

manufacturer’s full range. b. Interior - prime painted wood.

.4 Hardware - Standard of Manufacturer. .5 Weatherstripping - Factory applied completely around perimeter

of and between sashes. .6 Screens -

a. Furnish venting sash with Manufacturer's standard aluminum screen and attaching hardware.

b. Colour of screen frame to match exterior window frame colour.

.7 Glazing Characteristics – a. Gray tint exterior pane and clear interior pane, with low E

treatment on surface 3. b. Where Drawings indicate “Privacy Glazing”, gray tint

patterned exterior pane and clear interior pane, , with low E treatment on surface 3.

c. All glazing shall be with sealed insulating glass units. .8 Interior Jamb Extensions

a. As required for overall frame depth of 150 mm (6”). b. Of material matching window frame interior. c. Prime painted.

.9 Exterior Sills a. Extruded aluminum in colour to match window cladding. b. Minimum 114 mm (4-1/2”) depth extending from window sill to

exterior face of masonry veneer. c. Providing positive drainage to building exterior.

2.2 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 2.2.1 Bonneville Windows and Doors, Ste Marie de Beauce, PQ (418) 387-1000 2.2.2 Loewen Windows, Mississauga, ON (800) 268-0234

2.2.3 Marvin Windows, Mississauga, ON (800) 263-6161 2.2.4 Pella Windows / Kaycan, North York, ON (416) 747-6587

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

2.4.1 When delivered to Project, windows shall bear label stating model of window and Manufacturer's name, and CAN/CSA label.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 08850 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 Clad Wood Windows Page 4 of 4 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

3.1.1 Do not install windows in openings that are not properly prepared. Notify Consultant in writing of unsatisfactory conditions.

.1 Verify rough opening dimensions prior to ordering windows. .2 Check to ensure sill plate is level. .3 Ensure that masonry work has been cleaned prior to installation of

windows. 3.2 INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Tolerances - Windows provided may have no more than 13 mm (1/2") gap at each side and at top of opening dimensions indicated on Drawings. Provide custom windows if necessary to maintain specified installation tolerances.

3.2.2 Set windows plumb, level, and in alignment and secure properly to walls

and mullions with anchors and fastening devices supplied by Manufacturer. 3.2.3 Bed joints at mullions and contacts of windows with sills in mastic cement

supplied by window erector. Trim off excess mastic.

3.2.4 Follow Manufacturer’s written instructions.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 08 71 13 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 AUTOMATIC DOOR EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 3 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

1. Design, labour, Products, tool, equipment and services necessary for automatic door equipment work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2 REFERENCES

1. ANSI/BHMA A156.19, Power Assist and Low-Energy Power-Operated Doors.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1. Design handicap door system comprising of low energy power operator with optional push and go door system as defined in ANSI/BHMA A156.19.

2. Design handicap door system to operate both doors, of a set of double doors, with the push of a single push button. Coordinate opening of doors so that one door is almost completely closed before the other door starts opening.

3. Design Universal Washroom door system to include; - power door operator,

- electric strike - 2 stainless steel push plates - washroom kit; advanced logic control unit, mushroom (‘PUSH TO LOCK) button, single gang LED annunciator, magnetic door closer -emergency push button brushed stainless steel button with “press for Emergency Assistance” on faceplate, Single gang annunciator with 85db sounder, brushed stainless steel faceplate with ”ASSISTANCE REQUIRED” text legible if annunciator energized, single gang dome light with sounder 93 db at 1 m, brushed stainless steel faceplate with ”ASSISTANCE REQUIRED” text, sign to be located above activation switch , 15”x15” fire rated PVC white with black lettering, “IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY PUSH EMERGENCY BUTTON AND AUDIBLE & VISUAL SIGNAL WILL ACTIVATE”. Electric strike required by power door operator supplier). Door handle to be store room function.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Product data: Submit duplicate copies of manufacturer's Product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittals indicating performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference standard(s), characteristics, limitations, trouble-shooting protocol, transportation, storage, handling and installation requirements.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 08 71 13 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 AUTOMATIC DOOR EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 3

2. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittals indicating all connections, attachments, reinforcing, anchorage and location of exposed fastenings.

1.5 EXTENDED WARRANTY

1. Submit a warranty for automatic door equipment in accordance with General Conditions, except that warranty period is extended to 2 years. 1. Warrant against failure to meet design criteria and requirements. 2. Coverage: Complete replacement including affected adjacent

Work.

2 Products

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER(S) AND SYSTEM(S)

1. General: Provide for the complete installation and connection of automatic door operators at suite entry doors as indicated on the drawings. Installation shall include supply of all necessary equipment including, electric strike, all miscellaneous wiring and accessories, including hand held operator

2. Regular Duty, Interior Operator: Design is based on low energy, electro-mechanical operator. Operator to be as manufactured by one of the following: 1. SW 100 by Besam of Canada. 2. Magic Access by Stanley Canada Inc. 3. 7,000 Series by Horton Automatics. 4. LCN 9131. 5. Rhino Ado 7000 by Rhinotek Solutions

3. Electric Strike: As required for the selected Operator: 1. EFF (Rutherford) 7114. 2. Von Dupren 6211 FSE.

4. Activators: As required and suitable for the selected Operator. Provide all related electrical wiring, including low voltage, concealed wiring. 1. Suite entry doors (accessible projects only): Wireless transmitter

by BEA or LCN. 2. Public doors (as indicated on drawings): 150 mm diameter

stainless steel push button switches on either sides as indicated. Switches shall bear universal handicap logo visible to all types of traffic.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 08 71 13 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 AUTOMATIC DOOR EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 3 2.2 REQUIREMENTS

1. Provide header complete with full housing, finish shall match door frame finish.

2. Locations of automatic door operators to conform to requirements of the Ontario Building Code (OBC) and meet the approval of the Consultant. Execution

3.

2.3 INSTALLATION

1. Install automatic door operators, controls and accessories for doors indicated in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer written instructions.

2. Installation of automatic door operators to be in accordance with requirements of the Ontario Building Code (OBC) and meet the approval of TCHC.

3. Doors shall operate manually as though equipped with manual door closers, without damage to automatic door components, in event of power failure or in event of power termination.

4. Power supply to each door operator and wiring shall be provided by Division 26. Make connections at operators and at control panel and supply and install each electrical work between operators and activating controls. Comply with requirements of Division 26. All wiring shall be concealed and where exposed shall be run in conduit. Location of exposed wiring shall be subject to TCHC's approval.

2.4 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

1. Test and adjust operators and controls smooth and proper operation.

2. Upon completion of Work of this Section, remove from Site all debris, equipment and excess material resulting from Work of this Section.

END OF SECTION


Project: 017 010 FINISHING HARDWARE Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUPPLY OF HARDWARE

1.2.1 The supply and delivery, to the Place of Work, of all finish hardware for this

project shall be by the Hardware Supplier.

1.3 SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS, MAGNETIC LOCKING SYSTEMS AND ELECTRICAL LOCKING SYSTEMS 1.3.1 The supply and installation of Automatic Door Operators, Magnetic Locking

Systems and Electrical Locking Systems shall by the Hardware Supplier. 1.3.2 Division 16 shall supply and install conduit, junction boxes and wiring for and

make electrical power connections to Automatic Door Operators, Magnetic Locking Systems and Electrical Locking Systems

1.4 RELATED SECTIONS 1.4.1 Section 06210 Installation of Doors and Finish Hardware 1.4.2 Section 06400 Architectural Woodwork

1.4.3 Section 08100 Hollow Metal Doors, Frames, Panels and Screens. 1.4.10 Division 16 Electrical

1.5 EXTENT OF WORK 1.5.1 Supply direct from the distributor, off-load and place in designated storage

space at the Place of Work, all finish hardware specified, including necessary fastening devices.

1.5.2 Store finishing hardware in locked, clean and dry area. 1.5.3 Check and verify all hardware information on door and frame shop

drawings, prior to fabrication. 1.5.4 Give on-site assistance as required.

1.6 CODES 1.6.1 Hardware provided shall comply with codes and requirements of all

governing authorities, and be as specified.


Project: 017 010 FINISHING HARDWARE Page 2 of 5 1.6.2 Provide hardware items with characteristics which will provide specified fire

ratings and conform to exit requirements of all governing authorities.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

1.7.1 Finishing Hardware Schedule: Furnish six (6) copies of schedule to trades for field construction.

1.7.2 Maintenance Instructions: Instruct the Owner’s representative in proper care

and preventative maintenance of all hardware to assure longevity of operation.

1.7.3 Operations and Maintenance Manual: Provide one copy of the Finishing

Hardware Schedule and Maintenance Instructions in the Operations and Maintenance manual required under Section 01300.

1.7.4 Samples: Further to requirements of Section 01300, submit for review one (1)

sample of each latchset, lockset, combination push/pulls, closer(s), wall stops, butt hinges, continuous hinges, door bottoms and weatherstripping.

1.8 PRODUCT HANDLING

1.8.1 Provide all template information drawings, promptly when requested, and

provide three (3) copies of installation instructions for each item supplied. 1.8.2 Package each item of hardware individually complete with all trim and

necessary fastenings and accessories including wrenches, keys, and other appurtenances required to ensure correct installation. Mark each item as to contents and appropriate use in specified groups.

1.8.3 Provide kickplates with an easily removable covering to protect against

scratches, abrasions and tarnishing.

1.9 TEMPLATES 1.9.1 Arrange for the issue by each hardware manufacturer, the manufacturer’s

standard book of template drawings, at the option of the door and frame manufacturer.

1.10 SCHEDULES

1.10.1 Hardware consultant will prepare a separate Hardware Schedule for use on

the Work, which will list the type, selected manufacturer’s name and product number, location and finish of all hardware, and complete cross reference to the Door and Frame Schedules and the architectural woodwork details.

1.10.2 Hardware consultant will prepare a Keying Schedule recognizing Owner requirements. 1.10.3 These Schedules will be determined within four (4) weeks after award of

Contract.



1.11 KEY CONTROL SECURITY

1.11.1 Include all costs for a complete and acceptable cross-referenced Key Control System provided by the hardware supplier.

1.11.2 Change key for all locks will be placed in key cabinet by Owner. 1.11.3 Supplier shall forward all keys and cylinders to Owner. Contractor shall

request use of temporary cylinders and keys from Owner.

1.12 COORDINATION 1.12.1 Co-ordinate Work of this Section to ensure all information and materials are

promptly provided, to ensure orderly and expeditious progress of Work, and to comply with schedule for completion of all phases of the Work.

1.11.2 Within three (3) weeks of finish hardware contract award, submit to

Consultant confirmation of orders to suppliers. Finish hardware supplier shall be designated by the Owner.

1.11.3 Provide qualified staff to correctly categorize, mark, and arrange each item

in groups to enable efficient dispensing, in specified hardware sections for each door, to installation trades.

1.11.4 Be responsible for coordination of hardware with doors, frames and other

surfaces to which direct contact is made. This function shall include a review and acceptance of all hardware information on hollow metal door and frame shop drawings, aluminum entrance shop drawings, rolling door shop drawings, and any other shop drawings affected by hardware supplied to this project under this Section. Return such drawings with review stamp and signature to applicable manufacturer within five (5) days of receipt.

1.11.5 Provide qualified staff on site, promptly, to assist installation trades,

subsequent to being requested and to ensure that all hardware is being installed correctly.

1.12 WARRANTY

1.12.1 Contractor hereby warrants that the Work of this Section shall remain free of

defects in materials, quality of work, and operation in accordance with the requirements of the General and Supplementary General Conditions, but for a period of two (2) years for all items, except closers, which shall be under warranty for a period of ten (10) years.

1.12.2 Contractor further agrees to promptly remove, replace and reinstall

material, upon verification that defects in material, quality of work, or operation are in evidence.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Material provided as listed in the Finishing Hardware Schedule. 2.1.2 Provide all items complete with fastening devices necessary to ensure a

neat, secure and complete installation.

2.2 KEYING INSTRUCTIONS 2.2.1 All locksets, exit devices and cylinders, on this project, shall be registered to

the existing Grand Master Key system as established by the Owner. 2.2.2 Provide two (2) change keys per lock. 2.2.3 Hardware supplier shall coordinate with Owner for final keying schedule. 2.2.4 Stamp keying code numbers on keys and cylinders. 2.2.5 Provide construction cores. 2.2.6 Provide all permanent cores and keys to Owner.

2.3 FASTENINGS 2.3.1 Supply screws, bolts, expansion shields and other fastening devices required

for satisfactory installation and operation of hardware. 2.3.2 Exposed fastening devices to match finish of hardware. 2.4.3 Where pull is scheduled on one side of door and push plate on other side,

supply fastening devices, and install so pull can be secured through door from reverse side. Install push plate to cover fasteners.

2.3.4 Use fasteners compatible with material through which they pass.

2.4 OVER-WIDE DOORS 2.4.1 Where required, supply and install auxiliary ‘MARKAR’ reinforcing hinges to

prevent door sag on over-wide doors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION 3.1.1 Before furnishing any hardware, carefully check drawings of Work requiring

hardware, verify door swings, check door and frame materials and review operating conditions, and assure that hardware will fit Work to be attached.

3.1.2 Point out special requirements to installer. Make final adjustment of hardware, in particular closer arms, valves and locksets; all to work properly.



3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.2.1 Inspect the installation of finish hardware on an agreed frequency, but not

less than once per week during period of installation. 3.2.2 Advise in writing of any, and all, Work being performed which will prejudice

the installation or correct operation of items of hardware 3.2.3 Where door stop contacts door pulls, mount stop to strike bottom of pull. 3.2.4 Install key control cabinet. 3.2.5 Remove construction when directed by Consultant; install permanent cores

and check operation of all locks. 3.2.6 Upon completion of installation of hardware, hardware supplier shall

arrange and conduct, in company of Consultant and Contractor, inspections to verify that all hardware is installed, adjusted and functioning satisfactorily and is complete with all required trim and accessories, and fastenings are adequately secured and accepted. Where necessary, recommend adjustments of such items as closer arms, valves, door holders and latch and locksets. Report all comments in writing to Consultant and Contractor.

3.2.7 Any and all substitutions of specified products, which do not meet conditions of this Specification, shall be removed from Site and replaced with those products specified in the Finishing Hardware Schedule at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.3 MOUNTING LOCATIONS

3.3.1 Allow for mounting of all items at standard heights given in Hardware

Schedule. For architectural woodwork mounting locations, refer to Drawings.

3.3.2 Conform to requirements of Section 3.8 of the Ontario Building Code (OBC) (latest edition), for mounting locations of hardware for barrier-free access.

3.4 SETUP KEYING SYSTEM AND CABINET

3.4.1 Set up key control system with file key tags, duplicate key tags, numerical

index, alphabetical index and key change index, label shields, control book and key receipt cards.

3.4.2 Place file keys and duplicate keys in key cabinet on their respective hooks. 3.4.3 Lock key cabinet and turn over key to Owner.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 GLAZING Page 1 of 3

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1.1 Division 01, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here.

1.2 INCLUDES BUT NOT LIMITED TO

1.2.1 Glazing of Hollow Metal Doors and Screens. 1.2.2 Glazing of Flush Wood Doors. 1.2.3 Unframed and Framed Mirrors.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS 1.3.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300.

1.4 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.4.1 CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90 Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass 1.4.2 CAN/CGSB-12.3-M91 Flat, Clear Float Glass 1.4.3 CAN/CGSB-12.8-97 Insulating Glass Units 1.4.4 CAN/CGSB-12.13-M91 Patterned Glass 1.5 EXTENDED WARRANTY 1.5.1 Submit a warranty for mirrors in accordance with General and

Supplementary General Conditions, covering the repair or replacement of defective work for a period of 4 years from the expiration of the two-year warranty stated in the General Conditions.

1.5.2 Warranty shall apply against defects in workmanship and materials and, against silver deterioration and loosening of fastenings.

1.5.3 Total warranty period shall be 6 years. 1.6 SAMPLES 1.6.1 On request, submit samples of glass, unframed mirror and framed mirror in

accordance with Section 01300 for Consultant's approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Tempered Glass: to thickness indicated on Drawings and conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90, Type 2.



2.1.2 Laminated Glass: to thickness indicated on Drawings and conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90, Type 1.

2.1.3 Fire rated glazing: acceptable product: “Pilkington Pyrostop” as

manufactured by Pilkington Fire Protection glass, fire resistance rating for 60 minutes.

or approved equivalent.

2.1.4 Glass Blocks: as indicated on drawings. 2.2 MULLIONLESS GLAZING FRAMING

2.2.1 Top and Bottom Rails: 80 mm high x 45 mm wide tapered aluminum rails

suitable for 13 mm glazing and 6 mm high aluminum saddles as manufactured by Inkan Limited or equivalent by Rovico, AA A41 clear anodized to NAAMM AMP-505, or approved equivalent.

2.2.2 Glass Joint Sealant: Dow ‘795’ , or approved equivalent, in colour to be

selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s full range.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

2.3.1 Setting blocks: Neoprene, 80 - 90 Shore ‘A’ durometer hardness to ASTM D2240, 100 mm long x 6 mm high x width to suit glass thickness.

2.3.2 Spacer shims: Neoprene, 50 - 60 Shore ‘A’ durometer hardness to ASTM

D2240, 75 mm long x one half height of glazing stop x thickness to suit application. Self adhesive on one face.

2.3.3 Glazing tape:

.1 Pre-formed butyl compound, 10 - 15 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM D2240; coiled on release paper; 3 mm thick x 13 mm wide; black colour.

2.3.4 Glazing clips: manufacturer's standard type.

2.3.5 Lock-strip gaskets: to ASTM C542.

2.4 SURFACE APPLIED FILM

2.4.1 2-mil vinyl translucent film: 3M Envision Diffuser Film 3735-50, or approved equivalent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.1.1 Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.

3.1.2 Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of

obstructions, and ready to receive glazing.



3.2 PREPARATION 3.2.1 Take critical site dimensions to ensure that adjustments in fabrication or

installation are provided for, and that clearances to other constructions have been maintained.

3.2.2 Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations.

3.2.3 Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.

3.2.4 Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or

sealer. 3.2.5 Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.

3.3 GLAZING INSTALLATION 3.3.1 Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1.6

mm above sight line. 3.3.2 Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from

corners. 3.3.3 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at

perimeter of light or unit. 3.3.4 Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described

in 3.4.1. 3.3.5 Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape

for full continuous contact. 3.3.6 Knife trim protruding tape.

3.5 MULLIONLESS GLAZING INSTALLATION

3.5.1 Vertical joints between glass units to be uniform and 6mm in width. 3.5.2 Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from

corners. 3.5.3 Clean, prime and seal glass joints in accordance with sealant

manufacturer’s written instructions. 3.6 CLEANING 3.6.1 Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. 3.6.2 Remove labels after Work is complete. 3.6.3 Clean all glass on completion. 3.6.4 Use clean water, or water and mild detergent, as recommended by the

glass manufacturer. 3.6.5 Rinse on completion of wash.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 GYPSUM & CEMENT BOARD Page 1 of 11 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 Division 01, General Conditions are a part of this Section and shall apply as if

repeated here. 1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1 CAN/CSA-A82.27-M91 Gypsum Board Products 2 CSA-A82.31-M1991 Gypsum Board Application 3 GA-214-90 Gypsum Association. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 Package finish materials. 2 Store materials in a protected dry area. Store gypsum board flat in piles with edges

protected. 3 Ensure that finish metal members are not bent, dented, or otherwise deformed. 4 Deliver products only supplied under the work of this Section to those who are

responsible for installation, to the place they direct, and to meet installation schedules.

5 Package fire-rated materials with Underwriters Laboratories of Canada labels

attached. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS 1 Environmental Conditions

.1 Install work only in areas closed and protected against weather, and maintained between 10°C and 21°C. In cold weather, ensure that heat is introduced in sufficient time, before work commences to bring surrounding materials up to these temperatures, and maintained until materials installed by this Section have cured.

.2 Do not install work in any area unless satisfied that work in place has dried out, and that no further installation of damp materials is contemplated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 1 Gypsum Board: Conforming to CAN/CSA-A82.27, as manufactured by Canadian

Gypsum Company, Georgia-Pacific or Westroc Industries Limited as follows:

.1 Plain Gypsum Board: In thicknesses indicated, with tapered edges. .2 Fire-Rated Gypsum Board: Type "X", type ‘C’; in thicknesses indicated,

with tapered edges, classified for fire hazard by Underwriters Laboratories


Project: 017 010 GYPSUM & CEMENT BOARD Page 2 of 11

of Canada, and labelled in conformance with the ULC Label Service for the application specified.

.3 Interior Water Resistant Gypsum Board: In thicknesses indicated, faced with green water repellent paper and specially reinforced core, tapered edges.

.4 Linerboard and Coreboard: 25 mm thick with V tongue-and-groove edges. .5 Tile backer Board: Tie backer board as manufactured by Georgia Pacific or approved equivalent .6 Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board: Medium duty abuse resistant fire rated

gypsum board, in thicknesses indicated, mold resistant acceptable product; CGC Mold abuse resistant Sheetrock AR Firecode Core Gypsum Board, or approved equivalent.

2 Tilebacker Board and Cement Board: For areas to receive ceramic tile – use

“Tilebacker” Board by Georgia Pacific or approved equivalent and for special coatings use 12.5 mm Canadian Gypsum Duracrete, or Unifix "Unipan" minimum 1.2m x 2.4m sheets.

4 Cement Fibre Protection board: For exterior insulation protection an foundation

walls – Finex smooth finish fibre cement boards ¼” (6mm) & ½” (12.5mm), www.gofinex.com, tel. 1 877 923 4639

3 Joint Materials

.1 Joint Reinforcing Tape .1 For interior gypsum board: 50 x 0.3 mm perforated paper with

chamfered edges. .2 For moisture (water) resistant gypsum board: manufacturer's

standard tape for waterproof application. .3 For water resistant tile backer: manufacturer's standard for a

waterproof joint assembly.

.2 Joint and Skim Compounds .1 For interior gypsum board: gypsum with latex resin, possessing

good adhesion, mixed with fresh, unadulterated water, having no detrimental effect on compounds.

.2 For moisture (water) resistant gypsum board: manufacturer's standard compound for waterproof application.

.3 For water resistant tile backer: manufacturer's standard cementitious type for a waterproof joint assembly.

.4 For skim compounds: "Acrybase" distributed by Luc Aube and Associates Inc., or "Durabond 90" manufactured by Canadian Gypsum Co.

4 Accessories: As manufactured by Canadian Gypsum Company, Domtar

Construction Materials, Westroc Industries Limited or Bailey Metal Products Limited as follows:

.1 Corner Beads: #25 steel, zinc-coated with flanges suitable for thickness of wallboards on which applied, and suitable for taping and plastering over.

.2 Casing Beads: #25 steel, zinc-coated, channel-shaped, suitable for taping and plastering over.

.3 Reveal Moulding: Roll formed .610 mm thick x 10 mm opening, primed for painting, flanges profiled to receive joint compound, as distributed by Patry Products or approved equivalent. Use factory curved sections for curved applications.

http://www.gofinex.com/



.4 Ceiling Reveals: "Fry Reglet" distributed by Sound Solutions Canada or approved equivalent.

.5 Control Joints: Crimped, roll-formed zinc, as CGC #093, with flanges for tape reinforcement or two casing beads set with gap for movement, and backed with flexible air seal membrane.

.6 Shaftwall Accessories: Hot-dipped galvanized, C-H, E and J runners in gauge and dimensions to suit conditions.

.7 Thermal Break Tape: No.220D PVC tape manufactured by Sellotape Canada Ltd. or other reputable manufacturer.

5 Fastenings and Ties

.1 Screws: Self-drilling, self-tapping, case-hardened, Phillips head, gypsum board screws with corrosion-resistant finish. #6 x 25 mm for single thickness panel fastening, and #7 x 40 mm for double thickness panel fastening.

.2 Tie Wire: 1.5 mm galvanized soft annealed steel wire. .3 Twist Clips: Caddy acoustical tee combination washer - wing nut, as

manufactured by Erico Products Ltd. .4 Concrete Anchors: Phillips Red Head TW-614 or other make of tie wire

sleeve anchors conforming to US Federal Specs. FF-S-325, Group II Type 3, Class 3, and QQ-2-235, Type II, Class 3. Do not use powder activated fasteners for ceiling support.

6 Steel Studs: Depth to suit span except where wider depths are shown on

Drawings. Knurled flanges 32 mm wide with edges doubled back at least 4.8 mm; #25 steel galvanized, with girts as required and with service access holes. Where structural studs are indicated, provide 0.91 mm (20 ga) material.

7 Retainer Studs: As manufactured by Bailey Metal Products, or Insulock Systems. 8 Partition Runners: As specified for studs with flanges a minimum 125 mm high, and

to suit depth of studs as required to serve as backing for carpet base where carpet occurs.

9 Bracing Channels: For partitions, 19 x 9.5 x 1.2 mm cold-rolled, galvanized steel. 10 Furring Channels: #25 galvanized, nominal size of 22 mm deep by 32 mm face, hat

type with knurled face. 11 Resilient Channels: CGC RC-1 or equivalent by other reputable manufacturers. 12 Ceiling Hanger System

.1 Hangers: Galvanized annealed steel wire, #12 gauge to support a maximum weight of 68 kg. per hanger. #9 gauge to support a maximum weight of 140 kg. per hanger, and galvanized annealed steel rod 4.8 mm diameter to support a maximum weight of 250 kg. per hanger.

.2 Inserts and Hanger Connection: Steel, galvanized after forming, suitable

for structure and ceiling conditions and loading.

13 Acoustical Caulking: "Acoustical Sealant" by Tremco (Canada) Limited. 14 Sound Attenuation Batt Insulation: Friction fit, "Thermafibre" 50 mm thick sound

attenuation batts by Canadian Gypsum Company Limited, "Quietzone" by Owens-



Corning, "Sound Attenuation" blankets by the Roxul Company, or "SAB" by Fibrex Insulations Inc.

15 Fire Rated Insulation: "Firebarrier" distributed by Double A/D Distributors Limited. 16 Control Joint Strip: Roll formed zinc coated metal with a tape protected void, 6 mm

wide throat size x 13 mm deep with flanges for embedding in joint compound. 17 Skim Coating: "Durabond 90" or equivalent manufactured by Domtar Gypsum.

compound. 18 Access Panels to Receive Ceramic Tile: Nystrom Type RW flush for tile, 306 mm x

306 mm, Type 304 stainless steel. Phone 1-800-547-2635. 19 Access Panels for wallboard: Nystrom Type WB flush for wallboard, 306 mm x 306

mm, Type 304 stainless steel. Phone 1-800-547-2635.

20 Plaster Repair: .1 Plaster walls and ceilings shall be patched with material to match adjacent

material where holes have been exposed upon the removal of mechanical, electrical and other elements.

.2 Cutting of floors and ceilings for new mechanical and electrical elements: .3 Provide new rough framing of floor joists and ceiling framing where new

floor openings expose obstructions, existing framing that block the proposed drop or shaft.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 1 Before application of gypsum board commences, ensure that services have been

installed, tested and approved by relevant Jurisdictional Authorities and Consultant; that conduits, pipes, cables and outlets are plugged, capped or covered; and that fastenings and supports installed by others are in place.

2 Ensure that environmental conditions and work preceding that of this Section are

satisfactory. 3 Verify that work performed under other Sections as a part of a ULC specification for

a fire-rated assembly has been done in accordance with that specification. 3.2 INSTALLATION IN GENERAL 1 Install furring, studs, gypsum board, accessories, and all other related products in

strict accordance with CSA Standard A82.31, including Appendix B "Control Joints". Where the standard does not incorporate specific products and methods, follow the manufacturer's directions. Use 16 mm thick gypsum board for interior work unless detailed otherwise.

2 Install work within 3 mm of dimensioned location unless approved otherwise by

Consultant, and flat to tolerance of 3 mm maximum in 3 m and 1.6 m maximum in any running 300 mm.

3 Coordinate the work of this Section with that of other Sections. Ensure that

adequate preparation is made for the attachment of hangers, fasteners, stiffeners,



and reinforcing. Provide for carrying and integration of flush-mounted and recessed components only after consultation and verification of methods with those performing the work of Divisions 15 and 16. Do not use through-the-roof hangers.

4 Do not install metal framing, trim, casings, or accessories which have been bent,

dented, or otherwise deformed. 5 Securely attach trim, casings, framing and accessories. Attachment by means of

tape is unacceptable. 6 Framing and furring shown on Drawings is indicative, but do not regard it as exact

or complete. Construct work to provide adequate strength to withstand stresses imposed by use without distortion and to maintain dimensions indicated on Drawings.

7 Erect supporting and finish materials to dimensions indicated on Drawings, plumb,

level, straight, and square to adjoining elements. 8 Provide for movement at intersections with structural members to avoid

transference of loads to this Work. Construct vertically sliding deflection space at top of partitions by means of double channels. Secure top channel to structure and bottom channel to stud work. Secure board only to bottom track making allowance for up to 19 mm deflection of structure. Cut board short at top and caulk this joint.

9 Make allowance for thermal movements in gypsum board systems. 10 Provide control joints in gypsum board work at no greater spacing than 4000 mm in

each direction, at perimeters of ceilings where they abut walls and other vertical surfaces, at abutting structural elements, at dissimilar walls and ceilings, at structural expansion and control joints, and at other locations where stresses are likely to develop as recommended by board manufacturer. Line up control joints with joints in other construction or with centrelines of mullions, columns, piers, or similar building elements. Obtain Consultant’s acceptance of locations of control joints, other than those indicated on Drawings.

11 Form control joints using continuous furring channels along each side of joint

locations, and filling control joint space with specified joint strip, secured in place, making straight joints.

12 Install casings and thermal breaks at junctions of gypsum board with exterior door,

window, or screen joints. 13 Do not support the work of this Section from, nor make attachment to ducts, pipes,

conduit or the support framing of the work of other Sections. Place supplementary steel supports as required to maintain hanger spacing and to keep mechanical ducts free from hangers being secured to.

14 Do not apply gypsum board in close proximity to hot pipes or heating ducts. 15 Install materials with the minimum of joints. Tightly butt joints without force and

neatly align them. 16 Frame openings on each side with suitable sections. Provide clearances required

at mechanical and electrical services such as grilles, diffusers, access panels and lighting fixtures only after verification of requirements in each case.


Project: 017 010 GYPSUM & CEMENT BOARD Page 6 of 11 17 Cooperate with those installing the work of other Sections. Where the work of

others penetrates gypsum board construction, fit openings snugly, and to ensure cover by escutcheons or plates utilized.

3.3 FIXTURE, CABINET, TOILET PARTITION AND URINAL SCREEN SUPPORTS 1 Verify location of supports within gypsum board assemblies to support wall

mounted lights, fitments, cabinets, plumbing fixtures, wall plates required for grab bars and any other item attached to drywall. Cooperate and coordinate with all trades and provide information in ample time to ensure supports are provided in the correct locations, and are adequate to support the loads.

3.4 PARTITION STABILITY 1 Where partitions do not extend to structure, provide suitable internal reinforcement

to prevent lateral movement of the partitions. Secure head runners to acoustic tees by means of "twist clips".

3.5 CONCRETE ANCHORS 1 Locate anchorage points in reinforced concrete floor slab underside in accordance

with gypsum board manufacturers suspension requirements. Drill holes with carbide-tipped drill bits conforming to ANSI B94.12. Install anchors; minimum installation depth and method of expansion shall be as recommended by the anchor manufacturer.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED CEILING FRAMING AND FURRING 1 Include in the work of this Section the supply of hangers and supervision of their

proper location, or inserts for hanger attachment, when either or both are embedded in concrete.

2 Space hangers for runner channels to suit structure, to support ceiling load, at a

maximum distance of 1200 mm o.c. and at no greater distance than 150 mm from ends of runner channels.

3 Install runner channels at 900 mm o.c. generally, and at no greater distance than

150 mm from terminations of supported cross-furring members. Bend rod hangers sharply under bottom flange of runners, and wire securely in place with saddle ties.

4 Splice runner channels by lapping at least 300 mm, with interlocking flanges and

wires at each end with two loops. Splice only where unavoidable. Do not bunch or line up splices.

5 Install cross-furring at 600 mm generally, and at no greater distance than 150 mm

from walls, openings, breaks in continuity of ceilings, and changes of direction. Space furring in all cases to suit incorporated services, and so as to avoid contact with perimeter walls. Span hat-type furring no greater than 1200 mm. Use metal studs for greater spans: 40 mm deep spanning to 1500 mm, 65 mm deep to 1800 mm and 90 mm deep to 2400 mm.

6 Secure cross-furring to supports with double wire ties or approved equivalent

attachment. Splice by nesting and tying together with 200 mm overlap.


Project: 017 010 GYPSUM & CEMENT BOARD Page 7 of 11 7 Erect entire hanger and suspension system to adequately support the ceiling

assembly, including services incorporated with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of span of each component member, and free from horizontal movement.

8 Enclose ducts, pipes or beams that occur below the general finished ceiling level

with metal furring and gypsum board, in rooms where gypsum board is specified. 9 Enclose ducts, pipes, or beams that occur below the general finished ceiling level

with metal furring and gypsum board, in rooms where acoustic treatment for ceilings is specified.

10 Form recesses for light coves where indicated on Drawings. Enclose all light coves

with gypsum board. 3.7 METAL STUD PARTITION FRAMING 1 Secure runner channels at floor and tops of partitions for their full lengths, at 600

mm o.c. with concrete fasteners or as suitable for the substrate material. Install runner channels also at heads and sills of openings. Secure runners at openings by cutting flanges, turning up webs, and screwing to studs.

2 Butt, not mitre, runners at wall intersections and corners. At ceilings, lap and screw

channels together. 3 Space studs at 600 mm o.c. generally, and at no greater distance than 50 mm from

abutting walls, partitions and corners. 4 Secure studs to runners by screws, crimping, or welding as required by stud type to

conform with manufacturer's design specification. 5 Utilize only proper stud sizes to meet all the requirements of this specification.

Span studs of 40 mm depth no greater than 2700 mm between supports, 65 mm depth, 3600 mm and 90 mm depth, 4800 mm.

6 Double studs at all door jambs. At each jamb of doors exceeding either 900 mm

width or 60 mm in thickness or both, install a structural channel reinforcing extending from floor structure to structure above, and adequately anchored at each end.

7 Brace studs with stiffeners over doors in partitions of greater height than 3000 mm

spaced as preceding, and above and below window type openings spaced not more than 150 mm from the top and bottom of openings. Stiffeners shall be 19 mm bracing channels, wire tied or welded to each stud, and extending horizontally across entire length of each braced partition and across two full stud spaces at each side of door and window openings.

8 Splice studs only when unavoidable by nesting with 200 mm minimum lap, and

fastened with one screw in each flange. 9 Coordinate Work with others installing horizontal runs of service lines so that Work

of all is done simultaneously. Where standard holes are too small for installed services, notch studs and splice notched flange with a splice piece 300 mm longer than notch, fastened with two screws.

10 Unless shown otherwise on Drawings, all partitions, together with wallboard facing,

shall extend above ceilings to underside of structure above.


Project: 017 010 GYPSUM & CEMENT BOARD Page 8 of 11 11 Ensure that electrical and telephone boxes are not installed back to back. 12 Screw frame anchor clips of frames supplied and installed under the Work of

another Section, to jamb studs and head and sill runners. Provide adequate fastening to prevent movement of frames within partitions.

3.8 FURRING AT MASONRY AND CONCRETE WALLS 1 Install furring horizontally at 600 mm o.c. Space furring no greater than 50 mm from

abutting walls, floors, ceilings, and openings. 2 Secure furring to walls with fasteners, spaced at 600 mm o.c. on alternating or

opposite channel flanges. Shim as required with metal spacers or use adjustable wall furring brackets.

3 Return furring into reveals. 4 Close all exposed open ends of furred space with suitable metal closure. 5 Where wall furring is indicated clear of wall on Drawings, construct framing as for

metal stud partitions. 3.9 ACOUSTICALLY TREATED WALLS AND BULKHEADS 1 Install board 13 mm short at top, bottom and edges and fill with caulking. Caulk on

both sides of wall. Caulk after gypsum board is in place, not before. 2 Stagger all joints in double layer gypsum board construction. 3 Pack partition cavities with acoustical insulation. Friction fit insulation securely

between studs. 4 Fill all butt joints of gypsum board with joint filler prior to taping or finishing. 5 Caulk or plaster fill all penetrations through gypsum board for electrical boxes,

wiring, pipes, ducts and all similar items. Caulk airtight around electrical and communication boxes before plate is installed.

6 Do not let fastening screws extend through to opposite set of studs. 7 Build bulkheads above acoustically rated doors and partitions and folding partitions

as detailed. 8 Air Ducts/Water Piping Passing Through Rooms with Acoustically Treated Walls

and Ceiling

.1 Enclose air ducts, and water piping, using two layers of 15.9 mm gypsum board minimum, or three layers 13 mm gypsum board.

.2 The enclosure, or its supports, must not come into contact with ducts

anywhere. .3 Lap all gypsum board joints and all perimeter edges of the enclosure

caulked.



.4 Line all interior surfaces of the enclosure with minimum 88 mm batt glass fibre.

.5 All penetrations through the enclosure must have one inch annular

clearance between them and the nearest gypsum board. Pack annular spaces with batt glass fibre flush with gypsum board surfaces on either side, and then caulk thoroughly.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD 1 Extend boards into door, window, and other opening reveals. 2 Back all joints with a framing member. 3 Install boards in maximum lengths and widths to minimize joints, and never in

lengths of under 1800 mm. Stagger end joints where they are unavoidable. Locate joints in ceilings and soffits where least prominently discernible.

4 Form neat joints at mill ends and at field-cut edges of wallboard panels. Cut paper

on face with a knife. Smooth by sanding and rubbing edges together. 5 Fasten boards to metal support members by sheet metal gypsum board screws at

300 mm o.c. no closer than 9.5 mm to and no farther than 13 mm from centre of joints. Do not force adjacent boards into place. Allow moderate contact. Provide extension slips where required. Drive screws to form a slight depression, but no so paper cover is broken.

6 Where curved gypsum board is indicated, wet boards and bend to required radius,

and block in position until dry. Finished curved surface shall be smooth and even. 3.11 INSTALLATION OF CEMENT BOARD 1 Install cement board at locations indicated on Drawings and in Schedules. 3.12 TREATMENT OF GYPSUM BOARD JOINTS 1 Fill joints, screwholes, and depressions on board surfaces exposed to view to

provide smooth, seamless surfaces, and square, neat corners. Use jointing compounds and reinforcing tapes in conformance with manufacturer's specifications. Ensure that board is tight against framing members, fasteners are properly depressed, and adhesives have sufficiently cured.

2 Fill joints, edges and corners by Gypsum Association Level 5 three coat tape and

joint filler method. 3 At external corners, install corner beads secured to framing at 150 mm o.c. on

alternate flanges. Fill to nose of corner bead with joint filler and topping cement, as specified for bevelled joints.

4 At casing beads installed at all edges of board exposed to view, where board butts

against other materials, with no trim to conceal junction at control joints, at perimeter of ceiling surfaces, at top of partitions where they stop against continuous ceiling surfaces, and where otherwise shown on Drawings, secure casing beads to framing at 300 mm o.c.


Project: 017 010 GYPSUM & CEMENT BOARD Page 10 of 11 5 At screwheads, fill holes and depressions with a two-coat application of joint filler. 3.13 FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION PROTECTION- FIBRE CEMENT PANELS: 1 Cut Panels to maximum 4’ lengths

2 Install panels 12” ( 300mm) below grade level, fasten every 24” ( 600mm) along

width & height of panels 3 Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions, leaving minimum 1/8” space

between panels, ¼” space if a flexible adhesive is used (c/w bond breaking tape) 4 Exposed fastening screws to be stainless steel, & penetrate minimum ¾” ( 19mm)

into concrete or furring strips, flashing to extend over top of panels & cover upper screws.

3.14 JOINT AND SURFACE TREATEMENT OF CEMENT BOARD 1 Apply 50 mm glass fibre tape over joints and corners. Press firmly and uniformly in

place to avoid bumps. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 2 Where board is to serve as substrate for paint or coating, apply 3 mm thick uniform

water resistant skim coat, ready to receive paint or coating. 3.15 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES 1 Install accessories such as access panels, and grilles when supplied by other

Sections. Obtain prior Consultant's approval of locations of accessories prior to installation.

2 Gypsum board infill at access panels shall have taped edges. Apply gypsum board

with adhesive. Fill and sand smooth perimeter edges as specified for joint finishing. 3 Install cement board in wet area access panels which will receive ceramic tile by

Section 09300. 4 Install stainless steel corner guards on drywall as detailed using self adhered

backing tape. 3.16 FIRE SEPARATIONS 1 Construct gypsum board assemblies where located at fire separations of metal

framing covered on both sides by fire-rated gypsum wallboard. 2 Fit assemblies tightly to all enclosing constructions to maintain integrity of the

separations. Install casing beads at all perimeter edges. Ensure that caulking work under Section 07900 relative to non-sound rated assemblies, i.e. perimeter joints in concealed locations is done, before continuing with the work of this Section.

3 For two layers of gypsum board, attach one layer of gypsum board to each side of

studs with long edges on studs by screws at 400 mm o.c. as well as at intermediate studs and runners. Attach second layer of gypsum wallboard by screws at 400 mm o.c. at studs and 300 mm o.c. at runners. Stagger joints at first and second layers 300 mm tape joints only where exposed to view. Fill screw holes. For tested assemblies secure in accordance with test data.


Project: 017 010 GYPSUM & CEMENT BOARD Page 11 of 11 4 Assemblies constructed other than those indicated may be approved by the

Consultant on presentation of affidavits which validate fire resistance ratings by acceptance of the Jurisdictional Authorities.

5 For walls containing fire dampers provide gypsum board end covers over studs

between duct and stud. 3.17 CLEANING AND PATCHING 1 Remove droppings and excess joint compound from work of others and from work

of this Section, before it sets. 2 Make good to cut-outs for services and other work, fill in defective joints, holes, and

other depressions with joint compounds. 3 Make good defective work, and ensure that surfaces are smooth, evenly textured,

and within specified tolerances to receive finish treatments. 4 Clean off beads, casings, and other metal trim, and leave all surfaces ready for

specified finishes.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING Page 1 of 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 Division 01, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if

repeated here. 1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS

1 CAN/CGSB-19.21-M87, Sealing and bedding Compound Acoustical, ASTM C645-88, Specification for non-load bearing Steel Studs, Runners

(Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. 2 Non-loadbearing channel and stud framing: to ASTM C645, 92 mm stud size;

roll formed from .92mm thickness hot dipped galvanized sheet steel, for screw attachment of gypsum board. Knock out service holes at 460 mm centres.

3 Floor and ceiling tracks to: ASTM C645, in widths to suit stud sizes, 32mm

flange height. 4 Metal channel stiffener: 1.4 mm thick cold rolled steel, coated with rust

inhibiting coating. 5 Acoustical sealant to: Can/CGSB-19.21 6 Insulating strip: rubberized, moisture resistant 3 mm thick foam strip, 12mm

wide, with self sticking adhesive on one face, lengths as required. 7 Align partition tracks at floor and ceiling or steel deck and secure at 600 mm

o.c. minimum. 8 Install damp proof course under stud shoe tracks of partitions at slab on

grade. Place studs vertically at 400mm o.c. and not more than 50mm from abutting walls at each side of openings and corners. Position studs in tracks at floor and ceiling. Cross brace steel studs as required to provide rigid installation to manufacturer’s recommendations.

9 Erect metal studs to tolerance of 1:1000. Attach studs to underside of ceiling

or deck as indicated using screws. 10 Install two continuous beads of acoustical sealant under studs and tracks

around perimeter of sound control partitions.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 09300 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 TILING Page 1 of 6

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 Division One, General Conditions are a part of this Section and shall apply

as if repeated here. 1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1 Do tile work in accordance with 2002 Specification Guide 09300 Tile

Installation Manual, produced by Terrazzo Tile and Marble Association of Canada (TTMAC), except where specified otherwise.

2 ANSI A118.1-1992 Dry Set Mortar 3 ANSI A118.4-1992 Latex Portland Cement Mortar 4 ASTM C206-84 (1997) Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime 5 ASTM C207-91 (1997) Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for

Masonry Purposes 6 ASTM C1028-96 Standard Test Method for Determining the Static

Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method

7 CAN/CSA-A300-98 Cementitious Materials 8 CAN3-A23.1M77 Dry Washed Concrete Sand 9 CAN/CGSB-75.1-M88 Tile, Ceramic 10 CSA A82.56-M1976 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1 Samples

.1 Submit two samples of each type and colour of tile in accordance with General Conditions.

2 Maintenance Instructions: Submit maintenance instructions to Consultant in

accordance with General Conditions, for incorporation in Operations, Data and Maintenance Manual.

4 Extra Tile: Provide two extra boxes of tile and 5% of each type of trim in

appropriate colours for Owner's future maintenance use. Deliver where directed by Consultant. Tile and trim shall be from the same production run as those installed.


5 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings. 6 Extended Warranty

.1 Submit a warranty of the work of this Section in accordance with General and Supplementary General Conditions, covering the period for four (4) years beyond the expiration of the two year warranty specified in the Supplementary General Conditions.

.2 Warranty shall be against defects including, but not be limited to

loss of bond, loosening, leaking, cracking, splitting, and warping, or other deformations.

.3 Total warranty period shall be six (6) years.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS 1 Environmental Temperature: Install tile only when base surfaces and air

temperatures have been maintained between 10°C and 21°C for 72 hours preceding installation, and will be so maintained during installation and until setting materials have cured.

2 Protection

.1 Prevent traffic and work on newly-laid floors by barricading areas for at least 48 hours following installation.

.2 In areas where flammable adhesives are used, ensure that

adequate ventilation and spark-proof electrical equipment are provided, and that smoking is prohibited. Store materials to prevent spontaneous combustion.

1.5 MOCK-UP 1 Erect a sample installation where designated on site, approximately 1500 x

1500 mm in size, 1 for washroom wall. Mock-up to illustrate in a cutaway fashion, waterproofing, floor tile, wall tile, accent tile as required, base and grout. Modify or replace mock-up to obtain approval by Consultant. After acceptance, retain mock-up as standard of quality for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 1 Setting Materials

.1 Cement Mortar: Rendering in thicknesses between 20 and 40 mm; Mixture of 1 part Portland Cement Type 10, 4 parts dry, washed concrete sand, and Bostik Canada Ltd. ‘Hydroment 425 Multi Purpose Acrylic 50%’ latex additive or ‘Planicrete 50’ latex additive by Mapei Canada Inc. or approved equivalent.

.1 Portland Cement: To CAN3-A5 Type 10. .2 Sand: To CAN3-A23.1M77.


.3 Latex Additive: Bostik ‘Hydroment 425 Multi Purpose Acrylic

50%’, or Mapei ‘Planicrete 50’, or approved equivalent. Mix in accordance to manufacturer's latest written specifications.

.2 Slurry Bond Coat: Mixture of 1 Part Portland Cement Type 10 and 1 Part Bostik ‘50% Hydroment 425 Multi Purpose Acrylic Latex’, or ‘Planicrete 50’ by Mapei, or approved equivalent.

.3 Latex Dry Set Mortar, Latex Hydraulic Mortar System: Bostik ‘Single flex Fast Set 425 Multi Purpose Acrylic Full Strength’, or ‘GraniRapid’ mixed with ‘Ker 318’ flexible latex additive by Mapei, or approved equivalent.

.4 Grout: Bostik ‘Hydroment Ceramic Tile Grout/Undiluted 425 Multi Purpose Latex’, or ‘Ker 200’ by Mapei, or approved equivalent. Where epoxy grout is specified, Bostik ‘Hydroment Color-Poxy’ or ‘Kerapoxy’ by Mapei. Colours as selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s full range.

.5 Latex Additive: Conforming to ANSI A118.4, compatible with selected Setting Materials Manufacturer’s system, compatible with crystalline waterproofing if used in pool tanks; and, when mixed with mortar, be capable of achieving permanent bond, for the use intended.

2 Tile - General

.1 Dot mounting is acceptable in dry areas. .2 Ceramic Wall Tile: 4”x4” bright glazed ceramic wall tile, to match

existing tiles by Olympia Tile, or approved equivalent.

Note: Grout colours will be chosen at a later date by the Consultant .3 For the purpose of establishing colours and types, tiles are based on

a particular product type or brand as listed. Other acceptable products named above shall be equivalent and match the base colour specified, and be subject to approval by the Consultant.

3 Miscellaneous

.1 Bronze Wire Cloth: 0.047" x 2-1/2 mesh per 25 mm woven bronze as manufactured by W.S. Tyler Company (St. Catharines, Ontario) or Greening Donald Limited (Hamilton, Ontario).

.2 Wire: Not less than 3 mm Monel or Type 304 stainless steel.

.3 Reinforcing Mesh: 50 mm x 50 mm x 1.6 mm gauge galvanized square wire mesh.

.4 Caulking Compound: Tremco THC 900 or approved equivalent, for tile control joints. For constantly submerged joints use 2 component Sikaflex 2C or Mameco Vulkem 922 polyurethane, or approved equivalent, based non-sag for vertical joints and self levelling for horizontal joints complete with primer. For all other caulking associated with tile work, use Tremco ‘Dymeric 240’ or approved equivalent. Comply with application requirements specified in Section 07900. Colours shall match grout colour.

.5 Sealer: "Gard" manufactured by Dustbane, an acrylization emulsion polymer, to protect against yellowing, powdering, scuffing, acid,


alkalis, calcium chloride and detergent dulling, or approved equivalent.

.6 Dividing Strips .1 Provide extruded white zinc shelf-type with 6 mm wide zinc

body, with zinc shelf angle set at correct depth to receive flooring at all locations where resilient and ceramic tile flooring abuts another material, or plain concrete.

.2 All dividing strips shall be extruded solid zinc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACES 1 Surfaces shall be thoroughly clean, dry and sound. Before work begins, the

concrete substrate must be mechanically roughened to completely remove any grease, form release agents, laitance, loosely bonded topping or any other deleterious substances which may prevent or reduce proper bonding. Proceed only when these conditions are met.

2 Pre-wet (SSD Surface Saturated Dry) the concrete surface with water 24

hours prior to placing the mortar rendering. Ensure there is no standing water before applying. Apply slurry brush coat consisting of mixture 1 part Portland cement Type 10 and 1 part Bostik ‘50% Hydroment 425 Multi Purpose Acrylic Latex 507’ or ‘Planicrete 50 latex’ by Mapei, or approved equivalent. Using a stiff brush, apply slurry brush coat to concrete surface ensuring to completely cover the working area. Immediately proceed to apply and key in mortar bed with a scratch coat in sufficient material and pressure to ensure full bond on concrete surface. Bring scratch coat to an even surface to receive mortar setting bed. Scratch to a rough finish. Allow to dry and cure for a minimum of 3 days before applying additional mortar bed coats. Pre-dampen scratch coat prior to applying additional coats of mortar bed rendering. Individual coats shall not exceed 5mm in thickness. Allow rendering to cure for a minimum of 14 days after application of the final coat before installing ceramic tile.

3 Substrates shall be structurally sound, level and plumb, within a maximum

tolerance of 3 mm in 2400 mm for vertical surfaces, and horizontal surfaces within a maximum tolerance of 6 mm in 3000 mm from finished levels of the surface, or better.

4 Apply a levelling coat on uneven surfaces, or surfaces which do not

guarantee a plumb or level finish to the tile. 3.2 INSTALLATION 1 Generally

.1 Lay out Work so that fields are centred on areas, with no tiles of less than half-size included. Maintain heights of panels in full courses to nearest indicated dimension.

.2 Align joints of wall tile with floor tile. All joints 1.6 mm wide.


.3 Place tile in accordance with applicable Detail in the Installation

Manual published by the Terrazzo Tile and Marble Association of Canada.

.4 Where lighting coves occur apply mortar levelling coat to walls prior to applying tile.

.5 All tile for the following "Wet" areas, where excessive moisture and barefoot traffic prevails, shall be set in nominally 38 mm Portland cement mortar setting bed which includes thickness of tile. DO NOT INSTALL FULL SETTING BED THICKNESS IN ONE APPLICATION. Build coats allowing each to set up and cure until the desired thickness is achieved, as indicated on Drawings.

.6 Precede application of setting bed with a scratch coat in sufficient material and pressure to form good, full key and full bond on masonry or concrete surfaces. Bring scratch coat to an even surface ready to receive mortar setting bed. Scratch to a rough surface. Allow to dry and cure. Reinforce scratch coat on walls, curbs and thin mortar bed on floors with reinforcing mesh, to resist shrinkage and cracking. Note however, that curbs and certain other members are reinforced with fibreglass mesh cloth. Pre-form mesh to the exact configuration of the curb. Allow mesh flanges to "float". Do not fasten through reinforcing material.

.7 Apply mortar bed in uniform thickness and to follow slope of structural slab to drain.

.8 Use subscreeds and floating method of installing mortar bed on the floor.

.9 Bring every fourth course, vertical and horizontal, to plumb and level continuous lines.

.10 Thoroughly back up with mortar all cove, cap, nosing, trimmer and moulded or shaped pieces and secure firmly in place.

.11 Leave or cut openings to correct sizes to receive accessories, fittings, or other built-in work.

.12 Cut and grind tile accurately, and without damage, to fit openings and at intersections and against trim finish. Rub exposed edges smooth with abrasive stone.

.13 Drill tile for hardware and for pipes where possible; otherwise at pipes and fittings, fit tile closely so that escutcheons cover cuts.

3.2.3 Installation of Tile

.1 Install ceramic tile using dry set mortar. Follow manufacturer's instructions with respect to application of dry set mortar.

.2 Place tile in accordance with Tile Installation Manual published by the Terrazzo Tile and Marble Association of Canada including, but not limited to, the following:

.1 Detail 303W-98 for wall tile on masonry. .2 Detail 310F-98 for floor tile (epoxy grout where specified). .3 Detail 311F-98 for thinset floor tile.

.3 Beat tile into position to ensure no less than 95% coverage of mortar coat to each unit.

.4 Force grout into all joints. .5 Remove excess grout and polish with clean cloths.


.7 Lightly tap tiles with a solid object. If there is a hollow sound, remove

tile, check for adhesion and re-tile area.

3.3 CONTROL JOINTS 1 Install control joints in accordance with Detail EJ171-98 of the Tile Council of

America; Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. Unless shown otherwise control joints shall be 6mm wide.

3.4 GROUTING 1 Remove all spacer string, wet joints and tile that have become dry before

grouting. Force maximum grout into joints using stiff rubber float. 3.5 CAULKING 1 Caulk tile control joints and around piping and fittings extending through

tiled surfaces. Tool to a smooth, flush surface, free from air bubbles and contamination. Provide backer rod under sealant.

2 Apply caulking following manufacturer's instructions. Note: ensure proper primers are used.

3.9 PATCHING AND CLEANING 1 Before Project completion, remove and replace defective, damaged,

loose and unbonded tile, and point defective joints. 2 After grouting has cured, clean and remove haze. Cleaning shall be in strict

accordance with TTMAC recommendations for treating new Work as specified in its ‘Maintenance Guide’; the specific system shall be as required for the type of tile to be cleaned. Do not use acid for cleaning.

3 Re-point joints after cleaning as required to eliminate imperfections. Avoid scratching tile surfaces.

4 Apply sealer to unglazed tile in dry areas in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 RESILIENT FLOORING Page 1 of 12 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

1. Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for resilient tile flooring Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2 Related Sections: Other Division 9 sections for floor finishes related to this section but not the work of this section

1. Section 01 33 00 Submittals 2. Section 01 00 00 - General Requirements 3. Division 3 Concrete; not the work of this section 4. Division 6 Wood and Plastics; not the work of this section 5. Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection; not the work of this section

6. Division 15 - Mechanical..

1.3 REFERENCES

1. ASTM F710, Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.

2. ASTM F1066, Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. 3. ASTM E 648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering

Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source 4. ASTM E 662 Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke

Generated by Solid Materials 5. ASTM F 1482, Standard Guide to Wood Underlayment Products Available for

Use Under Resilient Flooring 6. ASTM F 1700 Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Tile 7. ASTM F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base 8. ASTM F 1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Vapor Emission Rate of

Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride 9. ASTM F 2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in

Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes 10. CAN/ULC-S102.2 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Flooring, Floor Covering and Miscellaneous Materials and Assemblies 11. NFPA 253 Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering

Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source 12. NFPA 258 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Smoke Generated by Solid Materials 13. ASTM F1303, Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing. 14. ASTM F 3010 Standard Practice for Two-Component Resin Based Membrane- Forming Moisture Mitigation Systems for Use Under Resilient Floor Coverings 15. ASTM F 3010 Standard Practice for Two-Component Resin Based Membrane-

Forming Moisture Mitigation Systems for Use Under Resilient Floor Coverings 14. DIN 51130 Slip Resistance Test


Project: 017 010 RESILIENT FLOORING Page 2 of 12

15. ACI 302.2R-06 Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials

16. RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Covering

1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Product Data: 1. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 00 00 - General

Requirements and 01 33 00 Submittals including the following: 1. Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications

and data sheet. 2. Submit WHMIS MSDS. Indicate VOC's for primers and adhesives. 3. Submit shop drawings to indicate materials, details, and

accessories. Submit a cut diagram indicating seam locations and roll direction. Use mitered seam layouts for corners when changing directions 180 degrees (e.g. when running material down corridors which bisect at a right angle), unless approved otherwise.

2. Samples: 1. Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 00 00 - General

Requirements and 01 33 00 Submittals including the following: 1. Two 250 x 200 mm samples of each type of tile material and

colour. 2. Two 250 mm long samples of each accessory and colour.

3. Closeout Submittals: Provide maintenance data for resilient flooring for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 77 00 – Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Installers qualifications: Trained and approved by the manufacturer and having a minimum three years of experience in the installation of the Work described in this Section and can show evidence of satisfactory completion of projects of similar size, scope and type.

2. Mock-ups: Install at project site a job mock-up using acceptable products and manufacturer approved installation methods, including concrete substrate testing.

.1 Maintenance: Maintain mock-up during construction for workmanship comparison; remove and legally dispose of mock-up when no longer required. .2 Incorporation: Mock-up may be incorporated into final construction upon Owner’s approval.



3. Bond Test: Install multiple bond tests using a 3’x3’ pieces of material adhered with the appropriate adhesive to verify quality of adhesion. Remove half of each piece after 24 hours, then the other half after 48 hours. To help assess resistance to indentation, place end user equipment onto a sample for 72 hours. Document all results

4. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient tile flooring with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing material in accordance with ASTM test methods indicated below by a certified testing laboratory or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. ASTM E 648 (NFPA 253) Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts per sq. cm. or

greater, Class I 2. ASTM E 662 (NFPA 258) (Smoke Generation) Maximum Specific Optical

Density of 450 or less 3. CAN/ULC-S102.2 – Flame Spread Rating and Smoke Developed – Results

as tested

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

1. Environmental Requirements: Ensure temperature of room floor surface and materials is not less than 21 deg C (70 deg F) for 48 hours before, during and for 7 days minimum after installation.

2. Ensure humidity levels of spaces to receive tile are maintained at design levels for minimum 24 hours before installation.

3. Avoid high humidity, cold drafts and abrupt temperature change.

4. Provide a high ventilation rate, with maximum outside air, during installation, and for 48 to 72 hours after installation. If possible, vent directly to the outside. Do not let contaminated air recirculate through a district or whole building air distribution system. Maintain extra ventilation for at least one month following building occupation.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1. Deliver products in accordance with Section 01 00 00 - General Requirements.

Label containers to clearly identify contents by product description, manufacturer, lot number, size, colour and pattern.

2. Prevent freezing of product. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions, at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. Store rolls in dry locations. Stand rolls on end. Protect and secure rolls from falling. Store materials in a clean, dry, enclosed space off the ground, protected from harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. Protect adhesives from freezing. Store flooring, adhesives and accessories in the spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation.



3. Deliver products to area of work minimum 24 hours prior to installation. Remove them from containers to allow them to become fully acclimatized.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

1. Extra Materials: Supply 5% extra tiles for future repairs in suitable boxes properly identified. Colour selection to be in proportion to amounts supplied. Store where directed on Site.

1.9 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 1. Deposit all packaging materials in appropriate container on site for recycling

or reuse. 2. Avoid using landfill waste disposal procedures when recycling facilities are

available. 3. Keep all discarded packaging away from children.

2 Products

1.2 MATERIALS

1. General: All materials under Work of this Section, including but not limited to, primers, adhesives, sealers, and waxes are to have low VOC content limits.

2. Vinyl composition tile: 1. Conform to ASTM F 1077, Class III, Type B – Embossed surface.

1. ‘Natrual Creations Classica Luxury Solid Vinyl Tile’ Galina Golden Grey NA180 Diamond 10 finish, 6”x48”, by Armstrong World Industries Canada Ltd., or approved equivalent.

2. ‘Contrast Varia # 2118 luxury vinyl tile, Wood Texture 7.36”x48.3”, by Beaulieu Canada

3. or approved equivalent.

3. Slip Resistant Sheet Vinyl: 1. Slip Resistance .78/D .80/W, Thickness: 0.08” (2 mm); Roll Width: 6' 7" (2 m);

Roll Length: 66' (20 m); Roll Weight: 220 lb (100 kg). Complete with a coved base. Walkway 20 / Walkway 20 Plus by Altro. CANADA: 6221 Kennedy Rd, Unit 1, Mississauga, ON, L5T 2S8 Toll Free: 800.565.4658 Tel: 905.564.1330 Fax: 905.564.0750

or approved equivalent. 2. SOLID COLOUR Colour to be selected from current range, VM Rock XL12204P LRV23,

3. Tactile Warning Strips: solid colour, Colour to be VM Swan XL12212P LRV75 to meet the performance and design requirements of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A117.1-1986, Accessible Warnings on Walking Surfaces. Tactile warning strip extends across the full width of the stair and for a continuous depth of 3 feet (.91 m) prior to the hazard.



4. Resilient Base:

1. 1/8” 3.2mm thick 4” high integrated wall base matte finish conforming to ASTM F 1861 Type TV - Vinyl Style B- Cove

2. ASTM F1861, Type TP, Group 1, rubber wall base, 3 mm thick x 100 mm high, in coil lengths as long as possible, complete with pre-moulded corners. Acceptable manufacturers: Duratrim, Johnsonite, Roppe.

3. Resilient stair accessories: 1. Rubber stair treads with nosing: Minimum 3 mm (1/8") thick rubber,

moulded, colour and profile as selected by Consultant from manufacturer's standard range.

2. Tactile Warning Strips: polyvinyl chloride (PVC) to meet the performance and design requirements of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A117.1-1986, Accessible Warnings on Walking Surfaces. Tactile warning strip extends across the full width of the stair and for a continuous depth of 3 feet (.91 m) prior to the hazard.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnsonite, American Biltrite Products Ltd., or Mondo Rubber International Inc. or approved equivalent.

4.3 ACCESSORIES 1. Primers and adhesives: Low VOC, of types recommended by resilient flooring

manufacturer for specific material on applicable substrate, above, on or below grade. Provide materials consistent with a high moisture installation.

2. Sub-floor filler and leveler: High-performance, rapid-setting cement based skim coating compound. 'Ultra SkimCoat' by Mapei or approved alternative for filling minor voids and leveling existing substrate.

3. Provide resilient edge strips of equal gauge to flooring homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition tapered or bullnose wedge, with colour to match or contrast with flooring or as selected by Architect

4. Metal edge strips: extruded aluminum, smooth mill finish, with lip to extend under floor finish, shoulder flush with top of adjacent floor finish. Sealer and wax: type recommended by resilient flooring material manufacturer for material type and location.

5. Provide threshold of thickness and width as shown on drawings or appropriate to circumstance.

6. For slid Vinyl Sheet: Vinyl welding rod: Acceptable material: .1 Altro weld rod Cove former: Acceptable material, sized to suit application: .2 Altro Cove former [20R - 24 mm (1") radius] [38R - 45 mm (1.75") radius]. Gulley edge: Acceptable material, vinyl, sized to suit application: .3 Altro Gulley Edge [GA 35/25] [GE 35RE] [GE 25RE]. .4 Cap strip: Acceptable material, sized to suit application, Vinyl:

Altro Cap Strip [C4] [C5] [C8] [C11]. 7. Adhesives

.1 Ecofix 20- Hard set for heavy rolling loads

.2 Ecofix 25- Acrylic general adhesive

.3 Altrofix 30- 2 part polyurethane for areas prone to moisture



.4 Altrofix 31- 2 part polyurethane fast set adhesive Or approved equivalent 8. Sealer and wax: type recommended by resilient flooring material manufacturer

for material type and location.

5 Execution

5.2 EXAMINATION

1. Verify condition and dimensions of previously installed Work upon which this Section depends. Report defects to TCHC. Commencement of Work means acceptance of existing conditions.

2. Ensure concrete floors are clean and dry by using test methods recommended by flooring manufacturer. 1. Test subfloor moisture content of concrete including filler. Do not proceed

with work when moisture content exceeds the level recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Protect subfloor against entry of water and moisture.

3. Ensure that sub-floors have been provided as specified without holes, protrusions, cracks, depressions or other major defects.

4. Defective Work resulting from application to unsatisfactory surfaces will be considered the responsibility of those performing the Work of this Section.

5.3 PREPARATION

1. Prepare intended substrates in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. Flooring shall be installed over subfloors conforming to ASTM F710 for concrete.

3. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and other defects with sub-floor filler.

4. Clean floor and apply filler; trowel and float to leave smooth, flat hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler cured and dry.

5. Meet ASTM F710 Standard for Concrete or other monolithic floors.

6. Old vinyl flooring to be removed by trained personnel (may contain asbestos).

7. Remove or treat old adhesives to prevent residual, old flooring adhesives from bleeding through to new flooring and/or interfering with the bonding of new adhesives.



8. Remove substrate paint, coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives or contain soap, wax, oil, solvents, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

9. Prime intended substrate in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

6 Wood subfloors: resilient floors are recommended on suspended wood subfloors with a 1/4" underlayment (see manufacturer’s product installation systems for exceptions) and a minimum of 18" of well-ventilated air space below. Armstrong Flooring does not recommend installing resilient flooring on wood subfloors applied directly over concrete or on sleeper-construction subfloors. Loading requirements for subfloors are normally set by various building codes on both local and national levels. Trade associations such as APA–The Engineered Wood Association provide structural guidelines for meeting various code requirements. Subfloor panels are commonly marked with span ratings showing the maximum center-to-center spacing in inches of supports over which the panels should be placed.

1. Refer to the Manufacturer’s Installation Systems manual, and ASTM F 1482, Standard Guide to Wood Underlayment Products Available for Use under Resilient Flooring for additional information.

7 Wood subfloors - Surface Cleaning: Make subfloor free from dust, dirt, grease, and all foreign materials.

1. Check panels for sources of discoloration such as contamination from paint, varnish, stain overspray or spills, plumbing sealers, asphalt, heater fuel, markers or potential staining agents such as wood or bark not visible on the surface, edge sealers, logo markings, printed nail patterns and synthetic patches.

2. Remove old adhesive. 3. Cover adhesive, oil or wax residue with an appropriate underlayment. If the

residue is tacky, place a layer of felt or polyethylene sheeting over it to prevent a cracking sound when walking on the floor.

4. Remove all paint, varnish, oil and wax from all subfloors. Many buildings constructed before 1978 contain lead-based paint, which can pose a health hazard if not handled properly. State and federal regulations govern activities that disturb lead-based painted surfaces and may also require notice to building occupants. Do not remove or sand lead-based paint without consulting a qualified lead professional for guidance on lead-based paint testing and safety precautions. The use of solvents is not recommended to remove paint, varnish, oil, wax or old adhesive residues because the solvents can remain in the subfloor and negatively affect the new installation. Whenever sanding, be certain the work site is well ventilated and avoid breathing dust. If high dust levels are anticipated, use appropriate National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) designated dust respirator. All power sanding tools must be equipped with dust collectors. Avoid contact with skin or eyes. Wear gloves, eye protection and long-sleeve, loose fitting clothes

8 For additional information on the installation and preparation of wood and board-type underlayments see the current edition of ASTM F1482, “Standard Practice for Installation and Preparation of Panel Type Underlayments to Receive Resilient Flooring.”



9. Contingency for High Moisture Readings in Concrete:

If at the time of installation the moisture readings are in excess of Altro’s recommendations, the General Contractor shall employ a means of Moisture Mitigation. This includes, but is not limited to, the following methods:

.1 Application of a Moisture Reduction Barrier (MRB)

.2 Temporary use of dehumidification equipment.

.3 Postponing of the flooring installation start time.

.4 A budget should be provided to the general contractor for use of an MRB

10. Prime intended substrate in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

11. Vacuum or broom-clean surfaces to be covered immediately before the application of flooring.

7.2 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING APPLICATION

1. Install resilient tile flooring in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Apply adhesive uniformly using recommended trowel. Do not spread more adhesive than can be covered by flooring before initial set takes place.

3. Lay flooring with joints parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. Border tiles minimum half tile width.

4. Install flooring to an appropriate pattern with all joints aligned.

5. Scribe, cut, and fit to permanent fixtures, columns, walls, partitions, pipes, outlets,

and built-in furniture and cabinets.

6. If required, install flooring on pan-type floor access covers. Maintain continuity of

color and pattern within pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Adhere

flooring to the subfloor around covers and to covers.

7. As installation progresses and after installation roll flooring with 45 kg minimum roller to ensure full adhesion.

8. Cut flooring neatly around fixed objects.

9. Continue flooring over areas which will be under built-in furniture and through areas to receive movable type partitions without interrupting floor pattern.

10. Terminate flooring at centreline of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or colour is dissimilar.

11. Edge trips: Install metal edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates.



12. Provide resilient base behind kitchen cabinets at new resilient tile floors.

7.3 SHEET VINYL INSTALLATION

1. Install resilient flooring in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. All Seams shall be heat welded with manufacturer’s weld rod only.

2. Apply adhesive uniformly using recommended trowel. Do not spread more adhesive than can be covered by flooring before initial set takes place.

3. Lay flooring with joints parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. Border tiles minimum half tile width.

4. Install flooring to square grid pattern with all joints aligned.

5. As installation progresses and after installation roll flooring with 45 kg minimum roller to ensure full adhesion.

6. Cut flooring neatly around fixed objects.

7. Continue flooring over areas which will be under built-in furniture and through areas to receive movable type partitions without interrupting floor pattern.

8. Terminate flooring at centreline of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or colour is dissimilar.

9. Edge trips: Install metal edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates.

10. Provide resilient base behind kitchen cabinets at new resilient floors.

11. Drains: Fit flooring and mechanically fasten to drain outlets to ensure a permanent, watertight installation.

New Round Drains: Install round flash clamping ring type drains to accommodate flooring. Install drains to fit flush with surrounding floor surface. Acceptable drain manufacturers and drain types include Wade FC-1100. Please refer to manufacturer’s current Installation Guide for approved drain manufacturers and styles.

Existing Drains: When existing drains are to be used, provide mechanically fastened stainless steel drain rings over all-round drain outlets. Fit rings over slip resistant sheet vinyl and permit inside diameter that will allow clean-out plate to be removed after installation. Drill into concrete to accommodate lead or plastic anchors. Screw drain rings to create a tight seal with beveled head stainless steel screws.

Square and Rectangular Drains and Floor Sinks: Install manufacturer’s Gully Edge GE25RE or GE35RE around perimeter of drain which has been set in concrete in



accordance with manufacturer’s Installation Guide. Do not use manufacturer’s Gully Edge around drains set in wood floors. Provide stainless steel strips, mechanically fastened with stainless steel screws. Use stainless steel strips in other areas where it is not practical to use Gull manufacturer’s Gully Edge.

12. Coved Installation: Where resilient flooring is coved up wall surfaces and other abutments, installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s Installation Practices using the following accessories:

At standard wall finishes: Use manufacturer’s C5 vinyl cap strip to accommodate sheet vinyl to a height as indicated; adhere with contact tape.

At ceramic tile, manufacturer’s Whiterock semi-rigid wall cladding or FRP paneling: Use manufacturer’s C8 Vinyl Cap Tile Strip or C4 cap, respectively.

When coving up the wall; at juncture of vertical and horizontal surfaces: Use manufacturer’s Vinyl Cove Former 901: install with contact tape.

Top set cove base: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

4.2 RESILIENT BASE

1. Install resilient base in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. Unroll base coils. Place them flat to loose coil set.

3. Prime substrates to adhesive and resilient base manufacturers' instructions.

4. Mix and spread adhesives evenly, in minimum quantities, using correct tool type to manufacturer's instructions.

5. Cover only amount of area that can be covered by resilient base within adhesive's working time. If adhesive over-dries completely remove it. Use solvents compatible with new adhesive. Re-apply adhesive.

6. Do not soil walls, bases, fitments, casework and adjacent areas with adhesive. Promptly remove spillage.

7. Use full length pieces where practicable, accumulated short lengths not permitted.

8. Cement base to vertical surfaces so that gaps do not occur behind base, so that base bears firmly and uniformly on floor surfaces and so that good and permanent bond is produced between base and surface to which it is applied. Roll base after laying to ensure full adhesive contact.

9. Use pre-moulded base corner pieces at external 90 deg. corners. Wrap base at other external corners. Mitre base at internal corners.



10. Minimize joints in base and under no circumstances shall joints in base runs occur within 450 mm (18") of corners door frames, openings and reveals. Accurately scribe base to fit tight and accurately to door frames and other vertical abutting surfaces. Make joints tight fit.

11. Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions. Use premoulded end pieces where end of base is exposed and does not butt against a vertical surface.

12. Roll base using 3 kg. hand roller, against wall and floor surfaces.

13. Install bases straight and level to variation of plus or minus 3 mm over 3 m straight edge.

14. Butt joints and keep flush without gaps.

15. Miter internal corners. Neatly and accurately scribe back of base straight and form external corners.

4.3 RESILIENT STAIR TREADS AND NOSINGS

1. Prepare adhesive and install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. Stair treads and nosings: 1. Pre-cut and fit treads prior to spreading adhesive. Fill back side of tread

nose with a caulking bead; brush on adhesive on understeps and back of treads, as well as back of risers, and on receiving substrate.

2. Allow to become tacky to touch before installing. 3. Treads shall be fully bonded to substrate, with tread nosing butted tight

against stair tread nosing. 4. Roll with hand roller after installation.

3. Remove adhesive seepage at seams or surface while adhesive is still wet, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

4.4 TACTILE WARNING STRIPS

1. Prepare adhesive and install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. Johnsonite's #996 Two-Part Epoxy, #975 Two-Part Urethane, or #965 Acrylic Flooring and Tread Adhesives or approved equivalent. Follow the directions on the respective adhesive label for mixing, application, and drying times.

3. Remove wet adhesive at seams or off tile surface with a cloth dampened with rubbing alcohol or water.

4. Roll the floor, in both directions, with a 100 lb. 3-section roller. Roll a second time one hour later. Inspect the floor 2-1/2 hours after installation and roll a third time, if



necessary. Use a hand roller in areas which cannot be reached with a large roller. Inspect floor surface, especially seams, and remove any adhesive on the surface.

5. Avoid all traffic for at least 12 hours and only limited light traffic for a period of 72 hours after the installation. Do not allow roller traffic on the floor until after a minimum of 72 hours.

4.5 CLEANING

1. Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage.

2. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas.

1. Repair or replace damaged installed products.

2. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to Owner’s acceptance.

3. Current recommended maintenance procedures from the maufacturer.

4. Clean, seal and wax floor surfaces to manufacturer's written instructions.

4.6 PROTECTION

1. Protect new floors in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

4.7 WORK IN EXISTING BUILDING

1. In resilient flooring areas, where fixed partitions and other permanent fixtures have been demolished, provide new floor flooring to match existing and apply new flooring to demolished areas. Thoroughly and properly prepare demolished areas prior to floor application.

2. In areas of alteration work, re-install all existing resilient flooring and bases which are not fully bonded. Replace missing flooring and bases and excessively worn tiles with new matching flooring and bases. Thoroughly and properly prepare surfaces.

3. Make good all existing resilient flooring and bases which are to remain but which are damaged and disturbed due to Work of this Contract. Where necessary, cut to suit adjacent new work.

-END OF SECTION-

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 09900 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 PAINTING Page 1 of 16

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1.1 The General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, and all other requirements of Divisions 00 and 01, shall apply to this Section of the Work.

1.1.2 Examine the Specifications and Drawings for the work of other Sections

regarding the provisions for prime and finish coats. Paint or finish all materials installed throughout the project which are required to be painted and which are left unfinished or unpainted by other Sections. The only exception to this requirement is where the Drawings, Specifications, or Schedules state positively and explicitly that a surface is not to be finish painted.

1.1.3 Note: all exposed surfaces are to be painted both interior & exterior.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

1.2.1 Section 05500: Miscellaneous Metals. 1.2.2 Section 08110: Steel Doors and Frames - Shop Priming of Ferrous Doors and

Door Frames.

1.2.3 Section 08120: Aluminum Doors and Frames - for matching paint colour.

1.2.4 Section 08521: Aluminum Windows and Curtain Wall - for matching paint colour.

1.2.5 Section 09250: Gypsum and Cement Board.

1.2.6 Division 15: Colour Code Marking Bands and Lettering for Identification of Concealed and Exposed Piping and Ductwork.

1.2.7 Division 16: Colour Code Banding and Lettering for Identification of Concealed

and Exposed Electrical Services and Equipment. 1.3 REFERENCES 1.3.1 Ontario Painting Contractors' Architectural (OPCA).

.1 Architectural Specifications Manual, latest edition - referenced throughout this Section as the OPCA Manual.

1.3.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).

.1 CAN/CGSB-1.36-M90, General Purpose Interior Varnish. .2 CAN/CGSB-1.38-M91, Interior Enamel Undercoater. .3 CGSB 1-GP-48M-78, Primer, Marine, for Steel. .4 CAN/CGSB-1.57-M90, Alkyd, Interior, Semigloss, Enamel. .5 CAN/CGSB-1.60-M89, Interior Alkyd Gloss Enamel. .6 CAN/CGSB-1.68-M91, Solvent Type Primer-Sealer for Interior Walls. .7 CAN/CGSB-1.73-M91, Exterior and Interior Enamel for Floors. .8 CAN/CGSB-1.100-M89, Interior Latex Type, Flat Paint. .9 CAN/CGSB-1.102-M89. Clear Alkyd Type Sealer. .10 CAN/CGSB-1.118-M89, Interior Alkyd, Flat Finish. .11 CAN/CGSB-1.119-M89, Primer-Sealer, Wall, Interior Latex Type. .12 CAN/CGSB-1.121-93, Vinyl Pretreatment Coating for Metals (Vinyl Wash

Primer). .13 CAN/CGSB-1.126-M91, Vinyl Sealer for Wood.


.14 CAN/CGSB-1.143-M90, Heat Resistant Aluminum Enamel, Silicone Alkyd.

.15 CAN/CGSB-1.145-M90, Solvent-Based Pigmented Stain. .16 CAN/CGSB-1.146-92, Cold Curing, Gloss Epoxy Coating.

.17 CAN/CGSB-1.150-M91, Clear Lacquer for Wood Furniture. .18 CAN/CGSB-1.153-M90, High Build, Gloss, Epoxy Coating. .19 CAN/CGSB-1.165-M89, Cold Curing Epoxy Primer. .20 CAN/CGSB-1.175-M89, Polyurethane Interior Coating, Oil Modified,

Clear, Gloss and Satin. .21 CGSB 1-GP-180Ma-82, Coating, Polyurethane, Two-Package, General

Purpose. .22 CAN/CGSB-1.188-M90, Emulsion Type Filler Masonry Block. .23 CGSB 1-GP-193Ma-83, Coating, High-Build Epoxy, Marine. .24 CAN/CGSB-1.195-M90 Interior Semigloss Latex Paint. .25 CAN/CGSB-1.198-92, Cementitious Primer (for Galvanized Surfaces). .26 CAN/CGSB-1.202-92, Interior Low Gloss Alkyd Enamel. .27 CAN/CGSB-1.209-93, Low Sheen Latex Interior Paint. .28 CGSB 85-GP-1M-78, Painting (New) Exterior Wooden Surfaces. .29 CGSB 85-GP-2M-78, Painting (Maintenance) of Exterior Painted

Wooden Surfaces. .30 CGSB 85-GP-10M-79, Shop Painting Structural Steel. .31 CGSB 85-GP-11M-80, Painting Steel for Protection Against Continuous

Wetting. .32 CGSB 85-GP-13M-80, Painting Structural Steel for Protection Against

Heavy Industrial Atmospheres. .33 CGSB 85-GP-14M-78, Painting Steel Surfaces Exposed to Normally Dry

Weather. .34 CGSB 85-GP-15M-78, Painting, Maintenance, Exterior Steel Exposed to

Normally Dry Weather. .35 CGSB 85-GP-16M-79, Painting Galvanized Steel. .36 CGSB 85-GP-18M-80, Painting, Maintenance, Exterior, Steel, for

Protection Against Continuous Wetting. .37 CGSB 85-GP-20M-79, Painting Copper and Copper Alloys. .38 CGSB 85-GP-31M-79, Painting Stucco, Masonry and Brick Surfaces. .39 CGSB 85-GP-32M-79, Painting Concrete Floors. .40 CGSB 85-GP-33M-79, Painting Interior Plaster and Wallboard. .41 CAN/CGSB-85.100-93, Painting.

1.3.3 National Fire Code of Canada 1990. 1.3.4 Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).

.1 Systems and Specifications Manual 1989. 1.3.5 CAN/CGSB-85.100-M93 Painting

1.4 PRODUCT DATA 1.4.1 Paint or special coatings shall be products manufactured by Benjamin Moore

Paints, ICI Paints Canada (Glidden), Sico Inc. (formerly Para Inc.), Pittsburgh Paints, Pratt and Lambert Inc., or Sherwin-Williams Company of Canada Limited.

1.4.2 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. 1.4.3 Submit full records of all products used. List each product in relation to finish

formula and include the following: .1 Finish formula designation.


.2 Product type and use. .3 CGSB number. .4 Manufacturer's product number. .5 Colour number. .6 Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). .7 Maximum VOC classification. .8 Ecologo certification.

1.4.4 Submit manufacturer's application instructions for each product specified.

1.5 SAMPLES 1.5.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. 1.5.2 Submit duplicate 300 mm x 200 mm sample panels of each paint, stain, clear

coating, type, colour, and texture specified. 1.5.3 Submit full range of available colours where colour availability is restricted. 1.5.4 For preparation of samples, use the base materials described below. These

materials are selected to simulate as closely as possible the type of background to which the specified finish paint system is to be applied.

.1 Use 3 mm plate steel as the base material for submittal of sample paint finishes for final application to metal surfaces.

.2 Use 12.5 mm birch plywood as the base material for submittal of sample paint finishes for final application to wood surfaces.

.3 Use 50 mm concrete block as the base material for submittal of sample paint finishes for final application to concrete or concrete masonry surfaces.

.4 Use 12.5 mm gypsum board as the base material for submittal of sample paint finishes for final application to gypsum board and other smooth surfaces.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6.1 Retain purchase orders, invoices and other documents to prove that all materials

utilized in this contract meet requirements of the specifications. Produce documents when requested by Consultant.

1.6.2 Standard of Acceptance:

.1 Walls - no defects visible from a distance of 1000 mm at 90 degrees to surface.

.2 Ceilings - no defects visible from floor at 45 degrees to surface when viewed using final lighting source.

.3 Final coat to exhibit uniformity of colour and uniformity of sheen across full surface area.

1.6.3 Qualification of Product Manufacturer(s) and Application shall conform to

requirements of Chapter 6 of the OPCA Manual. 1.6.4 All work carried out by this Section shall be subject to inspection described in

Chapter 7 of the OPCA Manual. 1.6.5 Pay all costs of OPCA inspection. Cooperate with the assigned OPCA inspector

and conform to OPCA inspection procedures. 1.7 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING


1.7.1 Deliver and store materials in original containers, sealed, with labels intact. 1.7.2 Indicate on containers or wrappings:

.1 Manufacturer's name and address. .2 Type of paint. .3 Compliance with applicable standard. .4 Colour number in accordance with established colour schedule.

1.7.3 Remove damaged, opened and rejected materials from site. 1.7.4 Provide and maintain dry, temperature controlled, secure storage. 1.7.5 Observe manufacturer's recommendations for storage and handling. 1.7.6 Store materials and supplies away from heat generating devices. 1.7.7 Store materials and equipment in a well-ventilated area with temperature range

7° to 30° C. 1.7.8 Store temperature sensitive products above minimum temperature as

recommended by manufacturer. 1.7.9 Keep areas used for storage, cleaning and preparation, clean and orderly. After

completion of operations, return areas to clean condition. 1.7.10 Provide minimum one 9 kg Type ABC fire extinguisher adjacent to storage area. 1.7.11 Remove only in quantities required for same day use. 1.7.12 Fire Safety Requirements

.1 Store oily rags, waste products, empty containers and materials subject to spontaneous combustion in ULC approved, sealed containers and remove from site on a daily basis.

.2 Handle, store, use and dispose of flammable and combustible materials in accordance with the National Fire Code of Canada.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1.8.1 Safety: comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information

System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling storage, and disposal of hazardous materials.

1.8.2 Ventilation:

.1 Arrange for ventilation system to be operated during application of paint. .2 Ventilate enclosed spaces.

.3 Provide continuous ventilation during and after application of paint. Run ventilation system 24 hours per day during installation; provide continuous ventilation for 7 days after completion of application of paint.

1.8.3 Where surface to be painted is not under cover, do not apply paint when:

.1 Substrate and ambient air temperature is below 5°C for alkyd and 7°C for latex paints or when temperature is expected to drop to 0°C before paint has thoroughly cured.

.2 Substrate and ambient air temperature are expected to fall outside limits


prescribed in paint standard and by manufacturer. .3 Temperature of surface is over 50°C unless paint is specifically

formulated for application at high temperatures. .4 Rain or snow is forecast to occur before paint has thoroughly cured; it is

foggy, misty, raining or snowing at site; relative humidity is above 85%. .5 Surface to be painted is wet, damp or frosted. .6 Previous coat is not dry.

1.8.4 Apply paint finishes only when conditions forecast for entire period of application

are within manufacturer's recommendations. 1.8.5 Provide and maintain cover when paint must be applied in damp or cold weather.

Heat substrates and surrounding air to comply with temperature and humidity conditions specified by manufacturer. Protect until paint is dry or until weather conditions are suitable.

1.8.6 Apply paint finish only when dust is no longer being generated by related

construction operations or when wind conditions are such that airborne particles will not affect the quality of the finished surface.

1.8.7 Schedule painting operations such that surfaces exposed to direct, intense

sunlight are scheduled for completion during early morning. 1.8.8 Remove paint from areas which have been exposed to freezing, excess

humidity, rain, snow or condensation. Prepare surface again and repaint. 1.9.9 Apply paint finishes only when temperature at location of installation can be

satisfactorily maintained within manufacturer’s recommendations. .10 Substrate and ambient temperature must be within limits prescribed in paint

standard and by manufacturer to approval of Consultant. 1.8.11 Maintain minimum substrate and ambient air temperature of 5°C for alkyd and

7°C for latex paints in covered and enclosed areas. Maximum relative humidity 85%. Maintain supplemental heating until paint has cured sufficiently.

1.8.12 Provide temporary heating where permanent facilities are not available to

maintain minimum recommended temperatures. 1.8.13 Apply paint finish only in areas where dust is no longer being generated by

related construction operations such that airborne particles will not affect the quality of the finished surface.

1.8.14 Apply paint only when surface to be painted is dry, properly cured and

adequately prepared. 1.8.15 Painting in occupied facilities to be carried out during evening and early hours

only. Schedule operations to approval of Consultant such that painted surfaces will have dried and cured sufficiently before occupants are affected.

1.8.16 Provide minimum 270 lux on surfaces to be painted. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS 1.9.1 Submit maintenance materials in accordance with General Conditions


1.9.2 Submit one - four litre container of each type and colour of primer and finish

coating. Identify colour and paint type in relation to established colour schedule and finish formula.

1.9.3 Deliver to Owner and store where directed. 1.10 WARRANTY 1.10.1 Provide a written two (2) year Guarantee for all painting work carried out by this

Section 09900, commencing at the date of Substantial Performance of the Work. 1.11 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1.10.1 Allow for 30% of the project to be finished in accent colours. 1.10.2 Allow for half the painting in the project to be in eggshell finish and half the

project in low gloss, semi-gloss, or gloss finish. 1.10.3 Full details of colour schemes will be issued during the construction period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Qualified products: only paint materials listed on the OPCA Approved Product

Lists are acceptable for use on this project. 2.1.2 Paint materials for each coating formula to be products of a single manufacturer. .3 Whenever possible, select products exhibiting low odour characteristics. If two

products are otherwise equivalent, select the product with the lowest odour. .4 Muriatic Acid (for surface preparation): commercial quality 30% to 38%

Hydrochloric Acid.

2.2 MIXING PROCEDURES

2.2.1 Paints shall be supplied ready-mixed unless otherwise specified. Do not incorporate adulterants.

2.2.2 Mix specified paste or powder coatings, or those that are field-catalyzed at job, to meet specified requirements of manufacturer.

2.2.3. Pigment shall be well ground to form a soft paste in the vehicle during its storage life. Paddle mixing at job shall evenly disperse paste throughout mixture to a complete homogeneous mixture. When mixing is complete, paint shall be smooth-flowing, easy brushing consistency and shall dry or cure free of sags or runs.

2.2.4 Mix paints only in mixing pails placed on suitably sized, non-ferrous or oxide-resistant metal pans.

2.3 COLOURS 2.3.1 Consultant will provide a complete Colour Schedule after contract award. 2.3.2 Colour schedule will be based upon the selection of five base colours and three


accent colours. No more than eight colours will be selected for the entire project and no more than three colours will be selected in each area.

2.3.3 Selection of colours will be from manufacturer’s full range of colours. 2.3.4 Where specific products are available in a restricted range of colours, selection

will be based on the limited range. 2.3.5 Perform all colour tinting operations prior to delivery of paint to site. On-site

tinting of painting materials allowed only with Consultant's written permission. 2.3.6 Second coat in a three coat system to be tinted slightly lighter colour than top

coat to show visible difference between coats. 2.3.7 For reference purposes only, to identify paint formula or colour (PT#-) that is

called up on the Drawings, in Schedules, or in the Specifications, a summary of paint colours is provided at the end of this Section.

2.4 PAINT FINISHES 2.4.1 Formula 1 (Alkyd): for concrete walls and ceilings apply:

.1 OPCA System INT-7-B, premium. Finish coat: low gloss. 2.4.2 Formula 2 (Alkyd): for concrete block walls apply:

.1 OPCA System INT-8-B, premium. Finish coat: low gloss. 2.4.3 Formula 3 (Alkyd): for gypsum board walls apply:

.1 OPCA System INT-4-A, premium. Finish coat: low gloss. 2.4.4 Formula 4 (Alkyd): for gypsum board ceilings apply:

.1 CPCA System INT-4-A, premium. Finish coat: low gloss. 2.4.5 Formula 5 (Latex): for concrete walls, soffits and stair edges apply:

.1 OPCA System INT-7-A, premium. Finish coat: eggshell. 2.4.6 Formula 6 (Latex): for concrete block walls apply:

.1 OPCA System INT-8-A, premium. Finish coat: eggshell. 2.4.7 Formula 7 (Latex): for gypsum board, plaster walls apply:

.1 OPCA System INT-4-B, premium. Finish coat: eggshell. .2 OPCA System INT-4-B, premium. Finish coat: semi-gloss. 2.4.8 Formula 8 (Latex): for gypsum board, plaster ceilings apply:

.1 OPCA System INT-4-B, premium. Finish coat: flat. 2.4.9 Formula 9 (Latex): for acoustic tile and textured ceilings apply:

.1 OPCA System INT-6-A, custom.

2.4.10 Formula 10 (Alkyd): for wood trim, panelling, plywood, cabinetry to receive paint finish apply:

.1 OPCA System INT-1-A, premium. Finish coat: gloss. 2.4.11 Formula 11 (alkyd): for concrete floors, curbs and bases apply:

.1 CPCA System INT-9-B, premium. 2.4.12 Formula 12 (Epoxy): for concrete floors apply:

.1 OPCA System INT-9-A, premium.


2.4.13 Formula 13 (Alkyd): for shop primed ferrous metal surfaces apply:

.1 touch up with shop primer as provided by fabricator. .2 OPCA System INT-12-A, premium. Finish coat: gloss.

2.1.14 Formula 14 (Epoxy): for shop primed ferrous metal surfaces apply:

.1 touch up with shop primer as provided by fabricator. .2 CPCA System INT-12-D, premium.

2.4.15 Formula 15 (Alkyd): for galvanized and zinc coated metal apply:

.1 OPCA System INT-13-A, premium. Finish coat: gloss. 2.4.16 Formula 16 (Alkyd): for galvanized metal deck (ceilings) apply:

.1 OPCA System INT-13-A, premium. Finish coat: low gloss. 2.4.17 Formula 17(Alkyd): for copper piping and fittings apply:

.1 OPCA System INT-16-A, premium. Finish coat: low gloss. 2.4.18 Formula 18 (Alkyd): for cotton or canvas insulation coverings apply:

.1 OPCA System INT-5-A, custom. Finish coat: flat. 2.4.19 Formula 19 (Alkyd): for primed ferrous metal to receive paint apply:

.1 spot priming with shop primer. .2 OPCA System: EXT-11-A, premium. Finish coat: gloss.

2.4.20 Formula 20 (Epoxy): for primed ferrous metal to receive epoxy paint apply:

.1 spot priming with shop primer. .2 OPCA System: EXT-11-D, premium. Finish coat: semi-gloss.

2.4.21 Formula 21 (Alkyd): for galvanized and zinc coated metal to receive paint apply:

.1 OPCA System: EXT-12-A, premium. Finish coat: gloss. 2.4.22 Formula 22 (Latex): for concrete and concrete block walls apply:

.1 OPCA System INT-8-A, premium. Finish coat: semi-gloss. 2.4 .23 Formula 23 (Epoxy): for concrete block and gypsum board walls apply: .1 OPCA System INT-8-D, premium. Finish coat: semi-gloss. 2.5 SPECIAL FINISHES 2.5.1 Formula 24: for metal surfaces exposed to heat medium temperature range to

425°C apply: .1 OPCA System: EXT-14-A, premium.

2.5.2 Formula 25 (Chlorinated Rubber): for surfaces exposed to Moderate or Heavy

Duty corrosive environments apply: .1 one coat chlorinated rubber primer. .2 two coats chlorinated rubber enamel.

2.5.3 Formula 26 (Multi Coloured Paint): for gypsum board wall surfaces apply: .1 Primer material formulated as part of the multi-coloured paint package,

colour - white, followed by spray applied one coat flek patterned paint system. Finish - gloss. Pattern- to approved sample.

2.5.4 Paint specification for pool floor and pool walls: Pool floor and pool walls to be painted with: 1. Olympic by Kelley Technical Coatings specification attached herewith, or Consultant approved alternate.


.1 Start with a sandblast/weatherblast preparation followed by a top coating of Olympic Kelly`s `Zeron` epoxy. On exposed smooth concrete prime surface with /218 Poxoprime, or Consultant approved alternate.

.2 finish colour to be Blue Mist, Zeron No. 395 2. or Consultant Approved Alternate 3. Concrete floors to be painted with Formula 12 (epoxy) 2.5.6 Fiber Cement Panels: Fiber Cement panels are to have a factory applied base paint in white and be painted as shown on drawings in 7 colours. 2.57 Paint specification for metal fences, (chain link, steel panels + supports & structure): All existing metal fences to be wire brushed to remove any & all rust & corrosion

1. Rustoleum high performance paint 2 part; .1 7400 sytem heavy duty rust inhibitive primer .2 V7400 system 340 VOC DTM alkyd enamel 2. Or approved equivalent

2.6 MULTI-COLOURED PAINT 2.6.1 Multi-coloured paint shall be a seamless multi-colour wall coating, water and

acrylic resin based with synthetic rubber polymer to provide the paint body and pigmentation.

2.6.2 Acceptable product: Decor-Flek manufactured by Decor-Flek Paint Surfaces,

Concord, Ontario, or other equal approved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL 3.1.1 Perform all painting operations in accordance with OPCA Painting Specifications

Manual except where specified otherwise. 3.1.2 Apply all paint materials in accordance with paint manufacturer’s written

application instructions. 3.2 PREPARATION 3.2.1 Prepare new surfaces, to receive paint, as described in Chapter 3 of OPCA

Manual. 3.2.2 Remove electrical cover plates, light fixtures, surface hardware on doors, door

stops, bath accessories and all other surface mounted fittings and fastenings prior to undertaking any painting operations. Store for re-installation after painting is completed.

3.2.3 Move and cover furniture and portable equipment as necessary to carry out

painting operations. Replace as painting operations progress. 3.3 PROTECTION 3.3.1 Protect new exterior and existing building surfaces, not to be painted, from paint


spatters, markings and other damage. If damaged, clean and restore such surfaces as directed by Consultant.

3.3.2 Cover or mask floors, windows and other ornamental hardware adjacent to areas

being painted to prevent damage and to protect from paint drops and splatters. Use non-staining coverings.

3.3.3 Cover or mask surfaces adjacent to those receiving treatment and finishing to

protect materials and surfaces installed by other Sections from damage and soiling. Mask instruction and specification plates attached to equipment being painted.

3.3.4 Take particular care in storage and mixing areas that floors are protected by

tarpaulins and metal pans. 3.3.5 Place cloths and other disposable finishing materials that are a fire hazard in

closed metal containers containing water, and remove from building at the end of each working day.

3.3.6 Ensure that the appropriate Trades remove from finished surfaces, store and

reinstall after finishing is completed, switch and receptacle plates, escutcheons, luminaire frames and similar items.

3.3.7 Porous materials on surfaces or in locations affected by the work of this Section,

which are soiled or damaged by the application of finish paint or special coatings by this Section 09900, where such soiling or damage cannot be completely removed or repaired, shall be replaced by this Section.

3.3.8 Post “No Smoking” signs and ensure that spark-proof electrical equipment is

used in areas where inflammable painting materials are being applied. 3.3.9 Protect items that are permanently attached such as Fire Labels on doors and

frames. 3.3.10 Protect factory finished products and equipment. 3.3.11 Protect passing pedestrians, and the general public in, and about, the building. 3.3.12 As painting operations progress, place "WET PAINT" signs in areas of work. 3.3.13 Post “WET PAINT” signs throughout freshly finished area and remove when

finishes are dry. 3.3.14 Remove finish hardware before painting. If finish hardware cannot be removed,

mask all hardware surfaces before painting. Remove masking and reinstall hardware upon completion of painting.

3.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS 3.4.1 Investigate existing substrates for problems related to proper and complete

preparation of surfaces to be painted. Report to Consultant all damage, defects, unsatisfactory or unfavourable conditions before proceeding with work.

3.4.2 Investigate moisture content of surfaces to be painted and report findings to

Consultant. Do not proceed with work until conditions fall within acceptable range as recommended by manufacturer.


3.4.3 Maximum moisture content as follows: .1 Plaster and wallboard: 12%. .2 Masonry/Concrete: 12%. .3 Concrete Block/Brick: 12%. .4 Wood: 15%.

3.5 CLEANING 3.5.1 Clean all surfaces to be painted as follows:

.1 Remove all dust, dirt, and other surface debris by vacuuming, wiping with dry, clean cloths or compressed air.

.2 Wash surfaces with solution of T.S.P., bleach and clean warm water using a stiff bristle brush to remove dirt, oil and other surface contaminants.

.3 Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water until foreign matter is flushed from surface.

.4 Allow surfaces to drain completely and allow to dry thoroughly. 3.5.2 Prevent contamination of cleaned surfaces by salts, acids, alkalis, other

corrosive chemicals, grease, oil and solvents before prime coat is applied and between applications of remaining coats. Apply primer, paint, or pretreatment as soon as possible after cleaning and before deterioration occurs.

3.5.3 Sand existing surfaces with intact, smooth, high gloss coatings to provide

adequate adhesion for new finishes.

3.5.4 Promptly as the work proceeds and on completion of the work, remove all paint where spilled, splashed or splattered; during the progress of the work keep the premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris; at the conclusion of the work leave the premises neat and clean.

3.6 SURFACE PREPARATION 3.6.1 Prepare new wood surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-1M. 3.6.2 Where possible, prime all surfaces of new wood surfaces before installation. Use

same primers as specified for exposed surfaces. 3.6.3 Prepare previously painted wood surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-2M.

.1 Apply vinyl sealer to CAN/CGSB-1.126 over knots, pitch, sap and resinous areas.

.2 Apply wood filler to nail holes and cracks. .3 Tint filler to match stains for stained woodwork.

3.6.4 Prepare stucco, brick, concrete masonry and concrete surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-

31M. 3.6.5 Prepare concrete floors to CGSB 85-GP-32M. Prepare new concrete floor by

acid etching. Rinse with clean water and thoroughly dry. 3.6.6 Prepare plaster and wallboard surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-33M. 3.7 SURFACE PREPARATION - METAL 3.7.1 Clean new metal surfaces to be painted by: removing rust, loose mill scale,


welding slag, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign substances in accordance with the following:

.1 Solvent cleaning: SSPC-SP-1. .2 Hand tool cleaning: SSPC-SP-2. .3 Power tool cleaning: SSPC-SP-3. .4 Commercial blast cleaning: SSPC-SP-6. .5 Brush-off blast cleaning: SSPC-SP-7.

3.7.2 Where new metal surfaces are such that bleed-through will occur, use Zinsser

Bulls-Eye latex primer or Zinsser 1-2-3 oil base primer. 3.7.3 Clean existing metal surfaces to be repainted by: removing loose, cracked, brittle

or non-adherent paint, rust, loose mill scale, welding slag, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign substances in accordance with following:

.1 Scrape edges of old paint back to sound material where remaining paint is thick and sound, feather exposed edges.

.2 Commercial blast clean rusted and bare metal surfaces where existing paint system has failed.

.3 Solvent cleaning: SSPC-SP-1. .4 Hand tool cleaning: SSPC-SP-2. .5 Power tool cleaning: SSPC-SP-3. .6 Commercial blast cleaning: SSPC-SP-6. .7 Brush-off blast cleaning: SSPC-SP-7.

3.7.4 Remove traces of blast products from surfaces, pockets and corners to be

painted by brushing with clean brushes or blowing with clean dry compressed air. 3.7.5 Touch up shop primer to CGSB 85-GP-10M with primer as specified in

applicable section. Touch-up to include cleaning and painting of field connections, welds, rivets, nuts, washers, bolts, and damaged or defective paint and rusted areas.

3.7.6 Prepare galvanized steel and zinc coated steel surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-16M. 3.7.7 Prepare copper and copper alloys surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-20M. 3.7.8 Prepare new steel surfaces exposed normally to dry conditions to CGSB 85-GP-

14M. 3.7.9 Prepare previously painted steel surfaces exposed normally to dry conditions to

CGSB 85-GP-15M. 3.7.10 Do not apply paint until prepared surfaces have been accepted by the

Consultant. 3.8 MIXING PAINT 3.8.1 Mix ingredients in container before, and during, use and ensure breaking up of

lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and uniform composition. 3.8.2 Thin paint for spraying according to manufacturer's instructions. If directions are

not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer and provide copy of instructions to Consultant.

3.9 PAINT APPLICATION


3.9.1 Method of application to be as approved by Consultant. Apply paint by brush,

roller air sprayer, or airless sprayer. Conform to manufacturer's application instructions unless specified otherwise.

3.9.2 Brush application:

.1 Work paint into cracks, crevices and corners. Paint surfaces not accessible to brushes by spray, daubers or sheepskins.

.2 Brush out runs and sags. .3 Remove runs, sags and brush marks from finished work and repaint.

3.9.3 Spray application:

.1 Provide and maintain equipment that is suitable for intended purpose, capable of properly atomizing paint to be applied, and equipped with suitable pressure regulators and gauges.

.2 Keep paint ingredients properly mixed in containers during paint application either by continuous mechanical agitation or by intermittent agitation as frequently as necessary.

.3 Apply paint in a uniform layer, with overlapping at edges of spray pattern. .4 Brush out immediately all runs and sags. .5 Use branches to work paint into cracks, crevices and places which are

not adequately painted by spray. 3.9.4 Use dipping, sheepskins or daubers only when no other method is practical in

places of difficult access and only when specifically authorized by Consultant. 3.9.5 Apply each coat of paint as a continuous film of uniform thickness. Repaint thin

spots or bare areas before next coat of paint is applied. 3.9.6 Allow surfaces to dry and properly cure after cleaning and between subsequent

coats for minimum time period as recommended by manufacturer. 3.9.7 Sand and dust between each coat to remove defects visible from 1.5 m. 3.9.8 Finish tops of cupboards, cabinets and projecting ledges, both above and below

sight lines as specified for surrounding surfaces. 3.9.9 Finish inside of cupboards and cabinets as specified for outside surfaces. 3.9.10 Finish closets and alcoves as specified for adjoining rooms. 3.9.11 Finish top, bottom, edges and cutouts of doors, after fitting as specified. 3.9.12 The dry film thickness on metal surfaces must be at least 3 mils. 3.9.13 Otherwise paint application shall be in conformance with application

requirements in Chapter 6 of the OPCA Manual. 3.10 APPLICATION OF MULTI-COLOURED PAINT 3.10.1 Protect all adjacent surfaces from overspray. 3.10.2 Apply primer to dry surfaces, free from flaking materials, dirt, grease and

nicotine. 3.10.3 Allow four (4) hours after application of primer before re-coating.


3.10.4 Apply second coat of primer, if required. 3.10.5 Apply finish by spray using cross lap method. 3.10.6 Finish shall be free of all runs, sags, voids and excessive tactile texture.

3.10.7 Wet film thickness shall be 238 microns and dry film thickness shall be 49.8 microns.

3.10.8 Match pattern to approved sample. 3.10.9 Application shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 3.10.10 Touch up, and repair any damaged areas with pattern finish to match approved

sample. 3.11 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.11.1 Paint exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and

electrical equipment in finished areas as well as inside cupboards and cabinet work. Colour and texture to match adjacent surfaces, except as noted otherwise.

3.11.2 In boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms: paint exposed conduits, piping,

hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment. Paint all items on roofs that are not provided with factory-applied finish prior to installation to this project.

3.11.3 In other unfinished areas: leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork

and other mechanical and electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks.

3.11.4 Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with

paint as supplied by manufacturer of equipment. 3.11.5 Do not paint over nameplates. 3.11.6 Keep sprinkler heads free of paint. 3.11.7 Paint inside of ductwork where visible behind grilles, registers and diffusers with

primer and one coat of matte Black paint. 3.11.8 Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in enamel. 3.11.9 Paint all fire protection piping. 3.11.10 Paint all natural gas piping. 3.11.11 Paint both sides and edges of backboards for telephone and electrical equipment

before installation. Leave equipment in original finish except for touch-up as required, and paint conduits, mounting accessories and other unfinished items.

3.11.12 Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems.

3.11.13 Paint exterior steel electrical conduit and all unfinished parts of boxes.

3.11.14 Leave inside of mechanical cabinets unpainted.


3.11.15 Leave name plates unpainted. 3.12 RESTORATION 3.12.1 Clean and re-install all hardware items that were removed before painting

operations. 3.12.2 Remove protective coverings and warning signs as soon as practical after

operations cease. 3.12.3 Remove paint splashings on exposed surfaces that were not painted. Remove

smears and spatter immediately as operations progress, using compatible solvent.

3.12.4 Protect freshly completed surfaces from paint droppings and dust to approval of

Consultant. Avoid scuffing newly applied paint. 3.12.5 Restore areas used for storage, cleaning, mixing and handling of paint to clean

condition as approved by Consultant. 3.13 FINISHING PROCEDURE 3.13.1 Finishes and number of coats specified are intended to cover surfaces

completely. If they do not, apply further coats until complete coverage is achieved.

3.13.2 Any areas exhibiting incomplete or unsatisfactory coverage shall have the entire

plane re-painted. Patching will not be accepted. 3.13.3 Spraying will not be allowed without written permission from Consultant. 3.13.4 Arrange to have traffic barred from completed areas wherever possible. 3.13.5 Apply materials in strict conformance with manufacturer’s directions and

specifications. Do not use adulterants. 3.13.6 Apply final coats on smooth surfaces by roller or brush. 3.13.7 Assume that all finished surfaces, except final factory applied finishes, shall be

coated. Colour code exposed plumbing lines in accordance with Codes and/or Mechanical Specifications.

3.13.8 This Section is to apply one coat of masonry block filler and one coat of primer

paint to masonry surfaces where gypsum wallboard is to be laminated to masonry. Coordinate this work with Section 09250.

3.14 CLEANING 3.14.1 Promptly, as the work proceeds and on completion of the work, remove all paint

where spilled, splashed or splattered; during the progress of the work keep the premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus

material, rags, empty paint cans and other cans, and debris; at the conclusion of the work leave the premises neat and clean.

3.15 PAINT MARKINGS (for the Pool Deck and Pool Floor) 3.15.1 The following is a guideline as to the paint markings required for the pool deck

and pool floor. The Contractor is to confirm the required paint markings with the Consultant prior to painting.


- Black Disc (150mm (6”) in diameter) at deepest point of pool painted on a white background.

- Deck Markings – not les tan 100mm high, markings that set out the water depths indicating the deep points, the breaks between gentle and steep bottom slopes and the shallow points and the words DEEP AREA and SHALLOW AREA at appropriate locations.

- Lane Markings – painted on the bottom and up end walls as per drawings, lanemarkings should be no wider than 150mm, (6”), colour black.

- Lane End Targets- painted on pool wall as per drawings colour black - Ramp Areas – beach front area, ramps, sloping areas – to be non-slip with a

contracting colour to the rest of the pool - Pool End Wall – where the lane send the pool wall is to have a non-sip finish 3.16 PAINT COLOUR SCHEDULE - FOR REFERENCE PURPOSES ONLY 3.15.1 The following information is for reference purposes only. 3.15.2 Colours are referenced to a manufacturer’s product for identification purposes

only. 3.15.3 Refer to drawings materials list for paint list, the Consultant will chose 7 paint colour selections later.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 INTERIOR & EXTERIOR REPAINTING Page 1 of 12

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Description:

.1 Section Includes: All labor, materials, tools and other equipment, services and supervision required to complete all exterior repainting work as indicated on Finish Schedules and to the full extent of the drawings and specifications.

.2 Work under this Contract shall also include, but not necessarily be limited to: Exterior wood siding, trim, fascia,

soffits, shutters, interior walls, floors and ceilings including millwork, moldings, casework, doors & frames etc.

.a Paint stripping of existing surfaces (including interior & exterior with lead based paint)

.b High pressure washing and abrasive blasting

.c Moisture testing of substrates.

.d Surface preparation of substrates as required for acceptance of paint, including cleaning, small crack repair, patching, caulking, and making good surfaces and areas to the limits defined under MPI Repainting Manual Preparation requirements.

.e Specific pre-treatments noted herein or specified in the MPI Repainting Manual.

.f Sealing / priming surfaces for repainting in accordance with MPI Repainting Manual requirements.

.3 Refer to drawings and schedules for type, location and extent of exterior repainting required, and include all touch-ups necessary to complete work shown, scheduled or specified.

.4 This Section along with the drawings forms part of the Contract documents and is to be read, interpreted and

coordinated with all other parts. 1.2 Related Sections:

.1 Unless otherwise noted, the following work or conditions are not included under this Section of work: Section 09900 - Painting (of new surfaces)

Section 01 15 43 – Temporary Scaffolding & Platforms Section 02 80 00 – Facility Remediation

1.3 Quality Assurance:

.1 This Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years proven satisfactory experience and shall show proof before commencement of work that he will maintain a qualified crew of painters throughout the duration of the work. When requested, Contractor shall provide a list of the last three comparable exterior repainting jobs including, name, location, specifying authority / project manager, start / completion dates and value of the work.

.2 Only qualified journeypersons, as defined by local jurisdiction, shall be engaged in exterior repainting work.

Apprentices may be employed provided they work under the direct supervision of a qualified journeyperson in accordance with trade regulations.

.3 All materials, preparation and workmanship shall conform to the standards contained in the latest edition of the

Master Painters Institute (MPI) Maintenance and Repainting Manual (herein referred to as the MPI Repainting Manual) as issued by the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association having jurisdiction.

.4 All exterior repainting work shall be inspected by a Paint Inspection Agency (inspector) acceptable to the

specifying authority and the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association. The painting contractor shall notify the Paint Inspection Agency a minimum of one week prior to commencement of work and provide a copy of the project painting specification, plans and elevation drawings (including pertinent details) as well as a Finish Schedule.

.5 All surfaces requiring repainting shall be inspected by the Painting Subcontractor who shall notify the

Consultant, Paint Inspection Agency, and General Contractor in writing of any defects or problems, prior to commencing repainting or after preparation work.



1.4 Regulatory Requirements:

.1 Conform to work place safety regulations for storage, mixing, application and disposal of all paint related materials to requirements of those authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Conform to safety precautions in accordance with the latest requirements to Industrial Health and Safety

Regulations, latest edition, of authorities having jurisdiction.

.3 Notify the Paint Inspection Agency on award of contract and make application for assignment of an Inspector using appropriate forms supplied by the Agency as well as provide a copy of the project repainting specification, drawings, color schedule and list of proposed materials for review purposes prior to commencement of work.

.4 Fully cooperate at all times with the requirements of the Paint Inspection Agency in the performance of their

duties, including providing access and assistance as required to complete inspection work.

.5 To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary / storm drain systems or into the ground the following procedures shall be strictly adhered to:

.a Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be filtered out. In no case shall

equipment be cleaned using free draining water. .b Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated containers and ensure

proper disposal. .c Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant recovery, proper

disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering. .d Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous waste

regulations. .e Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available). .f Close and seal tightly partly used cans of materials including sealant and adhesive containers and

store protected in well ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature.

.6 Lead based paint is known to exist on the interior and exterior surfaces, (refer to the attached hazardous materials survey), the exterior siding, etc. is to have the existing paint striped off, use FR polyethylene drop sheets over exterior areas, flooring such as carpeting that absorbs dust and over all flooring or exterior areas in work areas where dust and contamination cannot otherwise be safely contained. On the interior wear proper protection when drilling or doing other work which may create dust, clean up & dispose of hazardous materials as per regulatory & manufacturer’s instructions, typical. When drilling/work is finished clean up the entire building and make good.

.7 Where paint recycling is available, collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection

facility. 1.5 Mock-Ups:

.1 Prepare and repaint a designated exterior surface area to requirements specified herein, with specified paint or coating showing selected colors, gloss / sheen, texture and workmanship to MPI Repainting Manual standards for review and approval. When approved, exterior surface area and/or item shall become acceptable standard of finish quality and workmanship for similar on-site repainting work.

1.6 Submittals:

.1 All submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of the front end - Submittals.

.2 Submit list of all painting materials to the Consultant and the Paint Inspection Agency for review prior to ordering materials.

.3 Submit two sets of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) prior to commencement of work for review and for

posting at job site as required.

.4 Submit certification reports for ecologo paint products used.

.5 Submit invoice list of all paint materials ordered for project work to Paint Inspection Agency indicating manufacturer, types and quantities for verification and compliance with specification and design requirements if



requested.

.6 Submit work schedule for various stages of work for the Consultant’s review and Owner’s approval if requested.

.7 At project completion provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and color coding for all

colors used for Owner's later use in maintenance.

.8 At project completion provide properly packaged maintenance materials as noted herein and obtain a signed receipt.

1.7 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling:

.1 Deliver all painting materials in sealed, original labeled containers bearing manufacturer's name, brand name, type of paint or coating and color designation, standard compliance, materials content as well as mixing and/or reducing and application requirements.

.2 Store all paint materials in original labeled containers in a secure (lockable), dry, heated and well ventilated

single designated area meeting the minimum requirements of both paint manufacturer and authorities having jurisdiction and at a minimum ambient temperature of 45° F (7° C). Only material used on this project is to be stored on site.

.3 Where toxic and/or volatile / explosive / flammable materials are being used, provide adequate fireproof storage

lockers and take all necessary precautions and post adequate warnings (e.g. no smoking) as required.

.4 Take all necessary precautionary and safety measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion and to protect the environment from hazard spills. Materials that constitute a fire hazard (paints, solvents, drop clothes, etc.) shall be stored in suitable closed and rated containers and removed from the site on a daily basis.

.5 Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in regard to the use, handling, storage and disposal

of hazardous materials. 1.8 Project / Site Requirements:

.1 UNLESS specifically pre-approved by the specifying body, Paint Inspection Agency and the applied product manufacturer, perform no exterior repainting work when the ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 50° F (10° C).

.2 Perform no exterior repainting work unless environmental conditions are within MPI and paint manufacturer’s

requirements or until adequate weather protection is provided. Where required, suitable weatherproof covering and sufficient heating facilities shall be in place to maintain minimum ambient air and substrate temperatures for 24 hours before, during and after paint application.

.3 Perform no exterior repainting work when the relative humidity is above 85% or when the dew point is less than

5° F (3° C) variance between the air / surface temperature.

.4 Perform no exterior repainting work when the maximum moisture content of the substrate exceeds:

.a 12 % for concrete and masonry (clay and concrete brick / block).

.b 15% for wood.

.5 Conduct all moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter.

.6 Test concrete and masonry surfaces for alkalinity as required.

.7 Apply paint only to dry, clean, and adequately prepared surfaces in areas where dust is no longer generated by construction activities such that airborne particles will not affect the quality of finished surfaces.



1.9 Scheduling:

.1 Schedule repainting operations to prevent disruption of and by other trades when applicable.

.2 Schedule repainting operations to prevent disruption of Owner’s operations or building occupants. Obtain written authorization from Consultant / Owner for changes in work schedule.

1.10 Guarantee:

.1 Furnish a two (2) year Painting Association Guarantee in accordance with MPI Repainting Manual requirements.

.2 All exterior repainting work shall be in accordance with MPI Repainting Manual requirements. 1.11 Maintenance Materials:

.1 At project completion provide a minimum of 4 liters of each type and color of paint from same production run (batch mix) used in unopened cans, properly labeled and identified for Owner's later use in maintenance. Store where directed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials:

.1 All materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, thinners, solvents, etc.) shall be products listed in the latest edition of the MPI Approved Product List and shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.

.2 Other paint materials such as linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, etc. shall be the highest quality product of an

approved manufacturer listed in the MPI Approved Product List and shall be compatible with other coating materials as required.

.3 All materials and paints shall be lead and mercury free.

.4 Where required, paint products shall meet MPI Environmentally Friendly" [E1] [E2] [E3] ratings based on VOC

(EPA Method 24) content levels.

.5 All paint materials shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure free of blemishes, sags, air entrapment, etc. Refer to 3.5, Field Quality Control / Standard of Acceptance requirements.

.6 Lead based paint removal – Pirhana NexStrip Pro 5701, maximum strength dual action paint stripper,

manufactured by Fiberlock Technologies, www.fiberlock.com • 800.342.3755, as distributed by Safety Express Mississauga, 4190 Sladeview Crescent, Muississauga, Ont.,, L5L OA1, tel 1 800 465 2898

Or approved equivalent 2.2 Equipment:

.1 Painting Equipment: to best trade standards for type of product and application.

.2 Spray-Painting Equipment: of ample capacity, suited to the type and consistency of paint or coating being applied and kept clean and in good working order at all times.

2.3 Mixing and Tinting:

.1 Unless otherwise specified or pre-approved, all paints shall be ready-mixed and pre-tinted. Re-mix all paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and color and gloss uniformity.



.2 Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions.

.3 Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations.

.4 If required, thin paint for spraying in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. If directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer and provide copy of instructions to Consultant.

2.4 Finish and Colors:

.1 Unless otherwise specified herein, all exterior repainting work shall be done in accordance with MPI Premium Grade requirements.

.2 Colors shall be as selected by the Consultant from a manufacturer's full range of colors.

Generally and unless otherwise specified herein or noted on Finish Schedules the quantity of colors and finishes shall be based on the following criteria:

.3 Color selection will be based on five (5) base colors and two (2) accent colors [with a maximum of two (2) deep or bright color. No more than six (6) colors will be selected for exterior painting work on this project. Note that this does not include pre-finished items unless specifically scheduled.

.4 Exterior doors shall be repainted a different color than door frames and trim with walls a different color than

doors, frames and trim shall be repainted a different color than walls. Unless otherwise noted all doors, frames and trim shall be repainted using a G5 (semi-gloss) finish.

.5 Exterior window frames (unless pre-finished) including trim and sills shall be repainted a different color than

walls. Unless otherwise noted all window frames, trim and sills shall be repainted using a G5 (semi-gloss) finish.

2.5 Gloss / Sheen:

.1 Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the following MPI gloss / sheen standard values:

Gloss Level

Description

Units

@ 60 degrees

Units

@ 85 degrees G1 Matte or Flat finish 0 to 5 10 maximum G2

Velvet finish

10 maximum

10 to 35

G3

Eggshell finish

10 to 25

10 to 35 G4

Satin finish

20 to 35

35 minimum

G5

Semi-Gloss finish

35 to 70

G6

Gloss finish

70 to 85

G7

High-Gloss finish

> 85

.2 Gloss level ratings of all painted surfaces shall be as specified herein and as noted on Finish Schedule.

Unless otherwise approved by the painting inspection agency having jurisdiction, the use of deep colors or high contrast accent

colors will require a minimum of three or more finish coats over primer to achieve satisfactory hiding results. .

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Condition of Surfaces:



.1 Prior to commencement of repainting work, thoroughly examine (and test as required) all exterior conditions and surfaces scheduled to be repainted and report in writing to the [Consultant] [Owner] [and General Contractor where applicable] any conditions or surfaces that will adversely affect work of this section.

.2 The degree of surface deterioration (DSD) shall be assessed using the assessment criteria indicated in the MPI

Maintenance Repainting Manual. In general the MPI DSD ratings and descriptions are as follows:

Condition

Description DSD-0 Sound Surface (may include visual (aesthetic) defects that do not affect

film’s protective properties). DSD-1

Slightly Deteriorated Surface (may show fading; gloss reduction, slight surface contamination, minor pin holes scratches, etc.) / Minor cosmetic defects (runs, sags, etc.).

DSD-2

Moderately Deteriorated Surface (small areas of peeling, flaking, slight cracking, staining, etc.).

DSD-3

Severely Deteriorated Surface (heavy peeling, flaking, cracking, checking, scratches, scuffs, abrasion, small holes and gouges).

DSD-4

Substrate Damage (repair or replacement of surface required by others).

.3 Other than the repair of DSD-1 to DSD-3 defects included under this scope of work, structural and DSD-4 substrate defects discovered prior to and after surface preparation or after first coat of paint shall be made good and sanded by others ready for painting, unless otherwise agreed to by the Owner and painter to be included in this Work.

.4 No repainting work shall commence until all such DSD-4 adverse conditions and defects have been corrected

and surfaces and conditions are acceptable to the Painting Subcontractor. The Painting Subcontractor shall not be responsible for the condition of the substrate or for correcting defects and deficiencies in the substrate, which may adversely affect the painting work except for minimal work normally performed by the Painting Subcontractor and as, indicated herein. It shall always, however, be the responsibility of the Painting Subcontractor to see that surfaces are properly prepared before any paint or coating is applied. It shall also be the Painting Subcontractor’s responsibility to paint the surface as specified providing that the owner accepts responsibility for uncorrected DSD-4 substrate conditions.

3.2 Preparation of Surfaces:

.1 Prepare all exterior surfaces for repainting in accordance with MPI Repainting Manual requirements. Refer to the MPI Repainting Manual in regard to specific requirements for the following:

.a environmental conditions. .b pH testing. .c acid etching. .d rust stain removal. .e mildew removal. .f asphalt surfaces. .g vertical and horizontal concrete surfaces. .h clay and concrete masonry units. .i structural steel and miscellaneous metals. .j steel exposed to high heat. .k galvanized and zinc coated metal. .l aluminum and copper surfaces. .m glue laminated beams and columns. .n dimension and dressed lumber. .o wood doors. .p wood paneling and casework. .q wood decks, floors, stairs and steps. .r wood shingles and shakes. .s stucco. .t canvas and cotton coverings. .u bituminous coated surfaces.



.2 Where required, pressure wash exterior surfaces prior to repainting in accordance with MPI standards for type of surfaces and recommended pressures to ensure complete removal of all loose paint, stains, dirt, and other foreign matter. This work shall be carried out only by qualified tradesman experienced in pressure water cleaning. The use of water hose cleaning will not be considered satisfactory, unless specifically specified. Allow sufficient drying time and test all surfaces using an electronic moisture meter before commencing work.

.3 Sand, clean, dry, etch, neutralize and/or test all surfaces under adequate illumination, ventilation and

temperature requirements.

.4 Remove and securely store all miscellaneous hardware and surface fittings / fastenings (e.g. electrical lights, mechanical louvers, door and window hardware (e.g. hinges, knobs, locks, trim, frame stops) and, removable hazard / instruction labels. from wall and soffit surfaces, doors and frames, prior to repainting and replace upon completion. Carefully clean and replace all such items upon completion of repainting work in each area. Do not use solvent or reactive cleaning agents on items that will mar or remove finishes (e.g. lacquer finishes). Doors shall be removed before repainting to paint bottom and top edges and then re-hung.

.5 Protect all exterior surfaces and areas, including landscaping, walks, drives, all adjacent building surfaces

(including glass, aluminum surfaces, etc.) and equipment and any labels and signage from repainting operations and damage by drop cloths, shields, masking, templates, or other suitable protective means and make good any damage caused by failure to provide such protection.

3.3 Application:

.1 Do not commence repainting unless substrates and all environmental conditions are acceptable for the application of products.

.2 Apply primer, paint or stain in accordance with MPI Painting Manual Premium Grade finish requirements. .3 Apply striper, primer, paint or stain in a workmanlike manner using skilled and trade qualified applicators as

noted under Quality Assurance.

.4 Apply primer, paint or stain within an appropriate time frame after cleaning and preparation to prevent weathering or water staining of substrate or before environmental conditions encourage flash-rusting, rusting, contamination or when the manufacturer's paint specifications require earlier applications.

.5 Primer, paint or stain coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied at proper

consistency and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.6 Tint each coat of paint progressively lighter to enable confirmation of number of coats.

.7 Unless otherwise approved by the painting inspection agency, apply a minimum of four coats of paint where deep or bright colors are used to achieve satisfactory results.

.8 Sand and dust between each coat to provide an anchor for next coat and to remove defects (runs, sags, etc.) visible from a distance up to 1000 mm (39").

.9 Do not apply finishes on exterior surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Unless manufacturer's directions state

otherwise, each coat shall be sufficiently dry and hard before a following coat is applied. .10 To avoid air entrapment in applied coats, apply materials in strict accordance with manufacturer’s spread rates

and application requirements. 3.4 Exterior Finish / Coating Systems: EXTERIOR Wall Repair: Location: Walls (wood siding, windows, doors, frames, fascia, soffit, trim, moldings, etc.)



.1 Stripper: Lead based paint removal – Pirhana NexStrip Pro 5701, maximum strength dual action paint stripper, manufactured by Fiberlock Technologies, www.fiberlock.com • 800.342.3755, as distributed by Safety Express Mississauga, 4190 Sladeview Crescent, Muississauga, Ont.,, L5L OA1, tel 1 800 465 2898 Or approved equivalent .2 PRIMER: Once scraped down and sanded to sound surface Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore & Co. Insl-x Product: Aqua Lock Product Code: AQ-0400 Volume Solids: 40.5% Features: Excellent primer/sealer, provides consistent final finish for top coating Contact: Gloria Rinaldi | 416 428 6461 | [email protected] Or approved equivalent .3 Location: Walls (WOOD SIDING) TOP COAT: Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore & Co. Product: Aura Exterior Product Code: K634 Finish: Low Lustre Volume Solids: 44% Features: Withstands harshest weather conditions, offers superior colour and fade resistance Contact: Gloria Rinaldi | 416 428 6461 | [email protected] Or approved equivalent 3.5 INTERIOR Wall Repair : .1 Location: Plaster Walls PRIMER: Once properly prepared to accept painting Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore & Co. Product: Fresh Start Product Code: K046 Volume Solids: 35.8% Features: Maximum hide and uniform finish, exceptional adhesion for smooth and durable topcoat Contact: Gloria Rinaldi | 416 428 6461 | [email protected] Or approved equivalent .2 Location: Plaster Walls TOPCOAT: Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore & Co. Product: Regal Select Product Code: K549 Finish: to match existing finish & colours Volume Solids: 40.9% Features: Excellent durability and washability Or approved equivalent



Repaint exterior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Repainting Manual requirements:

.1 Concrete Vertical Surfaces: (including horizontal soffits)

REX 3.1A Latex [insert gloss level] finish. REX 3.1B Latex [insert gloss level] [insert texture type] aggregate finish. REX 3.1C Waterborne light industrial [insert gloss level] coating. REX 3.1D Epoxy finish. REX 3.1F Elastomeric coating. REX 3.1G Water repellent non-paintable finish [for use on surfaces previously coated with similar water

repellent]. REX 3.1H Water repellent paintable finish. REX 3.1J High-build latex [insert gloss level] finish. REX 3.1K Concrete stain finish. REX 3.1L Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkali resistant primer). REX 3.1M Pigmented polyurethane finish.

.3 Concrete Horizontal Surfaces: (decks, stairs, parking and court areas, driveways, etc.)

REX 3.2A Latex floor paint [gloss] [low gloss] finish. REX 3.2B Latex deck coating. REX 3.2C Epoxy non-slip deck coating. REX 3.2D Alkyd floor enamel [insert gloss level] finish. REX 3.2E Latex zone / traffic marking finish. [for parking or game court lines, etc.] REX 3.2F Alkyd zone / traffic marking finish. [for parking or game court lines, etc.] REX 3.2G Clear floor sealer. REX 3.2H Clear waterborne floor sealer. REX 3.2J Concrete stain finish.

.4 Clay Masonry Units: (pressed and extruded brick)

REX 4.1A Latex [insert gloss level] finish. REX 4.1B Latex [insert gloss level] [insert texture type] aggregate finish. REX 4.1C Waterborne light industrial [insert gloss level] coating. REX 4.1D Epoxy finish. [for smooth brick] REX 4.1F Water repellent non-paintable finish. [for use on surfaces previously coated with similar water

repellent] REX 4.1G Water repellent paintable finish. REX 4.1H High-build latex finish. REX 4.1J Pigmented polyurethane finish (over epoxy).

.5 Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications:

REX 5.1A Quick dry enamel [insert gloss level] finish. REX 5.1B Waterborne light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over epoxy primer). REX 5.1C Waterborne light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over alkyd metal primer). REX 5.1D Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish. REX 5.1F High build epoxy finish. REX 5.1G Pigmented polyurethane finish (over epoxy zinc rich primer and high build epoxy). REX 5.1H Pigmented polyurethane finish (over high build epoxy). REX 5.1J Aluminum paint finish. REX 5.1K Waterborne light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over waterborne primer). REX 5.1L Waterborne light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over epoxy primer). REX 5.1M Pigmented polyurethane [insert gloss level] finish (over epoxy zinc rich primer and epoxy). REX 5.1N Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over an alkyd primer).

.6 Steel - High Heat: (heat exchangers, breeching, pipes, flues, stacks, etc., with temperature range as noted)

REX 5.2A Heat resistant enamel finish, maximum 400° F (205° C). REX 5.2B Heat resistant aluminum enamel finish, maximum 800° F (427° C).



REX 5.2C Inorganic zinc rich coating, maximum 750° F (400° C). REX 5.2D High heat resistant coating, maximum 1100° F (593° C).

.7 Galvanized Metal: (not chromate passivated)

For high contact / high traffic areas (doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, etc.) For low contact / low traffic areas (overhead decking, ducts, gutters, flashing, etc.)

REX 5.3A Latex [insert gloss level] finish. REX 5.3B Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish. REX 5.3C Epoxy finish. [for use in high contact / high traffic areas] REX 5.3D Pigmented polyurethane finish. [for use in high contact / high traffic areas] REX 5.3E Bituminous finish [for use in low contact areas, e.g. unexposed galvanized metal next to

concrete, masonry, etc.] REX 5.3F Aluminum paint finish. [for use in low contact / low traffic areas only] REX 5.3G Waterborne light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over an epoxy primer). REX 5.3H Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over waterborne primer). [do not use flat finish on doors] REX 5.3J Waterborne light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over waterborne primer). REX 5.3K Polyurethane coating (over waterborne primer). REX 5.3L Waterborne light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.

.8 Aluminum: (unanodized) sash, sills and frames, flashing, posts and railings, downpipes, etc.)

REX 5.4A Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish. REX 5.4B Pigmented polyurethane finish. REX 5.4C Aluminum paint finish. REX 5.4D Bituminous finish [for unexposed alum. next to concrete, masonry, etc.] REX 5.4E Epoxy finish. REX 5.4F Waterborne light industrial [insert gloss level] coating. REX 5.4G Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over quick dry primer).

.10 Copper: (excluding roofs)

REX 5.5A Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish. REX 5.5B Pigmented polyurethane finish. REX 5.5C Aluminum paint finish. REX 5.5D Bituminous finish. [for unexposed copper next to concrete, masonry, etc.] REX 5.5E Epoxy finish. REX 5.5F Waterborne light industrial [insert gloss level] coating. REX 5.5G Latex [insert gloss level] finish. REX 5.5 H Quick dry enamel [insert gloss level] finish.

.11 Stainless Steel: (unpolished)

REX 5.6A Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish. REX 5.6B Pigmented polyurethane finish. REX 5.6C Aluminum paint finish. REX 5.6D Epoxy finish. REX 5.6F Latex finish. REX 5.6G Waterborne light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.

.12 Dimension Lumber: (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, siding, fencing, etc.)

REX 6.2A Latex [insert gloss level] finish. REX 6.2B Waterborne solid color stain finish. REX 6.2C Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish. REX 6.2D Solid color stain finish. REX 6.2E Semi-transparent stain finish. REX 6.2F Pigmented fire retardant coating (ULC rated). REX 6.2G Clear two component polyurethane finish. REX 6.2H Pigmented polyurethane finish. REX 6.2J Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish. REX 6.2K Latex [insert gloss level] transition system finish (over alkyd primer).



REX 6.2 L Waterborne light industrial coating.

.13 Dressed Lumber: (doors, door and window frames, casings, battens, smooth facias, etc.)

REX 6.3A Latex [insert gloss level] finish. [do not use flat finish on doors / door frames] REX 6.3B Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish. [do not use flat finish on doors / door frames] REX 6.3C Solid color stain finish. [do use on high contact areas or on doors / door frames] REX 6.3D Semi-transparent stain finish. [do not use on doors / door frames] REX 6.3E Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish (over stain). REX 6.3F Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish. REX 6.3G Clear two component polyurethane finish. REX 6.3H Pigmented polyurethane finish. REX 6.3J Waterborne light industrial coating. REX6.3K Waterborne solid color stain finish. [do not use on doors / door frames] REX 6.3L Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer). [do not use flat finish on doors / frames]

.15 Wood Paneling: (plywood siding, fascias, soffits, etc.)

REX 6.4A Latex [insert gloss level] finish. REX 6.4B Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish. REX 6.4C Solid color stain finish. REX 6.4D Semi-transparent stain finish. REX 6.4E Pigmented fire retardant coating (ULC rated). REX 6.4F Clear fire retardant penetrating wood preservative coating (ULC rated). REX 6.4G Waterborne solid color stain finish. REX 6.4H Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish. REX 6.4J Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish (over stain). REX 6.4K Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer).

.16 Wood Decks and Stairs / Steps: (using spaced lumber)

REX 6.5A Latex porch and floor [gloss] [low gloss] finish [SRA Optional] (over alkyd primer). REX 6.5B Alkyd floor enamel [gloss] [low gloss] finish [SRA Optional]. REX 6.5C Deck stain (for previously stained decks). REX 6.5D Non-Slip epoxy deck coating (for plywood decks). REX 6.5E Latex deck coating (for plywood decks). REX 6.5F Latex porch and floor [gloss] [low gloss] finish [SRA Optional] (over latex primer).

.17 Stucco: (walls and soffits)

REX 9.1A Latex [insert gloss level] finish REX 9.1B Waterborne light industrial [insert gloss level] coating. REX 9.1C Elastomeric coating. REX 9.1D Epoxy finish. REX 9.1E Water repellent paintable finish. REX 9.1F High-build latex finish. REX 9.1H Water repellent non-paintable finish. REX 9.1J Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkali resistant primer).

.18 Bituminous Coated Surfaces: (cast iron pipe, concrete, etc.)

REX 10.2A Latex [insert gloss level] finish. REX 10.2B Latex [insert gloss level] [insert texture type] aggregate finish. REX 10.2C Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish. REX 10.2D Aluminum paint finish.

3.5 Field Quality Control / Standard of Acceptance:

.1 All surfaces, preparation and paint applications shall be inspected.



.2 Repainted exterior surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any of the following defects

are apparent to the Painting Inspection Agency inspector:

.a brush / roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or shadowing by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and foreign materials in paint coatings.

.b evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets, corners and re-entrant angles.

.c damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory cause.

.d damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from the weather.

.e damage and/or contamination of paint due to wind blown contaminants (dust, sand blast materials, salt spray, etc.).

.3 Repainted exterior surfaces shall be considered unacceptable if any of the following are evident under

natural lighting conditions:

.a visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at 90 degrees to the surface from a distance of 1000 mm (39”).

.b visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at 45 degrees to the surface from a distance of 1000 mm (39”).

.c visible defects are evident on soffit and other overhead surfaces when viewed at 45 degrees to the surface

.d when the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of sheen across full surface area.

.4 Repainted surfaces rejected by the inspector shall be made good at the expense of the Contractor. Small affected areas may be touched up; large affected areas or areas without sufficient dry film thickness of paint shall be repainted. Runs, sags of damaged paint shall be removed by scraper or by sanding prior to application of paint.

3.6 Protection:

.1 Protect all newly repainted exterior surfaces from rain and snow, condensation, contamination, dust, salt spray and freezing temperatures until paint coatings are completely dry. Curing periods shall exceed the manufacturer's recommended minimum time requirements.

.2 Erect barriers or screens and post signs to warn, limit or direct traffic away or around work area as required.

3.7 Clean-up:

.1 Remove all paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed as work progresses using means and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.

.2 Keep work area free from an unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.

.3 Remove combustible rubbish materials and empty paint cans each day and safely dispose of same in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

.4 Clean equipment and dispose of wash water / solvents as well as all other cleaning and protective materials (e.g. rags, drop cloths, masking papers, etc.), paints, thinners, paint removers/strippers in accordance with the safety requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

---------End of Section-------

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 09 96 23 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATINGS Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division 01, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if

repeated here. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2.1 01 45 00 Quality Control 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 Samples: Before commencing work, submit samples in accordance with

Section 01300 of surfacing on applicable substrate materials to Consultant for review. After acceptance of sample, apply sample panel of not less than 2.25 m² to a substrate at the site, where directed by Consultant, to establish the standard of colour, texture, and finish for coatings on this project.

1.3.2 Affidavits: If requested by Consultant, submit affidavits or reports prepared

by an independent testing laboratory, verifying that the specified material conforms to the specifications. Test report shall TBD.

1.4 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS 1.4.1 Deliver and store materials in original containers with manufacturer's labels

and seals intact, in a warm dry lockable area, until surfaces are ready for application. Store "red label" (fire hazard) materials in locations approved by local Fire authorities.

1.4.2 Keep thinner-soaked rags and other similar combustible materials in closed

metal containers and remove from job site at end of each work shift. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS 1.5.1 Environmental Temperatures: Apply coating within temperature and

humidity conditions recommended by coating manufacturer. 1.5.2 Protection

.1 Post legible signs at all points of entry to areas in which work of this Section is being applied. These signs shall warn against smoking and use of open flame, such as torches, matches, and lighters.

.2 Erect suitable barriers to prevent traffic and other trades from

working in areas during application coatings. .3 Mask all surrounding adjacent surfaces to provide neat, clean, true

juncture lines with all adjacent surfaces.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 09 96 23 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATINGS Page 2 of 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Siloxa-Tek 8500 by Krete-Tek Industries as distributed by Day & Campbell Ltd., Tel. 1 800 263 6787

To be used for exposed interior and exterior exposed surfaces such as un painted surfaces, masonry and fabricated metal screens, frames, brackets, etc. unless otherwise noted.

2.1.2 ‘PSS 20’ both for painted surfaces, as distributed by Day & Campbell Ltd.

1074 Upper Wellington Street Hamilton ON. (1-905-385-5315) (Inside and Outside)

2.1.3 ‘Armaglaze 9000’ as distributed by Aquarius Coating Inc., 190 Marycroft

Ave., Unit #5 Woodbridge Ont. L4L 5Y1 tel: 905 264 1168 or approved equivalent

To be used for exposed interior and exterior exposed wood surfaces such as wood benches, plywood ceilings and the ventilating hood interiors, etc., unless otherwise noted.

2.1.4 Or Consultant approved equivalent

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Application as per manufacturer’s directions.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 TEMPORARY SCAFFOLDING & PLATFORMS Page 1 of 7 1PART 1: GENERAL .1 SAFETY REGULATIONS .2 TEMPORARY STAIRS, HOISTS, SWINGSTAGES, ETC. .3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS .4 RESPONSIBILITIES PART 2: MATERIALS PART 3: EXECUTION.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1: GENERAL 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS .1 The Contractor shall comply with the latest edition and amending regulations of the following documents, and in the case of conflicts between documents, the more stringent rule shall apply: .1 The Occupational Health and Safety Act - Revised Statutes of Ontario, Revised Regulation 851/90. .2 Occupational Health and Safety Act Revise Statutes of Ontario 2009. .3 Hazardous Projects Act and the Canada Labour Code, most recent edition. .4 Occupational Health and Safety Regulation for Construction Projects, Revised Statutes of Ontario, Regulation 213/91. .5 Workplace Safety and Insurance Act, 1997. .6 Ontario Building Code Act, Chapter 51 and Ontario Regulation 403/06 .7 Ontario Regulation 388/06 – Ontario Fire Code. .8 Regulation 347 – Environmental Protection Act. .9 Workplace Safety Information Board Regulation 1101 – First Aid Requirement. .10 National Building Code 2010, Part 8: Safety Measures at Construction and Demolition Sites. .11 Ensure that no part of the work is subjected to a load which will endanger its safety or will cause permanent deformation. 2 TEMPORARY STAIRS, HOISTS, SWINGSTAGES, ETC.

1. GENERAL 2. This subsection sets out the requirements respecting the design, supply, installation, 3. inspection and maintenance by the Contractor of all temporary devices such as

platforms, walkways, 4. scaffolding, staircases, ladders, access devices, barges or other floating plant,

enclosures, 5. formwork, bracing, supports and other temporary works necessary for the safe and

expeditious 6. performance of the work and to allow the Owner and its representatives to monitor

the work.

7. The access devices provided by the Contractor shall include devices such as cranes and work platforms, or elevating work platforms, staircases, walkways or other access devices in order to provide access to the work areas at all times for the workers, the Engineer, inspectors and any other representative of the Engineer.

8. The Contractor’s employees shall not walk directly on the chords of the bridge unless

walkways or other access devices are added.


Project: 017 010 TEMPORARY SCAFFOLDING & PLATFORMS Page 2 of 7

9. The Contractor’s employees shall not walk in open traffic lanes. The Contractor shall provide safe access to the various platforms and enclosures.

REFERENCE STANDARDS

1. With due regard for the specific nature of the work site, the Contractor shall design, erect, maintain and use all the temporary devices in strict compliance with federal, provincial or other applicable standards, codes, regulations and legislation, and to the complete satisfaction of the competent bodies, including the Commission de la santé et de la sécurité du travail (CSST) du Québec.

2. When the Engineer so requests, the Contractor shall demonstrate to him that all of the

legal and contractual requirements respecting temporary devices are being complied with.

EXECUTION OF THE WORK

TEMPORARY DEVICES

1. The Contractor shall design, supply, construct and maintain all the temporary devices

required to carry out the work safely and expeditiously.

2. The Contractor shall supply access devices that are sufficiently large and solid to safely accommodate the staff of the Contractor, the Owner and its representatives at all times, especially for the purpose of conducting a detailed inspection of the work site and the work.

3. When necessary, the Contractor shall erect temporary devices to allow pedestrians

and cyclists to use the sidewalks and cycling paths unhindered.

4. If the Contractor’s initial proposals for temporary devices, submitted as part of the bid and upon which the Contractor was authorized to proceed with the work, prove ineffective or do not comply with the safety requirements of the Owner, the Contractor shall modify them to the satisfaction of the Engineer so that they comply with these requirements, at no additional cost to the Owner.

5. The Contractor shall take steps to ensure that the temporary devices are inaccessible

to the public. The Contractor shall also ensure that the public does not have access to any cables suspended from the temporary devices.

6. Fourteen (14) days before the rigging takes place, the Contractor shall supply the 7. Engineer with a copy of the drawings, data sheets and design notes for the temporary

devices that were forwarded to the CSST. The documents provided shall clearly indicate how and in what order all of the temporary devices shall be installed and moved and how they shall be disassembled.

8. The design of the temporary devices, including the drawings, shall comply with the

requirements of the Commission de la santé et de la sécurité du travail (CSST) the Quebec Construction Code – Chapter 1, Building, the National Building Code of Canada 2005 and to the CSA Standards for the construction materials to be used and shall be submitted to the CSST and to the Engineer for review and comments.



Without limiting the scope of paragraph 6.15.3.1.6 at the latest, within fourteen (14) days of the written notification of Contract award, the Contractor shall submit the drawings and design notes for the temporary devices and the data sheets of all components such as the cables and trusses used to construct them to the Engineer for comment and review. The Contractor shall not start constructing the enclosures, scaffolding, walkways and other access devices until he has received the Engineer’s comments.

9. The Contractor’s schedule shall allow enough time for conducting all checks and

obtaining all authorizations that are required. The drawings shall indicate the dimensions and specifications respecting the components and, materials and the design loads that are used, permissible load combinations and information about splicing and fastening devices, including nails, staples and other joining devices.

10. The drawings and design notes for the temporary devices shall bear the seal and

signature of the engineer/designer responsible for their design, who shall be a member in good standing of the Ordre des ingénieurs du Québec and have at least eight (8) years of relevant experience.

11. Any on-site modifications of the temporary devices shall be approved by the

Contractor’s engineer/designer.

12. Throughout the entire course of the work, which includes, but is not limited to, the use and dismantling of the temporary devices, all temporary facility parts and components shall be attached in such a way as to prevent them from becoming displaced or falling.

13. Unless there is a written directive from the Contractor’s engineer/designer, the

total thickness of shims used for on-site adjustments during construction of enclosures, scaffolding, walkways and other access devices shall not exceed 150 mm.

14. Shims shall be attached at all times to prevent them from becoming displaced as a

result of vibrations or any other cause.

15. The temporary devices shall be constructed in accordance with the Contractor’s Drawings and as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall allow a minimum of fourteen (14) days for the Engineer to examine the Contractor’s Drawings for the platforms, scaffolding, and other access devices before starting the construction of the enclosures, scaffolding and walkways in accordance with article

16. Elements to be considered in planning, of these specifications.

17. When temporary devices are being installed for the first time and every time they are adjusted or moved, they shall be inspected by the Contractor’s engineer/designer, who shall issue an inspection report certifying that the devices comply with the approved drawings.

18. Copies of the Contractor’s Drawings, including the drawings for platforms, scaffolding,

and other access devices, and of the inspection certificates shall be kept at the site at all times during the execution of the work.



19. The Contractor shall install signs on its platforms indicating maximum permissible loads. To facilitate workers’ interpretation of maximum permissible loads, signs shall indicate the maximum number of persons, the maximum depth of abrasive or demolition debris and the maximum weight of construction material and equipment allowed on the platforms at all times. For the entire duration of the work, the Contractor shall ensure that equipment and debris are disposed of or removed so that the weight of residues, equipment and workers does not exceed the live load that was calculated and posted on the signs.

20. The suspension of temporary devices from bridge chords or other structures shall be 21. effected in a way that complies with the structural integrity of these chords or

structures. The drawings shall indicate the loads placed on the various chords or structures. The Contractor shall ensure that the chords or structures can bear all of the additional loads that are placed upon them. If this is not the case, the Contractor shall modify these works accordingly at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor’s engineer/designer shall submit the design notes for the temporary to the Engineer.

22. The temporary devices shall be designed and constructed in such a way as to

prevent all objects, residues or debris from falling and shall be equipped with enclosures, tarpaulins, fabric or screens to protect property and people during the work, according to requirements. When designing temporary devices the Contractor’s engineer/designer shall take the wind load into consideration and quantify it in the drawings.

23. Temporary devices that are subjected to winter conditions shall be cleared of snow

and ice by the Contractor. The Contractor shall take appropriate measures to avoid an accumulation of unforeseen loads.

24. Temporary devices erected above a street, a lane of traffic, a parking lot or a 25. building shall comply with free vertical clearance provisions of the standards of the

authorities responsible for these devices.

26. The Contractor’s electrical systems shall meet the requirements of article 5.16.8 Electricity and Temporary Lighting.

27. The choice of components of platforms, enclosures, walkways, scaffolding, formwork, 28. bracing, supports or other temporary works shall be such that fire hazards are

eliminated at source. In addition, these works shall be equipped with devices that make it possible to fight fires immediately and effectively.

29. The design of enclosures, scaffolding, walkways and other access devices shall be in

compliance with the Safety Code for the construction industry (R.Q. S-2.1, r.6.)

30. Minimal live loads to be used for the purposes of designing platforms, their 31. components and fastening devices are 2.4 kPa.

32. The Contractor shall assume all of the risks to which his enclosures, scaffolding,

walkways, access devices and equipment left on the site during and outside work periods are exposed. The Contractor shall, at no additional cost and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, take all necessary steps to ensure that enclosures, scaffolding and walkways are inaccessible to the public.



33. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a detailed procedure signed and sealed by the Contractor’s engineer/designer who designed the enclosures, scaffolding and walkways for lifting, moving and disassembling the enclosures, scaffolding and walkways. No lifting, moving or disassembly of enclosures, scaffolding or walkways shall be conducted until this procedure has been reviewed by the Engineer.

34. For every enclosure, scaffold, platform, walkway and other access device, the

Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a document signed by the Contractor’s engineer/designer certifying that the temporary devices were erected in compliance with the Contractor’s Drawings and that workers and users can use them safely. No work shall be commenced until the mandatory report referred to in 32 has been issued.

35. The Contractor shall give the Engineer twenty-four (24) hours notice whenever the

Contractor’s engineer/designer who designed the platforms, enclosures, scaffolding, walkways and other access devices is due to visit, as the Engineer shall accompany the Contractor’s engineer/designer each time the latter visits the site to verify and certify that the devices are in compliance with paragraph 32.

36. .Before work of any nature requiring the use of platforms begins, the Contractor shall

prepare and submit to the Engineer a diagram identifying provisions respecting the distribution of live loads on work platforms. This diagram shall include the location and a description of the equipment, materials and workers to be distributed on the platforms. The load distribution diagram shall bear the seal and signature of the Contractor’s engineer/designer who designed the platforms. The diagram shall be displayed at all times on the work platform and accessible to all.

37. Access to the staging shall be available at all times by a ladder or staircase which

can be accessed by the ground or by the water, whichever the case may be. The Contractor must insure himself that the ladders or staircases are only accessible to authorised personnel. The Contractor shall from the beginning of the work, put all into place to conceive, get the drawings reviewed and install the staging, work ladders or stairs as quickly as possible in order for the damage survey to be executed on the damaged elements concerned.

38. The Contractor shall leave in place the staging, scaffolding and other access for a

minimum period of twenty-four (24) hours after each work phase in order to permit the Engineer’s Representative to verify the quality of the work. This period can be increased if weather conditions do not permit this verification to be completed.

39. Failure by the Contractor to meet the requirements of paragraph 36 shall

result in the application of article 5.35.11 Damages for failure to comply with requirements related to temporary devices.

SPECIFIC MEASURES FOR ENCLOSURES

1. When required in Section 4 Special Technical Conditions or to ensure the protection of a. workers, the public or users, or as required under federal, provincial or other

regulations, standards, codes or acts, enclosures shall be designed and



constructed so as to provide protection on all sides of the work areas. Enclosures shall prevent dust and other materials used or produced during the preparation of surfaces, cleaning and painting from escaping for the entire duration of the work.

2. The enclosures shall be designed to resist wind pressure as specified in the National

Building Code – Canada 2005.

3. The walls of the enclosures along the full length of the traffic lanes (for motor vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists) shall be made of rigid materials (e.g., plywood) so as to resist wind loads as well as suction created by passing trucks. The rigid materials shall be fastened appropriately.

4. The materials collected or accumulated within the enclosures shall be contained so

as to prevent their escape. The collected materials shall be removed from the site in accordance with subsection 6.13, Environmental Protection.

5. The Contractor shall ensure that materials collected or accumulated are disposed of

in such a way that the weight of materials, equipment and workers on the scaffolding, walkways and other access devices does not exceed the live load specified in the drawings of the said scaffolding, walkways and other access devices.

6. Before moving or removing enclosures, scaffolding, and walkways, the Contractor

shall perform whatever cleanup, removal and collection of materials is necessary to prevent the said materials from escaping or remaining suspended in the air.

7. The Contractor shall provide a level of illumination inside the enclosures of at least

538 lux (50 foot-candles) during the cleaning, painting and work inspections by the Engineer, the painting inspectors or any other representative of the Engineer. By way of indication, this level of illumination is that which would normally be found in offices.

8. The Contractor’s system of enclosures shall not encroach on the bridge and access

ramp traffic lanes when the latter are open to traffic.

9. The Contractor’s enclosure system shall not obstruct aerial traffic signals and surveillance cameras.

10. The Contractor shall ensure that there is no water accumulation on the fabric making

up the enclosure roofing.

11. 1 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent objects of whatever nature from falling from the works. The Contractor shall provide and install on platform joints engineering fabric or any other means approved by the Engineer for containing dust, abrasives, paint and any other residues. The equipment and materials shall be rendered inaccessible to the public.

NIGHT WORK

1. The Contractor shall provide, install and maintain lighting, a surveillance system,

barriers and all other equipment needed for carrying out work at night. The temporary



devices shall include an illumination system that allows workers to work without any supplementary lighting.

TEMPORARY PLATES AND RAMPS

The Contractor shall install steel plates or some similar device to cover over temporary gaps in traffic lanes, cycle paths and sidewalks. These steel plates shall have chamfered edges with a slope of at least 1:10 if the plates are more than 8 mm thick and result in dislevelment of the traffic lanes, cycle paths and sidewalks. The design of the steel plates or any similar devices shall be such that they can resist the corresponding imposed load and ensure a dynamic loading factor of at least 0.50 in the traffic lanes. The steel plates shall be solidly fastened so as to prevent any lateral, longitudinal or vertical movement. The plates’ design and the way in which they are fastened shall make allowances for braking and uplift loads. The surfaces of all plates exposed to traffic (vehicles, cyclists and pedestrians) shall have a skid-resistant overlay. SIDEWALKS AND CYCLE PATHS

1. While work is in progress, the Contractor shall install temporary ramps when the level of the sidewalk or cycle path changes abruptly by over 19 mm. The slope of the temporary ramps shall be at least 1:10. Ramps shall be made of wood, concrete or asphalt concrete, according to requirements. Details of the type of temporary ramp to be installed shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and comment.

2. The Contractor shall use yellow reflective strips to mark or identify abrupt changes of

level on sidewalks and cycle paths. TRAFFIC LANES

1. While the work is in progress, the Contractor shall install temporary ramps when the

a. level of the traffic lanes changes abruptly by over 19 mm. Temporary ramps shall be made of asphalt concrete except where the drawings prescribe otherwise and subject to those applicable provisions of subsection 6.12 Health and Safety. The following table shows the minimum allowable slopes in accordance with posted speed limits and the extent of the change in level.

1. Speed Limit

2. Extent of the Change in Level

3. Minimal Slope of the Temporary

4. Less or Equal to 50

5. Between 19 mm and 63 mm

6. 1:40

7. Over 63 mm 8. 1:80 9. Over 50

km/h 10. Over 19 mm 11. 1:80

2. Details of the type of temporary ramp to be installed shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and comment. To ensure the comfort and safety of users, the



Owner reserves the right to ask the Contractor to install temporary ramps with slopes that are different from those specified in the preceding table.

3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS .1 The Contractor is required to conform with the latest edition of the Occupational Health and Safety Act, and Regulations for Construction Projects and Industrial Establishments and any other applicable Safety Regulations relating to the performance of this project. The Owner reserves the right to cancel this contract for the Contractor's failure to comply with these and any other applicable safety regulations. A copy of all applicable Regulations should be on the job site at all time. .2 No work will be permitted unless the Contractor has on hand a complete set of unexpired Materials Safety Data Sheets relating to the W.H.I.M.S. controlled products that are being used in the performance of this project. This information is expected to be produced upon request. .3 Comply with the requirements of the Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding the use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials, and regarding labeling and the provision of material safety data sheets. .4 In addition to the requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety Act, and the Regulations for Construction Projects, provide temporary safeguards and protection against: .1 Accident or injury to any workmen or other persons on the site, adjacent work and property, roads, and walks. .2 Damage to any part of the work and to any adjoining or adjacent structures, properties, pavements, walks, services, and other similar items by frost, weather, overloading, and any other cause resulting from the execution of the work. .5 Should there be an accident/incident, the Contractor is responsible to notify the appropriate authorities and submit all required reports and documentation. Provide a copy of all reports and correspondence regarding the incident to both the Owner and the Consultant. .6 Should there be a work refusal for Health and Safety concerns, the Contractor is required to notify the Consultant and the Owner of the reason for the refusal, the actions taken and the outcome. .7 Enforce the use of CSA approved hardhats and safety boots for all entering or working on the construction site. Refuse admission to those refusing to conform to this regulation. .8 Provide and maintain adequate lighting where workmen or public may be subject to hazards in the work area. 4 RESPONSIBILITIES .1 Without limiting the generality of the provisions above, the Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that: .1 the necessary steps are taken to protect the health and ensure the safety and physical well-being of all its employees, agents, sub-contractors and subcontractors’ employees working at the site; .2 any and all licenses and certificates required in connection with the work being performed at the site are obtained and maintained for the entire duration of this agreement;


Project: 017 010 TEMPORARY SCAFFOLDING & PLATFORMS Page 9 of 7 .3 any and all notices, forms or other types of documentation required by any federal, provincial and municipal authority or agency are prepared and submitted to the appropriate authority or agency; .4 any order or decision from any federal, provincial and municipal authority or agency with respect to the work being performed at the site is complied with immediately upon receipt thereof; .5 sufficient and qualified manpower is supplied; .6 adequate equipment, material and tools are supplied and maintained; .7 all its employees, agents, subcontractors and subcontractor’s employees working at the site follow the present procedures; .8 training, including but not limited to appropriate safety, WHMIS and first aid training, fall protection are provided to all its employees, agents, subcontractors and subcontractor’s employees working at the site; .9 competent supervision is provided for all its employees, agents, subcontractors and subcontractor’s employees working at the site; .10 work is carried out in the manner described and with the appropriate protective devices, measures and procedures established; .11 new employees, agents or subcontractors are provided with timely notice of the measures and procedures to follow for their protection while on the job site; .12 protection of the public is maximized and inconvenience caused by the work is minimized; .13 the current WHMIS inventory is on site and kept current by the person in charge of the site; .14 first aid kits are available at the site; .15 any employee injured receives the necessary medical attention required to ensure a speedy, safe return to gainful employment; .16 if an accident occurs, appropriate reports are prepared and submitted to the appropriate provincial authority; .17 accidents are thoroughly investigated; .18 the Consultant is notified of all safety inspections or any direction to comply, as soon as possible after any occurrence; .19 a copy of the provincial ministry of labour or inspector’s report is submitted to the Consultant’s attention for any follow-up as required. 2 Contractor's worker's responsibilities include: .1 knowing and following the Health and Safety Program; .2 using or wearing the equipment, protective devices or clothing that is required to be used or worn; .3 checking all equipment and tools prior to using them; .4 reporting to their supervisor any hazards, defects in equipment, devices and/or breaches of health and safety legislation; .5 avoiding "horseplay" that could result in an accident; .6 abiding by all applicable federal and provincial occupational health and safety acts and regulations; .7 abiding by all site rules and regulations imposed by an owner, manager, General Contractor or industrial establishment. 3 If the Contractor encounters toxic or hazardous substances or materials, the Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that no person suffers injury, sickness or death and that no property is damaged or destroyed as a result of exposure to or the presence of the


Project: 017 010 TEMPORARY SCAFFOLDING & PLATFORMS Page 10 of 7 substances or material and shall immediately report its findings to Consultant by telephone or fax and confirm same in writing. .4 The responsibilities herein are in addition to, and not in place of, the responsibilities set out in all applicable legislation, including but not limited to the applicable occupational health and safety and workers’ compensation legislation. The Contractor agrees to make itself and its employees, agents, subcontractors and subcontractor’s employees aware of their obligations pursuant to such legislation. PART 2: MATERIALS TRAINING Workers must be properly trained or instructed before they use equipment. Only competent workers may construct scaffolds. INSPECTION Inspect all equipment before using. Never use any equipment that is damaged or defective in any way. SITE EVALUATION When possible, always survey the job site to identify any potential hazard condition. Complete jobsite hazard evaluation and amend your standard fall protection plan with site-specific requirements. FOUNDATIONS Never construct a scaffold on unprepared foundations. Where necessary, provide adequate continuous wood sills and ensure that they are not less than 50mm x 250mm (2” x 10”) and cover two frame legs in length. Footings, sills or supports must be capable of supporting at least 2 times the maximum load to which they are subjected without settlement. Any part of a building or structure that is used to support the scaffold shall be capable of supporting the maximum intended load to be applied, and must be verified by a professional engineer. BASES Always use adjustable bases and ensure that these are centered and spiked to the wood sill. COMPONENTS Never mix scaffold frames and accessories that have been manufactured by different companies, unless all parts fit perfectly together and have been designed to the same capacity, so that the integrity of the scaffold is never compromised. FRAMES The spacing of frames is dependent upon the loading to be imposed on the scaffold. Always check loading requirements and, if necessary, seek approved engineered drawings. Ensure that each frame is located securely on the adjustable base and that it is level and plumb. Joints in frames must be made with internal coupling pins, which must be secured with locking pins or lock arms.


Project: 017 010 TEMPORARY SCAFFOLDING & PLATFORMS Page 11 of 7 CROSS BRACES Frames are connected by cross braces that have predetermined lengths to coincide with the frame spacing. Each cross brace should be connected to the frame and must be secured to the frame by a positive connection. BRACING – Plan Plan bracing (horizontal diagonal) is recommended and is often required. As a minimum, it should be installed at the base and on the same level as the scaffold ties. SCAFFOLD TIES Where the scaffold height exceeds three times the smallest base dimension (3:1 ratio), scaffolds must be tied at least every 4.57m (15’-0”) intervals vertically and 6.0m (20’-0”) horizontally. Where possible, push/pull ties should be used, ensuring that the tie tube is connected to both frame legs with right angle clamps. If it is not possible to tie the scaffold to a structure, a professional engineer must provide special design considerations. WORK PLATFORMS The work platform provides the worker with a safe environment from which to work. The work platform must consist of a fully planked/decked surface and shall have guardrails consisting of top rails, midrails and toeboards installed on all open sides. Toeboards shall be installed at the edge of all work platforms and should be a minimum 100mm (4”) high. GUARDRAILS, MIDRAILS Guardrails must be installed on all open sides of the scaffold where a person can fall a distance of 2.4m (8’-0”) or more, and shall be not less than 0.92m (3’-0”) nor more than 1.07m (3’-6”) above the platform, and should be positively connected to the frames or guardrail posts. Midrails shall be installed equal distant between the guardrail and the platform. PLANKS -WOOD Always use select structural wood plank, LVL (laminated veneer lumber) or equivalent TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES Weather Pro Extreme flame retardant sheeting and ties as manufactured by Layfield or equivalent. Install to manufacturer’s instructions. PART 3: EXECUTION 1. SCAFFOLDING 1. Provide and maintain scaffolding in rigid, secure and safe manner. 2. Erect scaffolding independent of walls. Remove promptly when no longer required. Refer to Health and Safety requirement of scaffolding. 2. GENERAL GUIDELINES Do not erect, dismantle or adapt a scaffold unless under the direct supervision ofa competent person. 1. In certain provinces a scaffold must be engineered when the height exceeds a stipulated dimension. Check your local codes for compliance and height restriction.


Project: 017 010 TEMPORARY SCAFFOLDING & PLATFORMS Page 12 of 7 2. Never work under the influence of alcohol, illegal or medically required drugs. 3. Never climb cross braces or diagonal bracing. Always use proper means of access to reach working platform – if using a ladder, maintain 3-point contact at all times while climbing. 4. Prior to use, always inspect the scaffold to ensure that it has not been altered and is in safe working condition. Always report any unsafe condition to your supervisor. 5. Always exercise caution when entering or leaving a working platform. 6. Never overload a scaffold. Be aware of the designed working load or consult the sup-plier/manufacturer. 7. Never use a ladder or makeshift devices to increase the height of the scaffold. 8. Do not jump onto planks or platform at any time. 9. Never use scaffold material for purposes or in ways for which it was not intended. 10. Follow all Occupational Health & Safety and provincial codes and ordinances pertaining to scaffolding. 11. Always wear fall protection equipment, (safety harness, lanyard, scaffold choker) and ensure that workers are trained in the use of this equipment. If a full guardrail system is not in place, fall arrest/protection system must be used. Check local codes for specific requirements. 12. Never extend adjustable bases beyond the manufactured limits. 13. Never use substitute materials such as wire instead of proper locking devices in frames. 14. Never take chances – if in doubt as to your safety or the use of the scaffold consult your supervisor on contact the scaffold supplier. 15. Do not use wood planks that have been painted or have knots or cracks. 16. If guardrails have to be temporarily removed for material hoisting, ensure that they are immediately replaced. 17. Never place or rest material on the guardrails. 18. Never undermine the base of a scaffold or the foundations near the base. 19. Scaffold erectors shall be physically capable of performing required tasks when erecting/dismantling scaffolding without risk to the health or safety of others. 20. It is dangerous to construct a scaffold close to power lines. Always consult the power company for specific guidelines and conform to all applicable codes. AS FIELD CONDITIONS VARY FROM PROJECT TO PROJECT AND ARE BEYOND THE CONTROL OF THE SIAC, SAFE AND PROPER USE OF SCAFFOLDING IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER. ROLLING SCAFFOLDS 1. It is dangerous to ride a rolling scaffold. Never ride a rolling scaffold. 2. Always consider the ground surface that the scaffold will be rolling on, and ensure that it is suitable. 3. Working platform height is restricted by the 3:1 height-to-base ratio; platform height cannot exceed three times the smallest base dimension. 4. Always remove material from the platform before moving the scaffold. 5. Casters with plain stems must be secured to the scaffold or adjustable bases by pins or other acceptable means. 6. Ensure that casters are the correct diameter and capable of withstanding the imposed load. 7. Casters must be the same size and from the same manufacturer. 8. Always lock the caster brake when the scaffold is stationary and in use.


Project: 017 010 TEMPORARY SCAFFOLDING & PLATFORMS Page 13 of 7 9. Ensure that the caster wheels rotate freely and that the brake mechanisms are in working order. 10. No more than 300mm (12”) of the adjustable base shall extend between the top of ter and the bottom of the collar/handle of the adjustable base. 11. Plan (horizontal diagonal) bracing must be installed at the base of the rolling scaffold and every 4.57m (15’-0”) vertically. 12. Do not use sidebrackets on rolling scaffolds without consideration for overturning. 13. All planks/decking must be secured and prevented from lateral movement and uplift. 14. When moving a rolling scaffold always have assistance to check for uneven surfaces and overhead obstructions. 15. The components of a rolling scaffold must be positively connected (locked) to prevent separation in both the vertical and horizontal positions. ADDITIONAL GUIDELINES FOR DISMANTLING 1) Inspect the entire scaffold to ensure that it has not been structurally altered in any way that would deem it to be unsafe. If necessary, make alterations to make it safe and check that all scaffold ties are in place. 2) Visually inspect all planks/decking prior to removal and ensure that they are not damaged and are safe to use. 3) Do not remove any scaffold component without due consideration for the effect on the total scaffold when that component is removed. 4) Never accumulate excess scaffold material on the level (lift) being dismantled as this can cause overloading of the scaffold. 5) Never remove scaffold ties until the scaffold directly above has been dismantled to the tie level. 6) If components are seized or jammed take extreme care when removing them, as the sudden release of a component may cause a worker to lose balance. 7) Lower dismantled material in a controlled manner. Never throw material off the scaffold. 8) Never leave loose material on the scaffold at the end of shift. Always clear the scaffold platform before leaving the site or ensure that they have been tied down to prevent movement. 9) When material has been lowered, always stockpile it in an orderly and safe manner. AS FIELD CONDITIONS VARY FROM PROJECT TO PROJECT AND ARE BEYOND THE CONTROL OF THE SIAC, SAFE AND PROPER USE OF SCAFFOLDING IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER. .1 Furnish and maintain all equipment such as stairs, ladders, ramps, scaffolds, hoists, runways, derricks, chutes, elevators, etc., as required for proper execution of work. .2 Construct and maintain scaffolding in rigid, secure, and safe manner. Erect scaffolding independent of walls. Remove promptly when no longer required. .3 Where such structures are of a complicated nature, employ the services of a Registered Professional Engineer to design such scaffolding, framework, or other temporary supports. .4 Provide all necessary temporary barricades, fencing, guardrails, nightlights, and


Project: 017 010 TEMPORARY SCAFFOLDING & PLATFORMS Page 14 of 7 barriers as necessary to complete the work. - END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS Page 1 of 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as

if repeated here. 1.1.2 All doors where indicated on the Door and Frame Schedule, and partitions

in Washrooms are to be floor-anchored, overhead braced. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00,

for Consultant's review before fabrication, indicating material, finish, dimensions, details of connections and fastenings, elevations, plans, sections, thicknesses, hardware and other pertinent information.

1.2.2 Samples: Submit samples of toilet partitions in selected colour and finish and

hardware, in accordance with Section 01300, for approval of Consultant. 1.2.3 Extended Warranty

.1 Provide a written warranty in accordance with Section 01 33 00, stating that work will remain free of defects in workmanship and materials for nine years beyond the expiration of the warranty period under the General Conditions.

.2 Total warranty period: twenty-five (25) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - GENERALLY 2.1.1 Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments

1. Basis of Design: Series-Hiney Hiders 2. Toilet partitions, urinal screens. 3. Floor mounted, overhead braced. 4. Integral Hinge 5. Continuous plastic brackets.

2.2 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION

A. Partitions: Premium, 1" solid HDPE with a homogenous color throughout, orange peel texture, in standard colours; heavy duty aluminum hardware continuous aluminum hinge (height of door/partition), continuous brackets & strikes, stainless steel latches, floor mount headrail braced, aluminum or stainless steel shoes.


Project: 017 010 SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS Page 2 of 3

B. Urinal screens: floor mounted screen.

C. Performance Requirements:

1. Graffiti Resistance (ASTM D 6578): Passed cleanability test; 5 staining agents. 2. Scratch Resistance (ASTM D 2197): Maximum load value exceeds 10

kilograms. 3. Impact Resistance (ASTM D 2794): Maximum impact force exceeds 30 inch-

pounds. 4. Smoke Developed Index (ASTM E 84): 120 for panels, 95 for stiles. 5. Flame Spread Index (ASTM E 84): 45 for panels and stiles.

D. Products manufactured by the following are acceptable provided provide total

privacy and no sightlines. .1 Scranton Products, Scranton Pennsylvania USA tel 1 800 445 5148

www.scrantonproducts.com .2 Hadrian Manufacturing, Burlington Ont. tel 1 888 817 7701

www.hadrian-inc.com .3 Polymer (HDPE) floor anchored overhead braced toilet

compartments, (pebble grained finish) by Global Partitions as distributed by American Specialties

.4 Approved alternate.

2.3 FABRICATION – TOILET COMPARTMENTS 2.3.1 Fabricate pilasters and stiles minimum 19 mm thick, and panels and doors

minimum 13 mm thick, of solid plastic core or Solid Color Reinforced Composite (SCRC), or as specified.

2.3.2 Provide pilasters with 2.9 mm, stainless steel levelling bar, rod and anchor

concealed by one-piece 102 mm high stainless steel. 2.3.3 Include panel brackets, full height hinges, door stops, latches, coat hooks,

fastening devices, bumpers, and pull on the outside of doors to accessible compartments. Coat hooks in accessible compartments shall be on the side wall, and shall project 25 mm maximum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Install compartments in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and in a

neat, rigid manner free of defects. 3.1.2 Provide anchors, inserts and fixings necessary for attachment of supports.

Drill supports as required to receive attachment of compartments. 3.1.3 Install units secure, accurately positioned, plumb, level, square and free

from sag and distortion. Provide continuous stainless steel ‘U’ channels per partition full height of the screen for mounting to wall.

http://www.scrantonproducts.com/


Project: 017 010 SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS Page 3 of 3 3.1.4 Perform drilling of steel, masonry and concrete necessary to install this work. 3.1.5 Connections between panels and pilasters, between panels and walls and

between pilasters and walls shall have continuous stainless steel ‘U’ channels for full height of the screen ensure it is not possible to see persons using the compartments.

3.1.6 Coordinate installation with the work of trades providing ceilings, wall and

floor finishes, shower accessories and other adjacent components and construction.

3.1.7 Use stainless steel anchors and fasteners; ferrous metals are not acceptable. 3.1.8 Provide for adjustment of floor variations with screw jack through steel

saddles made integral with pilaster. Conceal fixings with stainless steel shoes.

3.2 ADJUSTMENT 3.2.1 Upon completion of the work or when directed, remove all traces of

protective coating or paper. 3.2.2 Clean exposed surfaces and fittings. 3.2.3 Test hinges, locks and hatches and where necessary, adjust and lubricate.

Set hinges so that doors stand open 30 degrees when compartment is not in use. Ensure that partitions are in working order.

- END OF SECTION -

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 10800 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES Page 1 of 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if

repeated here. 1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.2.1 ASTM A167-87 Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting

Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip 1.2.2 ASTM A525 Standard Specification for General Requirements for

Steel Sheet Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process (Metric)

1.2.3 CAN/CSA-G164-M92 Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340, for

Consultant's review before fabrication. Shop drawings of units for use by the handicapped shall be distinctly marked and cross-referenced to the corresponding article in the specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS – GENERALLY 2.1.1 Metals

.1 Ferrous Steel: Sheet, cold-rolled furniture steel, double annealed, mill stretched and levelled, and fully pickled. Otherwise, steel shall be hot-rolled or cold-rolled of alloy to suit needs of fabrication, use, and appearance.

.2 Stainless Steel: Type 304, No. 4 finish. .3 Galvanized Steel: For sheet, Z275 zinc coating designation in accordance

with ASTM Specification A525. For irregular sections, hot dip galvanized to comply with CSA G164.

2.1.2 Anchors and Fastenings: Where exposed, use stainless steel and otherwise to

match metal anchored. Where non-exposed, use the same as that specified for exposed, or use galvanized steel. Anchors and fastenings shall be of the type appropriate for the substrate to which accessory unit is secured.

2.2 TOILET GRAB BARS: 2.2.1 Equip washroom with grab bars in conformance with the Ontario Building Code.

Fabricate of stainless steel; 1.2 mm for peened surfaced bars and 2.6 mm welded concealed flanges.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 10800 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES Page 2 of 5 2.2.2 Acceptable Products: Bobrick ‘B-5886’ x 600 mm long and Bobrick ‘B-5886’ x 760

mm long, Bobrick B4998 760x760, and similar as noted on drawings or ASI 3700P or 3800 P series type grab bars, by Amercian Specialties, similar as noted on drawings o approved equivalent.

Note: all grab bars to be 38mm dia. 2.3 COAT/ROBE HOOKS: 2.3.1 General Description: all stainless steel single robe/towel hook. 2.3.2 Acceptable Products: Bobrick ‘B-671’ or equivalent by Watrous or approved

equivalent, (refer to hardware schedule). Provide 1 per toilet compartment, typical.

2.4 DIAPER CHANGE STATION: 2.4.1 General Description: pull down, wall mounted diaper change station.

2.4.2 Acceptable Products: ‘Koala KB200’ (white) classic horizontal baby changing station or Surface mounted baby change station #9012 by American Specialties or approved equivalent

2.5 MIRRORS: 2.5.1 General Description: Vandal resistance, stainless steel framed, ¼” tempered glass

mirrors with concealed theft resistant wall hangers, as noted on drawings. 2.5.2 Acceptable Products: Bobrick ‘B- 1658 2436’ with Stainless steel frame or equivalent by Watrous or approved equivalent. 2.6 TOILET SEATS: 2.10.1 General Description: White open faced plastic seat with chromatic steel posts for

elongated bowls. 2.10.2 Acceptable Products: ‘Centaco model 500C’, or approved equivalent. 2.10.3 Accessible toilet seats: Closed plastic seat & seat cover with chromatic steel posts

for elongated bowls. 2.10.4 Acceptable Products: ‘Centaco model 820 Series, or approved equivalent. 2.7 HAND DRYER: 2.7.1 General Description: satin finish stainless steel finish on surface mounted electric

hand dryer. 2.7.2 Acceptable Products; Eco Fast high speed environmentally friendly hand dryer - #1195 - 120V or approved equivalent. 2.8 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL: 2.8.1 General Description: Stainless steel finish

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 10800 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES Page 3 of 5 2.8.2 Acceptable Products; Bobrick B-254 satin finish stainless steel 2.9 SOAP DISPENSERS & TOILET PAPER DISPENSERS: 2.9.1 Owner supplied soap dispensers and toilet paper dispensers to be installed by

contractor. 2.10 Door Bumpers : 2.8.1 General Description: solid rubber in stainless steel frame and mounting bracket

door bumpers. 2.8.2 Acceptable Products; Richelieu CDDH1412 satin finish stainless steel & rubber

convex wall mount door stop, 2.23 COMPONENT MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS 2.23.1 Construction

.1 Fabricate with materials, component sizes, metal gauges, reinforcing, anchors and fasteners of adequate strength to withstand intended use.

.2 Where specified as frameless, provide stainless steel accessories with

one-piece fronts having 90 degree formed returns at their edges and openings.

.3 Where accessory fronts are framed, frame edges, both inside and outside,

with 90 degree formed returns continuously welded and ground smooth at the corners. Doors shall also have 90 degree formed returns as specified.

.4 Unless otherwise specified, hinges shall be semi-concealed stainless steel

piano hinges extending full-length of hinged element. Provide hinged elements with concealed, mechanically-retained rubber bumpers for silent closing, and shall close flush with faces of fronts or frames.

.5 Ensure that work will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of joints

and seams, distortion and permanent deformation. .6 No exposed fixings permitted. Cut edges and openings square and

smooth. Chamfer corners of edges and cut-outs 1.6 mm. 2.23.2 Assembly

.1 Accurately cut, machine and fit joints, corners, copes and mitres so that junctions between components fit together tightly and in true planes.

.2 Fasten work with concealed methods, unless otherwise indicated on

Drawings. .3 Weld all connections where possible, bolt where not possible and cut off

bolts flush with nuts. Countersunk bolt heads, and provide method to prevent loosening of nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastening.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 10800 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES Page 4 of 5

.4 Welded joints shall be tight, flush, and in true planes with base metals. Make welds continuous at joints where entry of water into voids of members or assemblies is possible.

.5 Provide for differential movements within assemblies and at junctions of

assemblies with surrounding work. .6 Welds in exposed locations shall be ground and polished smooth.

2.23.3 Finish Work

.1 Provide holes and connections for work installed under other Sections of this Specification.

.2 Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials, including holes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION OF SITE 3.1.1 Take site measurements to ensure that work is fabricated to fit surrounding

construction around obstructions and projects in place, or as shown on drawings, and to suit service locations.

3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 Securely fasten accessories plumb, true, square, straight, level, and accurately and

tightly fitted together and to surrounding work. Install in locations shown and specified herein. Mounting heights as shown or in accordance with the OBC in the case of barrier-free accessories.

3.2.2 Work shall include anchor bolts, bolts, washers and nuts, lag screws, expansion

shields, toggles, straps, sleeve brackets, clips, and other items necessary for secure installation, as required by loading and by Jurisdictional Authorities.

3.2.3 Attach work at wood by screws through countersunk holes in metal. 3.2.4 Attach work to masonry with lead plugs and non-corrosive fastenings, to support

load with a safety factor of 3. Perform all drilling necessary to install the work. 3.2.5 Insulate between dissimilar metals or between metals and masonry or concrete

with bituminous paint, to prevent electrolysis. 3.2.6 Coordinate installation with the work of other trades adjacent to accessories to

achieve the reveals or other edge conditions shown, where their front faces are flush with the finished wall surfaces.

3.2.7 Before Owner occupancy and as scheduled with Consultant, provide initial supplies

to accessories (i.e. tissue paper, soap, etc.). 3.2.8 Note owner will be supplying most washroom accessories, however the General

Contractor is responsible for the installation of these washroom accessories.

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Section 10800 June 2018 Parks, Forestry and Recreation, City of Toronto Bill Lobb Architect Project: 017 010 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES Page 5 of 5 3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT 3.3.1 Upon completion of the work, or when directed, remove all traces of protective

coatings or paper. 3.3.2 Test mechanisms, hinges, locks and latches, and where necessary, adjust and

lubricate and ensure that accessories are in perfect working order.

- END OF SECTION -


Project: 017 010 Miscellaneous Specialties Page 1 of 2 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as

if repeated here. 1.2 TOLERANCES 1.2.1 Fabricate work of this Section within tolerances specified for work in which it

is built. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS 1.3.1 Submit shop drawings for each specialty product, for Consultant's review

before fabrication, in accordance with Section 01340. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.4.1 Package or crate and brace products to prevent distortion in shipment and

handling. Label packages and crates, and protect finish surfaces by sturdy wrappings.

1.4.2 Deliver products to location at building site designated by Contractor.

1.5 EXTENDED WARRANTY 1.5.1 Water Meter Room Access Hatch:

.1 Submit a warranty in accordance with Section 01300, covering the replacement of defective work for a period of 4 years from the expiration of the one-year warranty under the General Conditions.

.2 Total warranty period: 5 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR GRILLES 2.1.1 Airolite Model ‘685’ by E.H. Price, or approved equal, with type 'M' moulding

and site painted, by Section 09900, to match door face, in all hollow metal and/or wood veneer faced doors where indicated on Drawings or Schedules.

2.1.2 Prime to receive paint under Section 09900. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS 2.4.1 Work includes the following access panels for architectural purposes. Doors

required by mechanical division will be supplied by Division 15.


Project: 017 010 Miscellaneous Specialties Page 2 of 2

.1 Nystrom model numbers are specified to establish quality, however Lehage, Milcor, and Acudor equivalents will be acceptable. Contact Nystrom at 1-800-547-2635.

.2 Provide the following:

.1 Nystrom Type R-W recessed for reinforced cement board in wet areas.

.2 Nystrom Type TM flush for tile and masonry. .3 Nystrom Type WB flush for wallboard. .3 Material and Finish: .1 Galvanized bonderized steel, phosphate-dipped with

baked-on rust-inhibitive gray prime finish. .2 Stainless steel with No. 4 finish in Pool, Showers, Steam

Rooms, Showers, Sauna, Wet Washrooms and Drying Areas.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Strictly follow manufacturer's printed installation procedures. 3.1.2 Install work square, plumb, straight, true, and accurately fitted. 3.1.3 Include anchors, dowels, and fastenings necessary to anchor work together

and to work of other trades. 3.1.4 Where installing in masonry, centre material between masonry block joints.

Verify location, mounting heights, and dimensions of all units before installation. Anchor in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.1.5 Insulate where necessary to prevent electrolysis between metal to metal, or

metal to masonry, or concrete contact.

- END OF SECTION -

DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES AND HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ASSESSMENT

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Renovation Project

175 Moore Avenue Toronto, Ontario

M4T 1V8

Prepared for: Mr. Martin Balgavy

Senior Project Coordinator

City of Toronto Parks, Recreation and Forestry

55 John Street, 24th Floor Metro Hall Toronto, Ontario

M5V 3C6

Prepared by: Safetech Environmental Limited

Stephen Choi B.A.Sc., C.EES, WRT

OH&S Technician

Reviewed by:

Paul Valenti, B.ES., AMRT

Project Manager

SEL Project Number 167818

Date of Site Work: June 27, 2018 Date of Issue: July 5, 2018

TABLE OF CONTENTS EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. i

1.0 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................. 1

1.1 Background and Objectives .............................................................................. 1

1.2 Scope of Work .................................................................................................. 2

1.3 Description of Area(s) Assessed ....................................................................... 2

2.0 METHODOLOGY ................................................................................................. 3

2.1 Designated Substances .................................................................................... 4

2.1.1 Asbestos .................................................................................................... 4

2.1.2 Lead ........................................................................................................... 5

2.1.3 Mercury ...................................................................................................... 5

2.1.4 Silica .......................................................................................................... 6

2.1.5 Other Designated Substances ................................................................... 6

2.2 Other Hazardous Materials ............................................................................... 6

2.2.1 Chemical Hazards ..................................................................................... 6

2.2.2 Biological Hazards ..................................................................................... 6

2.2.3 Environmental Hazards .............................................................................. 7

3.0 RESULTS ............................................................................................................. 8

3.1 Designated Substances .................................................................................... 8

3.1.1 Asbestos .................................................................................................... 8

3.1.2 Lead ......................................................................................................... 13

3.1.3 Mercury .................................................................................................... 14

3.1.4 Silica ........................................................................................................ 14

3.1.5 Other Designated Substances ................................................................. 15

3.2 Other Hazardous Materials ............................................................................. 15

3.2.1 Chemical Hazards ................................................................................... 15

3.2.2 Biological Hazards ................................................................................... 15

3.2.3 Environmental Hazards ............................................................................ 15

4.0 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS .................................................. 16

4.1 Designated Substances .................................................................................. 16

4.1.1 Asbestos .................................................................................................. 16

4.1.2 Lead ......................................................................................................... 17

4.1.3 Mercury .................................................................................................... 20

4.1.4 Silica ........................................................................................................ 20

4.1.5 Other Designated Substances ................................................................. 21

4.2 Other Hazardous Materials ............................................................................. 21

4.2.1 Chemical Hazards ................................................................................... 21

4.2.2 Biological Hazards ................................................................................... 22

4.2.3 Environmental Hazards ............................................................................ 22

5.0 LIMITATIONS ..................................................................................................... 23

LIST OF TABLES Table 1 – Bulk Sample Analytical Results for Determination of Asbestos Content Table 2 – Results of Assessment for Asbestos-Containing Materials Table 3 – Results of Paint Condition and Lead Content Assessment

LIST OF APPENDICES Appendix A – Condition Assessment Criteria for Asbestos-Containing Materials Appendix B – Floor Plans for Areas Assessed Appendix C – Laboratory Certificate of Analysis - Asbestos Appendix D – Laboratory Certificate of Analysis - Lead Appendix E – Site Photographs Appendix F – Background Information on Designated Substances and Other Hazardous

Materials

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Safetech Environmental Limited (SEL) was commissioned by the City of Toronto to conduct a designated substances and hazardous materials assessment within 175 Moore Avenue, Toronto, Ontario. The objective of our assessment was to determine the presence, location, condition and quantities of designated substances and other hazardous materials within that have the potential to be disturbed as part of planned renovation activities so that appropriate control measures can be implemented to protect workers during the work. A summary of our assessment results and general recommendations based on our findings are provided in the following Table. This Table should be considered a summary only. Please refer to the Results (Section 3) and Conclusions and Recommendations (Section 4) of our report for additional details.

Designated Substance

Findings Recommendations

Asbestos

Asbestos-containing materials in the form of drywall joint compound, and

9x9 vinyl floor tiles were identified that may be disturbed as part of the

planned renovation project.

If required, vinyl floor tiles can be removed following Type 1 operations

outlined in O. Reg. 278/05. Drywall joint compound can be

removed following Type 2 operations outlined in O. Reg. 278/05.

Other suspect materials that may be present within the investigated area(s) includes roofing materials, high voltage wire jacketing and bell and spigot joint material on large cast iron drain piping. Since the above materials are not likely

to be disturbed as part of the project bulk sampling was not conducted to verify asbestos content. However,

based on the age of the materials they should be assumed to be asbestos-containing until proven otherwise.

No action required. Follow appropriate procedures in accordance with O. Reg. 278/05 should these materials require

disturbance/removal.

SEL Project Number: 167818 June 27, 2018

Designated Substances and Hazardous Materials Assessment Moorevale Park Clubhouse Renovation Project

175 Moore Avenue, Toronto, Ontario

Page ii

Lead

Grey paint on Wood Finish was confirmed to be lead containing paint

(>0.1% lead content). Other paints not sampled are assumed to be lead-

containing.

Any disturbance of lead-containing paints and surface coatings should be

conducted in accordance with measures and procedures outlined in the Environmental Abatement Council of Ontario (EACO) “Lead Guideline” (October 2014) and/or the Ministry of

Labour “Lead on Construction Projects” guideline.

Lead-containing wastes should be recycled if practicable or handled and disposed of according to O.Reg. 347.

Lead may be a component of solder in pipe fittings, glazing on ceramic tiles

and electrical equipment.

Mercury

Mercury vapour is expected to be present within fluorescent lamps.

Handle lamps with care and keep intact. All waste lamps are

recommended to be sent to a lamp recycling facility.

Sealed liquid mercury was visibly identified within thermostats throughout

the surveyed areas.

Handle equipment with care and avoid breakage/spillage. Any mercury-containing equipment that is to be removed is recommended to be

recycled rather than disposed of in landfill.

Silica

Building materials identified that are suspected to contain crystalline silica and may be disturbed as part of the planned renovation project include

plaster finish, drywall finish, brick and concrete finishes. Several other

building materials were also identified that are suspected to contain silica.

Any work involving the disturbance of silica-containing materials should follow the procedures outlined in the Ministry

of Labour “Silica on Construction Projects” guideline.

Other Designated Substances

No other designated substances are expected to be present in any

significant quantities or in a form that would represent an exposure concern.

No protective measures or procedures specific to acrylonitrile, arsenic, benzene, coke oven emissions,

ethylene oxide, isocyanates, and vinyl chloride are considered necessary.

Other Hazardous Materials

Findings Recommendations

Urea Formaldehyde

Foam Insulation

No UFFI was identified or is suspected within the areas assessed.

No action required.

Mould Contamination

None identified in area(s) assessed. No action required.

Pest Infestation None identified in area(s) assessed. No action required.

Polychlorinated Biphenyls

Fluorescent light ballasts are suspected to be PCB-containing. No other

sources of PCBs were identified in the areas assessed.

If required, PCB-containing ballasts should be removed, separated from other waste and disposed of as PCB waste at an authorized destruction

facility.

Ozone Depleting and Global Warming

Substances

No sources of ozone depleting and/or global warming substances were observed in the areas assessed.

No action required.

SEL Project Number: 167818 June 27, 2018

Designated Substances and Hazardous Materials Assessment Moorevale Park Clubhouse Renovation Project


Page iii

This assessment satisfies the Owner’s requirements under Section 30 of the Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act (OHSA), Revised Statutes of Ontario 1990, as amended. Should you have any questions regarding the information contained in the report, please contact our office. Safetech Environmental Limited

Stephen Choi, B.A.Sc., C.EES, WRT OH&S Technician

Paul Valenti, B.ES., AMRT Project Manager

July 5, 2018 City of Toronto Parks, Recreation and Forestry 55 John Street, 24th Floor Metro Hall Toronto, Ontario M5V 3C6 Attention: Mr. Martin Balgavy Senior Project Coordinator RE: Designated Substances and Hazardous Materials Assessment Moorevale Park Clubhouse Renovation Project 175 Moore Avenue, Toronto, Ontario

1.0 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Background and Objectives Safetech Environmental Limited (SEL) was commissioned by City of Toronto to conduct a designated substances and hazardous materials assessment within 175 Moore Avenue, Toronto, Ontario. The objective of our assessment was to determine the presence, location, condition and quantities of designated substances and other hazardous materials within the project specific areas that have the potential to be disturbed as part of planned renovation so that appropriate control measures can be implemented to protect workers during the work. This assessment satisfies the Owner’s requirements under Section 30 of the Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act (OHSA), Revised Statutes of Ontario 1990, as amended. Section 30(1) requires a building owner to determine if there are any designated substances present at a project site prior to construction or demolition activity. Sections 30(2), (3) and (4) require the Owner and constructors for a project to provide the findings in this report as part of the tendering information for any tendered project or to prospective contractors (and subcontractors) of a project before entering into a binding contract. This report documents findings of our on-site inspection that was conducted on June 27, 2018 and provides conclusions and recommendations based on our findings and knowledge of the planned renovation project.

SEL Project Number: 167818

June 27, 2018

Designated Substances and Hazardous Materials Assessment



Page 2

1.2 Scope of Work In accordance with our fee proposal document, our scope of work included the following activities:

A review of existing documents, including renovation documents and drawings, floor plans and existing environmental assessment reports, etc., where available.

A visual assessment of the accessible area(s) specific to the Moorevale Park Clubhouse Renovation Project to identify the presence, location, condition and quantities of designated substances and other hazardous materials.

Collection, analysis and interpretation of representative bulk samples of suspect asbestos-containing building materials for the determination of asbestos content and material classification.

Collection, analysis and interpretation of representative paint chip samples for the determination of lead content.

Preparation of a report to document findings and provide recommendations regarding control measures and/or special handling procedures for designated substances or specific hazardous materials that may be disturbed as part of planned renovation activities.

Documents reviewed to aid in our assessment included the following:

Architectural, mechanical & electrical drawings of planned renovation activities for the “Moorevale Park Clubhouse Renovation Project”

This assessment only identified designated substances and hazardous materials that were deemed to be part of the building or somehow otherwise incorporated into the building structure and its finishes. Assessing occupant items such as stored products, furnishings, items and materials used or produced as part of a manufacturing process, etc. were beyond the scope of this assessment. In addition, our assessment did not include an investigation for underground materials or equipment (vessels, drums, underground storage tanks, pipes, cables, etc.). Furthermore, this assessment was limited to the areas investigated, and more specifically, to those materials that may be disturbed as part of the planned renovation work, as described in Section 1.3. 1.3 Description of Area(s) Assessed Our survey was limited to areas of the building where work related to the Moorevale Park Clubhouse Renovation Project had the potential to disturb materials that may be hazardous. Based on our assessment, the building was constructed in an era known to include the use of asbestos-containing materials and other designated substances.


June 27, 2018




Page 3

Typical building materials observed include vinyl finish, wood and concrete floors, drywall finish, plaster finish and wood ceilings, drywall finish, plaster finish, brick and concrete walls.

2.0 METHODOLOGY

The presence of hazardous materials was assessed by visual inspection. For the purpose of this assessment and this document, hazardous materials include designated substances as well as other chemical, biological and environmental hazards as defined below:

Designated Substances (as prescribed by Ontario Regulation 490/09): o Acrylonitrile, Arsenic, Asbestos, Benzene, Coke Oven Emissions,

Ethylene Oxide, Isocyanates, Lead, Mercury, Silica and Vinyl Chloride.

Other Hazardous Materials: o Chemical Hazards – Urea Formaldehyde Foam Insulation (UFFI) o Biological Hazards – Mould Contamination and Pest Infestation o Environmental Hazards – Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) and Ozone

Depleting & Global Warming Substances For background information regarding the above hazardous materials, please refer to Appendix F. Destructive testing was not conducted as part of this assessment. Concealed locations such as above solid plaster or drywall ceilings, within plaster or drywall wall cavities, enclosed mechanical/pipe shafts and bulkheads, etc. were not investigated. Similarly, motors, blowers, electrical panels, etc., were not de-energized or disassembled to examine concealed conditions. Building materials that are not detailed within this assessment due to inaccessibility at the time of our site visit and/or uncovered during renovation/demolition activities should be assessed by a qualified person prior to their disturbance. Bulk sampling followed by laboratory analysis was also conducted to confirm the presence/absence of selected hazardous materials. Bulk sampling was limited to asbestos in building materials and lead in paint on building finishes. All other hazardous materials were identified by visual inspection only. Where possible, observations regarding the location, quantity and condition of the hazardous materials identified were made in order to determine the potential for exposure and provide appropriate recommendations for remedial action, if necessary. Specific methodology for each individual hazardous material assessed is further detailed below.


June 27, 2018




Page 4

2.1 Designated Substances 2.1.1 Asbestos A visual inspection for the presence of both friable and non-friable asbestos-containing material (ACM) was performed within the assessment area(s). The condition of ACM was rated as Good, Fair or Poor based on our assessment criteria provided in Appendix A. Although destructive testing was not conducted, details regarding the possible presence of ACM in enclosed locations were provided on a case-by-case basis where our visual inspection indicated this possibility. Other suspect materials that may be present within the investigated area(s) includes roofing materials, high voltage wire jacketing and bell and spigot joint material on large cast iron drain piping. Since the above materials are not likely to be disturbed as part of the project bulk sampling was not conducted to verify asbestos content. However, based on the age of the materials they should be assumed to be asbestos-containing until proven otherwise. Bulk samples of building materials suspected to contain asbestos were retrieved by SEL only for materials that were deemed to have a potential to be disturbed as part of the Moorevale Park Clubhouse Renovation Project. Other suspect materials were noted but were not sampled. Bulk samples were retrieved in accordance with Section 3 and Table 1 of Ontario Regulation 278/05, “Designated Substance – Asbestos on Construction Projects and in Buildings and Repair Operations”. The number of samples collected for each material was based on the type and quantity of the material present within the area(s) investigated. Each individual sample was placed in a labeled zip-lock bag for transportation to an independent laboratory (EMSL). EMSL is accredited by the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for bulk asbestos fiber analysis. Analysis for asbestos content was performed by the independent laboratory in accordance with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Test Method EPA/600/R-93-116: Method for the Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Building Materials. June 1993. This method identifies the asbestos fibre content of building materials using polarized light microscopy (PLM) analytical techniques, with confirmation of presence and type of asbestos made by dispersion staining optical microscopy. This analytical method meets the requirements set forth in Section 3 of O. Reg. 278/05. In accordance with O. Reg. 278/05, an asbestos-containing material is defined as material that contains 0.5 per cent or more asbestos by dry weight. The laboratory was instructed to conduct “stop-positive” analysis for all materials. If a sample was found to be asbestos-containing no further analysis was conducted for samples taken from the same homogeneous material. The Laboratory Certificate of Analysis is included in Appendix C.


June 27, 2018




Page 5

Locations where ACM have been identified are detailed in this report. Recommendations pertaining to ACM were made based on the friability, accessibility and condition of the material in conjunction with the potential for the planned renovation work to disturb the ACM. 2.1.2 Lead An assessment for lead in paint was conducted by retrieving a paint chip sample from representative surface within the area(s) assessed that was deemed to have a potential to be disturbed as part of the planned renovation activities. The condition of the painted surface from which the sample was taken was also visually assessed for signs of deterioration such as cracking, chipping, flaking, bubbling and deterioration due to friction. The condition of this surface was assessed as good, fair or poor based on the degree and extent of deterioration. The paint chip sample was retrieved by scraping the paint down to the base material substrate to ensure collection of all layers of paint. Care was taken to avoid collection of the underlying substrate to reduce analytical substrate matrix interference. Upon completion of our assessment, the paint chip sample was submitted to an independent laboratory (EMSL) for the determination of lead content. This laboratory participates in and is accredited by the EPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency) for analysis of lead in paint chips through the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) Environmental Lead Laboratory Accreditation Program (ELLAP). Analysis was conducted by the laboratory following the EPA “Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods” (SW-846), Method 7000B “Flame Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry”. Result of analysis was reported by the laboratory as the percentage of lead by weight of the total sample (% by wt.). The Laboratory Certificate of Analysis is included in Appendix D. The presence of lead in other materials, such as lead sheeting, pigmented mortar, lead piping, lead solder, etc. were noted where observed but were not sampled to verify lead content. Lead can be present in these materials to varying degrees, depending on their age of application (refer to Appendix F for additional details) and should be considered lead-containing until proven otherwise. 2.1.3 Mercury The type, quantity and location of mercury-containing equipment and devices within the area(s) assessed were determined by visual inspection based on appearance, age and knowledge of historical uses. Sampling for mercury-containing building materials and dismantling of suspect mercury-containing equipment was not performed. Where possible, attempts were made to verify the presence/absence of mercury by gathering additional information such as equipment model number, serial number, etc.


June 27, 2018




Page 6

2.1.4 Silica The presence of crystalline silica in building materials was determined through visual inspection of building materials only, based on knowledge of the historic use of silica-containing materials in certain building materials. Sampling to verify the presence/absence of silica in building materials was not performed. 2.1.5 Other Designated Substances Other designated substances (i.e. acrylonitrile, arsenic, benzene, coke oven emissions, ethylene oxide, isocyanates, and vinyl chloride) are typically not expected to be encountered in building materials as significant constituents or in a form that would represent an exposure concern. These substances were not included in our assessment unless specific information regarding their use (e.g. in a manufacturing process) was provided to us. Please refer to Appendix F for information regarding where these designated substances are typically found or used. No sampling for these designated substances was performed. 2.2 Other Hazardous Materials 2.2.1 Chemical Hazards Urea Formaldehyde Foam Insulation (UFFI) A visual inspection to evaluate the possible presence of Urea Formaldehyde Foam Insulation (UFFI) was conducted within the area(s) assessed. Our visual inspection was limited to looking for evidence of possible UFFI installation (i.e. repaired nozzle holes in walls) and overspray at wall/ceiling joints, etc. No destructive testing or material sampling was conducted as part of our assessment. 2.2.2 Biological Hazards Mould Contamination A visual inspection to determine the possibility of mould growth was conducted within the area(s) assessed. Our assessment was limited to looking for evidence of mould growth and water damage (staining, material deterioration, efflorescence, etc.) on the surface of building materials, which may be an indicator of hidden mould growth. No moisture content readings of building materials were taken to determine their current condition. Additionally, destructive testing to confirm the presence/absence of hidden mould growth and material sampling to verify the presence/absence of mould on suspect surfaces was beyond the scope of this assessment.


June 27, 2018




Page 7

Pest Infestation The presence and extent of pest infestation within the area(s) assessed was based on visually inspecting for evidence of significant pest activity, including signs of nesting, droppings/fecal accumulation, dead insects/carcass accumulation, etc. Evidence of minor pest presence was not considered to be indicative of pest infestation. 2.2.3 Environmental Hazards Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) The presence of PCB-containing electrical equipment within the area(s) assessed was identified through visual inspection and knowledge of the timeline of historical use. For stand-alone transformers and capacitors, information from the manufacturer nameplate (such as the date of manufacture, dielectric fluid trade name or “Type Number”, etc.) was gathered, where possible, to further evaluate if the equipment may contain PCBs. This information was then compared to the information provided in the Environment Canada document entitled “Handbook on PCB’s in Electrical Equipment” (Third Edition, April 1988) to aid in identification. Transformers and capacitors confirmed to be manufactured after 1979 were assumed to not contain PCBs. If appropriate information could not be obtained it was assumed that the transformer or capacitor contained PCBs. For fluorescent light ballasts, a representative number of fixtures were inspected, if possible, for assessment areas that were constructed prior to 1980 and where there was no history or evidence of a complete lighting retrofit. The light fixtures were examined by removing any lenses and ballast covers to expose the ballast and identify information such as ballast make, model number, serial number, and date code. This information was then compared to the information provided in the Environment Canada document entitled “Identification of Lamp Ballasts Containing PCBs” (Report EPS 2/CC/2 (revised) August 1991) to aid in identification. Ballasts that could not be confirmed Non-PCB-containing were assumed to contain PCBs. The light fixtures were not de-energized and ballasts were not removed to obtain manufacturer information that may be on the back of the ballast. If visual confirmation of ballast type could not be made it was assumed that light fixtures in areas constructed prior to 1980 that have not undergone a complete lighting retrofit have PCB-containing ballasts until proven otherwise. No sampling of materials or fluids within equipment was conducted to verify the presence/absence of PCBs. Inspection and testing of other materials for PCB content, including (but not limited to) caulking, asphalt, oil-based paint, plastics, switches, electric cables and hydraulic fluids was beyond the scope of our assessment.


June 27, 2018




Page 8

Ozone Depleting and Global Warming Substances The presence of fixed equipment likely to contain ozone-depleting substances (ODS) and/or global-warming substances (GWS) was identified through visual inspection and knowledge of the timeline of historical use. This included equipment such as chillers, air-conditioners, walk-in refrigeration and freezer units and fixed dry-chemical fire extinguishers, where chemicals such as hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs), hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs) or halons may be present. Where possible, information regarding the type and quantity of refrigerant present was obtained from the manufacturer nameplate. Our visual assessment was limited to fixed equipment within the area(s) assessed and did not include portable equipment such as stand-alone refrigerators, freezers, water coolers, air-conditioners and fire extinguishers, etc.

3.0 RESULTS

Results of our visual assessment and bulk sample analytical findings are summarized in the sections below. Photographs of conditions observed are referenced in the appropriate section where applicable (as P#) and are included in Appendix E. 3.1 Designated Substances 3.1.1 Asbestos Results of bulk sample analysis for the determination of asbestos content are summarized in Table 1. Materials have been classified as “ACM”, “Non-ACM”, “Suspected ACM” or “Presumed Non-ACM” based on analytical results. Materials classified as Suspected ACM or Presumed Non-ACM may require further analysis (depending on site-specific conditions) to verify whether the material should be classified as ACM or Non-ACM. Please refer to the Limitations section of this report (Section 5.0) for additional details. The Laboratory Certificate of Analysis is included in Appendix C.


June 27, 2018




Page 9

Table 1 Bulk Sample Analytical Results for Determination of Asbestos Content

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Renovation Project 175 Moore Avenue, Toronto, Ontario

Sample Collection Date: June 27, 2018

Sample No.

Material Description Sample Location Asbestos Content

Material Classification

1a

Plaster Finish

Tennis Clubhouse Women’s Change Room/Washroom

None Detected Non-ACM 1b

Public Women’s Washroom

1c Public Men’s Washroom

2a

Drywall Joint Compound

Associated with Drywall Finishes

Tennis Clubhouse Men’s Change

Room/Washroom 2% Chrysotile

ACM 2b


Stop Positive (ANR)

2c


Hallway

3a

Brick Mortar Basement None Detected Non-ACM 3b

3c

4a

Ceramic Tile Grout Tennis Clubhouse Women’s Change Room/Washroom

None Detected Non-ACM 4b

4c

5a 12x12 Blue Vinyl Floor

Tile Tennis Clubhouse

Kitchen/Office None Detected Non-ACM 5b

5c

6a

12x12 White with Green Specs Vinyl

Floor Tile

Tennis Clubhouse Men’s Change

Room/Washroom None Detected Non-ACM

Grey Mastic Underneath Vinyl Floor

Tile

6b


Floor Tile


Tile

6c


Floor Tile


Tile


June 27, 2018




Page 10

Sample No.

Material Description Sample Location Asbestos Content


7a

12x12 Pink Vinyl Floor Tile


None Detected Non-ACM

Brown Mastic Underneath Vinyl Floor

Tile

7b



Tile

7c



Tile

8a

12x12 Beige Vinyl Floor Tile

Lawn Bowling Women’s Staff Washroom

None Detected Non-ACM

Black Mastic Underneath Vinyl Floor

Tile

8b



Tile

8c



Tile

9a

9x9 Grey with White Streaks Vinyl Floor

Tile

Tennis Clubhouse Kitchen/Office

3% Chrysotile ACM


Tile None Detected Non-ACM

9b


Tile

Stop Positive (ANR)

ACM



9c


Tile

Stop Positive (ANR)

ACM



As per O.Reg. 278/05, ACM contains ≥0.5% asbestos by dry weight.


June 27, 2018




Page 11

Materials assessed for asbestos content are summarized in Table 2 based on the type/use of the material. The condition and friability of materials confirmed or suspected to be asbestos-containing (based on our visual assessment, results of bulk sample analysis or from a review of previous analytical results) is provided. Condition (Cond.) ratings are provided as Good (G), Fair (F) or Poor (P) based on our Assessment Criteria provided in Appendix A. Estimates of quantity have only been provided for confirmed or suspected asbestos-containing materials that were deemed to have a potential to be disturbed as part of the Moorevale Park Clubhouse Renovation Project. Any quantities provided should be considered rough estimates only and should not be relied upon for bidding purposes. It is the responsibility of the selected Contractor to obtain actual quantities.

Table 2

Results of Assessment for Asbestos-Containing Materials Moorevale Park Clubhouse Renovation Project


Sprayed and Loose Fill Insulating Materials

Location/Description Cond. Est.

Quantity Friability

Sprayed Fireproofing

None identified in area(s) assessed. N/A N/A N/A

Sprayed Insulation


Loose Fill / Vermiculite Insulation

None identified in area(s) assessed. Interior portions of concrete block walls could not be assessed. However, it is not expected that these walls are insulated with loose fill or vermiculite insulation.

N/A N/A N/A

Thermal System

Insulation Location/Description Cond.

Est. Quantity

Friability

Mechanical Pipe Insulation – Straights &

Fittings (elbows,

valves, tees, hangars, etc.)

Mechanical pipe insulation identified was observed to either be insulated with non-asbestos fiberglass or non-insulated.

N/A N/A N/A

HVAC Duct Insulation

HVAC duct insulation was observed to either be insulated with non-asbestos fiberglass or non-insulated.

N/A N/A N/A

Breeching / Exhaust

Insulation None identified in area(s) assessed. N/A N/A N/A

Tank Insulation

Domestic hot water tank was observed to be non-insulated.

N/A N/A N/A

Boiler Insulation



June 27, 2018




Page 12

Other Mechanical Equipment Insulation

Other mechanical equipment identified was observed to either be insulated with non-asbestos fiberglass or non-insulated.

N/A N/A N/A

Architectural Finishes & Finishing Materials


Quantity Friability

Sprayed Texture / Stucco

Finishes


Plaster Finishes

Plaster finish were identified within surveyed areas. Bulk sample analysis confirmed that it does not contain asbestos (refer to Sample set 1 in Table 1).

N/A N/A N/A

Drywall Joint Compound

Drywall joint compound associated with drywall finishes were identified within surveyed areas. Bulk sample analysis confirmed that it does not contain asbestos (refer to Sample set 2 in Table 1).

N/A N/A N/A

Ceiling Tiles Location/Description Cond. Est.

Quantity Friability

Lay-in Acoustic

Ceiling Tiles None identified in area(s) assessed. N/A N/A N/A

Glued-on Acoustic

Ceiling Tiles None identified in area(s) assessed. N/A N/A N/A

Transite Ceiling Panels


Flooring Location/Description Cond. Est.

Quantity Friability

Vinyl Floor Tiles

9x9 Grey with White Streaks Vinyl Floor Tile was sampled within the surveyed areas and found to contain 3% Chrysotile asbestos (refer to Sample set 6 in Table 1).

Good ~100

square feet

Non-Friable

Vinyl Floor Tiles

12x12 blue vinyl floor tile was identified within surveyed areas. Bulk sample analysis confirmed that it does not contain asbestos (refer to Sample set 5 in Table 1).

N/A N/A N/A

12x12 white with green specs vinyl floor tile was identified within surveyed areas. Bulk sample analysis confirmed that it does not contain asbestos (refer to Sample set 6 in Table 1).

N/A N/A N/A

12x12 pink vinyl floor tile was identified within surveyed areas. Bulk sample analysis confirmed that it does not contain asbestos (refer to Sample set 7 in Table 1).

N/A N/A N/A

12x12 beige vinyl floor tile was identified within surveyed areas. Bulk sample analysis confirmed that it does not contain asbestos (refer to Sample set 8 in Table 1).

N/A N/A N/A

Vinyl Sheet Flooring



June 27, 2018




Page 13

Associated Mastic

Black mastic underneath vinyl floor tiles were identified within surveyed areas. Bulk sample analysis confirmed that it does not contain asbestos (refer to Sample set 6, 7, 8 & 9 in Table 1).

N/A N/A N/A

Asbestos Cement

Products Location/Description Cond.

Est. Quantity

Friability

Piping None identified in area(s) assessed. N/A N/A N/A

Roofing, Siding,

Wallboard None identified in area(s) assessed. N/A N/A N/A

Other Cement Products


Misc. Materials


Quantity Friability

Brick Mortar Brick mortar was identified within surveyed areas. Bulk sample analysis confirmed that it does not contain asbestos (refer to Sample set 3 in Table 1).

N/A N/A N/A

Ceramic Tile Grout

Ceramic tile grout was identified within surveyed areas. Bulk sample analysis confirmed that it does not contain asbestos (refer to Sample set 4 in Table 1).

N/A N/A N/A

Other Materials

Other suspect materials that may be present within the investigated area(s) includes roofing materials, high voltage wire jacketing and bell and spigot joint material on large cast iron drain piping. Since the above materials are not likely to be disturbed as part of the project bulk sampling was not conducted to verify asbestos content. However, based on the age of the materials they should be assumed to be asbestos-containing until proven otherwise.

N/D N/D N/D

Notes: N/A=Not Applicable; N/D=Not Determined

3.1.2 Lead Laboratory analytical results for paints tested to determine lead content are summarized below in Table 3. The Laboratory Certificate of Analysis is included in Appendix D. Refer to Section 4.1.2 of this report for recommended lead abatement procedures (if any) that correspond to the type of proposed construction, renovation, or demolition work.


June 27, 2018




Page 14

Table 3 Results of Paint Condition and Lead Content Assessment

Moorevale Park Clubhouse Renovation Project 175 Moore Avenue, Toronto, Ontario

Sample Collection Date: June 27, 2018

Sample No.

Location Surface Paint Colour Condition

Lead Conc. (% by wt.)


L-01 Exterior Wood Finish Grey Good 0.96 LCM

LCM: Lead-Containing Material (≥0.1% Lead Content); LLLP: Low Level Lead Paint (<0.1% Lead Content)

As results in Table 3 indicate, Grey paint on Wood Finish sampled for lead content was found to have lead concentrations >0.1%, which is considered lead containing. Suspect lead-containing materials visually identified within the investigated areas included the following:

Additional paint finishes not sampled;

Glazing on ceramic tiles; and

A component of solder in pipe fittings and electrical equipment. 3.1.3 Mercury Mercury is present within the area(s) assessed in the form of:

Vapour within fluorescent lamps; and

Thermostats 3.1.4 Silica A number of building materials were identified within the surveyed area(s) that are suspected to contain crystalline silica. This includes the following materials:

Concrete;

Concrete block and associated mortar;

Brick mortar;

Plaster finish; and

Drywall joint compound associated with drywall finishes


June 27, 2018




Page 15

3.1.5 Other Designated Substances Acrylonitrile, arsenic, benzene, coke oven emissions, ethylene oxide, isocyanates, and vinyl chloride were not included in our assessment as these substances are not expected to be a significant component of building materials or present in a form that would represent an exposure concern. Additionally, no specific information regarding their use was provided to us. 3.2 Other Hazardous Materials 3.2.1 Chemical Hazards No visible evidence of UFFI installation (i.e. injection openings) or overspray of foam insulation at wall/ceiling joints was identified. In addition, due to the age of construction and use of the building the presence of UFFI insulation within wall cavities is not suspected. 3.2.2 Biological Hazards Mould Contamination There was no visible evidence of obvious mould growth on building finishes within the surveyed area(s) at the time of our assessment. In addition, there was no visible evidence of any significant water staining or discolouration to building finishes within the surveyed area(s) that would suggest the potential for hidden mould growth behind these finishes. Pest Infestation There was no visible evidence of any significant pest infestation within the surveyed area(s). 3.2.3 Environmental Hazards Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) Fluorescent light fixtures were identified throughout the project specific areas. Ballasts were not accessible during our assessment. As such, ballasts associated with fluorescent light fixtures are assumed to contain PCBs unless proven otherwise. No other sources of PCBs were identified in the areas assessed. Ozone Depleting and Global Warming Substances No fixed equipment suspected to contain ODS/GWS were observed in the area(s) assessed.


June 27, 2018




Page 16

4.0 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

4.1 Designated Substances 4.1.1 Asbestos Results of our assessment indicated that the following asbestos-containing materials are present within the project specific areas that will be disturbed as part of the Moorevale Park Clubhouse Renovation Project:

Drywall Joint Compound Associated with Drywall Finishes

9x9 Grey with White Streaks Vinyl Floor Tile Removal or disturbance of identified asbestos-containing materials must be conducted in accordance with Ontario Regulation 278/05 (O.Reg. 278/05) Designated Substance – Asbestos on Construction Projects and in Buildings and Repair Operations as made under the Occupational Health and Safety Act. Asbestos containing materials in Poor condition must be removed and/or repaired immediately following applicable asbestos abatement procedures. Asbestos-containing materials in Good condition can remain in place until major system upgrading, maintenance or demolition which could result in disturbance of this material. Drywall Joint Compound In accordance with O. Reg. 278/05, removal of less than 1 square metre of drywall where asbestos-containing drywall joint compound has been used can be conducted following Type 1 operations. If 1 square metre or more of drywall is removed where asbestos-containing drywall joint compound has been used then work should be conducted following Type 2 operations. Vinyl Floor Tiles Vinyl floor tiles are considered to be a non-friable ACM. As per O. Reg. 278/05, removal of non-friable ACM can be conducted following Type 1 operations; as long as the material can be removed without being broken, cut, drilled or otherwise similarly disturbed. If the material cannot be removed without it breaking or being similarly disturbed then the work should be conducted using non-powered hand tools and the material should be wetted to control the spread of dust. If the material cannot be wetted or if power tools attached to dust-collecting devices equipped with HEPA (high efficiency particulate aerosol) filters are used during removal or disturbance, then work should be performed following Type 2 operations. If non-friable materials are removed or disturbed using power tools that are not attached to dust-collecting devices that are equipped with HEPA filters then work should be conducted following Type 3 operations.


June 27, 2018




Page 17

Assumed Asbestos-Containing Materials Other suspect materials that may be present within the investigated area(s) includes roofing materials, high voltage wire jacketing and bell and spigot joint material on large cast iron drain piping. Since the above materials are not likely to be disturbed as part of the project bulk sampling was not conducted to verify asbestos content. However, based on the age of the materials they should be assumed to be asbestos-containing until proven otherwise. Removal or disturbance of identified asbestos-containing materials must be conducted in accordance with Ontario Regulation 278/05 (O.Reg. 278/05) Designated Substance – Asbestos on Construction Projects and in Buildings and Repair Operations as made under the Occupational Health and Safety Act. Asbestos containing materials in Poor condition must be removed and/or repaired immediately following applicable asbestos abatement procedures. Asbestos-containing materials in Good condition can remain in place until major system upgrading, maintenance or demolition which could result in disturbance of this material. General Recommendations The removal or disturbance of ACM must follow the measures and procedures indicated in O. Reg. 278/05. This work should be conducted by workers who have received proper training by a “competent person” in the hazards of asbestos exposure, personal hygiene and work practices, and the use and care of respirators and protective clothing. Any worker/supervisor who works in a Type 3 operation must successfully complete the Asbestos Abatement Worker or Supervisor Training Program approved by the Ministry of Training, Colleges and Universities. It is recommended that all work involving the removal or disturbance of ACM be subject to inspection and testing to document conformance with O. Reg. 278/05 requirements. The degree of inspection and testing is dependent on site-specific conditions such as the type, duration, size and location of the work. In most circumstances Type 3 operations require a visual inspection and clearance air testing to be conducted by a competent worker on completion of the work. The inspection should be conducted to ensure that the enclosure and the work area inside the enclosure are free from visible dust, debris or residue that may contain asbestos. Clearance air testing for Type 3 operations requires a minimum number of air samples to be taken (depending on the size of the work area) following specific sampling and analytical procedures and all samples taken must meet the clearance criteria set out in O. Reg. 278/05. 4.1.2 Lead Result of paint chip analysis for the determination of lead content indicated that Grey paint associated with Wood Finish is considered to be lead-containing (>0.1% lead content based on required of Environmental Abatement Council of Ontario (EACO) “Lead Guideline” (October 2014)). Any disturbance of the lead-containing paint should be conducted in accordance the procedures outlined in the Environmental Abatement


June 27, 2018




Page 18

Council of Ontario (EACO) “Lead Guideline” (October 2014) and/or the Ministry of Labour (MOL) “Lead on Construction Projects” guideline (April 2011). The extent of procedures (or Type of operation) necessary depends on the type of work to be conducted. Paints and surface coatings not sampled are assumed to be lead-containing (>0.1% lead content). Any disturbance of the lead-containing paints or surface coatings should be conducted in accordance the procedures outlined in the Environmental Abatement Council of Ontario (EACO) “Lead Guideline” (October 2014) and/or the Ministry of Labour (MOL) “Lead on Construction Projects” guideline (April 2011). The extent of procedures (or Type of operation) necessary depends on the type of work to be conducted. Additional suspect lead-containing products not anticipated to be disturbed as part of the Moorevale Park Clubhouse Renovation Project includes solder on pipe fittings, glazing on ceramic tiles and electrical components. Future testing of these materials and specific handling/disposal requirements may be necessary if/when these materials are to be disturbed. At this time the method of disturbance, if any, of lead-containing paints is unknown. It is recommended that any contractor whose work requires lead-containing paints to be disturbed consult the EACO or MOL guidelines prior to the start of work to determine the Class/Type of operation(s) and the corresponding control measures (engineering controls, work/hygiene practices, protective clothing and equipment and worker training) necessary to conduct the work in a manner that will prevent worker overexposure to lead. The following table outlines the classification of lead disturbance based on the EACO guideline.

Operation Description

Class 1

1. Removal of lead-containing or lead-based paints and surface coatings with a chemical gel/stripper or paste;

2. Application of lead-containing or lead-based paints and surface coatings with a brush, roller or sponge.

3. Installation or removal of lead sheeting or flashing. 4. Installation or removal of lead-containing packing, babbitt, caulking, gasket or similar

material. 5. Removal of materials coated with lead-containing or lead-based paints and surface

coatings, using non-powered hand tools, where the material remains chiefly intact and is not crumbled, pulverized or powdered.

6. Operating construction or demolition equipment (e.g. excavator, bulldozer) during building renovation or demolition where lead-based paints or surface coatings are present on building materials and are being disturbed.

7. Soldering with lead solder. 8. Removing lead-containing or lead-based paints or surface coatings with a heat gun. 9. Removing lead-containing and lead-based paints and surface coatings using a high-

pressure water jet (e.g. pressure washer).


June 27, 2018




Page 19


Class 2a

1. Removal of lead-containing or lead-based paints and surface coatings or lead-containing materials using a power tool that has an effective dust collection system equipped with a HEPA filter.

2. Welding, torching or high temperature cutting of lead-containing materials indoors when using an effective fume collector or smoke eater that filters and exhausts lead fume and expels it directly outdoors (away from occupants, entrances, walkways, rest areas, etc.). Fume collector or smoke eater must have effective source control and capture velocity, minimum of 0.5 metres per second (100 feet per minute) at the work surface.

3. Welding, torching or high temperature cutting of lead-containing and lead-based paints and surface coatings or lead-containing materials outdoors.

4. Removal of lead-containing mortar using handheld non-powered tools. 5. Removal of lead-containing and lead-based paints and surface coatings or lead-

containing materials by scraping or sanding (including wet sanding) using non-powered hand tools.

6. Demolition of plaster or building components that crumble, pulverize or powder and are covered with lead-containing or lead-based paints or surface coatings.

7. Clean up and removal of a significant amount of lead-containing dust and debris (that can be made easily airborne) using wet methods or HEPA vacuums.

Class 2b 1. Spray application of lead-containing paints and surface coatings

Class 3a

1. Removal of lead-containing or lead-based paints and surface coatings or lead-containing materials using a power tool without an effective dust collection system equipped with a HEPA filter.

2. Welding, torching or high temperature cutting of lead-containing materials indoors or in a confined space (e.g. within a ditch or pit).

3. Removal of lead-containing mortar using a powered cutting device. 4. Burning of a material containing lead. 5. Removal, cleaning or repair of a ventilation system or ductwork used for controlling

lead exposure. 6. Spray application of lead-based paints and surface coatings. 7. In the absence of an exposure assessment:

a. demolition or cleanup of a facility where lead-containing products were manufactured and significant dust and debris, which can be made easily airborne, is present.

b. cleanup of dust and debris down range of a firing station in an indoor firing range.an operation that may expose a worker to lead dust, fume or mist that is not a Class 1, Class 2, or Class 3B operation.

Class 3b 1. Abrasive blasting of lead-containing and lead-based paints and surface coatings or

lead-containing materials (including wet, slurry and dry abrasive blasting and dry-ice blasting).

If practicable, all bulk lead waste materials should be separated from other wastes and sent to a recycling facility. If not practicable, lead-containing waste should be handled and disposed of according to Ontario Regulation 347 (O.Reg. 347), “General – Waste Management”, made under the Environmental Protection Act. Under this regulation (and depending on the quantity of waste generated) the waste may be subject to analysis following the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) to determine if it is a “leachate toxic waste” based on the leachate quality criteria provided in Schedule 4 of the regulation. Such wastes must meet specific treatment requirements (Schedule 5) or undergo alternative treatment for hazardous debris (Schedule 8) prior to land disposal.


June 27, 2018




Page 20

4.1.3 Mercury Mercury vapour is present in fluorescent lamps. If fluorescent lighting requires removal, lamps should be handled with care and kept intact to avoid potential exposure to mercury vapour present within the lamps. Under O.Reg. 347, waste mercury produced in amounts less than 5 kilograms (kg) in any month or otherwise accumulated in an amount less than 5 kg are exempt from hazardous waste registration, treatment and disposal requirements and can be disposed of in landfill as regular waste. Larger quantities of waste mercury must be treated and disposed of in accordance with the requirements of O.Reg. 347. To prevent the release of mercury into the environment it is recommended that all waste lamps are sent to a lamp recycling facility and are not disposed of in landfill. Liquid mercury was observed in thermostats within the assessed areas. Although no mercury was visibly identified in other equipment, dismantling of equipment was not conducted to verify the presence/absence of mercury. It is cautioned that thermometers, barometers and other measuring devices (pressure gauges/sensors, vacuum gauges, manometers, etc.), thermostats and a variety of other electrical switches (temperature sensitive, tilt switches, float switches, etc.) may contain mercury that may not be visible without dismantling the equipment. Such devices should be assumed to contain mercury until proven otherwise and similar precautions to those outlined above should be taken if any of these items are to be disturbed or taken out of service in the future. 4.1.4 Silica Suspect silica-containing materials were identified to be present within the project-specific work area. In their current state, building materials containing silica do not represent a risk to building occupants or construction workers. Risks associated with exposure to silica arise during demolition activities that cause silica dust to be created (particularly grinding, drilling or cutting operations and during major demolition), resulting in a crystalline silica inhalation hazard. If any materials suspected to contain silica are to be removed or otherwise disturbed as a result of renovation/demolition activities it is recommended that procedures be put in place to control the generation of dust (such as routine water misting) and thus reduce the potential for worker exposure. Workers that have the potential to be exposed to airborne silica should also wear appropriate protective clothing and respiratory protection. Any work involving the disturbance of silica-containing materials should follow the procedures outlined in the MOL “Silica on Construction Projects” guideline (April 2011). The appropriate engineering controls, work practices, hygiene practices, personal protective measures and training necessary to conduct the work in a safe manner are provided in this guideline. The general measures and procedures (or Type of operation)


June 27, 2018




Page 21

necessary depends on the type of work to be conducted. The following table outlines the classification of silica disturbance based on the MOL guideline.


Type 1

1. The drilling of holes in concrete or rock that is not part of a tunneling operation or road construction.

2. Milling of asphalt from concrete highway pavement 3. Charging mixers and hoppers with silica sand (sand consisting of at least 95% silica)

or silica flour (finely ground sand consisting of at least 95% silica) 4. Any other operation at a project that requires the handling of silica-containing

material in a way that may results in a worker being exposed to airborne silica. 5. Entry into a dry mortar removal or abrasive blasting area while airborne dust is visible

for less than 15 minutes for inspection and/or sampling. 6. Working within 25 metres of an area where compressed air is being used to remove

silica-containing dust outdoors.

Type 2

1. Removal of silica containing refractory materials with a jackhammer 2. The drilling of holes in concrete or rock that is part of a tunneling or road

construction. 3. The use of a power tool to cut, grind, or polish concrete, masonry, terrazzo or

refractory materials. 4. The use of a power tool to remove silica containing materials. 5. Tunneling (operation of the tunnel boring machine, tunnel drilling, and tunnel mesh

installation). 6. Tuckpoint and surface grinding 7. Dry mortar removal with an electric or pneumatic cutting device 8. Dry method dust cleanup from abrasive blasting operations 9. The use of compress air outdoors for removing silica dust 10. Entry into area where abrasive blasting is being carried out for more than 15 minutes

Type 3 1. Abrasive blasting with an abrasive that contains >1% silica 2. Abrasive blasting or a material that contains >1% silica

4.1.5 Other Designated Substances No other designated substances are expected to be a component of building materials within the surveyed area(s) in a form that would represent an exposure concern. Therefore, no protective measures or procedures specific to acrylonitrile, arsenic, benzene, coke oven emissions, ethylene oxide, isocyanates, and vinyl chloride are considered necessary. 4.2 Other Hazardous Materials 4.2.1 Chemical Hazards As no UFFI was identified or is suspected to be present within the surveyed area(s) no further action is required. However, given that no destructive testing was conducted, there is a remote possibility that UFFI could be hidden within locations such as exterior wall cavities. If suspect foam insulation is identified during renovation/demolition activities work should be stopped and the area should be re-assessed to evaluate


June 27, 2018




Page 22

conditions and determine appropriate control measures and worker protection, if necessary. 4.2.2 Biological Hazards Mould Contamination No mould contamination was identified in the surveyed area(s) and therefore no further action is required at this time. Although no obvious mould contamination or evidence to suggest possible hidden mould contamination was visibly identified within the surveyed area(s) there is still a potential for hidden mould growth to exist behind or underneath building finishes. Should suspect mould growth be discovered during the course of renovation or demolition work it is recommended that all work stop so that the area can be assessed to evaluate proper control measures and remediation protocols in order to avoid worker exposure to mould and possible contamination of adjacent areas. Pest Infestation No visual evidence of any significant pest infestation was observed within the area(s) assessed. Therefore, no additional precautionary measures are deemed necessary for protection against biological contaminants potentially associated with pest infestation. 4.2.3 Environmental Hazards Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) The federal government has set strict regulations for the handling, storage and disposal of PCBs. The PCB Regulations (SOR/2008-273) came into effect on September 5th, 2008 and consolidates and replaces the Chlorobiphenyls Regulations (SOR/91-152) and the Storage of PCB Material Regulations (SOR/92-507). The purpose of the PCB Regulations is to improve the protection of Canada’s environment and the health of Canadians by minimizing the risks posed by the use, storage and release of PCBs by accelerating the elimination of these substances. As of December 31, 2009 all current PCB storage sites are to have been eliminated and there should no longer be any electrical capacitors, electrical transformers, electromagnets, heat transfer equipment or any other equipment in service that contains PCBs at a concentration greater than 500 mg/kg (500 ppm). As of this time, all of this equipment should have been removed from service and sent for destruction. Furthermore, the PCB Regulations restricts the use of equipment containing PCBs (other than light ballasts or pole-top electrical transformers) at concentrations exceeding 50 mg/kg (50 ppm) in sensitive areas (such as drinking water treatment plants, schools, hospitals and senior citizen care facilities) by the same date. All other locations have until December 31, 2025 to decommission equipment containing 50 ppm to 500 ppm PCBs.


June 27, 2018




Page 23

When PCB-containing equipment is taken out of service, jurisdiction falls under provincial regulations. As per Ontario Regulation 347, General - Waste Management, the land disposal of PCB waste is prohibited. PCB wastes in Ontario are regulated under Ontario Regulation 362, Waste Management – PCBs (O.Reg. 362), made under the Environmental Protection Act. Under this regulation, PCB waste is defined as any waste material containing PCBs at a concentration of more than fifty (50) parts per million by weight (i.e. >50mg/kg), with the exception of an electrical capacitor that has never contained over 1 kg of PCB’s. Any PCB-containing equipment taken out of service should be properly handled and disposed of at an authorized destruction facility in accordance with the requirements of Federal Regulation SOR/2008-273 and Ontario Regulation 362. No other sources of PCBs were identified in the areas assessed. Ozone Depleting and Global Warming Substances No equipment was identified within the surveyed area(s) that is expected to contain ozone depleting or global warming substances. As such, no recommendations will be made at this time. 5.0 LIMITATIONS The information and recommendations detailed in this report were carried out by trained professional and technical staff in accordance with generally accepted environmental and industrial hygiene work practices and procedures. Recommendations provided in this report have been generated in accordance with accepted industry guidelines and practices. These guidelines and practices are considered acceptable as of the date of this report. In preparation of this report, Safetech Environmental Limited (SEL) relied on information supplied by others, including without limitation, information pertaining to the history and operation of the site, test results and reports of other consultants and testing services provided by independent laboratories. Except as expressly set out in this report, SEL has not made any independent verification of information provided by independent entities. The collection of samples at the location noted was consistent with the scope of work agreed-upon with the person or entity to whom this report is addressed and the information obtained concerning prior site investigations. As conditions between samples may vary, the potential remains for the presence of unknown additional contaminants for which there were no known indicators.


June 27, 2018




Page 24

The analytical method used for determination of asbestos content meets the requirements of O. Reg. 278/05. However, small asbestos fibres may be missed by PLM due to resolution limitations of the optical microscope. Interfering binder/matrix and/or low asbestos content may also hinder positive identification by PLM. These conditions are common for vermiculite attic insulation (VAI) and non-friable organically bound (NOB) materials such as vinyl floor tiles, roofing materials, mastics and caulking and can lead to “false negative” results. If PLM analytical results for these types of materials indicate no asbestos detected they have been reported as “Presumed Non-ACM”. Due to limitations of the analytical method we cannot confirm that low quantities of asbestos are not present in these samples using solely PLM analysis. Additional analytical procedures should be considered for such materials to rule out false negative results. Conclusions are based on site conditions at the time of inspection and can only be extrapolated to an undefined limited area around inspected locations. The extent of the limited area depends on building construction and conditions. Building materials that are not detailed within this survey due to inaccessibility during the time of survey and/or are uncovered during renovation/demolition activities should be properly assessed by a qualified person prior to their disturbance. SEL cannot warrant against undiscovered environmental liabilities. If any information becomes available that differs from the findings in this report, we request that we be notified immediately to reassess the conclusions provided herein. No other person or entity is entitled to use or rely upon this report without the express written consent of Safetech Environmental Limited and the person or entity to who it is addressed. Any use that a third party makes of this report, or any reliance based on conclusions and recommendations made, are the responsibility of such third parties. SEL accepts no responsibility for damages suffered by third parties as a result of actions based on this report.

Appendix A Condition Assessment Criteria for Asbestos-Containing Materials

The condition of asbestos-containing materials identified within the surveyed area(s) was assessed as Good (G), Fair (F) or Poor (P). The assessment criteria used to determine condition is dependent on material characteristics, such as friability. The following Table summarizes the criteria used by SEL to evaluate the condition of ACM.

Condition Assessment Criteria for Asbestos-Containing Materials

Sprayed Fireproofing, Sprayed Insulation and Sprayed Texture Finishes

Good

Surface shows no significant signs of damage, deterioration, or delamination (i.e. <1%).

Unencapsulated or unpainted fireproofing or texture finishes, where no delamination or damage is observed.

Encapsulated fireproofing or texture finishes where encapsulation applied after damage or fallout.

Fair Not utilized as part of condition assessment for these materials.

Poor Greater than 1% damage, delamination, or deterioration to surface. In areas where damage exists in isolated locations, both Good and Poor may be applicable.

Mechanical Insulation (boilers, breeching, ductwork, piping, tanks, equipment, etc.)

Good Insulation completely covered in jacketing and exhibits no evidence of damage or

deterioration.

Jacketing may have minor damage (i.e. scuffs or stains), but is not penetrated.

Fair

Minor penetrating damage to jacketed insulation (cuts, tears, nicks, deterioration or delamination).

Undamaged insulation that had never been jacketed.

Insulation is exposed but not showing surface disintegration.

Extent of missing insulation ranges from minor to none.

Damage that can be repaired.

Poor Original insulation jacket is missing, damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated.

Insulation is exposed and significant areas have been dislodged.

Damage that cannot be easily repaired.

Non-Friable and Potentially Friable Materials (includes materials such as plaster finishes,

drywall compound, ceiling tiles, asbestos cement products, vinyl asbestos tile and asbestos paper backed vinyl sheet flooring, etc., which have the potential to become friable when handled)

Good

No significant damage.

Material may be cracked or broken but is stable and not likely to become friable upon casual contact.

No friable debris present

Fair Not utilized as part of condition assessment for these materials.

Poor Material is severely damaged.

Debris is present or binder has disintegrated to the point where the material has become friable.

Asbestos-Containing Debris (noted separately from the presumed source material)

Poor Debris is always considered to be in Poor condition.

Appendix B Floor Plans for Areas Assessed

james

Rectangle

james

Text Box

_____________________ Project: Renovation Project _____________________ Location: Moorevale Park Clubhouse 175 Moore Avenue Toronto, Ontario _____________________ Floor: Ground _____________________ Description: Location of Areas Assessed _____________________ Project No.: 167818 Date: July 13, 2018 _____________________

james

Stamp

james

Typewriter

3045 Southcreek Road, Unit 14 Mississauga, Ontario L4X 2X7

james

Text Box

Legend

james

Line

james

Line

paul

Text Box

ACM Vinyl Floor Tiles Notes: Drawings not to be relied upon solely and to be used in conjunction with report.

paul

Rectangle

paul

Snapshot

james

Rectangle

james

Text Box

_____________________ Project: Renovation Project _____________________ Location: Moorevale Park Clubhouse 175 Moore Avenue Toronto, Ontario _____________________ Floor: Basement _____________________ Description: Location of Areas Assessed _____________________ Project No.: 167818 Date: July 13, 2018 _____________________

james

Stamp

james

Typewriter

3045 Southcreek Road, Unit 14 Mississauga, Ontario L4X 2X7

james

Text Box

Legend

james

Line

james

Line

paul

Text Box

ACM Vinyl Floor Tiles Notes: Drawings not to be relied upon solely and to be used in conjunction with report.

paul

Rectangle

paul

Snapshot

Appendix C Laboratory Certificate of Analysis - Asbestos

EMSL Canada Inc.

2756 Slough Street Mississauga, ON L4T 1G3

Phone/Fax: (289) 997-4602 / (289) 997-4607http://www.EMSL.com / [email protected]

55SELI62551807628

167818

EMSL Canada Order ID:

Customer ID:

Customer PO:

Project ID:

Attn:

Proj: 167818-Moorevale Park Clubhouse Renovations DSS

Phone: (905) 624-2722

Fax: (905) 624-4306

Collected: 6/27/2018

Received: 6/28/2018

Analyzed: 7/09/2018

Stephen Choi

Safetech Environmental

3045 Southcreek Road

Unit 14

Mississauga, ON L4X 2X7

Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials for Ontario Regulation 278/05 via

EPA600/R-93/116 Method

Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00011a

Plaster - Tennis Clubhouse Women's Change Room/Washroom

DateTEST Non-Fibrous Asbestos CommentColor Fibrous

Non-AsbestosAnalyzed

6/29/2018 0% 100%PLM Gray/White *None Detected

Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00021b

Plaster - Public Women's Washroom




Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00031c

Plaster - Public Men's Washroom




Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00042a

Drywall Joint Compound Associated with Drywall Finishes - Tennis Clubhouse Men's Change

Room/Washroom



6/29/2018 0% 98% 2% ChrysotilePLM Beige

Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00052b

Drywall Joint Compound Associated with Drywall Finishes - Tennis Clubhouse Women's

Change Room/Washroom



6/29/2018PLM Positive Stop (Not Analyzed)

Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00062c

Drywall Joint Compound Associated with Drywall Finishes - Tennis Clubhouse Women's

Change Room/Washroom Hallway




Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00073a

Brick Mortar - Basement



6/29/2018 0% 100%PLM Gray None Detected

Test Report:EPAMultiTests-7.32.2.D Printed: 7/10/2018 10:14AM Page 1 of 6

EMSL Canada Inc.



55SELI62551807628

167818


Customer ID:

Customer PO:

Project ID:



Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00083b





Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00093c





Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00104a

Ceramic Tile Grout - Tennis Clubhouse Women's Change Room/Washroom



6/30/2018 0% 100%PLM Brown/Gray None Detected

Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00114b





Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00124c





Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00135a

12x12 Blue Vinyl Floor Tile - Tennis Clubhouse Kitchen/Office




Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00145b





Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00155c






EMSL Canada Inc.



55SELI62551807628

167818


Customer ID:

Customer PO:

Project ID:



Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00165a




6/30/2018 0% 100%PLM Blue no associated masticNone Detected

Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00175b





Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00185c





Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00196a-Floor Tile

12x12 White with Green Specs Vinyl Floor Tile - Tennis Clubhouse Men's Change

Room/Washroom



6/30/2018 0% 100%PLM White/Green None Detected

Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-0019A6a-Mastic


Room/Washroom




Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00206b


Room/Washroom



6/30/2018 0% 100%PLM White/Green no associated masticNone Detected

Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00216c


Room/Washroom



6/30/2018 0% 100%PLM White/Green no associated masticNone Detected

Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00227a

12x12 Pink Vinyl Floor Tile - Tennis Clubhouse Women's Change Room/Washroom



6/30/2018 0% 100%PLM Brown/Pink no associated masticNone Detected


EMSL Canada Inc.



55SELI62551807628

167818


Customer ID:

Customer PO:

Project ID:



Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00237b





Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00247c





Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:


12x12 Beige Vinyl Floor Tile - Lawn Bowling Women's Staff Washroom



6/30/2018 0% 100%PLM Beige None Detected

Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:





7/09/2018 0% 100%PLM Black None Detected

Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00268b-Floor Tile





Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-0026A8b-Mastic





Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00278c-Floor Tile





Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-0027A8c-Mastic






EMSL Canada Inc.



55SELI62551807628

167818


Customer ID:

Customer PO:

Project ID:



Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:


9x9 Grey with White Streaks Vinyl Floor Tile - Tennis Clubhouse Kitchen/Office



6/30/2018 0% 97% 3% ChrysotilePLM Gray

Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:






Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00299b-Floor Tile





Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-0029A9b-Mastic





Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-00309c-Floor Tile





Client Sample ID:

Sample Description:

Lab Sample ID: 551807628-0030A9c-Mastic






EMSL Canada Inc.



55SELI62551807628

167818


Customer ID:

Customer PO:

Project ID:



PLM: * - Layers combined prior to analysis at client request

Analyst(s):

PLM (26)Ioana Taina

PLM (7)Michelle Lung

Matthew Davis or other approved signatory

or Other Approved Signatory

Reviewed and approved by:

None Detected = <0.1%. EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. This report relates only to the samples reported above and may

not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical

method limitations. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. Samples received in good condition unless

otherwise noted. This report must not be used to claim product endorsement by NVLAP of any agency of the U.S. Government.

Samples analyzed by EMSL Canada Inc. Mississauga, ON NVLAP Lab Code 200877-0Report amended: 07/10/201810:14:19 Replaces initial report from: 06/30/201812:39:00 Reason Code: Client-Change to Appearance


Appendix D Laboratory Certificate of Analysis - Lead

Client Sample Description ConcentrationLab ID Analyzed WeightLead

Collected

EMSL Canada Inc.2756 Slough Street, Mississauga, ON L4T 1G3

Phone/Fax: (289) 997-4602 / (289) 997-4607

http://www.EMSL.com [email protected]

Attn: Stephen Choi

Safetech Environmental

3045 Southcreek Road

Unit 14

Mississauga, ON L4X 2X7

Received: 06/28/18 3:46 PM

167818-Moorevale Park Clubhouse Renovations DSS

Fax: (905) 624-4306

Phone: (905) 624-2722

Project:

6/27/2018Collected:

Test Report: Lead in Paint Chips by Flame AAS (SW 846 3050B/7000B)*

551807621

CustomerID: 55SELI62

CustomerPO: 167818

ProjectID:

EMSL Canada Or

0.2425

Site: Grey Paint on Wood Finish Exterior Wall

551807621-0001L-01 0.96 % wt6/29/2018 g6/27/2018

Page 1 of 1

Rowena Fanto, Lead Supervisor

or other approved signatory

Test Report ChmSnglePrm/nQC-7.32.3 Printed: 7/3/2018 12:11:04 PM

*Analysis following Lead in Paint by EMSL SOP/Determination of Environmental Lead by FLAA. Reporting limit is 0.010 % wt based on the minimum sample weight per our SOP. Unless noted, results in this report are not blank corrected. This report relates only to the samples reported above and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. "<" (less than) result signifies that the analyte was not detected at or above the reporting limit. Measurement of uncertainty is available upon request. The QC data associated with the sample results included in this report meet the recovery and precision requirements unless specifically indicated otherwise. Definitions of modifications are available upon request.

Samples analyzed by EMSL Canada Inc. Mississauga, ON A2LA Accredited Environmental Testing Cert #2845.08

Initial report from 07/03/2018 12:11:04

http://www.EMSL.com

mailto:[email protected]

Appendix E Site Photographs

P1 – Tennis Club Men’s Change Room/Washroom

Typical view of drywall joint compound associated with drywall finishes within the surveyed area sampled and found to contain 2% Chrysotile asbestos.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS SPACE

P2 – Tennis Clubhouse Kitchen/Office

Typical view of 9x9 grey with white streaks vinyl floor tiles within the surveyed area sampled and found to contain 3% Chrysotile asbestos.

Appendix F Background Information on Designated Substances and Other Hazardous Materials

DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES The Occupational Health and Safety Act of Ontario (OHSA) allows for certain toxic substances to be especially designated. The OHSA defines a designated substance as “a biological, chemical or physical agent or combination thereof prescribed as a designated substance to which the exposure of a worker is prohibited, regulated, restricted, limited or controlled.” Ontario Regulation 490/09 - Designated Substances (O.Reg. 490/09), made under the Occupational Health and Safety Act outlines required steps to control exposure of workers to designated substances. Under O.Reg. 490/09 there are eleven (11) designated substances; acrylonitrile, arsenic, asbestos, benzene, coke oven emissions, ethylene oxide, isocyanates, lead, mercury, silica and vinyl chloride. This regulation applies to every employer and worker at a workplace where the designated substances are present, produced, processed, used, handled or stored and at which a worker is likely to be exposed to the designated substance. Section 14 of O.Reg. 490/09 exempts an employer and the workers of an employer who engage in construction from the requirements of the regulation. However, designated substances are still required to be identified prior to the beginning of a demolition or renovation project to ensure that construction workers (and potentially building occupants) are adequately protected from the hazards posed by the presence of these materials if the planned work may cause them to be disturbed. Accordingly, under Section 30 of the OHSA building owners are required to perform an assessment to determine whether any designated substances are present at the project site before the beginning of the project. The owner is also required to prepare a list of designated substances that are present at the site and provide this list to prospective constructors before entering into a binding contract with the constructor. This way, contractors and construction workers are made aware of designated substances present within the work area so that appropriate measures can be taken during the work to limit exposure to these substances. Designated Substances and Hazardous Materials Assessments are conducted to conform to the requirements of Section 30 of the OHSA. The assessments are performed to identify designated substances (and other hazardous materials) within the work area that may present a hazard to workers if disturbed. These substances are commonly a component of building materials or equipment found in buildings. Additional information regarding the eleven designated substances including their properties, uses and health effects are provided below.

Acrylonitrile Acrylonitrile (ACN) is a clear, colourless or pale yellow liquid with a pungent onion- or garlic-like, irritating odour. It is highly flammable and as such is a severe fire and explosion hazard. Acrylonitrile is used mainly as a monomer or comonomer in the production of acrylic fibres, plastics, resins and nitrile rubbers. Historically, a mixture of acrylonitrile and carbon tetrachloride was used as a pesticide; however, all pesticide uses have stopped. Based on its use as a chemical intermediate, exposure to acrylonitrile is primarily occupational, via inhalation during its manufacture and use. Therefore, this designated substance is not expected to be encountered in buildings where it is not either produced or used in a manufacturing process. Acute (short-term) exposure of workers to acrylonitrile has been observed to cause mucous membrane irritation, headaches, dizziness, and nausea. More significant exposures may lead to symptoms such as limb weakness, labored and irregular breathing, impaired judgment, cyanosis, collapse, and convulsions. Exposure of the skin to high concentrations of acrylonitrile in the air may irritate the skin and cause it to turn red while direct skin contact with acrylonitrile may cause the skin to blister and peel. The International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) concluded that there is inadequate evidence in humans for the carcinogenicity of acrylonitrile, but has classified it as possibly carcinogenic to humans (Group 2B). Arsenic Arsenic is a naturally occurring mineral, widely distributed in the earth's crust. Elemental arsenic (sometimes referred to as metallic arsenic) is a silver-gray or white brittle metal. However, arsenic is usually found in the environment combined with other elements such as oxygen, chlorine, and sulfur to form inorganic arsenic compounds. Arsenic has no odor and is almost tasteless. Arsenic and its compounds have a variety of commercial uses. Inorganic arsenic compounds are mainly used as a wood preservative. Copper chromated arsenic (CCA) is used to make "pressure-treated" lumber. CCA-treated wood is no longer used for residential applications but may still be used in industrial applications. Arsenic is also used in metallurgy for hardening copper, lead and certain metal alloys, in pigment production, in the manufacture of certain types of glass, and in semiconductors and light-emitting diodes. Inorganic arsenic compounds are no longer used as pesticides in agriculture; however, organic arsenic compounds, namely cacodylic acid, disodium methylarsenate (DSMA), and monosodium methylarsenate (MSMA), are used, as yet, as pesticides – principally on cotton.

Today, workplace exposure to arsenic may still occur in some occupations that use arsenic, such as copper or lead smelting, wood treating, or pesticide application. Exposure to arsenic within buildings other than where it is used as part of the manufacturing process is unlikely and therefore arsenic is not expected to be encountered as part of a routine hazardous building materials assessment. Human exposure to arsenic can cause both short and long term health effects. Short-term or acute effects can occur within hours or days of exposure. If you breathe high levels of inorganic arsenic, then you are likely to experience a sore throat and irritated lungs. Longer exposure at lower concentrations can lead to skin effects (such as darkened patches of skin and areas of thickened skin), and also to circulatory and peripheral nervous disorders. An important concern is the ability of inhaled inorganic arsenic to increase the risk of cancer. Long term exposure to arsenic has been linked to cancer of the bladder, lungs, skin, kidneys, nasal passages, liver and prostate. The IARC classifies arsenic and arsenic compounds as "carcinogenic to humans" (Group 1). Asbestos Asbestos is the name given to a number of naturally occurring fibrous minerals found in the environment. Ontario Regulation 490/09 (Designated Substances) defines asbestos as any one of the following fibrous silicates: actionlite; amosite; anthophyllite; chrysotile; crocidolite; and tremolite. Asbestos fibres have several desirable characteristics such as high textile strength, the ability to be spun and woven, and resistance to heat and most chemicals. These characteristics have resulted in the historical use of asbestos in a wide variety of building materials and other manufactured goods. Examples of products where asbestos has been used include roofing shingles, ceiling and floor tiles, insulation, sprayed fireproofing, gaskets, and friction products such as automotive brakes and clutches. The peak years for asbestos use were in the 1960s and early 1970s. Therefore, asbestos is commonly found in building materials of this era. The use of asbestos in building materials and other products has decreased significantly since this time. Friable asbestos-containing materials (material that when dry can be crumbled, pulverized or powdered by hand pressure), such as sprayed fireproofing and sprayed insulation, ceased use circa 1973. Mechanical thermal system insulation ceased use circa 1981 while sprayed acoustic texture coat finishes ceased use circa 1982. Non-friable asbestos-containing materials were generally manufactured for a longer period of time (with the exception of plaster finishes which ceased use circa 1960’s). Asbestos-containing drywall joint compound ceased use circa 1980. Vinyl floor tiles, vinyl sheet flooring and acoustic ceiling tile ceased use 1982. Other non-friable materials continued to be produced into the 1990’s, including roofing materials (ceased use circa 1991) and floor adhesives (ceased use circa 1992). Today, asbestos is a controlled substance, and is banned for use in most products sold in Canada under the Hazardous

Products Act (with the exception of certain roof shingles, clutch facings and brake linings). Potentially harmful exposure to asbestos occurs through inhalation of air containing asbestos fibres. The greatest risk for workplace exposure to airborne asbestos is in occupations that produce and use asbestos, such as in mining and milling operations or in the manufacture of products containing asbestos. Exposure to airborne asbestos fibres may also occur to construction workers, trades people, maintenance workers and other building occupants in buildings constructed with asbestos-containing materials; especially during building renovations or repairs or if the materials are in poor condition or are otherwise disturbed. Health risks associated with asbestos exposure are dependent on several factors such as the type and airborne concentration of asbestos, and period of exposure. In general, the greater the exposure to asbestos, the greater the chance of developing harmful health effects. Typically, chronic, daily exposure to elevated airborne concentrations of asbestos over a period of years is required for health effects to eventually manifest themselves. Health effects associated with exposure to asbestos can result in asbestosis (a scarring of the lungs which makes breathing difficult), mesothelioma (a rare cancer of the lining of the chest or abdominal cavity) and lung cancer. The link between exposure to asbestos and other types of cancers and health effects is less clear. Benzene Benzene is a clear, colourless liquid with a characteristic, sweet or aromatic hydrocarbon odour. It is a liquid at room temperature but evaporates into the air very quickly, making it a highly flammable vapour as well as an extremely flammable liquid. Benzene is formed from both natural processes and human activities. Natural sources of benzene include volcanoes and forest fires. Benzene is also a natural part of crude oil, gasoline, and cigarette smoke. It is produced from petroleum and coal sources and is used mainly in the manufacture of other chemicals which are used to make plastics, resins, and nylon and synthetic fibers. Benzene is also used to make some types of rubbers, lubricants, dyes, detergents, drugs, and pesticides. Exposure to pure benzene within buildings other than where it is produced or used as part of a manufacturing process is unlikely. Therefore benzene is not expected to be encountered as part of a routine hazardous building materials assessment. Exposure to benzene primarily occurs through inhalation of airborne vapours. Short-term (acute) health effects associated with overexposure to benzene vapours can result in symptoms such as headache, nausea, dizziness, drowsiness and confusion, with unconsciousness or even death at very high levels. Long-term (chronic) exposure to

Benzene may cause blood and bone marrow effects which can lead to anemia and leukemia (cancer of the blood-forming organs) as well as cause damage to the immune system, increasing the chance for infection. The IARC classifies benzene as "carcinogenic to humans" (Group 1). Coke Oven Emissions Coke Oven Emissions refers to the benzene soluble fraction of total particulate matter emitted during the destructive distillation or carbonization of coal for the production of coke (pure carbon). These emissions are a mixture of coal tar, coal tar pitch, volatiles (including benzene, toluene and xylene), creosote, polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs – including benzo(a)pyrene, benzanthracene, chrysene and phenanthrene), and metals (including cadmium, arsenic, beryllium and chromium). Condensed coke oven emissions are a brownish, thick liquid or semisolid with a naphthalene-like odor, while uncondensed coke oven emissions are vapors that escape when the ovens are changed and emptied and are a component of fugitive emissions. The coke produced is used as a component in the manufacturing of iron and steel. Coke is also used to synthesize calcium carbide and to manufacture graphite and elec-trodes. Additional chemicals recovered from the coke oven emissions (such as benzene, toluene, naphthalene, sulfur, and ammonium sulfate) are used as raw materials for plastics, solvents, dyes, drugs, waterproofing, paints, pipecoating, roads, roofing, insulation, and as pesticides and sealants. Coke oven emissions would only be present within facilities producing or using coke as part of the manufacturing process and thus occupational exposure is limited to those workers in the aluminum, steel, graphite, electrical, and construction industries. Therefore, coke oven emissions are not a contaminant of concern during a routine hazardous building materials assessment. Chronic (long-term) exposure to coke oven emissions can result in chronic bronchitis (particularly those who smoke) and additional health effects such as conjunctivitis, severe dermatitis, and lesions of the respiratory system and digestive system. However, the greatest concern regarding chronic exposure to coke oven emissions is the increased risk of cancer. The IARC classifies coke production as "carcinogenic to humans" (Group 1). The site at which excess cancer rates have been identified most commonly among workers in coke production is the lung. Excess risk for kidney cancer has also been associated with work in coke plants. Additional studies have also reported excess risks for other types of cancers such as cancer of the large intestine and pancreas.

Ethylene Oxide Ethylene oxide is colourless gas with a somewhat sweet odour. It is extremely flammable and also dangerously reactive. Ethylene oxide exists as a compressed gas that has been produced since the early 1900s. It is used primarily as a chemical intermediate in the production of ethylene glycol, glycol ethers, nonionic surfactants and other industrial chemicals. Much smaller amounts are used as a non-explosive mixture with nitrogen or carbon dioxide for sterilizing medical instruments and supplies in hospitals and industrially for the fumigation of spices.

Most people are not likely to be exposed to ethylene oxide because it is not commonly found in the environment. Exposure to ethylene oxide is generally limited to those facilities where it is made or used. Therefore, ethylene oxide is not a contaminant of concern during a routine hazardous building materials assessment, although the presence of it should be determined in buildings such as hospitals if construction activities are to occur in or adjacent to areas where it is used or stored.

Exposure to ethylene oxide can result in irritation to the skin or eyes; however, the greatest risk for health effects is through inhalation. This can result in irritation to the nose, throat and respiratory tract, with damage to the central nervous system at higher concentrations. Exposure to high concentrations may cause headache, nausea, dizziness, drowsiness, and incoordination. Exposure to ethylene oxide is also a cancer hazard and possible reproductive hazard. In epidemiological studies of exposure to ethylene oxide, the most frequently reported association has been with lymphatic and haematopoietic cancer. The IARC has concluded that there is limited evidence for the carcinogenicity of ethylene oxide in humans and sufficient evidence for carcinogenicity in experimental animals, classifying ethylene oxide as “carcinogenic to humans” (Group 1). Isocyanates Isocyanates are a family of highly reactive, low molecular weight, manufactured chemicals containing one or more isocyanate groups (-NCO). An isocyanate that has two isocyanate groups is known as a diisocyanate, which are the most common type of isocyanates used for manufacturing other products. The most commonly used diisocyanates include methylene diphenyl diisocyanate (MDI), toluene diisocyanate (TDI), and hexamethylene diisocyanate (HDI). When isocyanates are combined with other compounds that contain free hydroxyl functional groups (i.e. –OH) they react and begin to form polyurethane polymers. These polyurethanes find significant application in the manufacture of rigid and flexible foams. Flexible foam is primarily used for cushioning, while rigid foam is used mainly for insulation. Polyurethanes are also used in the production of adhesives, elastomers, and

coatings and are increasingly used in the automobile industry, autobody repair, and building insulation materials. This diversity of applications means that exposures to isocyanates can occur in a broad range of production facilities from small workshops to automated production lines. Jobs that may involve exposure to isocyanates include painting, foam-blowing, and the manufacture of many polyurethane products. Exposure to isocyanates within buildings where it is not produced or used as part of manufacturing is unlikely, as products such as rigid foam insulation that may be used in buildings has already undergone the curing process. Completely cured products are fully reacted and therefore are considered to be inert and non-toxic. However, some products such as spray foams, coatings, sealants and adhesives may be sold and used in an uncured form. An example would be an adhesive, which is sold to be initially applied in an uncured form and as it cures (hardens), bonds two pieces of wood together. Such products can provide potential exposure to building occupants and construction workers during the application and use of these products. However, for the purposes of a routine hazardous building materials assessment, products that may have contained isocyanate as part of the manufacturing process (e.g. rigid foam) or during the application/installation process (e.g. spray foam, adhesives and sealants) are assumed to be fully cured and would no longer contain free isocyanate. Direct skin contact with isocyanates can cause marked skin irritation, resulting in reddening, swelling and blistering. However the greatest route of exposure to isocyanates is through inhalation of fine vapours or droplets. Airborne exposure to isocyanates can result in irritation to the mucous membranes of the eyes and respiratory tracts. This results in symptoms such as excessive tear secretion, dry throat, dry cough, chest pains and difficulty in breathing. Isocyanates are also a major cause of work-related asthma worldwide. Increased exposure to isocyanates can lead to sensitization. Once sensitized, individuals are subject to severe asthma attacks (which in some cases has been reported to result in death) if they are re-exposed. Lead Lead is a naturally occurring metal found in small amounts in the earth's crust. It is usually found in ore with zinc, silver and (most abundantly) copper, and is extracted together with these metals. Metallic lead is bluish-white in colour but soon tarnishes to a dull grey when exposed to air. When melted into liquid form it has a shiny chrome-silver appearance. Lead is soft, dense, highly malleable and resistant to corrosion, with poor electrical conductivity as compared to most other metals. Such properties have resulted in lead being used in many applications, including products and materials commonly found in buildings. It is present as a component of lead-acid batteries, ammunition, PVC plastics, and older brass and chrome-plated brass faucets. As a building component,

lead has been used in water distribution piping, as an alloy in solder, in electrical conduits, roofs and roofing details, and as an additive to paints, ceramic glazes and mortars as pigments or for anti-corrosion properties. Lead has also used as sheeting inside buildings for shielding X-rays and for sound attenuation. Exposure to lead can occur for workers in workplaces that produce the above materials but also to construction workers, building maintenance personnel and the general population due to the widespread historical use of lead in building materials and consumer products. Most exposure to lead occurs through ingestion or inhalation, with the health effects being the same. Overexposure to lead can result in damage to nervous connections and can cause blood and brain disorders, severe damage to the kidneys and ultimately death. Infants and young children are especially vulnerable to the health effects of lead, as overexposure has been proven to result in the permanent reduction in cognitive capacity. In pregnant women, high levels of exposure to lead may cause miscarriage. The IARC has concluded that lead and inorganic lead compounds are “possibly carcinogenic to humans” (Group 2B). The known serious health effects associated with lead exposure has brought about widespread reduction in its use. The use of lead in building materials and consumer products has decreased substantially since the 1970s to where lead is no longer being used in building materials and consumer products or is present at significantly lower concentrations. For example, unleaded gasoline was introduced in Canada in 1975, after which leaded gasoline was phased out and banned in 1990. Lead-based solder has been banned since the1980s and most solder used today is either lead-free or has very low lead concentrations. Up until the 1960s, lead was added to paints in significant quantities. Since that time, the concentration of lead in paint has decreased. The federal government began reducing the amount of lead allowed in interior paint in 1976 (to 0.5% by weight). By 1991, paint manufacturers in Canada and the U.S. voluntarily stopped adding lead to paint, reducing lead concentrations to background levels. In 2005 the Surface Coating Materials Regulations came into effect to limit the concentration of lead in paint (to 0.06% by weight) for both interior and exterior paints sold to consumers. This was since amended in 2011 to further reduce the allowable lead limit (to 0.009% by weight) and extended to include all consumer paints and coatings. Mercury Mercury is a naturally occurring element found in the earth's crust, with natural deposits generally found as a vermilion red ore called cinnabar. Mercury can exist as metallic mercury, organic mercury or inorganic mercury. Metallic or elemental mercury has unique properties as compared to other metals. It is the only pure metal that is a liquid at room temperature, having a silvery-white, shiny appearance. Mercury is the densest liquid known, which produces a colourless, odourless vapour at room temperature.

The unique properties of mercury have resulted in it being used in a wide variety of applications. Properties such as its coefficient of expansion and ability to conduct electricity has resulted in mercury being used in thermometers, barometers and other measuring devices (blood pressure gauges, vacuum gauges, manometers, etc.), thermostats and a variety of other electrical switches (temperature sensitive, tilt switches, float switches, etc.). Mercury is also used in antifouling paints, dry cell or button batteries and numerous lighting products, including fluorescent lamps and a variety of High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps such as mercury vapor, metal halide and high pressure sodium lamps. HID lamps are used for street lights, floodlights and industrial lighting applications. Because of the wide variety of uses mercury can be found as a component of machinery, equipment and lighting within buildings; although many of its uses have been phased out over the years. The health effects of mercury exposure depend on its chemical form (elemental, inorganic or organic), the route of exposure (inhalation, ingestion or skin contact), and the level of exposure. Vapours from liquid elemental mercury and methyl mercury are more easily absorbed than inorganic mercury salts and can, therefore, cause more harm. Exposure to mercury occurs mainly from breathing contaminated air or ingesting contaminated water and food. Mercury is a neurotoxin, which means it can adversely affect the central nervous system. Upon exposure, mercury tends to accumulate quickly in the brain where it tightly binds with the tissue and is released at a very slow rate. The nervous system effects of mercury toxicity are sometimes referred to as "Mad Hatter's Disease" since mercurous nitrate was used in making felt hats. High levels of exposure to mercury can also lead to harmful effects on the digestive and respiratory systems, and the kidneys. Many mercury compounds may also be teratogenic or capable of causing birth defects. Mercury compounds can also be toxic at low levels in the environment. The characteristics of mercury that make it an environmental problem are its toxicity and persistence in the environment, and its ability to accumulate and bioconcentrate as methyl mercury in fish and fish-eating predators such as large fish or loons. Therefore, proper disposal of mercury-containing materials is essential. The improper disposal of mercury-containing products such as fluorescent light bulb tubes, high intensity discharge lamps, mercury vapour lamps, mercury thermometers and thermostats can lead to the release of mercury from municipal landfills. Used fluorescent and HID lamps may be classified as hazardous waste due to their mercury content and should be recycled if possible rather than being disposed of in landfill. Silica Silica (silicon dioxide) is the name of a group of minerals that contain silicon and oxygen in a chemical combination and have the general formula SiO2. It is one of the most common minerals in the earth’s crust. Silica can be present as crystalline silica (free silica) or amorphous silica (combined silica), and exists in many forms. The three most

common crystalline forms of silica encountered in the workplace environment are quartz, tridymite, and cristobalite. Quartz is by far the most common crystalline silica found in nature, being abundant in most rock types, notably granites, sandstones, quartzites and in sands and soils. Cristobalite and tridymite are found in volcanic rocks. Amorphous silica is found in nature as biogenic silica and as silica glass of volcanic origin. One form of biogenic silica, diatomaceous earth, originates from the skeletons of diatoms deposited on sea floors. From a health perspective it is the crystalline silica forms that raise the biggest concerns. Silica is present in numerous building materials and products, including concrete, brick, stone, terrazzo, refractory brick, etc. Low concentrations of silica are also possible in plaster, drywall, acoustical ceiling tiles, drywall joint compound, mortars and adhesives. Because of the wide usage of quartz-containing materials, workers may be exposed to crystalline silica in a large variety of industries and occupations. Occupational exposure to silica dust occurs in cement and brick manufacturing, asphalt pavement manufacturing, china and ceramic manufacturing and the tool and die, steel and foundry industries. Exposure to silica also occurs during many different construction and maintenance activities. The most severe exposures to crystalline silica result from abrasive blasting activities using silica sand. Other activities that may produce crystalline silica dust include jack hammering, rock/well drilling, concrete mixing, concrete drilling, tuck pointing, and brick and concrete block cutting and sawing. Additionally, crystalline silica exposures occur in the maintenance, repair and replacement of refractory brick furnace linings. Adverse health effects associated with silica exposure result from inhalation of the respirable fraction of crystalline silica, which can arise from many of the activities outlined above. The main health effects associated with silica exposure are lung cancer and silicosis. The IARC has concluded that crystalline silica inhaled in the form of quartz or cristobalite from occupational sources is “carcinogenic to Humans” (Group 1). Silicosis is caused by scarring of the lung tissue from breathing in silica dust. This scarring is permanent and causes a reduction in the lungs’ ability to take in oxygen, making it difficult to breathe and in severe cases can be disabling, or even fatal. Since silicosis affects lung function, it also makes one more susceptible to lung infections like tuberculosis. Vinyl Chloride Vinyl chloride is a manufactured substance that does not occur naturally. It is used as a chemical intermediate and not an end product. Vinyl chloride exists in liquid form if kept under high pressure or at low temperatures. At room temperature, it is a colourless gas. It burns easily and is not stable at high temperatures. Most of the vinyl chloride produced is used to make a polymer called polyvinyl chloride (PVC). PVC is used to make a variety of plastic products including pipes, wire and

cable coatings, vinyl flooring, vinyl wallpaper and window frames. It is also used to make furniture, upholstery and packaging materials. One of the concerns regarding PVC is that upon burning it will emit toxic fumes. Contaminants emitted when PVC is burned include hydrochloric acid, carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide, along with lesser amounts of dioxin and furan. Vinyl chloride is reported to be slightly irritating to the eyes and respiratory tract in humans. Central nervous system effects (including dizziness, drowsiness, fatigue, headache, visual and/or hearing disturbances, memory loss, and sleep disturbances) as well as peripheral nervous system symptoms (peripheral neuropathy, tingling, numbness, weakness, and pain in fingers) have been reported in workers exposed to vinyl chloride. Short-term (acute) exposure to extremely high levels of vinyl chloride has also reportedly caused loss of consciousness, lung and kidney irritation, and inhibition of blood clotting in humans. The most significant health effect associated with exposure to vinyl chloride is that it is a known human carcinogen that causes a rare cancer of the liver. It has been classified by the IARC as “carcinogenic to humans” (Group 1). Brain cancer, lung cancer, and some cancers of the blood also may be connected with breathing vinyl chloride over long periods. OTHER HAZARDOUS MATERIALS CHEMICAL HAZARDS Urea Formaldehyde Foam Insulation Urea-formaldehyde foam insulation (UFFI) was developed in as an improved means of insulating difficult-to-reach cavities. It was typically made at the construction site from a mixture of urea-formaldehyde resin, a foaming agent and compressed air. When the mixture is injected into the wall, urea and formaldehyde unite and "cure" into an insulating foam plastic. Its appearance is like ordinary shaving cream. Dry, it can be a white or tan colour, and fluffy like styrofoam. Over time UFFI shrinks significantly and may begin to degrade due to its crumbly texture. UFFI was installed primarily in wall cavities during the 1970's as an energy conservation measure. The insulation was used most extensively from 1975 to 1978, during the period of the Canadian Home Insulation Program (CHIP), when financial incentives were offered by the government to upgrade home insulation levels. In addition to detached homes it can be found in common areas and walls of semi-detached homes, apartment buildings and condominiums. UFFI was also used to a lesser degree in some commercial and industrial buildings. UFFI installation has been banned in Canada under the Hazardous Products Act (HPA) since December, 1980 due to concerns regarding the health effects of exposure to formaldehyde. Formaldehyde is a colourless, pungent-smelling gas. Health effects

include eye, nose, and throat irritation; wheezing and coughing; fatigue; skin rash; nausea; headache; dizziness; and severe allergic reactions. Sometimes, a slight excess of formaldehyde was often added to ensure complete "curing" with the urea to produce the urea-formaldehyde foam. The excess formaldehyde was given off after installation during the initial curing process, which typically took a few days to a week to complete. UFFI was sometimes improperly installed or used in locations where it should not have been, resulting in continued off-gassing of formaldehyde past the initial curing stage. Since UFFI was last installed in 1980, it should have little effect on indoor formaldehyde levels today. However, if UFFI comes in contact with water or moisture, it could begin to break down. Due to the age of the insulation UFFI may also begin to degrade and crumble into a fine powder. Under these conditions UFFI may release more formaldehyde and consideration should be given to removing the material using properly trained remediation personnel. BIOLOGICAL HAZARDS Mould Mould is part of the fungi kingdom, which also includes mushrooms and yeasts. They are a naturally occurring and essential part of our environment since they break down dead organic material in the outdoor environment (such as leaves, wood and other plant debris), which they use as a food source. Mould reproduces by means of tiny spores that are so small they can’t be seen by the naked eye. Because of their small size mould spores easily become airborne and can travel long distances, entering indoor environments through ventilation systems, open windows or doors, or tracked in on footwear. Therefore, mould spores are a commonly detected in indoor air and as a component of settled dust. Under normal conditions, the presence of indoor mould is not an issue. However, if conditions exist that allow it to grow and multiply indoors it can become a potential hazard. Several factors will affect what moulds will grow within a building and how fast they will grow. This includes parameters such as temperature, airflow, and the pH (i.e. acidity/alkalinity) of the food substrate. However, the most important parameter affecting mould growth is water availability, as all moulds need some amount of moisture for them to be able to grow. Buildings that have had a history of water damage are at greater risk of indoor mould growth. Indoor mould growth may present a risk to the building structure itself through decomposition of building materials. Health risks to building occupants may also occur as a result of indoor mould growth. Construction or renovation work which disturbs mould-contaminated materials increases this risk of exposure to building occupants and the construction workers themselves. Health effects associated with exposure to mould

most commonly results in allergic type reactions such as runny nose, cough, congestion, eye irritation and aggravation of asthma, headache and fatigue. Exposure to very high concentrations of airborne mould spores (such as those that may be observed during disturbance of mould-contaminated building materials) can result in more serious health effects such as Organic Dust Toxic Syndrome (ODTS) or Hypersensitivity Pneumonitis (HP), where flu-like symptoms (fever, chills, cough, fatigue, shortness of breath, body aches, etc.) are exhibited. The chronic form of HP may occur from long-term exposure to lower levels of mould and results in a continued worsening in shortness of breath or cough. A variety of species of mould have also been documented to cause serious invasive infections, which are generally limited to individuals whose immune systems are already somehow compromised. Pest Infestation Areas currently or previously infested by pests (including birds, bats, rodents, raccoons, cockroaches, etc.) can result in potential exposure to numerous biological hazards that can be viral, bacterial, fungal or parasitic in nature. This can occur through exposure to their droppings, urine or saliva. Bird and bat droppings should be presumed to be contaminated with the fungi Histoplasma capsulatum and/or Cryptococcus neoformans. These fungi grow well in the high nutrient content of accumulated bird and bat excrement and can cause respiratory infections in workers exposed during construction or maintenance activities that cause the droppings to be disturbed and the fungi to become airborne. Histoplasmosis is an infectious disease caused by inhaling the spores of Histoplasma capsulatum. After an exposure, how ill a person becomes varies greatly and most likely depends on the number of spores inhaled and a person's age and susceptibility to the disease. The mildest form of histoplasmosis produces no signs or symptoms, but severe infections can cause serious problems throughout your body as well as in your lungs. Otherwise healthy people who've had intense exposure to H. capsulatum may experience a form of the disease known as acute symptomatic pulmonary histoplasmosis. Typical symptoms include fever, muscle aches, headache, dry cough, chest pain, sweating and loss of appetite. Cryptococcosis is an infectious disease caused by inhaling the spores of Cryptococcus neoformans. Once inhaled, infection with cryptococcosis may go away on its own, remain in the lungs only, or spread throughout the body. Most cases occur to people with a weakened immune system, such as those with HIV infection, taking high doses of corticosteroid medications, cancer chemotherapy, or who have Hodgkin’s disease. In people with a normal immune system, the lung (pulmonary) form of the infection may have no symptoms. In people with weakened immune systems, the cryptococcus organism may spread to the brain. Most people with this infection have

meningoencephalitis (swelling and irritation of the brain and spinal cord) when they are diagnosed. Rodents such as deer mice may be infected with Hantavirus, which can be shed in their urine, saliva and droppings. Exposure to Hantavirus can result in a serious respiratory illness called hantavirus pulmonary syndrome (HPS). Initially, infected individuals exhibit flu-like symptoms, including fever and body aches which progresses to shortness of breath and coughing which rapidly becomes more severe. Exposure to Hantavirus in Canada is rare and Health Canada has only found the virus in a very small percentage of deer mice tested in Northern Ontario. A raccoon latrine (i.e. an area where they repeatedly deposit fresh feces on top of old feces) may contain microscopic roundworm (Baylisascaris procyonis) eggs that can potentially be hazardous to human health. Once deposited in the environment, the eggs develop into an infectious form; and if inadvertently ingested by humans, the larvae hatch out of the eggs and may penetrate the body’s organs. Larvae travel through the body and may cause serious eye disease, spinal cord or brain damage or death. Raccoon roundworm disease is not contracted by inhalation nor has any case of inhalation of roundworm eggs been documented. Exposure to animal dander, scales, fur, urine, feces and saliva can also result in exposure to certain proteins that can act as allergens and can also cause asthmatic reactions. Some common sources of pest-related allergens include cockroaches, dust mites and rodents. The protein in urine from rats and mice is a potent allergen. Cockroach allergens are also potent and are derived from several sources, such as saliva, fecal material, secretions, cast skins, debris, and dead bodies. Allergic reactions occur when sensitized persons inhale, swallow or touch traces of the allergen, resulting in an exaggerated reaction of the body’s immune system to the foreign protein. Typical allergic reactions result in nasal, eye, and throat irritation as well as possible skin hives. These proteins may also trigger asthma attacks when sensitive individuals inhale the proteins, resulting in symptoms such as coughing, wheezing, chest tightness, and breathing difficulties. ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS Polychlorinated Biphenyls

Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) are a class of man-made organic chemicals known as chlorinated hydrocarbons. They vary in consistency from thin, light-coloured liquids to yellow or black waxy solids. They were manufactured in the United States from 1929 until their manufacture was banned in 1979. Although PCBs were not manufactured in Canada, they were imported from the U.S. over the years. Canada banned the import, manufacture and sale of PCBs in 1977.

PCBs are non-flammable, chemically stable over a wide range of temperature and physical conditions, not soluble in water, unaffected by acids, base or corrosive chemicals, and have a high dielectric or electrical insulating capacity. Due to these unique properties PCBs were used in hundreds of industrial and commercial applications, most commonly in electrical transformers and capacitors, including those capacitors found in light ballasts. They were also used as coolants, fire retardants and as insulation and in a number of other commercial applications including carbonless copy paper, dust suppressors for roads, hydraulic fluids, caulking compounds, plasticizers and lubricating oils and heat-transfer applications.

Although PCBs were found to be extremely useful in many industrial and commercial applications some of their chemical properties also made them an environmental and health hazard. PCBs are nearly indestructible and therefore persist if released into the natural environment. Their high fat and low water solubility result in a build-up (bioaccumulation) of PCBs in the fatty tissue of animals and humans if ingested/inhaled. Because PCBs persist in the fatty tissue of animals their concentration will tend to increase the higher up the food chain. Most of what is known about the human health effects of PCBs is based on exposures due to accidental releases or job-related activities. These exposures are much higher than the levels normally found in the environment. The adverse health effects include a severe form of acne (chloracne), swelling of the upper eyelids, discolouring of the nails and skin, numbness in the arms and/or legs, weakness, muscle spasms, chronic bronchitis, and problems related to the nervous system. The International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) classifies PCBs as “probably carcinogenic to humans” (Group 2A) based on limited evidence that long-term, high-level occupational exposure can lead to increased incidence of liver and kidney cancers. The long-term impact of low-level exposures to PCBs that is common in the general population is unclear. The current state of knowledge suggests that low-level exposures to PCBs are unlikely to cause adverse health effects. However, people eating large amounts of certain sports fish, wild game and marine mammals are at increased risk for higher exposures and possible adverse health effects. Ozone Depleting and Global Warming Substances There are several different types of chemicals that are being or have been used as refrigerants in commercial, home and vehicle air conditioners and refrigerators or as fire extinguishing agents in portable and fixed fire extinguishing equipment. This includes groups of chemical compounds known as chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs), hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs) and halons. Some of these chemicals have also been used as foam blowing agents, as cleaning solvents for electrical components, as aerosol spray propellants, and in hospital sterilization procedures. Fixed halon fire extinguishing systems have historically been used in areas such as data centers, IT rooms, museums, libraries, surgical suites, and other locations where use of water-

based suppressants could irreparably damage electronics or vital archival collections. There is a large number of halon fire extinguishing systems still in service in Canada. The concern regarding past and present use of many of the chemicals used as refrigerants or fire extinguishing agents is that they are ozone-depleting substances (ODS). When released into the environment these chemicals break down in the stratosphere and release chlorine or bromine, which destroy the stratospheric ozone layer. The ozone layer screens the earth from some of the sun's harmful ultraviolet rays (UVB). As the ozone layer is depleted, higher UVB levels reach the earth, resulting in increased exposure to UVB. Increased exposure to UVB can cause skin cancer and plays a major role in malignant melanoma development. It can also increase the likelihood of cataracts and may also suppress proper functioning of the body's immune system and the skin's natural defences. CFCs, HCFCs and halons are also known to be greenhouse gases and contribute to global warming due to the build-up of these heat-trapping gases in the atmosphere. Hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs) are a common replacement chemical for CFC and HCFC refrigerants; and although they do not have any ozone depleting potential they are a potent greenhouse gas. Due to the ozone-depleting potential and/or global warming potential of CFCs, HCFCs, HFCs and halons it is important to control their use and emission into the environment. The manufacture and use of CFCs has stopped while transitional refrigerants (HCFCs) are scheduled to be phased out of production. No phase-out dates are currently planned for any HFCs. In Ontario, Regulation 463/10, “Ozone Depleting Substances and Other Halocarbons” (made under the Environmental Protection Act) enhances the control and management of substances that deplete the ozone layer and contribute to global warming. This regulation has requirements to prevent or minimize ozone-depleting substances and other halocarbons emissions, which serves a dual environmental benefit of lowering emissions that destroy the ozone layer and contribute to climate change.

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD.

ELECTRICAL, LIGHTING, COMMUNICATIONS & MECHANICAL ENGINEERS

1022 White Clover Way | Mississauga, Ontario | L5V 1C8 | Tel: (905) 290-7861 | Fax: (289) 327-3420

ELECTRICAL ADDENDUM #E1

MOOREVALE PARK CLUBHOUSE RENOVATIONS

175 MOORE AVANUE

TORONTO, ONTARIO.

SEPT. 14, 2018

The following document is hereby made a part of the Contract Documents.

The following revisions and/or additions shall be made to Drawings and/or specifications and the

cost shall be included in Tender Price.

REVISION TO DRAWINGS:

DRAWING E3 (NOT RE-ISSUED):

1. Revise Basement & Ground Floor Proposed Lighting Layout notes as per attached sketch

ESK-1.

END OF ADDENDUM # E1

Parks, Forestry & RecreationCity of Toronto

METRO HALL - 24th FLOOR55 JOHN ST. TORONTO, ONT M5V 3C6

SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"A7:00NEW SCREENS FOR NEW WINDOWS1

SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"

WALL CONNECTION

SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"NEW SCREEN SECTION

SK-12

NOTE:-ALL DIMENSIONS TO BE VERIFIED ONSITE.-CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT SHOPDRAWINGS FOR SECURITY SCREENS

SK-13